Teletype Corporation 40 Tempest Model 40 Shop Manual

TO 31W4-4-300-1

(ARMY) TM 11-5815-606-34

NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010

MANUAL 359

ISSUE 3

Including Manual 355 Model 40 Printer

THIS PUBLICATION REPLACES TO 31W4-4-300-1 DATED 1 DECEMBER 1976.

This copy is a reprint which includes current pages from Changes 1.

1.

2.

(C) 1976 Teletype Corporation.

Year

Reprinted by permission of Teletype Corporation.

Teletype Corporation

1 NOVEMBER 1982

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

1.

(C) 1976 Teletype Corporation.

Year

2.

Reprinted by permission of Teletype Corporation.

(C) 1976 and 1982 by Teletype Corporation

All rights reserved

Printed in U. S. A.

Change

No. 1

TM 11-5815-606-34

NAVELEX 0969-LP- 188-0010

TO 31 W4-4-300-1

C1

DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY.

THE NAVY, AND THE AIR- FORCE

WASHINGTON, DC, 19

September 1984

Direct Support, and General Support

Maintenance 359m Shop Manual for

MODEL 40 DATA TERMINAL (AN/GGR-3, GGC-55,

GGC-57, GGC-59, GGC-62) (NSN 5815-01-016-4662,

5815-01-009-4322, 5815-01-009-4321, NSN 5815-01-015-0838,

5815-01-071-8446)

TM 11-5815-606-34, 1 November 1982, is changed as follows:

1. The attached pages were inadvertently omitted from copies of the subject publication recently distributed.

2. Insert pages as indicated below:

Remove

.............................................................

Insert

None ...................................................................

9-1 through 9-45/9(9-46 Blank)

None ...................... .............................................

10-1 through 10-15/(10-16 Blank)

3. File this change sheet in .he front of publication.

By Order of the Secretaries of the Army, the Navy, and 3he Air Force:

JOHN A. WICKHAM, JR.

General, United States ,Army

Chief of Staff

Official:

ROBERT. M. JOYCE

Major General, United States Army

The Adjutant General

G. B. SHICK

Rear Admiral, United States Navy

Commander, Naval Electronic

Systems Command

CHARLES A. GABRIEL,

General USAF

Chief of Staff

Official:

JAMES P. MULLINS

General. USAF, Commander, Air Force

Logistics Command

Distribution:

To be distributed in accordance with Special Distribution List.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

Teletype Corporation Product Service and Education Services

On the following page is a list of Teletype Corporation Product Service locations which provide maintenance service and repair on all Teletype Corporation products. For more information call toll free (US 800-3234226) (IL 800-9424192) 7: 00 A.M. -- 4:00 P.M. CST.

In addition, Teletype Corporation provides Customer Technical Training at its headquarters at

5555 W. Touhy Avenue, Skokie, IL in the northwest suburban area of Chicago, The training covers the installation, maintenance and repair of all Teletype Corporation products.

Arrangements can also be made for training to be conducted at customer-selected field sites.

For information about class schedules, enrollment, tuition, on-site training or any special training needs, please contact:

Education Services

Teletype Corporation

5555 W. Touhy Avenue

Skokie, Illinois 60077

Telephone (312) 982-3940

TLX 25-4051

TWX 901-223-3611

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

Teletype Corporation

Product Service

The Complete Resource

PROMPT SERVICE PERFORMED WELL AND AT A

REASONABLE COST

Even the best equipment can fail at some .time. When failures occur, you want. prompt service, because down time is expensive. You want service performed well and at a reasonable cost.

With Teletype® Product Service Centers located throughout the United States and Canada, and our

National Central Dispatch System available around the clock, every day of the year, you know we rate customer service as our primary goal.

A TOTAL SUPPORT EFFORT

Our service representatives are professional, employed and trained by Teletype Corporation. They know our equipment inside out, and can locate and repair problems quickly and effectively. These skilled technicians are backed by an array of sophisticated test equipment, a multi-million dollar parts inventory, and full engineering support. Only the manufacturer of equipment being serviced can offer this total support effort ... Teletype Corporation Product Service ... the complete resource.

NATIONAL SERVICE NETWORK

Albany

Albuquerque

Appleton

Atlanta

Baltimore

Birmingham

Boise

Boston

Buffalo

Charleston

Charlotte

Chicago

Cincinnati

Greensboro

Harrisburg

Hartford

Houston

Indianapolis

Jackson

Jacksonville

Kalamazoo

Kansas City

Lansing

Little Rock

Long Island

Los Angeles

Orange County

Orlando

Philadelphia

Phoenix

Pittsburgh

Portland

Reno

Richmond

Rochester

Sacramento

Salt Lake City

San Antonio

San Diego

Cleveland Louisville

Colorado Springs Lubbock

Columbia Madison

Columbus

Dallas

Decatur

Denver

Memphis

Miami

Milwaukee

Minneapolis

Des Moines

Detroit

Duluth

Durham

Eau Claire

Edison

Fairfield

Fort Lauderdale

Mobile

Nashville

Toronto

Tucson

New Orleans Tulsa

New York

Norfolk

Oakland

Oklahoma City

Ventura

Washington

Wausau

Omaha

Santa Clara

Seattle

Shreveport

St. Louis

Syracuse

Tampa

Toledo

Call Toll Free 800/323-4226 In Illinois 800/942-4192 In Canada, call416/745-9474

TELETYPE CORPORATION

Skokie, Illinois, U. S. A.

PART

1

2

3

4

5

8

9

6

7

10

3

1

2

3

1

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEIPEST M40 SHOP MANUAL 359

Issue 3, November 1982

INDEX

ISSUE

2

1

2

2

INTRODUCTION

CASSETTE DRIVE

RESERVED FOR FURTHER USE

DISPLAY 40MN202RA

OPCONS

POWER SUPPLY

CONTROLLER

CABINETS, PAPER WINDER

AND FACILITIES

SETS

MASTER COMPONEN-T PARTS INDEX

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MANUAL 359

PART 1 -- INTRODUCTION

A. GENERAL

This Shop Manual is structured to facilitate maintenance and/or repair of Teletype Corporation Tempest Model 40 Sets and Components. A KDP-RO Set arrangement detailing the components covered in Parts 2 through 8 is shown here.

Part 9 covers various set arrangements. Part 10 contains a master numerical component parts list.

1-1

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


A. GENERAL (Cont)

In addition to a knowledge of supplementary information and comprehensive training on Model 40 equipment, it will be advantageous to the Shop Manual user to become thoroughly familiar with the contents before attempting maintenance or repair. The Shop Manual should also be consulted when planning a shop in order to organize a most convenient work place, and to assemble the necessary tools, test equipment, cleaning and packing materials, and spare parts stock.

Each part numbered 2 through 9 is prefaced with an index containing a detailed listing of section contents as follows:

A. GENERAL: Provides a brief description of equipment covered in the section and a list of tools and test equipment required for performing all operations contained in the section.

B. SHOP PROCEDURES: Contains general information relative to repair of equipment covered in the section. Also includes specific information regarding cleaning and refinishing, conversions from one arrangement to another, and approved methods and materials for packing.

C. TESTING: Waveform illustrations, diagrams, adjustment and troubleshooting section references are provided as supplementary aids to the testing procedural text.

D. TROUBLESHOOTING: Step-by-step analysis of encountered troubles are supported by charts, diagrams, and adjustment section references. In most cases, the diagnostic steps should lead the repair person to a particular defective component or maladjustment.

When troubleshooting the controller, the additional diagrams and circuit descriptions contained in the appropriate Wiring

Diagram Package (WDP), as listed on Pages 1-3 and 1-4, B. REFERENCE MATERIAL, will be useful.

E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION: Contains requirements, instructions, and descriptive views for each adjustment and lubrication point of the subject component.

On equipment having interrelated adjustments, particularly the Model 40 Printer, a table is included listing any related adjustments for a specific adjustment. The related adjustment table should be followed to insure proper equipment functioning.

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS: Provides detailed procedures for removing and replacing various subassemblies and individual piece parts of components covered in Parts 2 through 9. The sequenced textual instructions are directly supported by part numbered illustrations. In addition, a complete parts listing is included that contains a brief description of each part along with the page numbers on which the part is illustrated.

Part 10, Sets, contains additional information and illustractions relevant to interconnecting and placement of cables.

Part 11, Master Component Parts List, contains a master numerical components parts list, excluding general mounting hardware which are listed in the component parts section for each component.

1-2

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


B. REFERENCE MATERIAL

TECHNICAL DATA

Power Source Requirements

115 Vac +10% 50/60 hertz connection to most sets is made by using a terminal block (No. 10 screws) in the interface assembly of the set. Some sets provide a power cord equipped with a three prong plug. Refer to Part 10 for set arrangements.

Note: When operating from a 50 cycle power source, a pulley change is required on the printer, the cassette drives and the flexible diskette drives.

Depending on set configuration up to six ac outlets with ground connection (3 prong) is required. Each cassette drive requires an outlet. On certain set configurations, the controller pedestal requires an outlet. The paper winder (if supplied) requires an outlet.

DANGER: SETS MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED TO PREVENT SHOCK HAZARD.

Power Consumption and Heat Dissipation

KDP

KD

ROP

KP

CD (each)

500 Watts

365 Watts

260 Watts

330 Watts

150 Watts

1720 BTU/Hr

1250 BTU/Hr

885 BTU/Hr

1130 BTU/Hr

367 BTU/Hr

Approx

Current Draw

4.5

Amps

3.35 Amps

3.15 Amps

3.65 Amps

1.0

Amps

Environmental Restrictions

Environmental conditions should be maintained within the following limits to avoid damage and provide proper operation.

Environmental Condition

Temperature

Humidity

Altitude

Storage or Transportation

Min

-40°F

2%

Sea Level

Max

+150°F

95%

50,000 ft

Min

+40°F

2%

Operation

Sea Level

Max

+110°F

95%

10,000 ft

Note: As with any device that can be damaged by water, sudden temperature changes that can cause condensation should be avoided.

Example: A device stored in subzero temperatures will collect frost when unpacked in a warm humid room.

1-3

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


B. REFERENCE MATERIAL (Contd)

COMPONENT SPACE REQUIREMENTS AND WEIGHTS

1-4

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


SUPPLEMENTARY MANUALS

The following manuals provide important information concerning operation, installation and field servicing of Model 40

Sets and Components. The manuals are broken down into two categories How to Operate and Installation and Service

Manuals. Listed below are manuals applicable to the Tempest Model 40 Set Configuration and the sets that they cover.

These manuals may be ordered from Teletype Corporation by the titles shown.

How To Operate Manuals

The "How to Operate" manuals are oriented toward the operator. The operating function and features of the various

Tempest Model 40 Set Configurations and their access or control by the operator are presented in an easy to understand now technical format.

Manual Title Equipment Covered

354

362

370

405

How to Operate Tempest

Model 40


Model 40 ASR


Model 40 Dual ASR


Model 40/8B ASR

Set Configurations Containing the

40C430 to 40C432 Controllers (40/8A)


4OC433 Controllers (40/8A)


40C434/ACW/063 Controller


40435/AEE/091 Controller (40/8B)

413

445

446

491

526

J

559


Model 40/8C


Model 40/8A Ruggedized

Rack Mounted ASR


Model 40/8B and 40/8B II

KDP with Cassette Drives


Model 40/8A ROP-KP-KP3


Model 40/8B I KDP with

Cassette Drives


Model 40/8B II KDP with

Cassette Drives

Set Configuration Containing the

40C435



Sets Configurations Containing the

40C437/AEE/091 (40/8B)

40C437/AEL/106 (40/8B II)


40C432/AEM/103, 40C433/AEN/104,

40C438/AEP/105 Controllers


40C437/AEL/106 Controller



1-5

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



INSTALLATION AND SERVICE MANUALS

The "Installation and Service Manuals" provide in depth information required for set or station assembly, installation and for field troubleshooting and maintenance. The subject includes?

• Installation

• Operational Checkout

• Troubleshooting

• Adjustments

• Component Access

• Routine Maintenance

The "Installation Manuals" provide information required for assembly, optioning and installation of set or station. The

"Service Manuals" provide in depth information for operational checkout and in field troubleshooting and maintenance.

Manual Title Equipment Covered

353

358

363

371

Tempest Model 40 Installation and Servicing Manual

Tempest Model 40 132 Column

Printer Set Installation and Servicing Manual

Tempest Model 40 ASR Installation and Servicing Manual



Tempest 132 Column ROP Sets (40/8A)


40C433 Controllers



404

Tempest Model 40 Dual ASR

Installation and Servicing

Manual

Tempest Model 4()/8B ASR

With Cassetes Installation

Manual


40C435/AEE/091 Controller (40/8B)

408

414

Tempest Model 40/8B ASR

With Cassettes Servicing

Manual

Tempest Model 40 Synchronous

40/8C Installation Manual


40C435/AEE/091 Controller (40/8B)


40C436/ADK/075

40C436/ADIU/095

40C436/ADN/094

40C436/ADD/093

40C436/ADA/092

Controllers (40/8C)

1-6

447

448

449

Manual

415

450

492

493

527

528

560

561

Title

Tempest Model 40 Synchronous 40/8C Service Manual

Ruggedized Rack Mounted

Tempest Model 40/8A Installation Manual


Tempest Model 40/8A Service

Manual


Tempest Model 40/8B and

8BII ASR With Cassette

Drives Installation Manual

Ruggedized Rack Mount Tempest Model 40/8B and 8BII

ASR With Cassette Drives

Service Manual

Tempest Model 40/8A

ROP-KP-KP3 Installation

Manual

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST MAO SHOP MANUAL 359

Equipment Covered


40C436/ADK/075

40C436/ADU/095

40C436/ADN/094

40C436/ADD/093

40C436/ADA/092

Controllers (40/8C)


40C430 to 40C432 Controllers (40/8A

Same as Manual 447


40C437/AEE/091 (40/8B)

40C437/AEL/107 Controllers (40/8BII)

Same as Manual 449


40C431/AEM/103

40C432/AEN/104

40C438/AEP/105 Controllers

Same as Manual 493 Tempest Model 40/8A

ROP-KP-KP3 Service Manual

Tempest Model 40/8BI/KDP also Tempest Model 40/8B/KDP

With Cassette Drives and

403142 Modification Kit

Tempest Model 40/8BI/KDP also Tempest Model 40/8B/KDP

With Cassette Drives and


Tempest Model 40/8BII/KDP

With Cassette Drives Installation Manual

Tempest Model 40/8BII/KDP

With Cassette Drives Service

Manual



Same as Manual 527

Set Configurations Containing

40C437/AEL/107 Controller (40/8BII)

Same as Manual 560

1-7

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST MAO SHOP MANUAL 359


FACTORY AUTHORIZED SERVICE

Teletype Corporation maintains a nationwide Product Service Organization to serve users of Teletype Corporation equipment. Refer to Pages 1-10 and 1-11 for details of services offered and a listing of Service Center locations.

WIRING DIAGRAM PACKAGE (WDP) LISTING

WDP0435

WDP0453

WDP0454

WDP0456

WDP0457

WDP0458

WDP0460

WDP0461

WDP0462

WDP0464

WDP0465

WDP0468

WDP0469

WDP0470

WDP0471

WDP0475

WDP0476

WDP0478

WDP0479

WDP0484

WDP0485

WDP0488

WDP0489

WDP0495

WDPO501

WDP0506 &

WDP0507

WDP0519

WDP0520

WDP0521

WDP0522

WDP0523

WDP0524

WDP0525

WDP0542

WDP0546

WDPO547

WDP0548

WDP0551

WDP0554

WDP0572

The following WDPs covering the component are supplied with the set.

40P 20-Column Friction Feed Printer

40CAB202/RA, RO 80-Column Friction Feed Printer Cabinet

40CAB352/RA, RO 80-Column Tractor Feed Printer Cabinet

40CAB354/RA 132-Column Tractor Feed Printer Cabinet

40CAB903 Pedestals

40K103 Keyboards

40MN202/RA Display

40C430/ZZZ/000 Controller Without Cards

40P201 & 40P202/ZZ 132-Column Tractor Feed Printer Cabinet



40CD101 Cassette Drive (Non-Tempest)

40C430/AAT/017 Controller With Cards RCMP

40C431/ABE/026 & 40C432/ABF/027 Controllers 40/8A

40C430/ABD/025 Controller With Cards 40/8A

4016AB/001/AB Cassette Drive Set (Non-Tempest)

40C433/ZZZ/OOO Controller Without Cards

40C433/ACS/059 Controller With Cards Samson

40P154/ZZ 80-Column Tractor Feed Printer


40C434/ACW/063 Controller With Cards TERP I


40C435/AEB/088 Controller With Cards Samson

40C435/AEE/091 & 40C437/AEE/091 Controller With Cards 40/8B

4016RA/001/RA & 4016RB/001/RA Cassette Drives

M40 Paper Tape 5 & 8 Level

40C436/ADK/075 Controller With Cards 40/8C SCC

40C436/ADU/095 Controller With Cards 40/8C DCC-A

40C436/ADN/094 Controller With Cards 40/8C DCC-B

40C436/ADD/093 Controller With Cards 40/8C MCC-A

40C436/ADA/092.Controller With Cards 40/8C MCC-B

40C436/ZZZ/000 Controller With Cards

40K108 Keyboards

40C435/AEE/099 Controller With Cards 40/8D

408828 Modification Kit- 40/8B to 40/8D

40MlO3/BC Memory System

40M803/BC Memory System

40C434/AEK/101 Controller With Cards TERP II


40K109/CAA Keyboard (40/7)

1-8

WDP0573

WDP0581

WDP0582

WDP0583

WDP0584 &

WDP0585

WDP0587

WDP0592

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Terminal With 40C405 Controller (40/7)

40C437/AEL/106 Controller With Cards 40/8B1

40C431/AEM/103 Controller With Cards 40/8AI KP

40C432/AEN/104 Controller With Cards 40/8AI ROP

40C438/AEP/105 Controller With Cards 40/8AI KP3

413330 Modification Kit Clock-Phase Correction

40C437/AEL/107 Controller With Cards 40/8BII

1-9

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART 2 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 CASSETTE DRIVE

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

INDEX

GENERAL

1.

DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................

3

2.

TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS............................................

4

SHOP PROCEDURES

1.

GENERAL...............................................................................................................

5

2.

CLEANING..............................................................................................................

5

3.

INSPECTION .........................................................................................................

7

4.

MARKING AND PACKING .....................................................................................

8

TESTING

1.

GENERAL ..............................................................................................................

11

2.

PRELIMINARY CHECKS .......................................................................................

11

3.

OFF-LINE CHECKOUT PROCEDURE ...................................................................

11

4.

MONITOR TAPE CASSETTE CHECKOUT ............................................................

11

5.

ON-LINE CHECKOUT.............................................................................................

26

6.

CASSETTE TEST PROGRAMS .............................................................................

29

TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................................

40

1.

GENERAL...............................................................................................................

40

2.

ERROR ANALYSIS.................................................................................................

44

3.

COMPONENT ANALYSIS.......................................................................................

47

4.CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS (410043)............................................................................

53

5.

CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS (410764). ....................................................................

57

6.

FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS. ................................................................................

86

ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION ..............................................................................

93

1.

GENERAL...............................................................................................................

93

2.

ASSEMBLIES .........................................................................................................

93

3.

CASSETTE HOLDER ADJUSTMENTS...................................................................

95

4.

DRIVE MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS....................................................................

106

5.

410764 CIRCUIT CARD ADJUSTMENT .................................................................

110

6.

CASSETTE DRIVE LUBRICATION.........................................................................

111

2-1

F.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART 2 -- TEMPEST MDDEL 40 CASSETTE DRIVE (Contd)

INDEX (Contd) PAGE

DISASSEMLY/REASSEMLY AND PARTS .......................................................................

114

1.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMIT OF UPPER CABINET ASSEMBLY .......................

114

2.

SUBASSEMBLY IDENIFICATION...........................................................................

116

3.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY DRIVE ..................................................................

116

4.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SSI/AC INTERFACE ............................................

121

5.

PARTS ...................................................................................................................

135

6.

CONPONENT PARTS LIST ....................................................................................

144

2-2

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART 2 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 CASSETTE DRIVE

A. GENERAL

1. DESCRIPTION

The function of the Tempest Model 40 Cassette Drive is to record (store) and retrieve data on a magnetic tape media.

The cassette drive accomodates a "Phillips" type cassette which conforms with the exception of tape length to the proposed ANSI standard for digital cassettes for the purpose of storing data. The cassette drive is designed to be used with Model 40 equipment containing a C400 or equivalent controller. Transmission of data and control signals between the cassette drive and the controller conform to the Teletype Standard Serial Interface (SSI), system. The cassette drive has no local controls and functions only in response to commands from the associated controller.

Tape movement is accomplished by means of a synchronous motor and a reel to reel drive arrangement wherein the drive (forward) and rewind (reverse) shafts are controlled by electromechanical clutches and electromagnetic brakes.

The cassette drive is designed to operate as a block device. Operation is synchronous within a block and asynchronous by block. As such, transmission to or from the cassette drive may be selected as required by the controller, but once the transmission has started the entire block must be transmitted. Tempest applications of the cassette drive utilize a 256

SSI word (512 ASCII characters) block size. The cassette storage capacity with the 256 SSI word block format is 500 blocks or 256,000 characters.

The cassette drive contains a single control logic circuit card which contains all logic required to control the cassette drive. The control logic card of the cassette drive receives commands from the controller and translates them into the appropriate signals to control the clutches, brakes and the read/write head. The control logic card interprets the input from cassette-in-place and write inhibit switches and the BOT photo sensor and translates them into the proper signals to the controller. It also provides drive for the BOT sensor lamp and the status (Run-Stop) lamp.

The cassette drive utilizes a single two channel read/write magnetic tape head to record and read data on the magnetic tape. Both channels are used during either the read or write operations.

The cassette drive contains a power supply to supply the voltage and current required by the cassette drive control logic card. The ac power to the cassette drive motor and power supply is controlled by an attendant accessible switch.

Refer to WDP 0501 for a general circuit description with block diagram and for further details of the major component functions.

The cassette drive is designed for operation with a supply voltage of 115 V ac ±10 percent 50 or 60 hertz ±5 percent.

Operating power is 105 watts and heat generation is 367 BTU per hour. When operating on 50 hertz power, a pulley change is required at the cassette drive motor.

2-3

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


A. GENERAL (Contd)

2. TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS

Tools

The tools listed below are supplementary to common types such as pliers, screwdrivers, wrenches, etc and may be procured locally or ordered from Teletype Corporation.

NOTE: When ordering parts, prefix each part number with the letters "TP" unless otherwise specified.

Description

• Pull Spring Hook

• Nut Driver Wrench 1/4 Inch



• Terminal Extractor

• Allen Wrench 0.050 Inch

• Allen Wrench 0.078 Inch

• Ruler 6 inch

• Gauge (Brake and Clutch Gap)

• Wrench, Drive (402274/402275 Drive Hubs)

• Soldering Iron, Weller Model W-MCP-750 With MP2C Tip, or Equivalent (Procure Locally)

• Desoldering Tool, EDSYN Model MMS005 Soldapullt ® , or Equivalent (Procure Locally)

Test Equipment

Part No.

75765

89954

89955

125752

182697

104457

110271

95960

406130

406131

The following equipment or equivalent is required for testing, troubleshooting and adjusting the cassette drive.

• Volt-Ohm-Millimeter, Triplett Model 630 APL

• Digital Multimeter, Fluke Model 8100A

• Oscilloscope, Tektronix Model 7904 E/W:

2 -- 7A16A Single Trace Amplifiers

1 -- 7B70 Time Base Unit

2 -- RX10 Circuit Probes

• High Voltage DC Breakdown Tester, Slaughter Company Model 108-2.5MW

• Tempest Model 40 KDP Set E/W 40C433/ACS/059

• Cassette Drive Program

The test program used with a C400 controller provides a 38 step program for recording, reading and verifying approximately ten million characters on a block by block basis.

The Cassette Drive Test Program is available from:

Teletype Custom Systems Division

5555 Touhy Avenue

Skokie, Illinois 60677

312-982-2000

• Cassette Drive Test Program - CP10.006

• Modified 410504 Circuit Card With Cassette Tape

• Loader EPROMS - CP10.006.010

2-4

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST 1M40 SHOP MANUAL 359

Miscellaneous

Grease -- 145867 (4 ounce can) or 143484 (1 pound can)

Oil -- 88970 (1 quart can)

Degreaser (Freon TF) -- 337449 (6 ounce aerosol can)

Tape Head Cleaner -- 337401 (6 ounce aerosol can)

B. SHOP PROCEDURES

1. GENERAL

This section details the cleaning, refinishing and inspection procedures to be followed prior to testing and troubleshooting the cassette drive. In many cases, careful inspection will save later troubleshooting by revealing broken or loose connections, damaged components, possible short circuits, etc.

Refer to Page 114 F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS whenever detailed information on removing cassette drive components is required.

The packing materials detailed in this section are designed for protection against damage from rough handling in shipping.

2. CLEANING

Immersion type cleaning is NOT recommended for the cassette drive.

CAUTION: AVOID THE USE OF HARSH OR ABRASIVE CLEANING AGENTS OR SOLVENTS WHICH COULD

SCRATCH OR DAMAGE THE EXTERNAL SURFACES OF THE CASSETTE DRIVE CABINET.

Exterior

Remove upper cabinet assembly.

(2) When necessary a very weak solution of mild detergent may be used to remove stubborn dirt, grease, or finger prints.

(3) Vacuum louvers in rear of cabinet to remove all dust.

Clean all surfaces as follows:

(1) Wipe with soft cloth moistened with water and wrung almost dry.

2-5

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


B. SHOP PROCEDURES (Contd)

2. Cleaning (Contd)

Interior

Remove cassette if present from drive mechanism before cleaning is started.

(1) Clean drive mechanism by using a vacuum, brushing or wiping away dust and foreign material.

CAUTION: EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED WHEN CLEANING IN THE AREA OF THE TAPE

READ/WRITE HEAD TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE HEAD PARTICULARLY SCRATCHES OR DENTS ON THE

TAPE HEAD POLE PIECES.

(2) Clean mating surfaces of the armature and rotor faces; place a small piece of paper saturated with 337401 recording head cleaner between the armature and rotor faces of each clutch assembly; apply pressure to each face; withdraw paper from between the armature and rotor. Repeat for each pole face until the withdrawn paper is clean.

(3) Using 337401 recording head cleaner and a cotton swab, clean the tape head, hub drivers and cassette locating pins.

(4) Check 403238 tape cleaner, if dirty replace.

2-6

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-,188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3. INSPECTION

Interior a. Check that the motor drive belt and the "O" ring are present and free from cracks and are not frayed.

b. Check that all three pullies and both armatures turn when motor is turned by hand at fan end. (Turn clockwise as viewed from fan end.) c. Check that power supply fuse is present, not blown and correct value (0.6 amp SL-BL).

d. Check that plug P1, P2, P4A and P4B are fully seated in their respective connectors on the 410764 control logic circuit card. Connectors are under the cassette drive base plate.

e. Remove cassette if present.

2-7

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


B. SHOP PROCEDURES (Contd)

3. INSPECTION (Contd)

Interior (Contd) f. Check that the tape load connector is fully seated in the tape head and is orientated in the correct direction.

4. MARKING AND PACKING

Packing

Factory-type packing may be duplicated by ordering material shown below and applying as follows. PK designated items should be ordered from Teletype Corporation.

Qty.

1

1

2

8

1

1

1

-

-

-

Materials Required

10774PK Corrugated Carton


28278PK Corner Details

28218PK Detail A

28218PK Detail B

23457PK Plastic Bag

27643PK Labels

21719PK Tape (as required)



(1) Carefully turn set upside down. Apply a strip of 21480PK tape on either side of unit base. Each tape strip must overlap both the base and cover side plate, as shown. Turn set right side up.

(2) Apply two bands of 21632PK tape around set as shown. Apply a third strip of tape across top and front of set to hold lid down.

(3) Place set in a 23457PK plastic bag. Leave line cord extended outside of bag.

2-8

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MANUAL 359, 2-9

(4) Position a 28218PK Detail A on right side of unit and a 28218PK Detail B on left side of unit as shown. Position line cord on top of unit.

(5) Form a 9861PK carton. Close and seal bottom flaps with a strip of 21719PK tape applied at the center seam and extending at least three inches up the sides of the carton.

(6) Place set and details in the carton. Close and seal top flaps of carton as outlined in Step 5. Apply a 27643PK label to upper left hand portion of top of carton.

(7) Form a 10774PK carton. Close and seal bottom of flaps with three strips of 21719PK tape. Apply tape to center and end seams.

(8) Secure a 28278PK detail to each of the four bottom corners of the inner carton by means of the pressure sensitive tape on each detail.

(9) Place carton and details in the outer carton.

(10) Position a 28278PK detail on each of the four top corners of the inner carton.

(11) Close and seal top flaps of carton and seal as indicated in Step 7.

(12) Moisten and apply a 27643PK label to upper left hand portion of top of carton.

2-9

4. MARKING AND PACKING (Contd)

Packing (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


B. SHOP PROCEDURES (Contd)

2-10

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING

1. GENERAL

Testing of the Tempest Model 40 Cassette Drive Units is accomplished with the cassette drive(s) connected as part of a

Tempest C400 Station. The test is performed in two stages:

(1) Off-line/on-line checkout,

(2) Functional test using the Teletype Custom Systems Division CP10.006 Cassette Test Program.

Each test procedure should be performed from start to finish with no omissions.

Whenever the cassette drive fails a particular test, refer to Page 2-40, D. TROUBLESHOOTING and/or Page 2-93, E.

ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION to locate the trouble. After the trouble has been located and corrected, repeat the test that disclosed the trouble and if found OK, resume testing from that point.

NOTE: When ordering replaceable parts or components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with the letters "TP' (ie, TP410055).

An operational checkout should be performed upon installation or on trouble calls.

If the indicated response is not obtained in any step of a checkout procedure, repeat the step to make sure that the procedure has been performed correctly. If the results are still unsatisfactory, perform the indicated trouble analysis.

Always perform the checkout in the order given in the chart,

The trouble analysis steps are based on satisfactory results of all previous steps.

2. PRELIMINARY CHECKS

Before turning on any equipment, check the following: a.

Are all circuit cards and cable connectors fully seated?

b.

Are all fuses in place?

c.

Are all cabinet lids and pedestal doors closed?

d.

Do all printers have paper and ribbon properly installed?

e.

Is the station connected to a properly grounded ac service?

f.

Have the station options been installed and are they properly recorded?

g.

Prior to applying ac power to the controller, insure that power is on to the tape cassette drives and the cassette is in the unlatched (cassettes disengaged) position.

h.

Insure that all tape cassettes are properly formatted, each tape cassette must be placed in the receive tape cassette drive and the erase function performed. The erase function must be performed prior to the offline checkout of the cassette drive. Refer to How to Operate Manual 405, Page 19 for procedure to erase cassettes.

2-11

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING (Contd)

3. OFF-LINE CHECKOUT PROCEDURE

NOTE: Immediately when power is turned on, various LED displays will be lighted on the opcon depending upon station type and applicable controller. See appropriate service manual for operation of particular stations.

1

STEP PROCEDURE

Depress CNTRL MODE keytop.

RESULTS

CNTRL MDE lamp lights and the following message appears on the display.

2

Number indicates cassette drive assigned for that function.

ST = Send Tape

RT = Receive Tape

MT = Monitor Tape

0 will appear if no cassette drive is available for that function.

LOCAL CHECKOUT KDP

2

AND KDPM

3

Using cursor positioning key

(1)position cursor to the first underline to the right of 2.

(2) Type an upper case X.

Cursor moves under direction of cursor key.

X appears, cursor moves one space to the right.

2-12

STEP

2

(Contd)

PROCEDURE

Depress LINE FEED key.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS

X remains, cursor returns to its original position.

3

4

Depress CNTRL MDDE key.

Message on screen extinguishes, cursor goes to home position.

Enter a line of "Quick Brown Fox". End line with

ETX. Enter several new lines. Enter a line of "Now is the time" end with ETX.

Message appears on display as typed.

Depress HOME.

Depress PTR LCL.

Depress REC TAPE LCL.

Depress DISP SEND.

Depress DISP LCL.

Cursor goes home.

PTR LCL lamp lights.

REC TAPE lamp lights.

DISP SEND lamp lights.

DISP LCL lamp lights.

Cursor moves across message and stops at character position after first ETX.

Printer motor starts and copies message. REC

TAPE positions cassette to next available recording block and records message.

When cursor reaches the first ETX, DISP LCL will extinguish.

2-13

3.

STEP

5

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

C. TESTING (Contd)

OFF-LINE CHECKOUT PROCEDURE (Contd)

6

PROCEDURE RESULTS

Depress DISP LCL again.

NOTE:

If terminal is optioned for home on send, the cursor will go to the HOME position and the first message will be sent again.

Cursor moves from present position to next ETX.

Printer and REC TAPE copy message as in Step 4.

Depress PTR LCL.

Depress DISP SEND.


PTR LCL lamp extinguishes.

DISP SEND lamp extinguishes.

REC TAPE LCL lamp extinguishes.

7

8

Depress CNTRL MODE key.

Prepared message extinguishes, and control mode message appears.

(1) Using cursor positioning key, position cursor over X placed in line 2.

Cursor moves under direction of cursor control keys.

(2)

(3)

Depress SPACE BAR key.


X is deleted.

Cursor returns to its original position.

9 Depress CNTRL MDDE key.

2-14

Control mode message extinguishes, and original typed message appears. Cursor in HOME position.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


STEP

10

11

12

13

PROCEDURE

Depress PTR LCL.


Depress DISP SEND.

Depress DISP LCL.

Depress DISP LCL again.

See Note in Step 5.

Depress PTR LCL.


Depress DISP SEND.

RESULTS


REC TAPE LCL lamp lights.


DISP LCL lamp lights

Cursor moves through messages until first ETX is reached.

Printer and REC TAPE copy message.

DISP LCL lamp extinguishes when the first ETX is reached.

Cursor moves to next ETX, and DISP LCL lamp extinguishes.



DISP SEND lamp extinguishes.


Typed message extinguishes, and control message appears on display.

Using the cursor control keys, position the cursor over the underline next to 7. Type an upper case X.

Cursor moves under control of cursor control keys.

X appears on display.


The control mode message extinguishes the REC

TAPE rewinds and the following appears on the display.

NOTE:

When listing is complete, alarm will sound once. If no messages are recorded on tape, alarm will sound once and display will be blank.

2-15

3.

STEP

14

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



PROCEDURE

Depress SPACE BAR.

RESULTS

Tape heading listing extinguishes, and control mode message appears on display.

15

16

Using the cursor control keys, position cursor.

(1) To character space to left of Receive Tape

Block Number and enter an upper case R.

Cursor moves under control of cursor control key.

R appears on display.

(2) Position cursor over X in line 7 and depress

Space Bar.

X is deleted from display.

(3) Depress LINE FEED.

Cursor returns to its original position. REC TAPE rewinds.

When rewind is complete.

4.

000 REC TAPE BLOCK NUMBER is displayed.

Using the cursor control keys, or CURSOR TAB key.

(1) Position cursor to underline next to 11 in line

11.

Cursor moves under control of the cursor positioning keys.

(2) Enter an upper case X.

(3) Position cursor to 1 after ST = 1 in line 11.

(4) Overwrite the 1 with a 2.

(5) Position cursor to 2 after RT = 2 in line 11.



2 appears on display



1 appears on display.

(7) Depress LINE FEED key. position in line 1.

Cursor returns to its original

NOTE:

The above procedure has reassigned Cassette 1 as the receive cassette and Cassette 2 as the send cassette.

2-16

PROCEDURE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS STEP

17 Using the cursor control keys, or CURSOR TAB key.

(1) Position cursor to first underline in row 6.

Cursor moves under control.

(2)

(3)

Enter a upper case X.

Depress LINE FEED.


Control mode message extinguishes, and the send tape headings are listed.

18

NOTE:

When listing is complete, alarm will sound once. If no messages are recorded on tape, alarm will sound once and display will be blank.

NOTE:

At any time during the listing of tape heading, the space bar may be depressed halting the tape heading listing. Depressing the space again will start the listings.

If listing exceeds 24 lines (capacity of display), listing will stop at 24th line. Depressing the space bar will cause the next 24 listings to be displayed.

Depress SPACE BAR.

The send tape heading listing extinguishes, and the control message appears on display.

2-17

3.

STEP

19

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359




20

Using the cursor control keys or CURSOR TAB key.

(1) Position cursor over first 0 in line 3.

Cursor moves under control of the cursor control keys.

(2)

(3)

Enter 001.

Depress LINE FEED.

Depress CNTRL MDE key.

The current block number is overwritten with 001.

Send block number changes counting down to 000 and then up to 001.

Control mode message extinguishes and cursor returns to HOME position.

21

22

23

Depress DISP LCL.


Depress PTR LCL.

Depress SEND TAPE LCL.


Depress PTR LCL.

Depress HOME.

Depress CLEAR.





The SEND TAPE transfers all its messages (4).

The display will copy to first ETX, and DISP LCL will extinguish. The printer and REC TAPE will copy all messages.

The SEND TAPE LCL lamp will extinguish when the message transfer is completed.



Cursor goes to HOME position.

Message is cleared from display.

Send tape message on display extinguishes, and control mode message appears.

2-18

PROCEDURE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS STEP

24

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Using the cursor control keys.

(1) Position cursor over first 0 in send tape block number.


Enter 001.

Position cursor over under-line in line 8.

Enter an upper case X.

Depress LINE FEED.

001 appears in send tape block number.

Cursor moves under control of cursor control key.


Send tape rewinds to block 001.

DISP LINE and DISP LCL lamps start flashing indicating monitor data on display mode.

25 Depress CNTRL NMDE key.

26

27

28


Depress PTR LCL.

Depress DISP LCL.



Depress PTR LCL.

Depress DISP LCL.

Depress CNTROL MODE key.

Control mode message extinguishes and blank display with cursor in HOME position is displayed.



DISP LCL lamp stays on steady

DISP LINE continues to flash.

SEND TAPE LCL lamp lights.

Send tape transmits all four messages recorded on it.

Printer, receive tape and monitor copy all four messages.



DISP LCL starts to flash.

Received message extinguishes, and control message appears on display.

2-19

3.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



STEP PROCEDURE RESULTS

29

30


(1) Position cursor over P in line 3.


(2) Enter an upper case R.

R overwrites P.

(3) Position cursor over X in line 8, depress

SPACE BAR.

X is deleted from display.

XXX appears on display.

(4) Position cursor to first underline in line 9.

Enter three upper case Xs.

(5) Depress LINE FEED.

DISP LINE and DISP LCL lamps stop flashing and are extinguished. Send and receive tapes rewind.

*** appear in the tape block numbers while rewind is completed, 000 appears in the receive tape block number. 000 appears in the send block number.


(1) Position the cursor to the underline next to

11 in line 11.


(2)

(3)


Position the cursor to the 2 after ST=2.




(4)

(5)

Overwrite the 2 with a 1.

Position the cursor to the 1 after RT=1.


(7) Depress the LINE FEED key.



Cursor returns to its original position in line 1.

NOTE:

The above procedure has reassigned Cassette 1 as the send cassette and Cassette 2 as the receive cassette.

2-20

PROCEDURE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

RESULTS STEP

31

32

Using the cursor positioning keys or CURSOR TAB key, position the cursor to the first underline following 9 in line 9.

Cursor moves under control of the cursor position keys.

Enter three upper case Xs.


Depress the LINE FEED key.

Cursor returns to its original position in line 1. REC

TAPE (Cassette 2) rewinds. *** appears in the tape block number while rewind is taking place.

For KDPM

2

sets, go to 5. On-Line Checkout, Page

2-82.

For KDPM

3

sets, to 4. Monitor Tape Cassette

Checkout.

4.

MONITOR TAPE CASSETTE CHECKOUT

The off-line checkout procedure of Part C does not check the operation of the monitor tape cassette since the monitor tape cassette (Cassette 3) has no local mode of operation. To perform an on-line check of the monitor tape cassette drive, two methods are available, depending on system protocol.

1.

METHOD 1

If the system provides for on-line testing of terminals, a sample test message may be sent to the Test Center. After the test message has been sent, Cassette 3 should be rewound, reassigned to the send cassette and a local send tape to display transfer done. The message can then be checked to insure the monitor tape correctly copied the sent message.

Rewind the tape, reassign Cassette 3 to be the receive tape. Perform the erase function on Cassette 3 and then reassign

Cassette 3 to be the monitor tape cassette.

2.

METHOD 2

If system protocol does not allow on-line testing, temporarily disconnect the terminal from the line by removing the line connections. Add the half-duplex strap between terminals 2 and 3 of TB101 of interface, if it was removed during installation. For this test, the clear-to-send input must be turned on or temporarily remove the 303181 or 303184 circuit card in slot Z4 of the interface assembly. Now, the following procedure may be followed to check out the monitor tape cassette drive. During this test, the set must be in the manual mode of operation (POLL/SEL lamp not lit).

2-21

4.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


MONITOR TAPE CASSETTE CHECKOUT (Contd)


1

2

3

4

Prepare a test message on display in keyboarddisplay mode (DISP LINE, DISP LCL and DISP

SEND lamps not lit). Start message with SOH. End message with ETX. Home cursor.

Message appears on display as typed on keyboard.

Depress PTR LINE.

Depress DISP SEND.

Depress DISP LINE.

PTR LINE lamp lights.


DISP LINE lamp lights. Cursor moves through message and stops at character position after ET,.

Printer motor starts and printer copies message.

Display lamps will extinguish, if Option U2 is installed. The DISP SEND lamp will extinguish if

Option U1 is installed.

Depress DISP LINE if lit.

Depress CNTRL MODE.

DISP LINE lamp extinguishes.

Test message disappears from display and control message appears.

Using cursor control keys or CURSOR TAB key.

(1) Position cursor to the character position to the left of the tape block number in line 5.


(2)

(3)

Enter an upper case R.



Cursor returns to its original position in line 1. *** appears in the monitor tape block while the monitor tape is rewinding. When the rewind is completed,

000 appears in the monitor tape block.

2-22

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


STEP

5

6


Using the cursor positioning keys.

(1) line 11.-

Position cursor to the under line after 11 in Cursor moves under control of the cursor positioning key.

(2)

(3)


Position cursor to the 1 after ST=1.



(4)

(5)


Position the cursor to the 3 after MT=3.




(6)

(7)




NOTE:

Cassette 3 (monitor) has now been reassigned as the send tape and Cassette 1 has been reassigned as the monitor tape.

Enter block number of test message (001 if cassette was not used before) in line 3. Depress LINE FEED

Send tape cassette positions to test message.

7

8

9

Depress CNTRL MDDE.

Position cursor to the beginning of the line after original message.

Control message disappears and original test message appears.

Depress DISP LCL.



SEND TAPE LCL lamp lights.

Test message appears on display below original message. These messages should be the same, except line feeds ( ) which were sent and stored on monitor tape are displayed as

, ( )

Depress the SEND TAPE LCL key.

Home cursor.

Depress CLEAR key.

Depress CNTRL MODE key.

SEND TAPE LCL lamp extinguishes.


Both messages are cleared from display.

Control message appears on display.

2-23

4.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


MONITOR TAPE CASSETTE CHECKOUT (Contd)


10

11

12

Using the cursor positioning key or CURSOR TAB key.

(1) Position the cursor to the character space to the left of the send tape block number.

Cursor moves under control of the cursor positioning key.

(2) Enter an uppercase R.



Cursor returns to its original position in line 1. *** appears in the send tape block number while the send tape is rewinding. 000 appears in the send tape block number when rewind in completed.

Using cursor positioning keys,

(1)

11.

(2)

Position cursor to underline after 11 in line

Enter an uppercase X.



(3) Position cursor to the 3 after ST=3.

(4)

(5)

(6)










NOTE:

Cassette 3 has now been reassigned as the receive tape and Cassette 2 has been reassigned as the send tape.

Position the cursor to the first underline following 9 in line 9.


Enter three uppercase Xs.



Cursor returns to the original position in line 1. The erase function is performed on the tape in Cassette

2.

2-24

PROCEDURE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS STEP

13 Using the cursor positioning key or CURSOR TAB key.

(1) Position the cursor to the underline after 11 in line 11.


(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

Enter an uppercase X.

Position the cursor to the 2 after ST=2.







(6)

(7)


Position the cursor to the 1 after MT=1.




(8)

(9)




NOTE:

Cassette 1 has now been reassigned as the send tape, Cassette 2 has been reassigned as the receive tape and Cassette 3 has been reassigned as the monitor tape.

Remove the half-duplex strap between terminals 2 and 3 of TB101 of the interface assembly, if it was installed for this test. Replace the 303181 or 303184 circuit card in slot Z4, if it was removed for this test. Reconnect the signal line connections in the interface unit at the rear of the test.

2-25

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



5.

ON-LINE CHECK-OUT

To perform an on-line check of the set, two methods are available depending on system protocol.

1.

METHOD 1

If system protocol allows for on-line testing, a sample test message may be sent to the Test Center in both the manual and poll/select modes. In the poll/select mode, the Test Center must send polling sequences before the set under test can send, and selecting sequences before the set under test can receive.

2.

METHOD 2

If system protocol does not allow on-line testing or if transmission facilities to the Test Center are not available, an alternative method called back-to-back can be used.

This method requires the use of another functional KD Set (referred to as test set). The test set should be optioned for 8level ASCII code operation at the same baud rate as the set being tested is optioned (Option ZZ). The test set should be connected as indicated below.

In either arrangement, the clear-to-send input must be turned on (46 V). If no clear-to-send input is available, temporarily remove the 303181 or 303184 circuit card in slot Z4 of each interface assembly.

2-26

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


MANUAL MODE CHECKOUT

The manual mode checkout must be performed with the POLL/SEL lamp not lit and the 5-level communication interface not selected (no character X in line 1 of control mode) in both the test set and the set under test.


1

2

3

4

Locally prepare a test message on set under test.

Start message with SOH and end message with

ETX.

Message appears on display.

Condition test set to receive (DISP SEND and

POLL/SEL not lit; DISP LINE lamp lit).

Home cursor on set under test.

Depress DISP SEND.

Depress DISP LINE.



DISP LINE lamp lights.

Cursor moves through message and stops at character position after ETX.

Message is received on display of test set.

NOTE:

If Option Z1 (Home on Send) is installed, the cursor will go to home when the DISP LINE key is depressed. If Option F1 (printer on-line required to send), PTR LINE indicator must be lighted before sending will start. If Option H1 (monitor tape on required to send) is installed, MONITOR TAPE indicator must be lit before sending will start.

Locally copy test message on display on receive tape (Cassette 2) of the set under test. (Refer to

How to Operate Manual 405 for procedure.)

Reassign Cassette 2 as the send tape. (Refer to

How to Operate Manual 405 for procedure.)

Position send tape to send test message. Condition test set to receive.

Depress SEND TAPE LINE.

Send tape sends test message and test set receives message on display.

2-27

5.

ON-LINE CHECK-OUT (Contd)

STEP PROCEDURE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



RESULTS

5

6

7

8

On set under test, enter control mode and place keyboard on-line. Type a character X in line 10 and depress LINE FEED. Exit control mode. Condition test set to receive.

Type a test message on keyboard.

Message will be received on test set display.

NOTE:

If Option D2 was selected, message will be copied on set under test display also.

Enter control mode. Delete the X in line 10 and depress the LINE FEED key.

Exit control mode.

Locally prepare a test message on test set. Start message with SOH and end with EOT.

Condition set under test to receive (DISP SEND lamp not lit; DISP LINE, PTR LINE, and REC TAPE

LINE lamps lit.

Send test message from test set.

Display, printer and receive tape receive message from test set.

NOTE:

Set under test will take received EOT, transform it into an EXT, display it on display and record it on receive tape.

To check receive tape: Depress CNTRL MODE.

Place an X in line 7 of control message.

Control mode message appears.

Depress LINE FEED.

Receive tape listing will be displayed with first 56 characters of test message.

2-28

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


STEP

9


Depress the space bar.

Delete the X in line 7.

Rewind all tapes and reassign Cassettes 1, 2 and 3 so that Cassette 1 is send tape, Cassette 2 is receive tape and Cassette 3 is monitor tape. Refer to How to Operate Manual 405 for procedures.

The control mode message appears on display.

6.

CASSETTE TEST PROGRAM

Program Description

The CP10.006 Cassette Test Program consists of a programmed cassette tape and a modified 410504 circuit card, which functions to load the program tape into the C400 Controller.

The parts required for this test are as follows:

Parts List

Part No.

CP10.006.004

CP10.006.010

CP10.006.100

Description

Programmed Cassette - CD Test Program for 40C434 Controller

Modified 410504 Circuit Card With Four

Programmed EPROMS Containing Program

Tape Loader Program (See Fig. 1.)

EPROM

CP10.006.101

TP405403

TP451003-1

EPROM

EPROM

EPROM

2-29

6.

CASSETTE TEST PROGRAM (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


Fig. 1

Parts can be obtained from Teletype Custom Systems Division. See Page 2-4 for ordering information.

This program functions to:

Verify the condition of cassette tapes.

Provide the user with an aid for troubleshooting cassette drives (CD's).

Two parts constitute the program.

Part one is the cassette tape verification stage. Test characters are written from controller memory to the tape which is to be verified. The tape is then read nine times and compared to controller memory. Word numbers of errored words will print out during each read cycle. This test will run approximately 25 minutes.

Part two of the test program consists of 38 steps which write and read approximately 10 million characters to/from the cassette on a block by block basis. Errored blocks will print out and indicate the type of error.

2-30

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


The test program will classify cassette tape errors as "soft" errors. It will rerun the errored blocks-up to nine times. If the error does not clear, the program will classify it as a "hard" error. Other types of error messages are as follows:

Error Printouts

1.

Cassette not in place

2.

Soft error (cassette error).

3.

Hard error (repeated cassette error)

4.

Positioning error (controller could not find marker)

5.

In write mode not received -- disabled!

6.

Two wrong positions -- off until rewritten!

7.

This tape failed at word #

8.

Drive disabled -- no SS1 or no cassette!

9.

Drive disabled -- too many errors!

10.

Tape fails tape test -- drive disabled!

(Possible response to "REC TAPE LINE" "Y".)

Part two of this program will run for approximately six hours to complete the 38 steps one time, unless otherwise terminated. This will give the maintenance personnel adequate time to perform cassette drive analysis,

Table 1 lists the specific test program steps. Steps 1A and 1B constitute the tape verification stage. This test is initiated by depressing the "REC TAPE LINE", '"Y" keys on the operator console.

NOTE:

References in this procedure will be to "REC TAPE LINE" key, however, on some units containing a 40K108RDF keyboard (Terp System), the depressed key will be "NEXT INCOM". In any case, the depressed key should be the eighth keytop from the left in the top row of keytops.

"REC TAPE LINE" "Z" will execute "REC TAPE LINE" "Y" repeatedly.

Steps 1C through 38 are part two of the test program and function on "REC TAPE LINE" "Q".

Any other commands are not related to this test procedure even if they are functional.

Operating the "DISP LINE" ("LOCAL" for Terp) key after the test has begun, will stop the test and rewind all cassette tapes.

One to six cassette drives can be accommodated by the program. When multiple drives are used, the drive input port number will print out with the program responses. This allows service personnel to relate the printout to the drive that caused it. Sample test copy is included in this procedure for the user's reference.

The user is required to provide one 40C400 Controller for test program use. The controller must be reconfigured and optioned as follows.

2-31

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


6.


Test Terminal Configuration

Arrange the controller circuit cards and option them as shown in Fig. 2.

CAUTION: BEFORE HANDLING CIRCUIT CARDS, ATTACH A 346392 STATIC DISCHARGE WRIST STRAP OR

EQUIVALENT. ALSO, ALWAYS TURN CONTROLLER DC POWER OFF BEFORE REMOVING OR INSERTING

CIRCUIT CARDS.

CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION

Arrange Circuit Cards -- Remove Extra Cards

Fig. 2

One Model 40 Printer and one operator console (opcon) are required. The printer must be optioned for no error

character on parity error. Connect the SSI cables of these units to the controller as shown in Fig. 3.

Two additional cassette drives may be connected to the controller as shown in Fig. 3.

2-32

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CONTROLLER INPUT-OUTPUT

Fig. 3

Pretest Precautions

Observe all usual precautions when handling cassette tapes such as never turning off ac power when a cassette is running.

The CP10.006.004 cassette should have been delivered in the write protect (write inhibit) mode. Be sure the write

protect tab is up and to the right before using. Refer to Fig. 4.

2-33

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


6.


NOTE:

Write inhibit tab of CP10.006.004 cassette program tape must ALWAYS be to the right (window uncovered) to prevent destruction of program.

Fig. 4

Clean all cassette drive heads before and after testing. Check the 403238 tape cleaner and replace if required.

Double check test terminal cable connections, Fig. 3, and controller card arrangement and options according to Fig. 2.

Program Loading

Remove all cassette tapes, if any, from all cassette drives.

Turn on ac power to the test terminal.

Power On Reset (POR) the 40C400 controller by operating its power supply switch to the OFF and then ON position.

Be sure the CP10.006 program cassette is write inhibited. Insert the program tape into any one of the cassette drives which is known to be in good working order. Push the cassette forward to start in the normal manner. The test program will load into the controller memory.

The monitor cursor will appear and the "DT.SP LINE" ("LOCAL" for Terp) lamp will light if the program has loaded properly.

If the program did not load properly, repeat the load procedure by power on resetting the power supply.

2-34

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


When the cassette drive RUN/TEST lamp has gone off, remove the program tape from the drive and store away. Never remove a cassette when the lamp is on.

Load the desired number of drives with cassette tapes to be checked. All tapes will go thru the normal self test upon loading. A flashing RUN/TEST lamp indicates that the self-test has failed.

New cassettes may not be added after testing has begun. However, any drive may be removed from test at any time by disconnecting its SSI cable from the controller.

Program Execution

Tape verification. Operator console should now have "DISP LINE" (or "LOCAL") lighted.

Home the cursor (HOME position is fourth line down). Now Clear.

Depress "REC TAPE LINE" "Y" on the opcon. See below for sample copy for explanation of this command.

Cassette Drive 38 Step Exercise

Depress "DISP LINE" (or "LOCAL). Home the cursor and clear the monitor.

Depress "REC TAPE LINE" "Q". Refer to Page 2-36 for explanation of this command and see the sample copy.

Depressing the "DISP LINE" (or "LOCAL") key during the test will stop the test and cause all cassettes to rewind.

Printout from "REC TAPE LINE." "Y". Only the port number column has meaning at the right hand side last four columns. The first column will indicate the number of times "REC TAPE LINE" "Y" has been repeated if "REC TAPE

LINE" "Z" has been used to do "Y" repeatedly.

Response to "REC TAPE LINE" "Y"

Monitor will display "40 CD TEST PROGRAM".

If tape has no errors, no other printout will occur.

Monitor will display "TEST COMPLETE" after end of test.

4

φ

CD TEST PROGRAM

THIS TAPE FAILED AT WORD

≠φφφ

,411


≠φφφ

,411


≠φφ

1,195


≠φφ

1,195


≠φφφ

,914


≠φφφ

,914


≠φφ

1,195

THIS TAPE FAILED AI WORD

≠φφφ

,914


≠φφφ

,914

TEST COMPLETE

φ

1

φ

1

φ

1

φ

1

φ

φ

φ

φ

φ

1

1

1

1

1

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

5

φ

1

φ

1

φ

1

φ

1

φ

φ

φ

φ

φ

1

1

1

1

1

Printout using "REC TAPE LINE" "Q" when there are no cassettes in any of the cassette drives. This sample is included to illustrate the meaning of the columns at the right-hand side of the page. The two digits at the extreme right will indicate the program step in process during the execution of "REC TAPE LINE" "Q".

2-35

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-l1

359


6.


Program Execution (Contd)

The next column to the left is the input port number of the cassette SSI cable to: the C400 controller; Port 6 will correspond to controller SSI connector J310, Port 5 will correspond to connector J308 etc. The next two three digit numbers to the left are the block number and the last column to the left has no significance to this procedure.

Printout from "REC TAPE LINE" "Q". This sample shows the entire 38 steps of the program using a good cassette tape being read from the cassette drive which is connected to Port 5 (J308). Note that the printout indicates that Ports 1, 2, 3,

4, and 6 are either not being used or have defective drives and/or cassette tapes. Also note that the cassette tape ran error free until block 461 during Step No. 36. At this time an error was detected; when the controller reread the tape the fifth time, the error had cleared and the program continued.

2-36

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2-37

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


6.


CHART

STEP PROCEDURE

Step 1A The ASCII characters "+" and "3" are written onto the tape continuously over an area equivalent to approximately 520 blocks.

Step 1B

Step 1C

The tape is then read and each character received by the C400 is compared bit by bit to "+" and "3".

The ASCII characters "+" and "3" are written onto Channel 1 and the ASCII characters "T" and "L" are written onto Channel 2. There will be 129 SSI words containing +3 on Channel 1 and 129 SSI words containing TL on Channel 2. In addition, there will be two more SSI words on Channel 1, a word containing (New Line-ETX) and a block check word. Also, Channel 2 will contain one more SSI word

(Block No.). The above block of 261 SSI words or 522 characters is written onto the tape with "markers".

A total of 500 blocks are written (0 to 499).

Step 2 through Step

10

Read one block at a time.

Step 11

Step 12

The same as Step 1C except TL is written onto Channel 1 and +3 is written onto Channel 2. The blocks are written without "markers".

Read block 490 and then read block 10.

Step 13 through Step

21


Step 22 The same as Step 1C.

Step 23 The same as Step 12.

Step 24 through Step

32


Step 33

Step 34

Write with "markers" (TL on Channel 1 and +3 on Channel 2) followed by a "REW" and then a READ.

This test is performed one block at a time.

Write without "markers" (+3 on Channel 1 and TL on Channel 2) followed by a "REW" and then a READ.

This test is performed one block at a time.

2-38

STEP

Step 35

Step 36

Step 37

Step 38

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART (Contd)

PROCEDURE

Same-as Step 12.

Same as Step 33.

Same as Step 34.

Read Block 0, 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 490, 451, 401, 351, 301, 251, 201, 151, 101,

51 and 10.

The following procedure is used to check the outputs of the magnetic tape head assembly. The controller should be

configured as it was for use with the Cassette Test Program. See Fig. 2, Page 2-32 for configuration. After execution of

this procedure, the controller should be configured in it's original state. The tape head checkout procedure utilizes a special cassette tape No. 10.006.020 which is available from Teletype Custom Systems Division. See Page '2-4 for ordering information. The 410764 circuit card contained in the cassette drive unit must be electrically extended from the

base to provide access to the components. Refer to D. TROUBLESHOOTING, Page 2-40 for further information.

Observe all usual precautions when handling cassette tapes such as never turning off ac power when a cassette is running.

The CP10.006.020 Cassette Tape should have been delivered in the write protect (write inhibit) mode. Be sure the write protect tab is up and to the right before using.

Turn on ac power to the test terminal.

Power On Reset (POR) the 40C400 controller by operating its power supply switch to the OFF and then ON position.

Be sure the CP10.006.020 Program Cassette is write inhibited. Insert the program tape into the cassette drive. Push the cassette forward to start in the normal manner. The tape should be allowed to run to the end and the check should be made only with the tape moving in the forward direction.

If the program did not load properly, repeat the load procedure by power on resetting the power supply. The power supply should also be reset before each new check.

2-39

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


6.


With tape moving in the forward direction, check anode of CR16 (with Channel 1 of scope), and anode of CR17 (with

Channel 2 of scope) for waveform shown in Fig. 5. The two waveforms must be in phase within +10 microseconds. If

waveforms do not meet requirement, replace the 403241 tape head assembly. Refer to F. DISASSEMBLY/

REASSEMBLY AND PARTS for replacement procedure.

Fig. 5

D. TROUBLESHOOTING

1.

GENERAL

This section provides troubleshooting methods to be followed in repairing the Tempest Model 40 Cassette Drive Units.

When trouble is encountered in testing a cassette drive, the diagnostic steps and corrective measures should be followed to arrive at the trouble source. After corrective steps have been verified by successfully repeating the test that disclosed the problem, the testing procedure should be resumed.

Functional schematics have been supplied in 6. FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS of this section as an aid to troubleshooting.

Waveshapes and voltage levels specified for troubleshooting the cassette drive logic circuit card are to be checked with an oscilloscope unless stated otherwise.

Continuity and dc voltage checks specified for troubleshooting are to be made with a multimeter.

2-40

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


If the cassette drive fails to perform its intended function, the difficulty should be analyzed in a logical manner to recognize the source of the problem. Above all, make certain it is the cassette drive which is causing the problem rather than associated apparatus or electronics.

Take the time to pinpoint the exact nature of the difficulty rather than just a general description. For example, it would be of much more use to be able to say that "The brake fails to operate properly" rather than "The unit is failing to transmit data properly".

Check to see that all springs are attached and parts mounted properly. No adjustment should be changed indiscriminately in an effort to correct a difficulty which is not fully understood. Very often this will only result in more than one difficulty being present.

As an aid to troubleshooting, the following list of troubles and remedies are intended to serve as a guide in the analysis and correction of difficulties. The associated schematic wiring diagrams of this specification are required for reference.

These remedies are intended for field repair and, as such, will call for the most expeditious solution to the problem. For instance, if a clutch fails, the immediate solution would be to replace it.

2-41

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


D. TROUBLESHOOTING (Contd)

1.

General (Contd)

SYMPTOM

Cassette drive motor does not turn on.

POSSIBLE CAUSE

1. Loss of ac power.

Motor runs, but nothing else operates, selftest is not performed.

Either brake or clutch fail to operate.

Either clutch fails to operate properly.

1. Interface circuit open.

2. No dc power.

3. Cassette in place or file protect switch are inoperative.

1. Open coil.

1. Dirty clutch armature rotor faces.

2. Improper clutch adjustment,

Either brake fails to operate properly

(usually evidenced by slack in the tape).

Garbling of data in read or write mode.

1. Dirty armature face.

2. Improper brake adjustment.

1. Dirty head or tape.

2. Damaged tape, ie, wrinkled tape or oxide layer is scratched.

3. Dirty tape cleaner.

4. Faulty belt adjustments.

2-42

REMEDY

Check all fuses and switches between 40CD101 and ac source.

Make sure interface circuit is complete.

Check power source and replace faulty portion.

Readjust switches per E. ADJUSTMENTS AND

LUBRICATION.

Replace complete set of faulty items.

Clean faces.

Readjust clutch per E. ADJUSTMENTS AND

LUBRICATION.

Clean armature face.

Readjust per E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION.

Clean the tape head.

Use new tape cassette.

Replace cleaner.

Readjust "O Ring" belt and flat belt per E.

ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION.

SYMPTOM

Cleaning bobbin fails to rotate

POSSIBLE CAUSE

1.

Faulty adjustment.

2.

Weak flat spring.

3.

Weak tension spring.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


REMEDY

Readjust bobbin per E. ADJUSTMENTS

AND LUBRICATION.

Bend spring per E. ADJUSTMENTS AND

LUBRICATION.

Replace spring.

2-43

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.

ERROR ANALYSIS

Table A is provided as a guide for associating errors with likely causes and recommends specific areas of the cassette

drive to be checked.

TABLE A

Errors Caused By Acceleration Problem:

1.

Generally occur in first third of block.

2.

Can result in incomplete block error with more than one missing SSI word.

3.

Will usually cause errors on both channels.

4.

Errors will usually change with each reread.

5.

Will not cause character errors with just one or two bits incorrect.

6.

If written with acceleration problem, data cannot be recovered correctly no matter how many rereads are attempted.

Errors Caused By Tape:

1.

Can occur anywhere in block.

2.

Can occur on one or both channels.

3.

Damaged tape will usually cause incomplete block errors. (Even if rewritten, block cannot be recovered correctly.)

4.

Debris on tape will usually cause one character error which could be distributed throughout the block.

5.

Blocks written with debris on tape cannot be recovered correctly no matter how many rereads are made even if debris falls off of tape.

Errors Caused By Tape Head:

1.

If head has debris on it, incomplete block errors will result. (Lost data could be from one or both channels).

2.

If skew adjustment is out, data errors will result throughout block.

3.

If mechanical dimensions are out, data errors and incomplete blocks will result.

Errors Caused By Circuit Card:

1.

Generally circuit card errors will result in many or all blocks being either written or read incorrectly.

Types of errors and the manner in which they manifest themselves are listed in Table B. The following procedures are

recommended for testing and analyzing test results.

The drive in question should be allowed to complete enough steps of the test program to allow sufficient data for analysis.

2-44

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


The first step of error analysis is to remove the tape from the drive in question and verify the tape in a known good drive.

If the tape does not verify properly, it should be discarded and another-properly conditioned tape installed in the drive in question. The drive in question should be watched closely because it may be damaging tapes. If the tape verifies properly, the drive in question should be examined.

If errors occur on both channels and near the beginning of the block, acceleration is most likely the cause of the errors.

Check the items listed under ACCELERATION ERRORS, and also check the items listed under IRREGULAR DATA

PATTERN.

If the errors occur only on one channel, the items listed under HEAD RELATED ERRORS may apply. If these items are suspected, replace the 410764 circuit card with a known good card.

If the errors occur anywhere throughout a block and on both channels, check the items listed under ACCELERATION

ERRORS and IRREGULAR DATA PATTERN. If these items are okay, replace the 410764 circuit card with a known good card.

If the errors are positioning type errors, check the items listed under COAST PROBLEMS and CLUTCH PICKUP

PROBLEMS.

If a cassette drive will not verify a cassette tape, check the items listed under MOTION PROBLEMS.

TABLE B

ACCELERATION ERRORS

1.

Check connections at Berg connector (brakes and clutches).

2.

Check brake gap adjustment (forward and reverse).

3.

Check holdback torque with tension monitor.

4.

Check belt tension.

5.

Check clutch torque.

6.

Check yield spring tension.

7.

Check end play and side to side play of all shafts.

8.

Check brake disc and armature (both forward and reverse).

IRREGULAR DATA PATTERN

1.


2.


3.

Check belt tension.

4.

Check yield spring tension.

5.

Check brake disc and armature.

HEAD RELATED ERRORS

1.

Channel amplitude incorrect.

2.

Skew (read head outputs out of phase).

3.

Flutter (one channel jittering with respect to other).

4.

Check for wear.

2-45

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.

ERROR ANALYSIS (Contd)

COAST PROBLEMS

1.

Check connections at Berg connector.

2.

Clean clutches and brake disc.

3.

Check polarity of clutches and brakes.

4.

Check brake and clutch gaps.

5.

Check resistance of brake coils.

CLUTCH PICKUP PROBLEMS

TABLE B (Contd)

1.

Check connections at Berg connector.

2.

Clean clutches and brake disc.

3.

Check brake and clutch gaps.

4.

Check resistance of clutch coils.

MOTION PROBLEMS

1.


2.


3.

Clean clutches.

4.

Check belt tension.

5.

Check head.

Refer to Section E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION for adjustment procedures.

2-46

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3.

COMPONENT ANALYSIS

NOTE: In the following sections, where references are made to specific adjustments and/or lubrications, refer to E.

ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION for procedures. Perform repair steps listed in the “NO” RESPONSE DIRECTIVE column in the order specified until trouble is corrected.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 4.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

ANALYSIS QUESTION

1.

With the Cassette Drive power switch in the "ON" position, does motor run?

2.

Is 115 volts available at source?

3.

With motor connector removed from ac distribution assembly connector, is 115 volts present at ac distribution assembly connector?

Go to 3.

(a) Disconnect power supply from motor connector and replace motor.

(b) Replace connector

Repair or replace voltage.

(a) Replace 408598

SSI/AC interface assembly.

(b) Replace connector.

4.

With no cassette in the cassette holder and power switch in the "ON" position, is the BOT/EOT lamp lit?

Go to 9.

Go to 5.

5.

Is power supply fuse "open"?

Check continuity.

continues to "blow".

Recheck power- supply.

Replace fuse, recheck.

Recheck if fuse

6.

Is -12 volts present at power supply? Check for

Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

-12 volts dc between terminals (410764) marked common and -12.

Go to 6.

Go to 7.

7.

Is transformer output voltage present (approximately

31.6 volts ac) present between unmarked terminals on power supply circuit card?

(a) Go to 4. CIRCUIT Go to 8.

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410043)

(b) Replace 406101 power supply.

2-47

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.

COMPONENT ANALYSIS (Contd)


8.

Is transformer input voltage present (103 to 127 volts ac) between pins 1 and 3 of connector P8?

9.

Is RUN (Status ) lamp lit?


DIRECTIVE

Replace 406103 transformer.

Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS

(410764)

Go to 13.

10.

Does RUN (Status) lamp light when the “Cassette in Place” switch is manually activated?

11.

Is +12 volts dc present at power supply? Check for +12 volts dc between terminals marked common and +12.

Go to 12.


DIRECTIVE

Replace 408598 SSI/

AC interface assembly

Go to 10.

Go to 11.

12.

With power removed from the Go to 5. CIRCUIT cassette drive, the cassette CARD ANALYSIS drive removed from its base, and plug P4 removed from the

J4 connector, is there continuity between terminals

2 and 9 of plug P4?

(410764)

(a) Go to 4. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410043)

(b) Replace power supply 406101.

(a) Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410764)

(b) Replace 406111 cassette in place switch.

(c) Perform switch height adjustment.

13.

Does left drive shaft

(rewind) hub rotate when

“Cassette in Place” switch is manually activated?

14.


(rewind) rotor rotate?

15.

Is clutch activated when the “Cassette in Place” switch is actuated?

16.

Is clutch out of adjustment?

Go to 18.

Go to 15.

Perform pulley and shaft end play adjustment.

Adjust clutch.

Go to 14.

Go to 18.

Go to 16.

Go to 17.

2-48

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3.



17.

With power removed from cassette drive, drive removed from base and the P4B connector removed from J4 connector is resistance between terminals 3 and 8 of P4B 32 to 50 ohms?

18.

Does right drive shaft

(forward drive) rotor rotate?

19.

Is O-Ring belt present?

20.

Are left drive shaft

(rewind) pulley and idler pulley present?

21.

Are left drive shaft

(rewind) Pulley set screws

(2) tight?

22.


(rewind) pulley bind on casting?


DIRECTIVE

Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS

(410764)

Go to 19.

Go to 20.

Go to 21.

Go to 22.

Adjust for end play.


DIRECTIVE

(a) Replace 402271 clutch assembly.

(b) Perform clutch adjustment.

(c) Perform pulley alignment adjustment.

Go to 23.

Assemble O-Ring belt.

Assemble missing pulley/pulleys.

Tighten set screws.

(a) Replace 403296 brake assembly.

(b) Perform brake adjustment.

(c) Perform pulley and shaft end play adjustment.

(d) Perform latch adjustments.

Assemble Belt.

Tighten set screws.

23.

Is motor drive belt present?.

24.

Are right drive shaft (forward drive) pulley set screws tight?

Go to 24.

Go to 25.

25.

Are motor pulley set screws tight?

Go to 26.

26.

Does right drive shaft (forward Adjust for end play.

drive) pulley bind on casting?

Tighten set screws.

(a) Perform motor drive belt adjustment.

(b) Perform motor pulley adjustments.

(c) Replace 403296 brake assembly.

(d) Perform brake adjustment.

2-49

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3.


26.


(Contd)


DIRECTIVE


DIRECTIVE

(e) Perform pulley and shaft end play adjustment.

(f) Perform latch adjustments.

(g) Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410764)

Adjust cassette pressure spring.

27.

With a partially unwound standard cassette placed wrong side out, is the cassette held flat against inside surface of the cassette holder?

Go to 28.

28.

Is cassette holder properly latched?

29.

30.

When removing cassette does latch open too far?

31.

Does the left drive (rewind) shaft rotate?

Is cassette holder ejected from drive mechanism?

Go to 29.

Adjust "Cassette in

Place Switch".

Adjust latch stop screw.

Go to 32.

Adjust latch.

Go to 30.

Go to 31.

Adjust cassette holder pressure spring.

Go to 33.

32.

With the cassette properly assembled to the cassette holder, did the cassette rewind?

33.

With the cassette removed from the cassette holder, do both reels rotate freely?

Go to 34.

Adjust "Cassette in

Place" switch height.

Replace cassette.

34.

After rewinding, does the tape move forward and rewind?

Go to 36.

(a) Cassette drive not plugged into mating equipment.

(b) Go to 35.

35.

With power switch in the OFF power to cassette drive, does tape move forward and rewind?

Replace or repair (a) Replace system position, remove system cable mating equipment.

from mating equipment Restore Cassette Drive.

(b) cable.

Replace 408598 connector and connect it to a known good part. Restore to proper configuration.


(c) Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410764)

2-50

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3.



36.

Does tape move forward and reverse a second time?

37.

Does cassette have red tab on left side folded back so that notch is exposed?

38.

Does the RUN (Status) lamp turn off or flash when tape is rewound?

39.

Is the tape between the

BOT/EOT sensor tube mechanism transparent?


DIRECTIVE

Go to 38.

Go to 38.

Go to 41.


DIRECTIVE

Go to 37.

(a) Adjust "Write

Inhibit Switch".

Go to 39.

Go to 40.

(a) Replace cassette.

(b) Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410764)

(c) Replace 406123 cable assembly.

(d) Perform sensor tube adjustment.

Perform sensor tube adjustment.

40.

Is the hole in the underside of the sensor tube over the BOT/EOT lamp?

41.

Does the RUN (Status) lamp flash?

42.

Remove cassette and place in known good Cassette Drive.

Does RUN (Status) lamp flash after moving forward and reversing when "Write Inhibit" tab is folded back (see

Step 37) or after moving forward, reversing, moving forward again and reversing a second time for "Write

Inhibit" tab not folded back?

43.

With the cassette drive connected to a M40 KD or

KDP capable of receiving from a cassette drive and using a cassette previously recorded on the cassette drive, can text be sent to the display?

44.

Is text garbled?

Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410764)

Go to 42.

Cassette bad - replace.

Go to 45.

Go to 44.

Go to 45.

Go to 43.

Go to 48.

Cassette drive good.

2-51

3.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



45.

Replace the cassette used in Step 43 with a known

46.

Is the tape cleaner bobbin indexed as the cassette is

47.

48.

49.


properly recorded cassette

- does garbling still occur?

inserted and removed?

Is "O" Ring Belt frayed?

Is tape cleaner bobbin dirty?

Does associated display indicate Block Number

or 000?


DIRECTIVE

Go to 46.


DIRECTIVE

Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410764)

Go to 47.

Replace "O" Ring

Belt 403289.

Replace 403238 tape cleaner bobbin.

Cassette drive good

- mating equipment at fault.

(a) Adjust bobbin latch spring.

(b) Check bobbin ratchet spring requirement.

(c) Check bobbin stepper spring requirement.

(d) Replace tape cleaner bobbin.

Go to 48.

(a) Check Drive Belt adjustment.

(b) Check "O" Ring

Belt adjustment.

(c) Clean recording head.

(d) Clean clutch faces.

(e) Clean brake faces.

(f) Adjust clutches.

(g) Adjust brakes.

(h) Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410764)

(a) Replace System

Cable.

(b) Replace 408598


(c) Go to 5. CIRCUIT

CARD ANALYSIS.

(410764)

2-52

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4.

CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS (410043)

If the repair troubleshooting instructions do not serve to correct the defective card, refer to functional schematics in this section for further analysis.

View of circuit card connection looking from the top of all components. These designations are for reference only.

DIODE

E = emitter

C = collector

B = base

Pin callouts for different size circuit packs.

Miscellaneous component identification callouts.

2-53

4.

CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


REF.

PART

DESIG.

NO. REQ.

QTY

QR1

QR2

402201

402204

1

1

DESCRIPTION

REGULATOR, +12V

REGULATOR, -12V

R1, R2

C3, C4

C5

CR1-4

AL-A5

171580

305455

321158

312341

137471

2

2

1

4

5

RESISTOR 470, IW

CAPACITOR, 15 MFD

CAPACITOR, 0.1 MFD

DIODE, IN4004

POST

407348

111017

107116

3606

409043

4

4

2

4

1

HEAT SINK

SCREW, 6-40 X .312 PAN

WASHER, STAR

NUT, 6-40 HEX.

BOARD, CIRCUIT

410043 Power Supply Circuit Card

2-54



DIRECTIVE

1.

Is 15.8 volts ac (RMS) present Go to 2.

at terminal marked A3?

2.

Is +18 volts dc (approximately) Go to 3.

present at cathodes of

CR1 and CR2?

3.

4.

5.

6.

Is +12 volts dc present at terminal marked A1?

Is 15.8 volts ac (RMS) present at terminal marked A4?

Is -18 volts dc (approximately) present at anodes of

CR3 and CR4?

Is -12 volts dc present at terminal marked A5?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Go to 4.

Go to 5.

Go to 6.

410043 card is good.


DIRECTIVE

Go to 3. COMPONENT

ANALYSIS.

(a) Replace CR1-CR2.

(312341)

(b) Replace CS.

(321158)

(c) Replace C1.

(336027)

(a) Replace QR1.

(402201)

(b) Replace C3.

(305455)

(c) Replace R1.

(171580)

Go to 3. COMPONENT

ANALYSIS.

(a) Replace CR3-CR4.

(312341)

(b) Replace C5.

(321158)

(c) Replace C2.

(336027)

(a) Replace QR2.

(402204)

(b) Replace C4.

(305455)

(c) Replace R2.

(171580)

2-55

4.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS (410043) (Contd)

Information Notes:

1.

Terminal designations enclosed in parenthesis are for reference only and are not marked on the components.

2.

All resistors are ¼ watt and all resistance values in ohms, unless otherwise specified.

3.

All capacitance values in microfarads unless otherwise specified.

4.

Indicates Common.

5.

SL-BL

Indicates Frame Ground.

Indicates Slow Blowing.

2-56

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5.

CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS (410764)

General

CAUTION 1: TO AVOID POSSIBLE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE MOS DEVICES, OR CARD WITH MOS DEVICES,

DUE TO ELECTRICAL STATIC DISCHARGE BY SERVICE PERSONNEL, THE DETAILED PROCEDURES LISTED

SHOULD BE FOLLOWED.

(a) ALL MOS DEVICES SHOULD BE DELIVERED AND STORED IN CONDUCTIVE CARRIERS SUCH AS

FOAM PADS OR ALUMINUM TUBES.

(b) ALL HANDLING OF MOS DEVICES, OR CARDS WITH MOS-DEVICES, SHOULD BE DONE AT A

GROUNDED BENCH WITH A CONDUCTIVE FOAM PAD OR AT A LOCATION WHERE THE SERVICE

PERSONNEL CAN BE MAINTAINED AT GROUND POTENTIAL.

(c) ALL PERSONNEL HANDLING MOS DEVICES, OR CARDS WITH MOS DEVICES, MUST WEAR A STATIC

PROTECTION GROUNDING STRAP ADJUSTED TO MAKE FILM CONTACT WITH THE SKIN AT ALL

TIMES.

(d) MOS DEVICES DELIVERED IN ALUMINUM TUBES OR FOAM PADS MAY BE TRANSFERRED TO WORK

AREA PAD BY TOUCHING CARRIER OR PAD FIRST, AND REMOVING DEVICES BY THEIR PACKAGE

(BODY), RATHER THAN BY THE LEADS, IF AT ALL POSSIBLE. HOWEVER, THESE DEVICES SHALL

ALWAYS BE POSITIONED SO THAT THE LEGS ARE IN CONTACT WITH THE FOAM AT ALL TIMES.

(e) SOLDERING IRONS, TEST, AND INSERTION EQUIPMENT MUST BE GROUNDED.

Service personnel are never to be connected directly to ground, but rather through a high resistance discharge path of a minimum of 1 megohm where 110 volts is present. Use 346392 static discharge strap.

CAUTION 2: TO AVOID POSSIBLE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO MOS CIRCUITRY WHENEVER THE 410764 CIRCUIT

CARD IS REMOVED, THE 346392 STATIC GROUND STRAP MUST BE WORN. THE STRAP IS NOT TO BE WORN

OVER CLOTHING BUT MUST CONTACT THE SKIN TIGHTLY. THE GROUND STRAP MUST BE CONNECTED TO

GROUND (EITHER "EARTH" GROUND OR FRAME GROUND) VIA ITS ASSOCIATED CLIP.

CAUTION 3: TURN OFF ALL POWER OR SIGNAL SOURCES BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING ANY

COMPONENT.

Grounding Precautions

The 410764 circuit card contains MOS logic which requires careful handling. If the card is not already installed in the unit it should be handled while stored in its protective 406260 static bag.

2-57

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS (410764) (Contd) 5.

Before troubleshooting of the 410764 logic circuit card can be undertaken, it mast be removed from the cassette drive unit and extended away 80 that it may lie flat on a surface which is accessible to the repair person.

Refer to F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS for procedure to remove circuit card from cassette drive unit.

Extender cables necessary for the circuit card are number CP10.019.000 and may be ordered from:

Teletype Custom Systems Division

5555 Touhy Avenue


(312) 982-2000

2-58

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"POR"

Step 1.

Check Cathode of CR11. When power is applied to cassette drive, does voltage change from O volts to +12 volts and slowly back to O volts?

Yes

Go to 2.

Replace C21 with 337335.

Replace CR11 with 197464.

Replace R62 with 321508.

"CIRCUIT VOLTAGES"

Step 2.

Check Anode of CR12. Is voltage level +3 volts dc?

No

Yes

Go to 3.



Step 3.

Check Cathode of CR7. Is voltage level approximately -1 volt dc?

No

Yes

Go to 4.





No

2-61

5.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Step 4.

Check Anode of CR7. Is voltage level approximately

-6 volts dc?


YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 5.


Replace Q5 with 337340.




"CLOCKS"

Step 5.

Check MLC2 pin 2 for waveform.

No

Yes

Go to 6.

Replace MLC2 with 339380.

Replace XTAL with 406685.

Vert

Horz

Step 6.

Check MLC3 pins 6 and 7 for waveform.

.2V/Div.

.2us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 7.


Vert .2V/Div.

Horz .5us/Div.

No

2-62

Step 7.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



Check MLC3 pin 10 for waveform.

YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 8.


Vert .2V/Div.

Horz .2us/Div.

Step 8.

Check MLC2 pins 13 and 14 for waveform.

No

Yes

Go to 9.


Step 9.

Check base of Q7 for waveform.

Vert .2V/Div.

Horz .5us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 10.



Vert .2V/Div.

Horz .5us/Div.

No

2-63

5.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Step 10.



YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 11.

Replace C16 with 197464

Replace R28 with 320275

Step 11.

Check MLB4 pin 18 for waveform.

Vert .2V/Div..

Horz .5 us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 12.






Vert .5V/Div.

Horz .5us/Div.

No

2-64

Step 12.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 13.






Step 13.


Vert .5V/Div.

Horz .5us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 14.

Replace MLB4 with 402279.

Vert .5V/Div.

Horz 10us/Div.

No

2-65

5.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Step 14.



YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 15.




Vert

Horz

.1V/Div.

10us/Div.

Step 15.

Check MLB4 pin 2 and MLB5 pin 14 for waveform.

No

Yes

Go to 16.






Vert .5V/Div.

Horz 10us/Div.

No

2-66

Step 16.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 17.


Step 17.


Vert .5V/Div.

Horz 10us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 18.




Vert .1V/Div.

Horz 10us/Div.

No

2-67

5.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Step 18.


Check MLB4 pin 39 and MLB5 pin 28 for waveform.

YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 19.






Step 19.

Check J2 pin 3 for waveform.

Vert .5V/Div.

Horz 5us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 20.

Replace 408598 SSI/AC Distribution Assembly.

Go to 3. COMPONENT ANALYSIS.

2-68

No

Step 20.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 21.




Step 21.


Vert .1V/Div.

Horz 20us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 22.




Vert .1V/Div.

Horz 20us/Div.

No

2-69

5.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Step 22.



YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 23.



Step 23.


Vert .5V/Div.

Horz 10us/Div.

No

Yes

Go-to 24.



Vert .5V/Div.

Horz 10us/Div.

No

2-70

Step 24.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 25.

Replace 408598 SSI/AC Vert .2V/Div.

Distribution Assembly.

Horz 10us/Div.

Refer to 3. COMPONENT ANALYSIS.

Step 25.


No

Yes

Go to 26.



Step 26.


Vert .5V/Div.

Horz 10us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 27.

Vert .5V/Div.

Horz 10us/Div.

Replace 408598 SSI/AC Distribution

Assembly. Refer to 3. COMPONENT ANALYSIS.

No

2-71

5.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Step 27.



YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 28.



Vert

Horz

Step 28.

Check to see if BOT/EOT lamp is lit.

.5V/Div.

10us/Div.

No

Yes

Go to 29.

Replace 406123 cable assembly.



"SELF-TEST"

Step 29.

Perform self-test by latching cassette into cassette drive. MLB5 pin 3 should be +12 V dc, and MLB5 pin

4 should be 0 V dc.

No

Yes

Go to 30.

Replace cassette in place switch with 406111.


2-72

No

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Step 30.

Unlatch cassette and manually activate write inhibit switch. MLB5 pin 26 should be at O V dc, and MLB5 pin 27 should be at +12 V dc.

Go to 31.

Replace write inhibit switch with 406111.


2-73

No

5.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Step 31.


During self-test does RUN/STATUS lamp turn on?

YES/NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 37.

Step 32.

Check MLB1 pin 1 for -12 V dc when lamp is on, and +12 V dc when lamp is off.

No

Go to 32.

Yes

Go to 33.



2-74

No

Step 33.


Check MLB5 pin 25 for +12 V dc when lamp is on, and

-12 V dc when lamp is off.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MANUAL

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 34.

Step 34.


Check base of Q17 for -11 V dc when lamp is on, and

-12 V dc when lamp is off.

No

Yes

Go to 35.



359, 2-75

No

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



5.


Step 35.


Check collector of Q17 for -12 V dc when lamp is on, and 0 V dc when lamp is off.

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 36.



Step 36.

Check left side of R74 for -5 V dc when lamp is on, and

0 V dc when lamp is off.

No

Yes

Go to 37.



359, 2-76

No

Step 37.

ANALYSIS QLESTION

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check MLB5 pin 22 with scope set on Vert .5V/Div. and

Horz lOus/Div., signal should toggle between -12 V dc, and +12 V dc during normal operation (self-test, reading and writing), and should remain at -12 V dc during forward and reverse tape movement.

Yes

Go to 38.

Step 38.


Check base of Q25. Signal should toggle between -12 V dc and -10 V dc during normal operation, and should remain at -12 V dc during forward and reverse tape movement.

No

Yes

Go to 39.



359, 2-77

No

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



5.


Step 39.


Check collector of Q26. Signal should toggle between

+12 V dc and -12 V dc during normal operation, and should remain at +12 V dc during forward and reverse tape movement.

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 40.

No

Step 40.





Replace 403296 brake assembly (2).

Check MLB5 pin 17. Signal should toggle between -12 V dc and +12 V dc during normal operation, should remain at

-12 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at +12 V dc during reverse tape movement.

No

Yes

Go to 41.


359, 2-78

No

Step 41.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Check base of Q13. Signal should toggle between -12 V dc and -10 V dc during normal operation, should remain at -12 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at -10 V dc during reverse tape movement.

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 42.



Step 42.

Check collector of Q14. Signal should toggle between

O V dc and -12 V dc during normal operation, should remain at O V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at -12 V dc during reverse tape movement.

No

Yes

Go to 43.



359, 2-79

No

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5.


Step 43.


Check Anode of CR25. Signal should toggle between

0 V dc and -10 V dc during normal operation, should remain at 0 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at -10 V dc during reverse tape movement.

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 44.



Replace 403274 clutch coil

Replace 402271 clutch assembly.

Step 44.

Check MCB5 pin 19. Signal should toggle between -12 V dc and +12 V dc during normal operation, and should remain at -12 V dc for forward and reverse tape movement.

No

Yes

Go to 45.


359, 2-80

No

Step 45.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Check base of Q15. Signal should toggle between -12 V dc and -10 V dc during normal operation, and should remain at -12 V dc during forward and reverse tape movement.

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 46.

Step 46.



Check collector of Q16. Signal should toggle between +12

V dc and -12 V dc during normal operation, should remain at -3 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at +12 V dc during reverse tape movement.

No

Yes

Go to 47.



359, 2-81

No

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5.



Step 47.

Check Anode of CR21. Signal should toggle between +12 V dc and -12 V dc for normal operation, should remain at +5 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at +12 V dc during reverse tape movement.

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 48.





Replace 403296.brake assembly.

Step 48.

Check MLB5 pin 20. Signal should toggle between -12 V dc and +12 V dc during normal operation, should remain at

+12 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at -12 V dc during reverse tape movement.

No

Yes

Go to 49.


359, 2-82

No

Step 49.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Check base of Q18. Signal should toggle between -12 V dc and -10 V dc during normal operation, should remain at

-10 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at -12 V dc during reverse tape. movement.

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 50.

No



Step 50.

Check collector of Q19. Signal should toggle between +12

V dc and -12 V dc during normal operation, should remain at -12 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at +12 V dc during reverse tape movement.

Yes

Go to 51.








359, 2-83

No

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5. CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS (410764) ,(Contd)

Step 51.


Check Anode of CR23. Signal should toggle between 0 V dc and -12 V dc during normal operation, should remain at

-10 V dc during forward tape movement, and should remain at 0 V dc during reverse tape movement.

YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Yes

Go to 52.



Replace 403274 clutch coil.

Replace 402272 clutch assembly.

No

359, 2-84


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


YES, NO

RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Step 52.

Analysis Steps 1-51 should be sufficient to repair a defective 410764 circuit card. If problems are still encountered at this point, the following steps may be undertaken:

1.


2.


3.

Refer to functional schematics at end of section for further analysis.

If problems are still encountered during write operations, the following steps may be undertaken:

1.


2.


3.


4.


5.


6.


7.

Refer to functional schematics at end of section for further analysis.

If problems are still encountered during read operations, the following steps-may be undertaken:

1.

Replace MLA7 with'337347.

2.


3.


4.


5.


6.

Replace,Q23 with 323934.

7.


8.


9.


10. Replace Q29 with 323934.

11. Replace Q30 with 323934.

12. Replace CR9 with 197464.






18. Refer to functional schematics at end of section for further analysis.

359, 2-85

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


6.

FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS

POWER INPUT, REGULATORS, POR

AND SSI INTERFACE CIRCUITS

359, 2-86

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PEAK DETECTOR CIRCUITS

359, 2-87

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


6. FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS (Contd)

WRITE AMPLIFIERS

359, 2-88

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SIOP-MANUAL

OSCILLATOR AND CLOCK DRIVERS

359, 2-89

TM 11-5815-606-34JNAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


6.

FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS (Contd)

CLUTCH AND BRAKE DRIVERS

359, 2-90

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MNUAL

LAMP, SWITCHES, PHOTO DETECTOR INTERFACE,

MOTOR AND MOTOR CONTROL

359, 2-91

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


6.

FUNCTIONAL,SCHEMATICS (Contd)

MOS CIRCUIT, PLL CONTROL AND MIRKER BLIND

359, 2-92

TM 11-5815-606-B4/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION

1.

GENERAL

Adjustments that require major disassembly of the cassette drive are not covered in this manual at this time.

Adjustments are grouped according to the mechanism (cassette holder or drive mechanism), and in the sequence recommended for a comprehensive "in-the-field" adjustment. One electrical adjustment of the 410764 card "Open Line

Frequency" is shown.

Identification drawings and tables are included to locate the mechanisms and list the adjustments related to these mechanisms.

The instruction "friction tight" means to tighten to the point where friction keeps the parts from moving, but they are still loose enough to move for adjustment purposes.

Spring or belt tensions are checked with a spring scale held at the angle shown in the adjustment illustration. Springs that do not meet requirements, and for which no adjustment procedure is given, should be replaced.

After adjustment is complete, tighten any screws or nuts loosened to make the adjustment.

Tools Required: 406131 Gauge (Brake and Clutch Gap)

406130 Wrench, Driver (402274/402275 Drive Hubs)

2.

ASSEMBLIES

359, 2-93

2.

ASSEMBLIES (Contd)

Cassette Holder

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION (Contd)

CASSETTE HOLDER ADJUSTMENTS

(1) Cassette Holder

(2) Latch (Preliminary and Final)

(3) Latch Stop Screw (Rear)

(4) Latch Stop Screw (Front)

(5) Switch Height

(6) Tape Cleaner

(7) Run Lamp Mounting

(8) Head

(9) Plate With Cassette Holder

(10) Cassette Latch Spring

(11) Sensing Bail Spring

(12) Cassette Pressure Spring

(13) Cassette Holder Pressure Spring

(14) Bobbin Latch Spring

(15) Bobbin Spring

(16) Stepper Spring

(17) Drive Hub Spring

(18) Cassette Holder Stop

(19) BOT-EOT Lamp Mounting

(20) BOT-EOT Sensor Tube

(21) Cassette Downstop

359,2-94

ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE PAGES

2-96

2-97

2-97

2-98

2-99

2-99

2-100

2-100

2-101

2-101

2-101

2-102

2-102

2-102

2-105

2-105

2-103

2-103

2-104

2-104

Drive Mechanism

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


DRIVE MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS

(1) Pulley and Shaft Endplay

(2) Pulley Alignment

(3) Belt ("O" Ring)

(4) Clutch

(5) Brake

(6) Motor Pulley

(7) Motor Drive Belt

3.

CASSETTE HOLDER ADJUSTMENTS

Cassette Holder

(1) Requirement

With a standard cassette latched in position, there should be equal clearance

(as gauged by eye) between both sides of the cassette and the cassette holder.

(2) Requirement

Endplay between the cassette holder and the pivot screws

Min Some---Max Q.010 inch.

To Adjust

With the locknuts friction tight, adjust pivot screws until the requirements are met. Tighten locknuts.

359, 2-95

ADJUSTMENT REFERENCE PAGES

2-106

2-106

2-106

2-107

2-107

2-108

2-108

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969'LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

E- ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION (Contd)

3. CASSETTE HOLDER ADJUSTMENTS (Cont)

Latch (Preliminary)

(1) Requirement

With a standard cassette in place and the cassette latched, the clearance between the cassette holder and the stop post should be

Min 0.005 inch---Max 0.015 inch.

(2) Requirement

With a standard cassette in place and the cassette holder latched, the clearance between any point and the latch should be

Max 0.012 inch.

To Adjust

With the rear locknuts loosened, adjust the two front stoop nuts equally (preliminary) until the requirement is met.

Tighten locknuts.

Latch(Final)

(1) Requirement

With a standard cassette placed

(wrong side out) in the cassette holder and the cassette holder rotated until the latch is resting on the cassette, clearance between the cassette and either end of the latch should be

Min Some---Max 0.015 inch.

(2) Requirement

The two switch actuators should be centered with their respective hole or slot, as gauged by eye.

(3) Requirement

With the cassette removed, the write inhibit switch actuator should clear the cassette holder when it is moved in and out.

To Adjust

Maintain front locknuts position, loosen the rear locknuts, position the latch and switch to meet the requirements. Tighten locknuts.

NOTE: Recheck PRELIMINARY LATCH adjustment. Refine if necessary.

359, 2-96

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Latch Stop Screw

(Rear)

Requirement

With the latch raised to its uppermost position, there should be clearance between the latch and a standard cassette of

Min 0.030 inch-Max 0.075 inch.

To Adjust

With locknut loose, position rear stop screw until the requirement is met. Tighten locknut.

Latch Stop Screw

(Front)

(1) Requirement

As the cassette holder with a standard cassette installed is pivoting toward the latched position, the cassette should strike the latch and cam the latch upward.

(2) Requirement

In the latched position, the latch should rest on the cassette and there should be clearance between the front stop screw and the latch bracket of

Min Some-Max 0.005 inch.

To Adjust

With the locknut loose, position the front stop screw until the requirement is met. Tighten locknut.

NOTE: Requirements (1) and (2) have to be checked with cassette spring holding cassette in place against the rear of the cassette holder.

359, 2-97

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3.

CASSETTE HOLDER ADJUSTMENTS (Contd)

Switch Height

(1) Requirement

As a standard cassette (right side out) is loaded and unloaded into position, the two switches should operate at approximately the same time.

To Check

Operation may be determined by the audible "click" of switches or by use of a continuity checking device, on terminals

7 and 8, ("Write Inhibit" switch) and terminals 1 and 2 ("Cassette in Place" switch) to indicate contact closure.

(2) Requirement

There should be some over travel left on the two switch actuators.

To Check

Check for some clearance between the switch actuator and the cassette, without bottoming the actuator against the switch.

To Adjust

With the switch mounting screws friction tight, position the hinge plate until the requirements are met. Tighten mounting screws.

NOTE:

LATCH

Power must be removed from unit when this measurement is taken. Recheck adjustment, refine if necessary.

359, 2-98

Tape Cleaner

(1) Requirement

With a standard cassette in the loaded position, the magnetic tape should be in contact with the cleaning fabric.

(2) Requirement

There should be

Min Some---Max 0.030 inch clearance between cassette and bobbin on the side with least clearance.

(3) Requirement

The bobbin should step at least every second time the cassette is inserted.

To Adjust

With the locknut friction tight, position the bobbin vertically to meet the requirement. Tighten locknut.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Run Lamp Mounting

Requirement

The tip of the run lamp should be

Min Flush---Max 0.015 inch under flush with the top surface of the latch bracket.

To Adjust

With the locknut loose, position the lamp. Tighten the locknut.

359, 2-99

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3.

CASSETTE HOLDER ADJUST (Contd)

Head Adjustment

(1) Requirement

With the cassette holder biased rearward against the stop post, recording head assembly should rest on the locating posts and should be centered with equal clearance, as gauged by eye, between the locating posts.

(2) Requirement

The recording head assembly should not bind on the locating pins when cassette holder is pivoted outward. Check that the end play between the cassette holder and pivot screws is taken up, first to the left and then to the right.

To Adjust

With the cassette holder biased rearward against the stop post and the mounting screws friction tight, slide recording head assembly against locating posts and the clearance on both sides should be equal. Tighten mounting screws.

Plate With Cassette Holder

Requirement

With a standard cassette loaded in its latched position, the radial distance between the drive hub (less driving teeth) and the cassette case should be equal, as gauged by eye. Check requirement on both hubs.

To Adjust

With the mounting screws friction tight, position plate with stop to meet this requirement. Tighten mounting screws.

NOTE: The flat portion of the driving teeth of the drive hubs must drive the reel clockwise on the left (rewind) shaft and counterclockwise on the right

(wind) shaft.

359, 100

Cassette Latch Spring

Requirement

With a standard cassette in the latched position, it should take

Min 7 ounces---Max 10 ounces to start spring moving from the installed length.

NOTE:

If spring does not meet requirement, it should be replaced.

Sensing Bail Spring

Requirement

With a standard cassette in the latched position, it should take

Min 5 ounces---Max 8 ounces to start spring moving from the installed length.

NOTE: If spring does not meet requirement, it should be replaced.

Cassette Pressure Spring

Requirement

With an unloaded cassette holder, the clearance between the tip of the pressure spring and the cassette holder should be

Min 5/16 inch---Max 3/8 inch.

To Adjust

Bend spring to meet requirement.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


359, 2-101

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3.

CASSETTE HOLDER ADJUSTMENTS (Contd)

Cassette Holder Pressure Spring

Requirement

With the cassette holder in the unlatched position, the distance between the outside edge of the upper form of the spring and the plate with stop should be

Min 5/16 inch---Max 3/8 inch.

To Adjust

Bend spring to meet this requirement.

Bobbin Latch Spring

Requirement

It should take

Min 10 grams---Max 20 grams to start latch moving.

To Adjust

Bend spring to meet his requirement.

NOTE: While checking, hand rotate ratchet wheel 1/2 tooth travel

.

Bobbin Spring

Requirement

The bobbin spring should bias the bobbin shoulder against the washer.

359, 2-102

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Cassette Holder Stop

Requirement

With cassette holder in unlatched (forward) position, rear side of head bracket should be in line with the tip of the NIB (as gauged by eye at cutout of head bracket).

To Adjust

With Locknut. friction tight, adjust stop screw until requirement is met. Tighten locknut.

BOT-EOT Lamp Mounting

(1) Requirement

With cassette holder in its rearmost position (against stop post), tip (of lamp should be

Min 3/16 inch---Max 5/16 inch from bottom of sensing tube.

(2) Requirement

Lamp should be in line with hole in underside of sensing tube, as gauged by eye. Lamp should be aimed for peak photo-cell output. (A minimum of

-200 millivolts.)

To Adjust

Loosen locknuts and mounting screw which secures lamp bracket to cassette holder. To meet requirement, adjust light source in the following sequence (to produce a minimum output of -200 millivolts between pins 4 and 10 (to 410764 BOT circuit card).

(a) Vertical (up and down) LOCKNU'

(b) Vertical Rotation

(c) Horizontal Position

(within mounting hole)

Tighten locknuts and mounting screws.

359, 2-103

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3. CASSETTE HOLDER ADJUSTMENTS (Contd)

BOT-EOT Sensor Tube

Requirement

With the cassette in the latched position, the clearance between the sensing tube driver and the plate with stop should be

Min: Touch without binding.

Max: Not to exceed 0.015 inch at the point of least clearance when the sensing tube is biased lightly to the rear to take up play.

To Adjust

Bend sensing bail as required to meet requirement.

Cassette Downstop

Requirement

With a cassette latched in place, the clearance between the cassette and the top of the washer should be

Min 0.005 inch---Max 0.020 inch on both sides.

To Adjust

With mounting screw friction tight, move washer up or down to meet requirement. Tighten mounting screw.

NOTE: The downstop washer on the right side should be adjusted in conjunction with the BOT-EOT LAMP

MOUNTING adjustment.

359, 2-104

Stepper Spring

Requirement

With the cassette removed, it should take

Min 2-1/2 ounces---Max 3-1/2 ounces to start spring moving at the installed length.

NOTE: If spring does not meet requirement, it should be replaced.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Drive Hub Spring -- Forward (Right)

Requirement

The drive hub should contact the special screw. It should require

Max 3-1/2 ounces to start drive hub moving rearward.

NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the special screw to check this requirement, however, the check is made with the drive hub at the normal rest position. If spring does not meet requirement, replace spring.

Drive Hub Yield Spring -- Reverse (Left)

(1) Requirement

Restrain the shaft from turning; it should require

Min 3-1/2 ounces---Max 7 ounces applied to the outer edge of the drive hub to start the hub moving counterclockwise.

(2) Requirement

When the drive hub is moved all the way to the rear and let snap forward, the drive hub should contact the special screw.

NOTE: If the spring does not meet the requirement, replace spring.

2-105

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION (Contd.)

4. DRIVE MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS

Pulley and Shaft Endplay

Requirement

There should be

Min Some---Max 0.002 inch perceptible endplay, as gauged by eye, on each shaft.

To Adjust

(a) Position each armature oin its shaft with two set screws loosened.

(b) Insert a 0.002 inch gauge between friction washer and armature.

(c) Apply enough rearward pressure on the drive hubs to force the steel washer against the nylon bushing and overcome any play between the

"E" ring and the shaft "E" ring groove.

(d) Tighten (very securely, both set screws for each assembly).

Pulley Alignment

Requirement

With lubrication holes upward, the front face of all three pulleys should be in line within

Max 0.020 inch as gauged against a straight edge.

(Bias idler pulley toward rear.)

To Adjust

With the rear clamp screw friction tight and the "O" ring removed, adjust the shafts with pulleys until the requirement is met. Tighten clamp screw.

Belt ("O" Ring)

Requirement

The gap in the reversing belt should be


To Adjust

With the idler pulley shaft friction tight, adjust up or down until the requirement is met. Tighten shaft nut.

2-106

Clutch

Requirement

With lubrication holes upward and each shaft biased toward the center, the air gap between the rotor and armature of each clutch should, at the point of least clearance, be


To Adjust

With the front clamp screw friction tight, and the 406131 0.012 inch gauge between the rotor and armature, slide front housing rearward until the requirement is met. Tighten clamp screw

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Requirement

With the armature biased toward the front (by means of pulling slightly on the drive hub), the air gap between the brake disc and the brake housing should, at the point of least clearance, be

Min 0.010 inch---Max 0.014 inch

(Forward Brake)

Min 0.008 inch---Max 0.014 inch

(Reverse Brake)

To Adjust

Loosen the two sets screws. Insert the 406131 0.012 inch gauge between the brake disc and the brake housing.

With the set screws over the mounting flats on the drive housing, slightly tighten the right set screw until friction tight. Adjust brake coil housing until the requirement is met. Tighten two set screws.

2-107

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. DRIVE MECHANISM ADJUSTMENTS (Contd.)

Motor Pulley

Requirement

The flat belt should be approximately centered on both the motor drive pulley and driven pulley.

To Adjust

With the set screw loose, position the drive pulley to meet the requirement.

Motor Drive Belt

(1) Requirement

With a force of 8 ounces applied perpendicular to the drive belt, approximately midway along its free length, the belt should deflect

Min 1/16 inch---Max 1/8 inch from a line tangent to both pulleys.

(2) Requirement

While the belt is motor driven

(motor on), the belt should maintain its center position on the large pulley and should not walk to the edge of the pulley.

To Adjust

With the casting mounting screws friction tight, move casting, left or right with a slight pivot, to meet the requirements.

2-108

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Base Plate Height (Early Design Only - See Note)

(1) Requirement

The five posts and adjusting screws should support and maintain a level balance of the unit when removed from the cover base.

(2) Requirement

The distance between the tops of the adjusting screws and base plate should be Min 1-1/16 inch---Max 1-3/32 inch.

To Adjust

With the locknuts friction tight, adjust the four corner posts to meet the requirement. Tighten locknuts. With the aid of a flat surface, adjust the center post until the tip of the adjusting screw is parallel to the four outer posts. Tighten locknut..

NOTE: Early design 40CD102 were supplied with five posts and five adjusting screws. Later design units are supplied with screws replacing the posts and adjusting screws and do not require adjusting.

2-109

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5. 410764 CIRCUIT CARD ADJUSTMENT

Open Line Frequency

Requirement

The open line frequency of the 405681 TCI chip must be 50 kilohertz +1 kilohertz.

The adjustment must be accurate to within +.4 microseconds.

To Adjust

With dc power applied to the 410764 circuit card and the SSI signal line disconnected, adjust R22 to meet the above requirement.

NOTE 1: To adjust variable resistor (R22), connect oscilloscope common to board common (negative end of CI) and oscilloscope probe to the phase 1 clock output (either end of R13).

Set the scope:

X10 probe to 0.5 V per division

2 microseconds per division

Center the trace

Adjust R22 to obtain one complete cycle in 10 divisions.

NOTE 2: With the exception of this adjustment on the 410764 circuit card assembly, all other adjustments are related to the mechanical portion of the 40CD102.

2-110

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


6. CASSETTE DRIVE LUBRICATION

Lubricate the cassette drive Just prior to placing in service or before putting it in storage. The cassette drive should be relubricated after it has been in service a few weeks. Thereafter, relubricate every 2000 hours of running time or 6 months, whichever occurs first.

Apply lubricants to points as indicated.

On small parts, a minimum amount of lubricant should be applied, so that the lubricant remains on the parts and does not run off.

Excessive lubricant should be removed with a dry, lint-free cloth.

The following areas must be kept dry, free of all lubricant:

All electrical components, including terminals.

All parts normally touched by the operator, including exposed surfaces in the cassette holder area and all large flat areas..

Reading head.

Surfaces of the tape cleaner which contact the magnetic tape.

Friction surfaces of the magnetic clutches.

The following symbols indicate the quantity of lubricant to. be used on a specified area: Symbols 01, 02, 03, etc., refer to

1, 2, 3, etc., drops of oil. The following list of symbols applies to the lubrication instructions and the type of lubricant to be used:

O Oil (88970)

G Pack grease between nylon bushings (143484--one pound can or 145867 4-ounce tube)

D Keep dry, no lubricant permitted.

2-111

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


6. CASSETTE DRIVE LUBRICATION (Contd)

NOTE 1: These nylon bushings should be greased only when the unit is reassembled.

NOTE 2: These nylon bushings (4) and fiber friction washer (4) should be oiled (03 drops), whenever a nylon bushing or a friction washer is replaced.

2-112

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2-113

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS

1. REMOVAL AlD REPLACEMENT OF UPPER CABINET ASSEMBLY

To remove cover.

2-114

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


(5) Lay cassette drive on its side for access to the underside of drive.

(7) Holding the base and cover firmly together, return the cassette drive to its upright position.

(8) Remove the cover from the base with cassette drive by lifting the cover straight up.

To replace the cover, reverse the removal procedure.

WARNING: DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN THE SIX 408584 CAPTIVE SCREWS WHICH MOUNT THE COVER.

2-115

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS (Contd)

2. SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION

3. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY DRIVE

40CD102 Cassette Drive (From Cabinet Base)

To install cassette drive with base plate, reverse removal procedures. Before sliding cassette drive rearward, screws must be centered in circular holes located under power supply and motor.

2-116

406101 Power Supply

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


To install power supply, reverse procedures.

403303 Motor Assembly

To install motor, reverse procedures.

2-117

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY DRIVE (Contd.)

403300 Dive Belt

To install drive belt, reverse procedures. Recheck Motor Drive Belt and Motor Pulley adjustments (2-108).

410764 Logic Circuit Card

2-118

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


To install 410764 logic circuit card, reverse removal procedures. Circuit card must be installed with component sidetoward baseplate. -Projections or 403586 plastic studs must secure circuit board. The tape head connector must be assembled to the tape head so that the identification mark is to the right as viewed from the front of the cassette drive.

143307 Fuse

To install fuse, reverse removal procedures.

NOTE: Replace with 143307 0.6 amp Slow-Blow fuse.

2-119

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEMBY/REASSEMBY AND PARTS (Contd)

3. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY DRIVE (Contd)

410043 Power Supply Circuit Card

To install circuit card, reverse procedures. Cover lower portion of fuse holder with suitable heat shrink tubing after black leads are soldered in place. Secure cable assembly to power supply circuit board with two RM43679 cable ties.

406103 Transformer

To install 406103 transformer, reverse removal procedures. Cover lower portion of fuse holder with suitable heat shrink tubing after leads are soldered in place. Secure cable assembly to power supply circuit board with two RM43679 cable ties.

2-120

403289 "0" Ring Belt'

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST 140 SHOP MANUAL 359

To install, reverse procedures. Recheck Belt ("O" Ring) adjustment (2-106).

4. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SSI/AC INTERFACE

2-121

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY SSI/AC INTERFACE (Contd)

410300 Circuit Card

•

Remove upper cabinet assembly (2-114)'.

•

Remove SSI/AC interface from cabinet

assembly (2-121).

•

Remove rear enclosure assembly from (

interface assembly (2-128).

To install a new 410300 circuit card, reverse removal procedure.

408590 Filter Assembly Removal

•

Remove upper cabinet assembly (2-114).

•

Remove SSI/AC interface assembly (2-121).

•

Remove rear enclosure assembly from interface assembly (2-128).

•

Remove 410300 SSI from circuit card (2-129).

To install new 408590 filter assembly, reverse removal procedure.

2-122

408607 AC Filter Assembly Removal

•

Remove upper cabinet assembly (2-114)

•

Remove SSI/AC interface assembly from

upper cabinet assembly (2-114).

•

Remove Rear enclosure assembly from


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


To install the ac filter assembly, reverse the removal procedure. When resoldering leads to line side of filter, solder black lead to terminal 5 and white lead to terminal 4. Leads should be covered with heat shrink tubing after soldering.

2-123

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



408594 Circuit Breaker Removal


Remove rear enclosure assembly from


To install a new 408594 circuit breaker, reverse removal procedure. When connecting the black leads, proceed as indicated below.

When mounting circuit breaker in rear enclosure, orientate circuit breaker so that keyway is pointing toward small hole next to circuit breaker mounting hole.

2-124

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


408591 SSI Cable Assembly Removal

•


•

Remove rear enclosure assembly from the interface assembly (2-128).

To install SSI cable assembly, reverse removal procedure.

408592 AC Cable Assembly Removal

•

Remove the upper cabinet assembly (2-114).

•

Remove the rear enclosure assembly from the interface assembly (2-128).

2-125

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



To install the 408592 ac cable assembly, reverse the removal procedure. When connecting the black leads to the circuit breaker, proceed as indicated below:

(3) When connecting the white and black leads to the ac filter assembly, solder the black lead from circuit breaker to terminal 5 of the ac filter assembly. Solder the white lead from terminal A of J601 connector to terminal 4 of the ac filter assembly. The leads: , should be covered with heat shrink tubing after soldering.

2-126

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Drive Mechanism

•

Remove cassette drive with base from lower cabinet.

•

Remove 403300 drive belt.

2-127

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



To install cassette holder assembly, reverse removal procedure. The tape head connector must be assembled to the tape head so that the identification mark is to the right as viewed from the front of the cassette drive.

Recheck adjustments:

Cassette Holder Page 2-95 and BOT-EOT Sensor Tube Page 2-104 and BOT-EOT Lamp

Mounting Page 2-103.

Front Plate Assembly

•


•

Remove drive mechanism from base.

•

Remove cassette holder assembly.

2-128

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


To install drive mechanism, reverse removal. procedures. The tape head connector must be assembled to the tape head so that the identification mark is to the right as viewed from the front of the cassette drive. If plastic strap was cut, secure cabling to left rear of casting with a new plastic strap or lacing twine. Recheck Motor Drive Belt and Motor Pulley

adjustments (2-108).

Cassette Holder Assembly

• Remove cassette drive with base from lower cabinet.

• Remove drive mechanism.

2-129

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



(2) Remove two 153799 screw and 110743 lockwasher and

403291 cassette holder pressure spring.

(3) Carefully route cable through casting.

(4) Remove front plate assembly.

To install the front plate, reverse removal procedure.

Check Plate With Cassette Holder adjustment Page 2-100.

Brake Assembly

•


•


•


•

Remove front plate assembly.

2-130

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


To install a brake assembly, reverse the, removal procedure. Refer to WDP 0501 for connections to P4B connector.

Check adjustment, Clutch, Page 2-107 and Brake, Page 2-107.

Armature Assembly

•


•


•


•


2-131

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



To install armature assembly, reverse the removal procedure.

Check adjustments: Pulley and Shaft End Play Page 2-106.

NOTE: Armature assemblies with clutch assemblies should be replaced as mated pairs.

2-132

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Clutch Assembly

•


•


•


•


NOTE 1: Clutch assemblies with armature assemblies should be replaced as mated pairs.

2-133

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



To install clutch assembly, reverse the removal procedure. Refer to WDP 0501 for connections to P4B. Check

adjustments: Clutch Shaft End Play Page 2-106 Pulley Alignment Page 2-106 and Clutch Gap, Page 2-107.

2-134

5. PARTS

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MANUAL 359,

2-135

5. PARTS (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS (Contd)

Power Supply Assembly

2-136

TM 11-5815"06-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Casting Assembly

2-137

5. PARTS (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


Front Plate Assembly

2-138

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Cassette Holder Assembly

2-139

5. PARTS (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


40CAB102- Upper Cabinet Assembly

2-140

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40CAB102 - Lower Base Assembly

2-141

5. PARTS (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSENBLY AND PARTS (Contd)

Chassis Assembly of 408598 SSI/AC Interface Assembly

2-142

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


408597 Rear Enclosure Assembly of the 408598 SSI/AC Interface Assembly

2-143

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2191

76474

92115

92260

92527

93001

97799

98642

103305

107116

110434

2415

2669

3598

3599

3606

7002

34432

41382

45815

49056

60458

72509

119654

121244

125015

128357

130663

143307

151354

151442

151621

151622

151630

5. PARTS (Contd)

PART NO.

1274

110743

111537

111640

112485

112626

112630

116783

119649

119652

DESCRIPTION AND PAGE NO.

Screw, 6-40 x 1-1/8 FIL

135

Lockwasher 135, 136, 138,

139

Spring 139

Lockwasher 137

Nut, 6-40 Hex 135, 136, 138

Nut, 4-40 Hex 138

Nut, 6-40 Hex 139, 142

Washer, Flat 139, 142

Washer, Flat 137

Spring 138

Lockwasher 137

Screw, 10-32 x 7/8 Hex 137

Gasket 140

Lockwasher 136

Nut, 10-32 Hex 138, 139

Setscrew, 8-32 135

Lockwasher 136, 142

Lockwasher 135

Washer, Flat 137

Screw, 6-40 x 9/64 Flat 142

Lockwasher 136

Washer, Flat 137

Lockwasher 139, 140

Screw, 4-40 x 3/16 FIL

135, 138, 139

Lockwasher 135, 138, 143

Post 135

Screw, 2-56 x 7/32 FIL 137

Screw, 6-32 x 1/4 FIL 142

Nut, 10-32 Hex 137

Spring 138

Holder, Fuse 136

Ring, Retaining 138, 139,

140


141

Ring, Retaining 137

Clamp, 1/4 ID Cable 126

Washer, Flat 139

Ring, Retaining 140

Lockwasher 137

Fuse, .6 AMP 136

Screw, 2-56 x 15/32 FIL

138

Screw, 6-40 x 1/2 Hex 136

Screw, 6-32 x 3/4 RD 135

Nut, 6-32 SQ 135

Screw, 6-40 x 1/4 Hex 135,

136

PART NO.

151631

152441

152893

153441

153537

153799

153817

180595

181240

181241

181242

181424

182523

184056

184057

184058

192226

198670

312918

324142

327444

333147

336027

342121

401191

401194

401195

401204

401239

401269

401288

401301

401302

402095

402271

402274

402275

403224

403225

403231

DESCRIPTION AND PACE NO.

Screw, 6-40 x 5/16 Hex 135

Washer, Flat 137

Screw, 4-40 x 1/4 Hex 143

Screw, 10-32 x 7/16 Hex 137

Screw, 6-40 x 9/32 Hex 138

Screw, 4-40 x 21/64 Hex 138

Screw, 4-40 x 3/8 Hex 138

Setscrew, 4-40 137

Screw w/Lockwasher, 6-40 x

3/16 Hex 140


1/4 Hex 136, 142


5/16 Hex 143

Nut, 6-40 SQ 136

Clamp, 1-38 in ID Mounting

136


1/4 Hex 136


3/8 Hex 136


7/16 Hex 136-

Bracket, Capacitor Mounting

135


5/16 Hex 136

Strap 138

Connector, 3 PT Plug 143

Capacitor, 2 MFD 142

Jumper, 1-3/4 in Braided

140


Motor 135

Panel, End 140

Band, Trim 140

Clip 140

Bumper 141

Screw, 8-18 SPL 140

Washer, Spring 140

Handle 140

Plate 140

Plate 140

Receptacle 43

Clutch Assembly 137

Hub, Right Drive 137

Hub, Left Drive 137

Plate w/Stop 138

Post 138

Bracket 138

2-144

PART NO.

403271

403272

403273

403274

403275

403276

403277

403278

403279

403280

403281

403282

403283

403284

403232

403233

403234

403235

403236

403237

403238

403239

403240

403241

403243

403252

403270

403286

403289

403290

403291

403296

403297

403298

403299

403300

403301

403302

403304

403305

403580

403586


Bail, Sensor 138

Shaft 138

Holder, Cassette 139

Screw, 10-32 Pilot 138

Bracket 139

Post, Bobbin 139

Bobbin w/Tape 139

Spring, Compression 139

Bearing, Retaining 139

Head Assembly 139

Latch, Feed 139

Tube, Sensing 138

Casting 137

Stud 137

Bearing 137

Pulley 137

Coil 137

Rotor 137

Shaft 137

Housing 137

Shaft 137

Housing 137

Pulley 137

Pulley 137

Clamp 137

Housing 137

Shaft, Drive 137

Screw, 4-40 Spl 137

Ring, 0 137

Spring 137

Spring, Flat 138

Brake 137

Plate 135, 136

Strap, Mounting 135

Driver 135

Belt, Drive 137

Cover 135

Fan, Motor 135

Capacitor, 8MF 135

Driver 135

Cassette 139

Support, Circuit Card 135

406124

406125

406133

407015

407070

408583

408584

408585

408586

408588

408590

408591

408592

408594

408595

408597

403616

403937

403939

405699

405785

406102

406103

406111

406113

406114

406119

406121

406123

408598

408599

408600

408606

408607

408613

408963

408964

408965

408967

408971

410043

410300

410764

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART NO.

DESCRIPTION AND PACE NO.

Post 142

Shaft 140

Screw, 8-32 Spl 141

Cable Assembly 135

Cable Assembly 143

Bracket 136

Transformer 136

Switch 138

Bracket 138

Plate, Nut 138

Actuator 138

Lamp w/Terminals 138, 139

Cable Assembly 138, 139

Armature 137

Blade 138

Shaft 137

Adhesive 140

Spacer 140

Base 141

Screw, 6-40 Shoulder 141

Bracket 142

Cabinet 140

Plate 142

Filter Assembly 142

Cable Assembly 143

Cable Assembly 143

Breaker, Circuit 142

Enclosure, Rear 143

Enclosure Assembly, Rear

143

Interface Assembly 142

Door w/Hinge 140

Cable Assembly 143

Filter 142

Filter Assembly 142

Base Assembly 141

Latch 140

Plate, Trim 140

Lens 140

Adhesive 140

Standoff 141

Card, Circuit 136

Card, Circuit 142

Card, Circuit 135

2-145

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART 4 - TEMPEST MODEL 40 DISPLAY MONITOR 40MN202/RA

4-1

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

PART 4 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 DISPLAY MONITOR 40MN202/RA

A. GENERAL

1. DESCRIPTION

The function of the Tempest Model 40 Display Monitor (standard Teletype Tempest treated) is to provide a visual display on a cathode ray tube of the data stored by the Tempest Model 40 display logic. Characters are displayed in dot pattern form within a matrix of 720 horizontal dots by-336 vertical dots, over an area 11-1/4 inches wide by 5-1/4 inches high, centered on the CRT face. Adjustments are provided within the monitor for horizontal size and linearity, brightness, focus and centering. Operator controls include a power (ON-OFF) switch, brightness control, and tube tilt to minimize reflected glare. Indicator lamps are provided within the monitor for use in checking operation of major subsystems.

Under control of the display logic, the monitor is capable of displaying characters, singly or in groups, at half intensity.

The ac power is routed to the display monitor via a connector in the left support leg. Logic signals are routed to the display monitor via a cable through an opening in the rear of the housing assembly.

Refer to Page 4-65, 5. REFERENCE MATERIAL for a general circuit description with block diagram and for further

details of the major components functions.

The display monitor is designed for operation with a supply voltage of 115 V ac (+10 percent) at 60 or 50 Hz. Operating power is 115 watts and heat generation is 400 BTU/Hr.

2. TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT, AND MISCELLANEOUS

Tools

The tools listed below are supplementary to common types such as pliers, screwdrivers, etc, and may be procured locally or ordered from Teletype Corporation.

NOTE: When ordering replaceable components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with the letters

"TP" (ie, TP410055).

Description Part No.

• Pull Spring Hook





• Adjusting Tool

• Scale, 6 Inch L. S. Starrett No. 338 or equivalent

(procure locally)

• Soldering Iron, Weller Model W-MCP-750 with MP2C Tip, or equivalent (procure locally)

• Desoldering Tool, EDSYN Model MMS005 Soldapullt ® , or equivalent (procure locally)

75765

89954

89955

125752

182697

405992

4-2

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Test Equipment

The following equipment or equivalent is required for testing, troubleshooting, and adjusting the display monitor.

• Volt-Ohm-Milliameter, Triplett Model 630 APL

•· Digital Multimeter, Fluke Model 8100A

• Oscilloscope, Tektronix Model 7904 e/w:

2 - - 7A16A Single Trace Amplifiers

1 - - 7B70 Time Base Unit

• High Voltage DC Breakdown Tester, Slaughter Co. Model 108-2.5MW

• Tempest Model 40 KD Set, Full Edit or

• Display Monitor Test Set -- CP10.010.000

Supplied by: Teletype Corporation

Custom Product Division

5555 Touhy Avenue


(312) 982-2499

Miscellaneous

The following items should be procured locally:

• Glyptol® , General Electric, Type 1201, Red

• Brush, 1/2 Inch Soft-Bristle

• Thermal Joint Compound

B. SHOP PROCEDURES

1. GENERAL

This section details the cleaning, refinishing, and inspection procedures to be followed prior to testing and troubleshooting the display monitor. In many cases, careful inspection will save later troubleshooting by revealing broken or loose connections, damaged components, possible short circuits, etc.

Refer to Page 4-76, F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS whenever detailed information on removing display

monitor components is required.


2. CLEANING

Immersion type cleaning is NOT recommended for the display monitor.


SCRATCH OR DAMAGE THE EXTERIOR PLASTIC SURFACES OF THE MONITOR HOUSING OR THE FACE OF

THE CATHODE RAY TUBE (CRT) OR CRT MASK.

Exterior

CAUTION: WEAR SAFETY GLASSES AND USE CARE IN HANDLING.

4-3

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

B. SHOP PROCEDURES (Cont)

2. CLEANING, Exterior (Cont)

(1) Remove housing (bottom latch).

(2) Set display monitor on the rear, display tube face up, and pull off bottom cover and support covers.

(3) Restore unit to its normal position.

Clean all indicated surfaces as follows: a. Wash with mild detergent solution b. Rinse with damp cloth c. Buff dry with soft cloth

Interior

CAUTION 1: WEAR SAFETY GCLASSES, AND BE

CAREFUL NOT TO STRIKE OR DAMAGE THE

FRAGILE NECK OF THE CRT.

Rotate heatsink back if necessary for easier access.

Clean chassis and components, particularly heatsink area, by lightly brushing with a clean dry 1/2 inch brush followed by air blowing.

CAUTION 2: THE AIR SUPPLY SHOULD NOT

EXCEED 20 PSI. HIGHER AIR PRESSURES MAY

DAMAGE SMALL COMPONENTS.

4-4

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3. INSPECTION

Interior

CAUTION: WEAR SAFETY GLASSES, AND BE CAREFUL AROUND SUCH FRAGILE AREAS AS THE DISPLAY

TUBE NECK, YOKE, AND SOCKET.

a.

Rotate heatsink to the rear and check the condition of wiring and components. Verify that various connectors are in place and fully seated.

b.

Check for the presence and proper connection of grounding straps.

Make sure these connections are tight.

c.

Check for the presence and legibility of all warning labels.

4-5

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. INSPECTION (Cont)

External a.

Examine the face of the display tube for chips, scratches, or severe discolorations.

b.

Check that housing, bottom plate and support bracket shields are not cracked, severely scratched, discolored, etc.

c.

Verify that all four studs associated with bottom plate are present and not broken or mutilated.

d.

Reinstall bottom plate and support bracket shields which were removed prior to cleaning.

Note the differences in the right and left support shields to accommodate the support bracket's hinge.

Mechanical Checks a.

Check tube tilt control for proper detenting throughout the entire range of tilt, so that the tube will remain positioned at any desired tilt angle in the range. Move adjusting lever to the right to disengage from rack teeth. Move lever forward or backward to obtain desired position.

Release lever to lock in place.

4-6

TM 11-5816-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300:1


b. With monitor housing removed, the monitor tilt release mechanism should latch to prevent monitor from tilting back on support brackets.

Check this feature by attempting to tilt monitor from the horizontal.

c.

Replace housing. Observe that housing latch operates to securely lock housing to monitor and that monitor is now capable of being tilted back on support brackets.

4. MARKING AND PACKING

Marking

For record keeping purposes, repair date may be marked on monitor chassis as shown.

4-7

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. MARKING AND PACKING (Cont)

Packing

Factory-type packing may be duplicated by ordering material shown below and applying as follows. PK designated items should be ordered from Teletype Corporation. The screws, washers, and lockwashers should be procured locally.

Qty

1

2

8

1

1

1

1

2

1

1

Materials Required



28381PK Wood Pallet

28364PK Corrugated Detail


28051PK Metal Spacers

27442PK Plastic Corners

27542PK Labels

23457PK Plastic Bag

28316PK Wood Frame

Qty

4

4

4

-

-

-

1

Materials Required

1/4-20 by 2 Inch RH Steel

Machine Screws

Steel Compression Lockwashers for

1/4 Inch Screws

Flat Iron Washers for 1/4 Inch

Screws


21632PKTape (as required)

21298PK Tissue Paper (as required)

28263PK Corrugated Detail a.

Preassemble all parts to bottom of main frame. Mount assembly to a 28381PK pallet with two 28051PK spacers, four 1/4-20 by 2 inch right-hand steel machine screws, four steel compression lockwashers for 1/4-inch screws and four flat iron washers for 1/4-inch screws. Tighten screws securely.

b.

Complete assembly of monitor with cover removed. Invert monitor.

c.

Secure each of the two support covers in place with a strip of 21632PK tape. Return unit to an upright position.

d.

Carefully disconnect CRT cable. Tape the video cable to inside of left frame with 21632PK tape.

e.

Mount one 28316PK wood frame support to the two side frames at the top of unit. The side frames must fit inside the slots of the wood detail. The cut out portion of the wood detail must be facing in the direction of the front face of the tube. Move detail to rear so it is positioned just in front of the round projections on frames.

f.

Tape the wood frame support tightly in position on the frames with three complete bands of 21632PK tape over the front and rear of the support and the underside of the monitor.

g.

Mount cover and latch securely.

h.

Release monitor and bottom plate assembly to the packing area.

i.

Form a 10603PK carton. Close and seal bottom flaps with a strip of 21719PK tape applied along the center seam. The tape should extend approximately three inches down the ends of the carton.

j.

Place unit in carton. Place a 23457PK plastic bag around unit.

k.

Form a 28365PK detail and place in carton at front of unit as illustrated.

l.

Wrap the bottom plate assembly in a sheet of 21298PK tissue paper. Form a 28364PK detail and secure the wrapped bottom plate to the detail with two bands of 21632PK tape.

m. Position the detail and bottom plate in the carton.

n.

Close and seal the top flaps of the carton as outlined in operation 9.

o.

Moisten and apply a 27542PK label to upper left-hand portion of top of carton.

4-8

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


p.

Form a 11322PK carton and with bottom flaps down and outward, place around the inner carton.

q.

Position a 27442PK plastic corner on each of the four corners of the inner carton.

r.

Close and seal the top flaps of the carton with 21719PK tape as outlined in operation 9.

s.

Moisten and apply a 27542PK label to upper left-hand portion of top of carton.

t.

Carefully invert carton and contents. Position a 27442PK plastic corner on each of the four corners of the inner carton.

u.

Close and seal bottom flaps of carton as outlined in operation 9. Invert carton.

NOTE: If tilt lever is equipped with 406152 latch spring (late design), 28263PK detail is not required. Move lever to front detent position and latch will engage when monitor bottom plate is removed.

4-9

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

B. SHOP PROCDURES (Cont)

4. MARKING AND PACKING, Packing (Cont)

4-10

NOTE: 23457PK plastic bag deleted for clarity.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5. CRT DISPOSAL

Because cathode ray tubes are highly evacuated the glass shell may collapse if dropped, scratched, or struck sharply.

The sudden inrush of air displacing the vacuum may exert sufficient force to dangerously propel shattered glass. To eliminate this accidental possibility, air must be allowed to enter the tube under controlled conditions prior to disposal of defective or worn out CRT tubes. Once the air pressure is equalized, standard glass disposal methods can be followed.

Either of the methods illustrated can be used to allow air into the tube.

DANGER: ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES (PREFERABLY SAFETY GOGGLES OR GLASSES WITH SIDE

SHIELDS) WHEN HANDLING OR WORKING IN THE AREA OF EXPOSED CATHODE RAY TUBES.

WEAR LEATHER GLOVES WHEN HANDLING EXPOSED CRT.

EXTREME CAUTION MUST BE OBSERVED TO AVOID CONTACT BETWEEN SKIN ABRASIONS OR OPEN

WOUNDS AND BROKEN FRAGMENTS OF THE CRT.

IF A CUT IS RECEIVED FROM CRT GLASS OBTAIN IRDICAL TREATMENT IMMEDIATELY.

DO NOT PICK UP THE TUBE BY ITS NECK. CARRY TIE TUBE WITH BOTH HANDS NEAR ITS

FACE. DO NOT TOUCH THE ANODE TERMINAL (RING SHAPED) ON SIDE OF TUBE.

4-11

5. CRT DISPOSAL (Cont)

Method 1:

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


Method 2:

4-12

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING

1. GENERAL

Functional testing of the display monitor is accomplished with the use of a full edit Tempest Model 40 KD Set or Display

Monitor Test Set.

Functional testing provides a means for verifying operational requirements of the display monitor unit. The test procedure should be performed from start to finish without omissions. Possible causes of trouble are listed with the tests to provide aid in correcting the trouble.

Whenever the display monitor fails a particular test, refer to D. TROUBLESHOOTING to locate the trouble. After the trouble has been corrected, repeat the test that disclosed the trouble and if found satisfactory, resume testing from that point.

CAUTION: TURN OFF ALL AC POWER AND SIGNAL SOURCES WHEN INSTALLING THE DISPLAY MONITOR ON

THE TEST SET OR WHEN REMOVING IT. SIMILARLY, TURN OFF ALL POWER AND SIGNAL SOURCES WHEN

REMOVING OR REPLACING COMPONENTS.

4-13

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

NOTES

4-14

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2. HIGH VOLTAGE BREAKDOWN TEST

Resistance Checks

These checks are to be made prior to connecting power to unit and prior to breakdown test. Remove monitor housing and place unit as shown.

Using digital multimeter, select (R X 1) scale and clip common lead (black) to chassis at a convenient point.

Touch pin 5 of P702 with probe lead. The meter should read essentially zero ohms.

Select (R X 1 K) scale of multimeter. Operate monitor

ON/OFF switch to ON. Leave meter common lead on chassis and touch pin 8, and then pin 11 of P702. The multimeter should indicate infinite (

∞

) resistance at both pins. Any reading indicates a leak to ground in cabling or power distribution circuitry.

NOTE: If any of these tests fail DO NOT perform the high -voltage breakdown test. The trouble must be corrected first.

Proceed to D. TROUBLESHOOTING for the appropriate procedure to correct the trouble.

Precautions

CAUTION: EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN TESTING AS HIGH VOLTAGE IS PRESENT WHEN

POWER SWITCH IS ON. OPERATOR SHOULD OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING PRECAUTIONS.

a.

AVOID BODILY CONTACT WITH CHASSIS WHEN PROBING.

b.

PROBE ONLY THE POINTS SPECIFIED BY THIS SECTION.

4-15

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

C. TESTING (Cont)

2. HIGH VOLTAGE BREAKDCWN TEST (Cont)

Equipment Preparation

Verify that breakdown tester power switch is OFF and that probe tips are retracted.

Connect breakdown tester to 115 V ac power source.

Operate breakdown tester power switch to ON and adjust for 500 V output.

Extend both probe tips and touch together momentarily to verify that breakdown indicator is functioning.

Retract probe tips and proceed.

Breakdown Test Procedure

With the breakdown tester turned ON, set the breakdown voltage to O V dc.

Hold one extended probe tip of the breakdown tester on bottom of monitor chassis.

Use the other extended probe tip to touch pin 8. Increase the breakdown test set output voltage to 500 V dc and hold for one second. Repeat the procedure probing pin 11. The test set should NOT signal a breakdown.

If a breakdown failure occurs, refer to D., 2. HIGH VOLTAGE BREAKDOWN FAILURE for detailed troubleshooting methods. If the breakdown test was successful, operate display monitor power switch to OFF and proceed to 3.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS.

4-16

3. FUNCTIONAL TESTS

Preliminary

Check that 115 V ac power switch of KD set or display monitor test set, whichever used, is in the OFF position. The display monitor power switch should also be switched to OFF. Mount display monitor as shown, either on the KD set or on the circular base supplied with test set.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M/40 SHOP MANUAL 359, 4-17

Certain differences in the displayed information are present when using the display monitor test set in lieu of KD set for performing the functional tests.

Operating the TEST CHARACTER switch to ON, causes 24 lines of 80 test characters per line, or,

1920 test characters to be generated. These characters are displayed as white on a dark background and are rectangular with a central dot:

•

The CURSOR ON switch operated, produces a uniformly bright screen by illuminating all 1920 character positions (cursor in all character positions).

The HIGHLIGHT switch operated in conjunction with the CURSOR ON or TEST CHARACTER switch causes the display to alternate from full to half intensity at intervals of approximately one second.

Residual Images

Residual images on the display monitor screen shall be considered permissable subject to local. appearance standards so long as the images are not apparent when the monitor is in operation and are not objectionable in nature when the monitor is turned off. Refer to F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS for CRT replacement and B. SHOP

PROCEDURES for CRT disposal.

4-17

3. FUNCTIONAL TESTS, Preliminary (Cont)

1

TEST

NO.

PROCEDURE

Apply ac power to KD or test set. Turn ac switch on.

C. TESTING (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

RESPONSE POSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

Make sure P5 in front of power distribution assembly is connected and

405703 ac input cable and 403639 ac filter are connected.

ADDITIONAL

ANALYSIS

4-24, 1.a.

4-24, 1. b.

NOTE: All other test set switches should be OFF.

b. Filaments lit. (Do not check if CRT screen has raster or display.)

NOTE: To view filament, turn power off, remove CRT J17 connector, remove 402112 shield, replace J17 connector, and restore power.

c. Red drive lamp lit. (Do not check if CRT screen has raster or display. )

4-25, 1.c

NOTE: To view red drive lamp, turn power off and remove 405873 front enclosure from 402254 high voltage and video assembly. Connect P3 directly to J6 on

410545 circuit card by passing the 410547 filter assembly. Reconnect all other connectors and restore power.

4-18

TEST

NO.

2

3

PROCEDURE

Monitor ac power switch on.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESPONSE

POSSIBLE CAUSE OF

TROUBLE

ADDITIONAL

ANALYSIS

4-25, 2.c.

410853

4-25, 2.b.

410852

4-25, 2.a.

410546

4-26, 2.d.

NOTE: If all lamps remain extinguished.

a.

Raster clearly visible (not brilliant).

Check red pilot lamp.

Master Brightness

Adjustment

4-24, 1.a.

4-69

410545 b.

Cursor and segment marker present when using

KDP set.

410547 Regulator

Filter

4-26, 3.

Operator brightness to maximum intensity.

4-19

TEST

NO.

4

PROCEDURE

Generate the following test pattern on screen from the KD keyboard, or

RESPONSE a.

Characters well defined.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


POSSIBLE CAUSE OF

TROUBLE

Focus adjustment

ADDITIONAL

ANALYSIS

4-69

b.

Vertical size 5-1/4 inches ± 1/8 inch.

Vertical Size adjustment

4-70

Operate test set TEST CHARACTER switch

to ON. See Page 4-13, Preliminary for

discussion of test patterns.

c.

Equal character height.

Vertical Linearity adjustment

4-70

d.

Horizontal size.

Horizontal Size adjustment

4-70

4-20

TEST

NO.

4

(Cont)

PROCEDURE RESPONSE e. Equal character width.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


POSSIBLE CAUSE OF

TROUBLE

Horizontal Linearity adjustment

ADDITIONAL

ANALYSIS

4-73

f.

Lines across display appear parallel to horizontal plane.

Yoke Orientation adjustment

4-74

g.

Test pattern centered.

Display Centering adjustment

4-74

5 Generate one line of highlighted characters or operate test set HIGHLIGHT

Characters shall alternate full to half intensity at approximately one second intervals as gauged by eye.

410545

4-21

4-28, 4

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


1.

GENERAL

This section provides necessary information for locating and clearing troubles encountered in testing the display monitor per C. TESTING. Proceed directly to the additional analysis of this section that is referenced in C. TESTING.

Troubleshooting of breakdown test failures are provided completely in 2. HIGH VOLTAGE BREAKDOWN FAILURE.

For other problems, 3. TROUBLE ISOLATION should always be consulted first. Proceed, when necessary, to the referenced in depth information of 4. DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS which contains voltage levels, oscilloscope waveforms, and step-by-step instructions required for circuit analysis.

Supplementary information such as circuit descriptions and block diagrams is provided in 5. REFERENCE MATERIAL.

The display monitor contains a number of circuit status lamps as an aid to locating trouble. The sketch details the location of these lamps.

To view the red drive lamp on the 410545 circuit card or the high voltage lamp on the 410546 circuit card, or to probe test points on these cards, it is necessary to remove the 405873 front en closure from 402254 high voltage and video assembly. See F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

AND PARTS for procedures. With the enclosure removed, connect P3 (from 410853 circuit card) directly to J6 on

410545 circuit card bypassing the 410547 filter assembly.

Reconnect all other connectors and restore power.

Resistance checks are to be made with the digital multimeter.

Signal waveforms and voltage levels indicated at the test points of the trouble analysis procedure are to be checked with the oscilloscope.

Refer to F, DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS for procedures.

4-22

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2.

HIGH VOLTAGE BREAKDOWN FAILURE

Select the (R X 1) scale of the digital multimeter and check resistance between P702(5) and chassis. If not zero ohms, check for a loose chassis connection or green wire broken off at P702(5). The P702(5) MUST have continuity to the chassis.

Unplug P902 leads from the top of the 403638 ac filter. Use the breakdown tester as in C. TESTING, holding one prod on the chassis. Use the other prod to probe P702 pins 8 and 11. If a failure occurs, check 405703 ac input cable.

If P902 checked satisfactorily, unplug J5 and P5. Use breakdown tester in C. TESTING, holding one prod on the chassis. Use the other prod and progressively probe J35, pins 5 through 12. If a failure occurs on any pin, remove

341795 power distribution assembly and examine components and wiring associated with the pin (see circuit). Also check for signs of arcing at J5. Replace any defective wiring or components.

If J5 checked satisfactory, repeat the above procedure on P5, pins 5 through 12. Carefully examine wiring associated with failure indication for signs of arcing. Note that certain P5 pins are connected together by wiring. Disconnect switch

PS3 and check separately if cabling appears in good order. Replace any defective wiring, 403638 ac filter, or components.

4-23

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


D. TROUBLESHOOTING (Cont)

3.

TROUBLE ISOLATION

CAUTION: TURN OFF ALL POWER OR SIGNAL SOURCES BEFORE DISCONNECTING OR CONNECTING

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS IN THE DISPLAY MONITOR.

a.

TROUBLE SYMPTOM

Red pilot lamp OFF.

TROUBLE ISOLATION

AND CORRECTION

Check fuse for continuity -- early design 341578 (1 .4A SL-

BL). Current design 341686 (1.5A SL-BL).

Fuse good, but pilot lamp not lit. Check 115 V ac ± 10% at connector P5 (10, 12).

DETAILED

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

4-67

b.

CRT filaments OFF.

NOTE: To view CRT filaments remove the 402112 shield.

No 115 V ac -- Replace 405703 cable assembly or 403639 ac filter assembly.

115 V ac OK -- Replace 341795 power distribution assembly.

Fuse continues to fail -- Replace:

! 410852 circuit card assembly,

410853 circuit card assembly,

402254 high voltage and video assembly,

Q1 and Q2 on heatsink.

Pilot lamp ON -- Power distribution assembly.

Disconnect J17 from CRT.

Check 5.4 V ac ±10% at connector

J17 (1, 8).

5.4 V ac OK -- Replace CRT.

No 5.4 V ac.

Remove power.

Disconnect P5.

Check continuity P5(1) to J17(8).

Check continuity P5(4) to J17(1).

Check continuity P20(1) and (2) to

J17(8) and (1).

No continuity -- Replace or repair 405863 cable assembly or

405861 rear cover assembly.

Continuity OK -- Replace 341795 power distribution assembly.

4-67

4-67

4-24

TROUBLE SYMPTOM

1.

(Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


TROUBLE ISOLATION

AND CORRECTION

Check Test Point 4 on 410545.

NOTE: To view red drive lamp, remove 405873 front enclosure from the 402254 high voltage and video assembly.

DETAILED

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

4-36

2.

Check Test Point 1 on 410852. Remove power and remove the 410852 card.

Apply power and check for 135 V ac ±10% at P1 (4, 5). If 135

V ac not present, replace 341795 power distribution assembly.

4-46 b.

Normal lamp OFF.


c.

Overvoltage lamp ON.


4-25

4-54

4-54

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.

TROUBLE ISOLATION (Cont)

TROUBLE SYMPTOM

2.

(Cont) d.

High voltage lamp OFF.

TROUBLE ISOLATION

AND CORRECTION


DETAILED

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

4-36

3.

a.

No display.

b. Bright horizontal line.

c.

Bright horizontal dashed line.

Normal lamp OFF -- 410853. Check 130 volt regulator.

Normal lamp ON -- 410853. High voltage lamp OFF --

410546. Check horizontal driver.

High voltage lamp ON -- 410546. Check connector P10,

405858 cable assembly, and 405859 high voltage plate assembly.

Decrease operator brightness. Depress Test Switch No. 3 on

410001 circuit card in KD test set display logic or switch test set test character ON. If horizontal line appears dashed, go to

3.c.

Check 65 volt regulator. 4-52

Check connector 34 and 410559 vertical deflection assembly.

Check vertical control.

Check for open C3 capacitor on 410852 rectifier assembly.

454

4-36

4-67

4-52

4-30

4-48

4-45

4-26

d.

TROUBLE SYMPTOM

3.

(Cont)

Raster, but no cursor or character.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Check dot amplifier.

TROUBLE ISOLATION

AND CORRECTION

DETAILED

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

4-39

e.

Rolling (vertical).

f.

No brightness control.

Check vertical control.

Check vertical receiver.

NOTE: Rectifier assembly can cause vertical rolling and linearity problems without failure of indicator lamps.

Check connector P13.

Check highlight amplifier.

4-48

4-38

4-45

4-31

4-42

g.

Expanded vertical.

Check 65 volt regulator.

4-51

h.

Expanded horizontal.

Overvoltage lamp ON -- 410853. Check 130 volt regulator.

4-54

4-27

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. TROUBLE ISOLATION (Cont)

TROUBLE SYMPTOM

3.

(Cont) i.

Reduced display.

TROUBLE ISOLATION

AND CORRECTION


DETAILED

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

4-48

j.

Dim vertical line.

4.

5,

No highlight.

Check connector P10, 405858 cable assembly, and 405859 high voltage plate assembly.

Replace 410546 circuit card.

4-31

Check highlight amplifier.

4-42


4-45

6.


4-45

4-28

TROUBLE SYMPTOM

7.

a.

Snowy, fuzzy display random flickering of dots.

f.

Entire display out of focus.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


TROUBLE ISOLATION

AND CORRECTION

Check highlight (R-13) b.

Blooming, oversize display.

c.

Gradual decrease in intensity over periods up to 1/2 hour.

d.

Entire display flickers brighter or dimmer randomly or for extended

Periods of time.

High voltage (410546)

Check CRT (402110)

Check CRT (402110) e.

Parts of characters dim or fading over entire or part of display.

Check CRT (402110)

Check focus adjustment

Check CRT (402110)

DETAILED

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

4-42

4-57

4-69

4-29

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS

NOTE:

The circled numbers on the schematic and pictorial diagrams designate the test points referenced in the associated troubleshooting sequences.

Actual Wiring Diagram

NOTE:

Transistors Q1, Q2 and Q3 are mounted on heatsink. Transistor Q4 is mounted on the rear enclosure of the

402254 high voltage and video assembly.

4-30

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-31

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.

DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS (Cont)

402117 CRT Cable Assembly

RUNNING LIST

24 AWG. TEFLON WIRE, VOLTAGE RATING 1000V

FROM

A1

A3

A4

A5

A8

A2

A7

COLOR

BROWN

RED

BLUE

GREEN

YELLOW

24 AWG. DOUBLE SHIELDED CABLE

BLACK

WHITE

TO

B2

B6

B5

B1

B7

B4

B3

4-32

402246 Video Cable Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


FROM

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A8

A9

A10

A11

A12

A13

7 TWISTED PAIR

26 AWG. 31194 RM

COLOR

ORANGE

WHITE-ORANGE

WHITE-YELLOW

WHITE-BROWN

GREEN

YELLOW

WHITE-GREEN

BLACK

SLATE

VIOLET

BLUE

BROWN

TO

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

NOTE 1:

Prepare for crimping (24 places).

NOTE 2:

Remove twisted pair, namely red and white/red.

NOTE 3:

In area (A) use 402097 male pins (12 places).

NOTE 4:

In area (B) cover terminals with suitable heat shrink tubing (12 places).

4-33

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.


410545 Horizontal Driver

Issue 6A

CR6

CR7

Q1

Q3

Q6

Q7

ML1

ML2

R4

R5

R39

R40

CR1

CR3

CR4

CR5

DS1

C13

C14

C16

C20

C21

C23

R1

R2

R3

REF

DESIGN

C1

C2

C3

C6

C9

C12

DESCRIPTION

0.1 MFD 25 W Vdc

.47 MFD 20 W Vdc

0.01 MFD 100 W Vdc

.220 MFD 200 W Vdc

.50 MFD 50 W Vdc

0.22 MFD 35 W Vdc

0.10 MFD 20 W Vdc

0.01 MFD 1.4 K Vdc

0.27 MFD 1 K Vdc

0.22 MFD 400 W Vdc

0.002 MFD 1 K Vdc

0.47 MFD 35 Vdc

.120 ohm

1000 ohm

4.7 K

220 ohm

470 ohm

200 ohm, pot.

1.3 M, .25 W

Diode 1N4148

Diode 1N4007

Diode

Diode, 1N4740 ZENER 10 V

Diode, LED

Diode, Damper

Transistor, 2N4275

Transistor, 2N3725

Transistor, Horz. Driver

Transistor, 2N3569

Integrated Circuit

Integrated Circuit

Bulb, NEON (Orange Dot)

318802

320276

406292

330642

197464

335880

430605

336019

341636

341539

335774

341638

341639

324656

339716

339002

341590

PART

NO

305821

310931

319999

335803

192711

300089

403016

336377

325035

341637

328794

323139

333405

321213

315959

4-34

9

J8

J11

R

R18

R19

R22

R23

R26

R27

R28

R29

R30

REF

DESIGN

R8

R9

R10

R13

R16

R17

R31

R34

J6

J7(1)

J7(2)

J7(3)

J7(4)

TI

DESCRIPTION

300 ohm, 20 W, 5%

600 ohm, 5 W, 5%

150 ohm

2.7 K

470 ohm, 1/2 W, 5%

4.7 ohm

270 ohm

22 meg

2.7 K, 1/2 W, 5%

1200 ohm, 15 W, 5%

330 ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

6.8 meg, 1/2 W

Variable 1 meg, 1/2 W

Variable 5 meg, 1/2 W

50 ohm, 15 W, 5%

25 ohm, 10 W', 5%

1.5 K

Guide, Connector

Connector, Pin .025

Plug, 15 Circuit

Terminal

Connector, 9 Pin Male

Plug, 3 Pin

Connector, Pin .025

Heat Sink, Snap On

Pad, Transistor Mounting

.027 Dia. Wire (Strap)

Lead, Elect. (Yellow)

Lead, Elect. (Green)

Lead, Elect. (Blue)

Lead, Elect. (Red)

Transformer

PART

NO.

341634

330640

315956

137602

341575

328784

324855

118144

341631

328785

147028

341567

341668

341635

315954

341751

341618

341645

341644

341700

341692

341618

341660

144495

39550RM

405877

405876

405875

405874

341521

410545 Horizontal Driver

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


REF

DESIGN

C1

C2

C12

C16

C17

C18

C20

C21

ML2

DESCRIPTION

0.1 MFD 25 W V dc

47 MFD 20 W V dc

0.22 MFD 35 W V dc

270 PFD 1000 W V dc

0.22 MFD 35 W V dc

100 MFD 10 W V dc

0.22 MFD 400 W V dc

0.002 MFD 1000 W V dc

Integrated Circuit

PART

NO.

305821

310931

300089

325035

300089

181665

341637

328794

315954

339002

118184

341636

341539

402282

341732

341732

341732

REF

DESIGN

R21

R22

R23

R24

R30

R31

R32

R33*

R34

R36

R38

R39

DESCRIPTION

470 ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

2.7 K, 1/2 W, 5%

1200 ohm; 15 W, 5%

6.8 ohm, 1/2 W, 5%

50 ohm, 15 W, 5%

25 ohm, 10 W, 5%

4.7 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

1 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

1.5 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

180 ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

120 K ohm, 1/2 W

120 K ohm, 1/2 W

PART

NO.

320276

118144

341631

177101

341635

341635

315959

321213

315954

328783

118184

118184 CR6

CR7

CR8

CR9

CR10

CR11

Diode, LED

Diode

Diode Network

Diode

Diode

Diode

Q6

Q7

Q4

Q4

F1

T1

Transistor

2N 3569

341639

324656

(Heatsink) Transistor 341570

(Heatsink) Transistor (See Note) 406306

No. 18 ga wire strap**

Transformer 341521

NOTE: Transistor Q4, 406306, can only be used with Issue 6A or later, 410545. circuit card. Transistor Q4, 341570, can be used with any issue of 410656 card.

*Deleted at Issue 4A.

4-35

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



4.

DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS. 410545 Horizontal Driver (Cont)

4-36

NOTE 1: If high voltage lamp remains extinguished with a good signal at Test Point 1, replace 410546 circuit card.

NOTE 2: Most failures isolated under Test Points 1 through 10 will result in no raster.

NOTE 3: The above waveforms may appear different in the new Issue 6A or higher 410545 circuit cards. It may be necessary to adjust the

R39 variable resistor for the correct waveforms.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-37

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.


410545 Vertical Receiver

4-38

410545 Dot Amplifier

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-39

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS, 410545 Dot Amplifier (Cont)

TEST

POINT

16

17

18

VOLTAGE OR WAVEFORM COMPONENT

ANALYSIS

No signal.

Test Point 20.

Replace Q3.

Signal good.

No characters.

Check J7 and

405861 rear cover assembly including

CRT cable.

Replace CRT.

No signal.

Check J9 and

410548 video interface receiver and video input cable.

Replace ML1.

19

20

No signal.

Replace respectively:

Q1

Q2

21 42 V dc No voltage.

Replace CR1.

NOTE 1: The signals above are developed by entering characters on the display.

NOTE 2: Failure here will result in no cursor or any characters.

4-40

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-41

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



4.


410545 Highlight Amplifier

TEST

POINT

22

VOLTAGE OR WAVEFORM

COMPONENT

ANALYSIS

No signal. Check J9, 410548 video interface receiver, and video input cable.

23

24

25

26

27

Test Points 23-26 look similar to Test Point 22 - changes indicated below.

Level 4.2 V dc Neg. Pulse.

Level .2 V dc-+5 V dc Pulse.

Level 0 V dc +3.5 V dc Pulse.

Level 10 V dc Neg. Pulse.

No signal. Replace ML1.

No signal. Replace Q4.

No signal. Replace ML2.

No signal. Replace Q5. Signal good. Check J7 and 405861 rear cover assembly. Replace 410546.

Replace CRT.

No signal. Check J8.

28 No signal. Replace CR2.

NOTE 1

: The signals shown are developed by placing 80 highlighted

*S on line one of display. The rest of display is blank and cursor is home. If monitor test set is used, turn HIGHLIGHT and TEST CHARACTER ON.

The signal at test point

22 will appear similar

NOTE 2

: Failure will result in no highlight or protected information.

CAUTION

: PROBE ONLY

DESIGNATED TEST POINT

AREAS ON THIS CIRCUIT

CARD AS DAMAGE TO

MONITOR OR TEST EQUIP-

MENT COULD RESULT.

29 10 V de No voltage. Replace CRS.

4-42

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-43

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSTS, 410545 Highlight Amplifier (Cont)

4-44

410852 Rectifier Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


REF

DESIGN

C1

C2

C3

C4

CR1*

CR2

CR3

CR4

CR5

CR6

DESCRIPTION

200 MFD 250 V

300 MFD 150 V

1000 MFD 75 V

0.01 MFD 1000 V

Bridge, 2A, 400 V

1N4004

Diode

Diode

Diode

Diode

PART

NO.

341504

341505

341506

341550

341503

312341

408307

408307

408307

408307

*Deleted at Issue 1B; replaced by CR3, CR4, CR5, and CR6.

REF

DESIGN

DS1

DS2

R1

R2

R3

R4

R5

DESCRIPTION

NEON, (Orange Dot)

NEON, (Green Dot)

39 K, 2 W

20 K, 1 W

10, 1 W

330 K, 1/4 W

82 K, 1/4 W

PART

NO.

341590

341589

341572

120211

178862

333415

333411

4-45

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.

DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS, 410852 Rectifier Assembly (Cont)

TEST

POINT

1

2

3

4

VOLTAGE OR WAVEFORM

190 V dc ±10%

90 V dc ±10%

55 V dc ±10%

COMPONENT

ANALYSIS

No voltage.

Replace CR1.

No voltage.

Check J1.

No voltage.

Check yoke.

Incorrect signal.

Replace CR2.

NOTE:

Troubles on this card will usually result in no display.

5

6

60 V dc ±10%

55 V dc ±10%

High voltage.

Replace DS1.

High voltage.

Replace DS2.

4-46

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-47

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



4.


410853 Vertical Control

TEST

POINT

1

VOLTAGE OR WAVEFORM

COMPONENT

ANALYSIS

Signal good.

No trouble here.

Horizontal dashed line.

Check Test Points 4 and 6.

Replace Q3 (Heatsink).

2

Rolling. Incorrect signal.

Problem on 410545. No signal. Check 410547 regulator filter circuit card assembly.

3

Rolling. Incorrect signal.

Replace CR15 or Q1.

4

5

6


Incorrect signal.

Replace Q2.

Reduced display.

Incorrect signal.

Replace Q3.


No signal.

Replace Q4.

4-48

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-49

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

D. TROUBLESHOOTING (Cont)

4. DETAILED TROUBLE AIALYSIS, 410853 Vertical Control (Cont)

R13

R14

R15

R16

R17

R33

R1

R2

R3

REF

DESIGN

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

R12

DESCRIPTION

1.5 K ohm, 5 W, 5%

15 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

51 ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

2.2 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

75 K ohm, 1/4 W, 1%

2.2 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

Resistor, Variable

1.5 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

1 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

Resistor, Variable

75 K ohm, 1/4 W, 1%

2.2 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

1.5 K ohm, 1 W, 5%

1 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

15 ohm, 2 W, 5%

1.5 K ohm, 1 W, 5%

2 K ohm, 2 W, 5%

PART

NO.

341551

333408

315947

315955

341592

315955

341666

315954

32i213

341665

341592

315955

341597

321213

332764

341597

321155

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

REF

DESIGN

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

DESCRIPTION

100 MFD 50 W V dc

2 MFD 200 W V dc

47 MFD 200 W V dc

0.01 MFD 1000 V

2 MFD 25 W V dc

2N3568

Transistor, UNIJ

2N3569

2N2218

Q3

RT1

CR15

(Heatsink) Transistor

Thermistor

Diode

4-50

PART

NO.

327668

341609

341617

341550

320290

315930

341511

324656

325083

341568

341606

300102

410853 -- 65 Volt Regulator

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


REF

DESIGN

R27

R28

R29

R30

R34

Q9

Q10

Q1

DESCRIPTION

18 K ohm, 1/2_W, 5%

68 K ohm, 1/4 W, 5%

28.7 K ohm, 1/2 W, 1%

4.02 K ohm, 1/4 W, 1%

27 K ohm, 2 W, 5%

2N3440

2N3440

(Heat Sink) Transistor

PART

NO.

118151

333410

341595

324900

341603

341508

341508

341569

REF

DESIGN

CR9

CR10

CR11

CR12

CR13

CR14

1N4004

1N5235 B

1N4004

1N4004

1N4007

1N5268 A

DESCRIPTION

C9

F1

4 MFD 150 W V dc

Fuse (0.5 Amp)

4-51

PART

NO.

312341

341510

312341

312341

335880

341571

341602

341752

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

D. TROUBLESHOOTING (Cont): -

4. DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS, 410853 -- 65 Volt Regulator (Cont)

TEST

POINT

7

VOLTAGE OR WAVEFORM

+65 V dc ±10Z

COMPONENT

ANALYSIS

Horizontal line.

Test Point 10 CR13.

8 90 V dc

9

10

11

12

13

14

65 V dc

65 V dc

82 V dc

6.8 V dc

8 V dc

65 V dc

No signal.

Check J2.

Horizontal line.

Replace Q1 (Heatsink).

Horizontal line.

Replace F1.

High voltage.

Replace CR14.

Expanded vertical.

Replace CR9, CR10.

No signal.

Replace R29.

Expanded vertical.

If high, replace Q9.

15

16

17

65 V dc

7.6 V dc

7.4 V dc

Horizontal line.

If zero, replace Q10.

No signal.

Replace CR11.

No signal.

Replace CR12.

NOTE: Components listed in Trouble Analysis column should be replaced if symptom specified exists.

4-52

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-53

4. DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS (Cont)

410853 -- 130 Volt Regulator

TEST POINT

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,


VOLTAGE OR WAVEFORM COMPONENT ANALYSIS

18 130 ±1.3 V dc

19 190 V dc

No display.

Replace CR8.

No signal.

Check connector J2.

20 130 V dc

21

22

190 V dc

6.8 V dc

No display.

Replace Q2 on heatsink.

No display.

Replace CR16.


Replace CR6, CR5.

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

8 V dc

130 V dc

130 V dc

130 V dc

7.8 V dc

7.6 V dc

55 V dc.

130 V dc

No signal.

Replace R24.


Replace Q6.

No display.

Replace Q5.

No display.

Replace CR7.

No signal.

Replace CR5.

No signal.

Replace CR4.

No signal.

Replace DS1.

No signal.

Replace DS2

NOTE: The components listed in Component Analysis column should be replaced if no signal is found at test point.

4-54

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MA.NUAL 359

4-55

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-00 10/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. DETAILED TROUBLIE ANALYSIS, 410853 -- 130 Volt Regulator (Cont)

C7

C8

C10

DS1

DS2

REF

DESIGN

R18

R20

R23

R24

R25

R26

R35

R36

DESCRIPTION

100 K

180 K

121 K, 1%

2 K,.1/2 W, Var.

7.15 K, 1%

56 K, 1 W

180 K

47 K

4 MFD 250 W V dc

0.01 MFD 1000 V

10 MFD 250 W V dc

NEON (Orange Dot)

NEON (Black Dot)

PART

NO.

321508

333412

341596

364l665

341594

118198

333412

318801

341600

341550

341601

341590

341591

Q5

Q6

Q2

REF

DESIGN

CR3

CR4

CR5

CR6

CR7

CR8

CR16

DESCRIPTION

1N4004

1N4004

1N4004

1N5235 B

1N4004

1N4007

1N4004

2N3440

2N3440

(Heatsink) Transistor

4-56

PART

NO.

3-12341

312341

312341

341510

312341

335880

312341

341508

341508

318822

410546 High Voltage Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 MANUAL 359

4-57

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



410559 Vertical Deflection Filter Circuit Card Assembly

4-58

410547 Regulator Filter Circuit Card Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-59

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



405861 Rear Cover Assembly

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

REF

DESIGN DESCRIPTION

0.1 MFD, 25 V DC

0.1 MFD, 25 V DC

200 PF, 1000 V DC

200 PF, 1000 V DC

22 PF, 1000 V DC

22 PF, 1OO000V DC

PART

NO.

305821

305821

325011

325011

325007

325007

REF

DESIGN

R1

R2

T1'

J1-J4

L1

L2

4-60

DESCRIPTION

1.5K Ohm 1/4 W

1.5K Ohm 1/4 W

Transformer Assem.

Vert. PV Receptacle

Ferrite Sleeve

Ferrite Sleeve

PART

NO.

315954

315954

403659

403611

343619

343619

405861 Rear Cover Assembly (Includes 410544)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-61

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-00910/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



410548 Video Interface Receiver

REF

DESIGN

R2

R3

R4

PR5

R6

R8

R9

R10

R11

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

C8

C9

C10

R1

DESCRIPTION

0.1 MFD

22 PF

0.1 MFD

0.001 MFD

0.01 MFD

0.1 MFD

0.1 MFD

10 MFD

47 MFD

0.002 MFD

1200 Ohm 1/4 W

1000 Ohm 1/4 W

100 Ohm 1/4 W

220 Ohm 1/4 W

220 Ohm 1/4 W

1200 Ohm 1/4 W

560 Ohm 1/4 W

220 Ohm 1/4 W

220 Ohm 1/4 W

220 Ohm 1/4 W

PART

NO.

305821

335801

305b21

328793

300057

305821

305821

137312

310931

328794

333405

321213

315948

318802

318802

333405

315951

318802

318802

318802

REF

DESIGN

T1

T2

Q1

Q2

Q3

CR1

CR2

CR3

ML1

R12

R13

R14

R15

R16

R17

R18

R19

R20

R21

R22

4-62

DESCRIPTION

560 Ohm 1/4 W

220 Ohm 1/4 W

220 Ohm 1/4 W

470 Ohm 1/4 W

1.2K Ohm 1/4 W

3.6K Ohm 1/4 W

820 Ohm 1/4 W

430 Ohm 1/4 W

2.2K Ohm 1/4 W

4.7K Ohm 1/4 W

4.7K Ohm 1/4 W

Transformer Assem.

Transformer

2N4410 Transistor

2N3646 Transistor

2N4275 Transistor

1N4178 Diode

1N4148 Diode

1N4148 Diode

I.C. Line Receiver

PART

NO.

315951

318802

318802

320276

315953

315958

315952

336697

315955

315959

315959

403659

403658

334133

325076

335774

197464

197464

197464

339716

410554 Filter Circuit Card Assembly

410548 Video Interface Receiver and 410554 Filter

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


REF

DESIGN

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

L1

L2

R1

R2

DESCRIPTION

Filter

Filter

Filter

Filter

Filter

Filter

R.F. Choke

R.F. Choke

120 Ohm 1/4 W

15 Ohm 1/4 W

PARTNO.

341872

341872

402087

402087

341872

341872

405849

405849

333405

335635

4-63


405859 High Voltage Plate Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


REF

DESIGN

C1, 2, 3-

C4, 5, 6

C7,8,9

C10,11

DESCRIPTION

0.001 MFD, 1K V

0.001 MFD, 1K V

Feed-Thru

500 PF, 1K V

500 PF, 1K V

PART

NO.

328793

338801

321157

325036

REF

DESIGN

L1, 2, 3

L7, 8

DESCRIPTION

R.F. Choke

R.F. Choke

R1, 2, 3 10K Ohm

PART

NO.

405849

405849

320275

4-64

5. REFERENCE MATERIAL

Major Component Function and Position

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-65

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5. RENCE MATERIAL (Cont)

General Circuit Description

Power

Ac power is applied to power distribution assembly through the left support leg of display monitor and through the ac line filter assembly. At this time the pilot lamp lights and half power is supplied to the CRT filaments. By turning on display monitor control, full ac power is supplied to power distribution assembly where voltage is stepped up and applied to rectifier assembly. Normal filament voltage is now provided for CRT.

The rectifier assembly provides two filtered dc voltages for use on regulator assembly, unregulated +65 V and unregulated +130 V. The two indicator lamps on the circuit card indicate the presence of both dc voltages.

The regulator assembly has two regulators which provide +130 V and +65 V to the interface/amplifier assembly. The norm lamp on the circuit card should be on indicating regulated 130 volt power.

The voltages needed to bias CRT are processed and controlled by the interface/ amplifier assembly. These voltages as well as the horizontal deflection current are generated by high voltage assembly.

The high voltage assembly also generates 17,000 V accelerating voltage for CRT. An indicator lamp on the circuit card indicates the presence of high voltage during normal operation.

Deflection

In order to form characters, numbers, or symbols on the CRT screen, the CRT electron beam must be positioned from up to down, and from left to right across screen in successive sweeps.

This is done by generating two independent ramps of current coupled to the deflection yoke vertical and horizontal coils.

One ramp of current is generated by the vertical sweep generator of the regulator assembly at a 60 Hz rate. The other ramp generated by the high voltage assembly sweeps the electron beam from left to right and back again at a 21,000 Hz rate.

Since horizontal rate is much faster than vertical rate, the electron beam will travel across the CRT screen 350 times during one vertical cycle, thereby, creating a uniform lighted area called the raster. Video signals from the display logic to CRT grid element turn the electron beam on or off at proper times during vertical raster deflection to accomplish writing of a character on display screen.

4-66

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Master Brightness

Requirement: After a 3 minute warmup, the raster (lighted rectangular background) shall be just visible (not brilliant) with operator brightness control turned full counterclockwise to maximum intensity.

To Adjust: Rotate operator brightness control full counterclockwise for maximum intensity. Rotate master brightness potentiometer clockwise for darker; counterclockwise for brighter.

Adjust for clearly visible raster.

Focus Adjustment

Requirement: The display characters shall be well defined.

To Adjust: Rotate focus potentiometer to position giving sharpest display characters. For 410545 Issue 6A and later, if focus is unobtainable and sharpest setting of potentiometer is at counterclockwise extreme, remove cover from high voltage and video assembly. Cut strap ST (DANGER: POWER DOWN FIRST), immediately behind R29. Repeat

Master Brightness and Focus adjustments. Replace cover from high voltage and video assembly.

4-69

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION (Cont)

1. ADJUSTMENTS (Cont)

Vertical Size

Requirement: The height of the 24 lines shall be 5-1/4 inches ±1/8 inch.

To Adjust: Rotate vertical size potentiometer clockwise to decrease; counterclockwise to increase.

Vertical Linearity

Requirement: Character height shall be uniform throughout the display.

To Adjust: Rotate vertical linearity potentiometer clockwise to decrease top row; counterclockwise to decrease bottom.

Horizontal Size

NOTE: Use 405992 monitor adjusting tool to perform this adjustment.

Requirement: The width of 80 characters shall be 11-

1/4 inches ±1/4 inch

To Adjust: Rotate horizontal size coil clockwise to decrease width;. counterclockwise to increase width.

4-70

(1) Turn off main power switch.

(2) Remove eight 152893 screws, 110743 lock washers and 125011 flat washers from 405859 high voltage plate assembly.

(3) Position high voltage plate so that there is an unobstructed view of the horizontal size and linearity coils on the 410546 circuit card

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST MT40 SHOP MANUAL 359

NOTE: On later design monitors, the horizontal drive cable is clamped to the high voltage plate assembly

WARNING: BE SURE THAT TERMINALS AND/OR

FEED THROUGH FILTERS ON THE HIGH VOLTAGE

PLATE ASSEMBLY ARE NOT TOUCHING THE

COPPER ENCLOSURE.

(4) Turn on main power switch.

(5) Insert the 405992 adjusting tool through the access hole on the left side of the enclosure as viewed from back of monitor

While viewing through the top opening of the enclosure, route the 405992 past the heat sink on the fly-back transformer and into the horizontal size coil.

DANGER: DO NOT PUT FINGERS INSIDE THE

ENCLOSURE AND DO NOT TOUCH COMPONENTS

ON HIGH VOLTAGE PLATE ASSEMBLY,

(6) Adjust horizontal size of display to 11-1/4 inches ±1/4 inch.

(7) Turn off main power switch.

(8) Reassemble 405859 high voltage plate assembly by reversing the removal procedure.

4-71

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Horizontal Centering Adjustment (New)

Requirement: (410545 Issue 6A and later), the space between the 80th character and the right edge of the raster should be 1 to 1-1/2 character width (gauged by eye) after a three minute warm-up.

To Adjust: Rotate horizontal centering potentiomenter.

HORIZONTAL CENTERING

POTENTIOMETER

4-72

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Procedure for Access to Monitor Yoke and Centering Rings

(1) Turn main power switch off.

(2) Remove monitor cover.

(3) Remove monitor P901 connector.

(4) Release 1/4-turn fastener securing heat sink assembly and tilt heat sink assembly rearward.

(5) Using tube tilt mechanism, tilt tube face downward.

(6) Carefully remove CRT J17-connector.

(7) Carefully remove 402112 shield assembly.

(8) Replace CRT J17 connector.

(9) Turn main power switch on.

• To reinstall 402112 shield assembly reverse above procedure.

Horizontal Linearity

Requirement: Character width shall be uniform throughout the display as gauged by eye.

To Adjust: Rotate horizontal linearity coil for uniform width characters. Check and refine (if necessary)

Horizontal Size adjustment.

4-73

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Yoke Orientation

Requirement: The rectangular display area shall be aligned (rotationally) to the CRT face.

CAUTION: HIGH VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT AT

YOKE. HANDLE ONLY BY YOKE LINER. THE NECK

OF CRT IS FRAGILE. BE CAREFUL NOT TO

STRIKE GLASS WITH SCREWDRIVERS, ETC. DO

NOT OVERTIGHTEN YOKE CLAMP SCREW

.

To Adjust: Loosen yoke clamp screw. Rotate yoke to align display with CRT face. Do not overtighten yoke clamp screw.

Display Centering

Requirement: The display (80 character by 24 lines) shall be centered on CRT face as gauged by eye.

To Adjust: Rotate two display centering rings by tabs.

4-74

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


130 VOLT ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: The 130 V adjustment is preset at the factory, and should not be remade unless:

• There is definite indication that adjustment is not correct. Refer to Test and Troubleshooting Sections C and D.

• Components on 410853 circuit card have been replaced during repair.

Requirement: The voltage at the emitter of transistor Q2 (318822) on heatsink shall be 130 V dc ±1.3 V.

To Adjust: Connect voltmeter input to white lead going to emitter of Q2 on heatsink. Rotate 130 V potentiometer to adjust measured voltage to 130 V dc. Apply small amount of Glyptal to 130 V potentiometer adjusting screw.

2. LUBRICATION

None required.

4-75

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F.- DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS

1. GENERAL

This section provides removal and disassembly procedures of various display monitor assemblies. For identification and

removal of soldered-in circuit card components, refer to Page 4-30, 4. DETAILED TROUBLE ANALYSIS or wiring

diagram package WDP0460.

Included in this section are exploded assembly views detailing individual part numbers and a numerical listing of parts

referenced to page numbers of the exploded views. This information will be found on Page 4-111, 3. PARTS.

When removing a subassembly or part, follow the order of removal as indicated by the circled numbers, such as, (1) (2) etc. Do NOT force or pry any parts to provide clearance for removal.

Refer to Page 4-2, 2. TOOLS, TEST EQUIPMENT, AND MISCELLANEOUS for a listing of tools required to

disassemble or reassemble the display monitor unit.

After disassembly and reassembly of a subassembly or component are performed, the associated adjustments shall be checked, and relubrication (if applicable) shall be performed. For adjustments and lubrication of the monitor refer to

Page 4-70, E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION.

For all disassembly or reassembly procedures or when disconnecting or reconnecting any electrical components of the display monitor, all power and video signals to the monitor shall be turned OFF to avoid safety hazards and prevent electrical component damage. A recommended safety practice is to unplug all ac input power cords.

CAUTION: WEAR APPROVED SAFETY GLASSES WHEN THE MONITOR HOUSING. IS REMOVED, AS THE

DISPILAY TUBE IS FRAGILE IN THE NECK AFEA AND IS SLBJECT TO IMPLOSION IF BROKEN. BE CAREFUL

NOT TO STRIKE THE GLASS TUBE WITH TOOLS OR COMPONENTS WHEN WORKING IN ITS VICINITY.

(1) Yoke with 405843 filter assembly.

(2) Yoke without filter assembly.

NOTE: To remove a subassembly or individual part, follow the procedure on page referenced in parentheses.

4-76

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO .31W4-4-300-1


NOTE: The number indicated in parentheses after each assembly designates the page covering the disassembly/reassembly procedures.

4-77

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

NOTES

4-78

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

The disassembly/reassembly procedures are based upon the following initial conditions unless otherwise specified:

The display monitor shall be placed on a suitable holding fixture.

405946 Housing Assembly

(2) Removal of monitor housing:

Disconnect the fan cable and ground strap and route cable out of cover through opening in rear of the shroud assembly.

(3) Disengage latch. New cover latch has rectangular hole to accept a tool (small screwdriver) to unlatch display cover.

4-79

New cover latch has rectangular hole to accept a tool

(small screwdriver) to unlatch monitor cover.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS (Cont)

2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEIBLY (Cont)

408980 Pan Assembly

(1) Remove monitor and place on end for access to shroud assembly with fan.

(2) Remove the six self-threading screws and flat washers that hold the shroud assembly to the cover. Remove the shroud assembly from the cover assembly.

4-80

Heat Sink to Lowered Position

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


410852 Rectifier Circuit Card Assembly

4-81

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS (Cont)

2.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY (Cont)

410853 Regulator Circuit Card Assembly

4-82

402254 High Voltage and Video Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-83


2.


405859 High Voltage Plate Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

NOTE

: During reassembly of 405859 high voltage plate assembly, the requirements specified on the following pages should be checked and met to insure proper operation of the monitor.

4-84

High Voltage Plate Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP ANUAL 359

(1) The hex nuts that mount the two 405824 and 405825 cable assemblies must be tight and secure to the 405823 mounting plate.

(2) The 403694 ferrite sleeve must be on the 405825 cable assembly when mounted to the 405823 high voltage plate.

(3) The 408974 ferrite sleeve (two required) must be on the 405824 cable assembly when mounted to the 405823 high voltage plate.

(4) The presence of eight segments of 39628RM contact strip must be around the perimeter and between the 405823 mounting plate and the 405821 front housing when assembled.

4-85

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


Front Enclosure With High Voltage Plate Assembly

The eight 152893 hex head screws, 110743 lockwashers and 125011 flat washers must be tight and secure when 405859 high voltage plate assembly is mounted to 405821 front housing.

4-86

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


410547 Regulator Filter Assembly

•

Remove 405859 high voltage plate assembly (4-87).

4-87

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


410100 Circuit Card Assembly

•


NOTE

: During reassembly, the requirements specified on the following page should be checked and met to insure proper operation of the monitor.

4-88

405873 Regulator Filter Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


The three 405860 tubular filter cartridges must be tight and secure when mounted onto the 405821 front housing.

At the lower edge of the 405821 front housing, check for the presence of (12) segments of 39628RM contact strip around entire opening and make sure that they are parallel to the lower edge.

4-89

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


410546 High Voltage Circuit Card Assembly

•


•

Remove high voltage assembly cover (4-87 and 4-88)

(2) Rotate and unhook 410546 circuit card.

4-90

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


410545 Interface/Amplifier Circuit Card Assembly

•


•

Remove high voltage assembly cover (4-87 and 4-88).

•

Remove 410546 high voltage circuit card assembly (4-90).

4-91

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


405861 Rear Cover Assembly

•

Remove 402254 high voltage and video assembly (4-83) from heat sink.

•


•


•


•

Remove 410545 interface/amplifier circuit card assembly (4-91).

NOTE:

During reassembly of the 405861 rear cover assembly, the requirements specified on the following page should be checked and met to insure proper operation of the monitor.

4-92

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


For location of contact strip see 405991 rear enclosure contact strip.

The presence of seven segments of 39628RM contact strip must be between the 405861video filter assembly and the

405820 rear housing.

4-93

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


410548 Video Interface Receiver Circuit Card Assembly

•


•


•


•

Remove 410545 interface/amplifier circuit card assembly (4-91).

4-94

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


402108 Choke Assembly

•

Remove 410852 rectifier circuit card assembly (4-81).

4-95

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


403639 AC Filter Assembly

•


4-96

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


341795 (50/60 Hz) Power Distribution Assembly

•


4-97


2.


410559 Vertical Deflection Circuit Card Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

Tube Tilt Mechanism

4-98

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


402110 Cathode Ray Tube

405701 or 405994 Deflection Yoke Assembly

•


(1) Disengage captive mounting screws and move ac filter assembly aside.

(2) Disconnect J17.

(See Page 4-100 for location of parts.)

(3) Disconnect P15.

(4) Disconnect high voltage lead from side of CRT by removing five 152893 screws, 110743 lockwashers and 125011 flat washers. Remove 405878 cover and pull connector from socket in CRT.

(5) Disengage 410559 vertical deflection. circuit card assembly from CRT (see 4-98).

(6) Remove four 152893 screws, 110743 lockwashers, 125011 flat washers.

NOTE: Insert 402244 ferrite sleeve on filter marked "0". Above ferrite sleeve, solder one end of 328793 disc capacitor to portion of filter leg that is round. Other end of disc capacitor to be between shield and washer of screw as shown. Both leads of capacitor to be as short as possible.

(7) Remove 402285 tube tilt lever (see 4-98).

(8) Remove four 181523 springs.

(9) Rotate rod rearward and remove by disengaging from holes in chassis.

(10) Remove mask.

(11) Remove top two 181243 screws w/lockwashers, 107116 lockwashers, and 3598 nuts to disengage ground straps.

(12) Rotate neck of CRT toward vertical and lift to disengage pivot points from chassis.

(13) Remove bottom two 181243 screws w/lockwashers, 107116 lockwashers, and 3598 nuts.

(14) Remove 402112 intermediate shield.

(15) Carefully remove 402101 shield from CRT.

(16) Disconnect two leads.

(17 Loosen yoke clamp screw. Slide yoke rearward off CRT neck. In reassembly, do not overtighten yoke clamp screw.

4-99

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY (Cont)

402110 Cathode Ray Tube, 405701 Deflection Yoke Assembly (Cont)

NOTE:

During reassembly, the requirements specified on the following pages should be checked and met to insure proper operation of the monitor. These recommended checks are to be performed by qualified service personnel.

4-100

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


This figure shows all the shield assemblies that enclose the CRT.

4-101

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


402110 Cathode Ray Tube, 405701 Deflection Yoke Assembly (Cont)

Front of Monitor

Check that the 402109 braided ground straps are properly mounted from the upper right and upper left side of the CRT tube shield assembly to the right and left sidewalls of the 402106 main frame.

4-102

Rear 402116 CRT Shield Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LIP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Check that the 405802 "twin-ax" connector that mounts on the rear 402116 CRT shield is tight and secure to the shield.

4-103


2.


Video and High Voltage Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

As viewed from rear of monitor.

Check that the 402047 threaded metallic bushing on the 402117 CRT cable assembly is tight and secure at the point of entry to the 405861 video filter assembly.

4-104

Left Side of Shielded Tube

As viewed from rear of monitor.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Check that the 328635 metal cable clamp is in total metallic contact with the braid of the 405824 ultor cable assembly and that the braid of the 405824 ultor cable assembly is in metallic contact with the edges of the slot in the 405878 ultor cover shield that covers the connection to the CRT. The shrink tubing on the cable should not prevent metallic contact as indicated above.

Check that the ground strap which is centrally located and mounts to the floor of the 402106 main frame is in direct contact with the 405702 CRT shield assembly at all times.

4-105

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 09fi9-l,P-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


Upper Rear Corner of the Right Sidewall of the Main Frame

As viewed from rear of monitor.

Check for presence of the 341792 contact strip which should be mounted on the inside surface in the upper rear area of the right sidewall of the 402106 main frame.

4-106

402118 Brightness Control W/Cable Assembly

TM 11-581fi-06-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 3iW4-4-300-1


4-107

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


402120 Monitor Off/On Control Assembly

•


4-108

Heat Sink Transistors

(1) Secure heat sink in upright position.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTE 1:

On heat sink assembly, 402319 insulator associated with transistor (Q3) is replaced by 402319 (new) using mica (muscovite) material. The mica insulator requires thermal joint compound (heat conducting paste) applied to the rear side of the transistor and on the heat sink surface. The 402318 insulator associated with transistors (Q1, Q2 and

Q4) remains unchanged. The insulator material used is fiberglass reinforced silicone rubber and does not require thermal joint compound.

NOTE 2:

Transistor Q4 part number 406306 can only be used with 410656 Issue 6A or later, incorporating R39 part number 406292 horizontal centering control. Transistor Q4 part number 341570 can be used with any issue of 410656 circuit card.

4-109

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


4-110

3. PARTS

Frame Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-111

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3. PARTS, Frame Assembly (Cont)

4-112

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-113

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

402120 Monitor Control Switch (On-Off) Assembly

402118 Brightness Control Switch Assembly

4-114

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-115

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4-116

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-117

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSENBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS (Cont)

HIGH VOLTAGE PLATE ASSEMBLY (405859)

FRONT ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY (405873)

4-118

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


REAR COVER ASSEMBLY (405861)

4-119

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



REAR ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY

4-120

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


402286 MODIFICATION KIT TO REPLACE WHEEL-TYPE

TUBE TILT MECHANISM WITH LEVER-TYPE

4-121

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4-122

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


408892 MODIFICATION KIT TO REPAIR 40-TYPE DISPLAY

MONITOR CRT WITH BROKEN TILT LEVER MOUNTING TAB

4-123

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. COMPONENT PARTS LIST

NOTE: When ordering replaceable parts or components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).

Part

Number

1020

2191

2199

2539

3598

3599

3603

3606

6347

7002

71073

74707

76296

84226

90951

92260

92527

93117

98642

100759

107116

108450

110126

110743

112485

119652

121242

121243

125005

125011

125124

126241

146952

151632

121, 123

151660

151737

151880

152893

153799

154156

Description and

Page Number

Screw, 640 x 1/4 Hex

117

Lockwasher 118

Nut, 7/16-32 Hex 118

Nut, 3/8-32 Hex 119

Nut, 640 Hex 115

Nut, 440 Hex 119

Nut, 1/4-32 Hex 120

Nut, 6-40 Hex 118, 120

Screw, 6-32 x 3/8 RD 120

Washer, Flat 122


Spring 122

Spring 115, 121, 123

Spring 111

Lockwasher 119, 120


Lockwasher 112

Lockwasher 118, 119

Lockwasher 111

Screw, 440 x 3/16 Flat

120

Lockwasher 111, 115,

121, 123

Lockwasher 119

Lockwasher 111

Lockwasher 111

Screw, 6-32 x 1/4 Fil

112, 113

Ring, Retainer 122



Screw, 2-56 x 3/16 RD

118, 119

Washer, Flat 119

Screw, 440 Shoulder 116

Lockwasher 118

Screw, 440 x 3/8 Flat 117


341526

Screw, 640 x 7/8 Fill 120


111

Nut, 440 Hex 119

Screw, 440x 1/4 Hex 120


118

Grommet, Rubber 119

Part

Number

180714

181240

185676

185677

185871

195272

300860

318822

318845

319238

326919

327954

328625

328793

341507

341522

341523

341527

341533

341546

341557

341558

181241

181243

181392

181707

181721

182182

182648

183111

184055

184057

184058

Description and

Page Number

Screw, #6 Self-Tapping

112

Screw w/Lockwasher, 6-40 x 3/18 Hex 111, 115

Screw w/Lockwasher, 6.40

x 1/4 Hex 118, 119, 120

Screw w/Lockwasher, 640 x 3/8 Hex 115, 118

Terminal, Tab Type 116

Nut, Speed 112

Connector, 12 Pt Plug

Type 112

Holder, Fuse 112

Connector, 12 Pt

Receptacle Type 114, 115

Label 112

Screw w/Lockwasher, 640 x 3/16 Hex 121


Screw w/Lockwasher, 6-40 x 7/16 Hex 117

Terminal, Plug Type 112

Terminal, Receptacle Type

113, 114, 115, 118

Screw w/Lockwasher, 8-32 x 3/8 Hex 112, 115, 121

Screw, 640 Spl 112, 113

Ring, Retaining 122

Transistor 117

Jumper 111

Nut, 12-32 Hex 118

Nut, Speed 112

Retainer, Split Ring 117

Cable Assembly 118

Capacitor, .001 MFD 118

Cable Assembly 112

Choke 115

Bracket 112

Socket Assembly 117

Socket Assembly 117

Base, CRT 121

Fastener, Drive 112, 117,

122

Wheel 114, 115

Potentiometer 114, 115

341711

341715

341716

341717

341730

341791

341792

341795

341797

341798

400574

401107

401108

Part

Number

341559

341561

341562

341563

341564

341566

341567

341568

341569

341570

341576

341577

341578

341579

341580

341616

341621

341630

341648

341649

341651

341674

341683

341684

341685

341686

341690

341696

Description and

Page Number

Cable Assembly 114

Retainer, Spring 114, 115

Container 114, !15

Container 114

Retainer, Spring 114

Wheel 114

Shaft 114

Transistor 117

Transistor 117

Transistor 120

Switch 114

Socket, Fuse 112

Fuse, 1.4A SL-BL 112

Fastener 117

Support, Circuit Card 117

Insulator 112

Cover 117

Socket Assembly 120


Connector 116

Stud 117

Connector, 3 Pt Receptacle

114,118

Socket, Fuse 112

Lamp Assembly, Neon 112

Strap 112

Fuse, 1.5A SL-BL 112

Transformer 112

Connector,5Pt Receptacle

112

Clamp, Cable 115

Lable 112

Latch 111


Screw, 640 Shoulder 121

Transformer 112

Finger 111, 112, 115

Distribution Assembly,

Power 112




Mask, Monitor 121

Plate, Bottom 122

4-124

Part

Number

401109

401111

401112

401113

401114

401115

401116

401117

401118

401119

401120

401122

401126

401130

401558

401559

401647

402095

402097

402101

402104

402106

402109

402110

402112

402113

402117

402118

402120

Description and

Page Number

Rod, Support 111

Support 116

Cover, Right Support 116

Cover, Left Support 116

Shield, Right Side 111

Shield, Left Side 111

Shield, Front 111

Bracket 111, 116

Screw, 10-32 x 1/2 Flat

111

Bracket, Hinge 111

Post 116

Screw, 8-32 x 7/32 Hex

111

Screen 122

Plate 122

Bracket, Latch 122

Post 122


115

Receptacle 120

Pin 120

Shield 121

Cap, Rear 119

Frame 112

Strap, 3" Braided 115

Shield Assembly, CRT

Front 121

Shield 121

Strip, Contact 119

Cable Assembly 119


Switch Assembly 114, 115

Part

Number

402246

402283

402284

402285

402286

402318

402319.

403636

403637

403638

405701

405703

405719

405720

405809

405810

405811

405812

405815

405818

405819

405820

405823

405824

405825

405832

405853

405856

405857

405858

405859

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Description and

Page Number

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

Cable Assembly 120

Clip, Spring 115, 121

Bracket 115, 121

Lever 121, 123

Modification Kit 115, 121

Insulator 117, 120

Insulator 117

Bracket 112, 113

Post 112

Filter 112, 113

Yoke Assembly 121

Cable Assembly 116

Network 114, 115

Cable Assembly 114

Sink, Heat 117

Bar 117

Rail 117

Plate 117

Cover 120

Nut, 440 Slotted 120

Post 120

Enclosure, Rear 120

Plate 118

Cable Assembly 118

Cable Assembly 118

Cable Assembly 118

Cover 118

Cable Assembly 118

Cable Assembly 118

Cable Assembly 118

Plate Assembly, High

Voltage 118

405861

405863

405864

405865

405866

405867

405868

405869

405873

405878

405881

405946

405947

405952

405955

405994

406152

406306

406594

407371

407373

408891

408892

410544

410545

410546

410548

410554

410559

410852

410853

Cover Assembly, Rear 119

Cable Assembly 115

Cover 119

Socket 119

Ring 119

Cover, End 119

Plate 119

Post 119

Enclosure Assembly,

Front 118

Cover 121

Sleeve 118

Cover, Monitor 122

Bushing 122

Strap 115

Cable Assembly 119

Yoke Assembly 121

Latch, Spring 121

Transistor 120

Terminal 119

Label 113

Label 119

Bracket 121, 123

Modification Kit 123

Card, Circuit 119

Card, Circuit 118

Card, Circuit 118

Card, Circuit 120

Card, Circuit 120

Card, Circuit 117

Card, Circuit 112

Card, Circuit 117

4-125

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART 5 - TEMPEST MODEL 40 OPCONS

40K103 and 40K108 KD Opcons

(With Keyboard)

40K002 RO Opcon

(Without Keyboard)

INDEX

A.

GENERAL

1.

DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................

2.

TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT..................................................................................

B.

SHOP PROCEDURES

1.

GENERAL INFORMATION............................................................................................

2.

CLEANING AND REFINISHING ....................................................................................

3.

INSPECTION ................................................................................................................

4.

CONVERSIONS ............................................................................................................

5.

MARKING AND PACKING ............................................................................................

C.

TESTING

1.

GENERAL .....................................................................................................................

2.

PRELIMINARY ..............................................................................................................

3.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS - 40K103 OPCON ......................................................................

4.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS - 40K108/RDE/RDH OPCONS ...................................................

5.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS - 40K108/RDG OPCON .............................................................

6.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS - 40K108/RDF ............................................................................

7.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS - 40K002 OPCON ......................................................................

D.

TROUBLESHOOTING

1.

GENERAL .....................................................................................................................

2.

PRELIMINARY ..............................................................................................................

3.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS ...................................................................................

4.

REFERENCE MATERIAL..............................................................................................

E.

ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION

1.

ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................................................

2.

LUBRICATION ..............................................................................................................

F.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS

1.

GENERAL .....................................................................................................................

2.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT - KD AND RO...........................................................

3.

SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION - KD .......................................................................

4.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - KD ............................................................................

5.

PARTS - KD ..................................................................................................................

6.

SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION - RO ......................................................................

7.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY - RO ............................................................................

8.

PARTS - RO..................................................................................................................

9.

COMPONENT PARTS LIST - KD AND RO ...................................................................

5-1

5-50

5-50

5-51

5-94

5-121

5-121

5-121

5-123

5-123

5-124

5-130

5-140

5-141

5-143

5-144

PAGE

5-2

5-2

5-3

5-3

5-5

5-6

5-11

5-14

5-14

5-14

5-26

5-33

5-41

5-49

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

PART 5 -TEMPEST MODEL 40 OPCONS

A. GENERAL

1. DESCRIPTION

KR. Opcon

The KD Opcon is a keytop actuated device for manually generating data and operational mode information in the form of coded signals. The KD opcon also functions to receive and indicate (lighted keytops) status codes or sound (internal tone generator) alarm codes. Interface with other Model 40 components is by means of separate controller logic.

The KD Opcon consists of one or two circuit cards mounting the integrated and discrete component logic, keytop associated keyswitches, tone generator and necessary cabling, hardware and covers. A 9-pin connector is provided for interfacing with the Model 40 controller.

RO Opcon

The 40K002 RO Opcon is a keytop actuated device for manually selecting certain operating modes of receive-only printer sets. Selection is by direct keyswitch make-break operation in contrast to the keyswitch code generating capabilities of the KD opcon. Status of the various modes is indicated by lighted keytops.

The RO opcon consists of a frame mounting the keytop associated keyswitches, necessary hardware and covers, and cabling terminated by a 9-pin connector for interfacing with the Model 40 controller.

2. TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Tools

The tools listed below are supplementary to common types such as pliers, screwdrivers, etc, and may be ordered from

Teletype Corporation using the part number shown. Tools listed without a Teletype part number may be procured locally.

NOTE: When ordering parts, prefix each number with the letters "TP" unless specified otherwise.

Description

• Spring Hook (Pull)

• 1/4 Inch Nut Driver Wrench

• Keyswitch Extractor Tool

• Keytop Extractor Tool

• Cable Assembly (Interface and Bell Card Extractor)

(2 required)

• Static Discharge Strap

• Cable Extender (Opcon Extender - 6 Ft)

• Terminal Extractor Tool

• Terminal Insertion Tool, Molex HT-1807, or equivalent

(procure locally)

• Soldering Iron, Weller Model W-MCP-750 with MP2C Tip, or equivalent (procure locally)

• Desoldering Tool, EDSYN Model MMS005 Soldapullt® , or equivalent (procure locally)

5-2

Part No.

75765

89954

346257

346260

346274

346392

401641

402840

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Test Equipment

The following equipment is required for testing and troubleshooting the KD Opcon. This equipment, or equivalent substitutes, should be procured locally.

• Triplett Model 630APL Multimeter

• Tektronix Model 7904 Oscilloscope e/w:

2 - -7A16A Single Trace Amplifiers

1 - -7B70 Time Base Unit

Miscellaneous

Items a. through d. may be procured locally. Item e. should be ordered from Teletype Corporation.

a. Refined Mineral Spirits b. Wiping Cloths, Soft, Lint-Free c. 1/2-Inch Nylon-Bristle Paint Brush d. Thermal Joint Compound, Wakefield Engineering No. 340, or equivalent e. Grease, 4-Ounce Tube 97116

B. SHOP PROCEDURES

1. GENERAL INFORMATION

This section details the cleaning, refinishing and inspection procedures to be followed prior to testing and troubleshooting the opcon unit. In many cases careful inspection, in particular, will save later troubleshooting by revealing broken or loose connections, damaged components, possible short circuits, etc.

Refer to Page 5-121,F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS whenever detailed information on removing opcon

components is required.

CAUTION: TO AVOID POSSIBLE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE MOS DEVICES OR CIRCUIT CARDS WITH MOS

DEVICES DUE TO ELECTRICAL STATIC DISCHARGE BY SERVICE PERSONNEL, FOLLOW THE HANDLING AND

GROUNDING PROCEDURES ON PAGE 5-64, 1. GENERAL.

Refer to Page 5-6, 4. CONVERSIONS for keytop locations and part numbers when a change from one standard keytop

arrangement to another is desired.


2. CLEANING AND REFINISHING Immersion type cleaning is not recommended for the KD or RO opcon units.

CAUTION: AVOID THE USE OF HARSH OR ABRASIVE CLEANING AGENTS, OR SOLVENTS WHICH COULD

SCRATCH OR DAMAGE THE EXTERIOR PLASTIC COVER OR KEYTOPS.

5-3

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

B. SHOP PROCEDURES (Cont)

Clean all indicated surfaces as follows:

Cover (Removed From Opcon)

Wash with mild detergent solution.

Rinse with damp cloth.

Buff dry with soft cloth.

Keytops (Removed Frotr Opcon)

Place keytops in dipping basket or other mesh container.

Immerse basket in mild detergent solution and agitate for 1 or 2 minutes.

Rinse keytops with clean hot water (140°F).

Remove keytops from basket and air dry or buff dry with clean soft cloth.

Before keytops are reinstalled, clean the opcon interior as specified on Page 5-5,

Interior.

Pan (Removed From Opcon)

Wipe off metal pan with a soft cloth dampened with refined mineral spirits.

5-4

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Clean the interior area, keyswitches, circuit cards, and other components by lightly brushing with a clean dry 1/2-inch paint brush followed by air blowing.

CAUTION: THE AIR SUPPLY SHOULD NOT EXCEED 20 P,S.I. HIGHER AIR PRESURES MAY DAMAGE SMALL

COMPONENTS.

Reinstall the keytops in accordance with the arrangements detailed on Page 5-6, 4. CONVERSION! of this section.

Replace any damaged or illegible keytops. Leave the cover ant pan off at this time to facilitate inspection.

3. INSPECTION

Internal Inspection

Remove the cover and pan, if not already removed, and visually check general condition of opcon, replacing any damaged components.

Verify continuity of green ground strap between opcon connector pin 9 and the opcon frame.

Examine the 9-pin connector located at the left rear side of the opcon for dirty, loose, bent, broken, or missing pins.

Check for presence of audible click when each key is depressed (except CAPS LOCK) and when each key is released. A second click should be heard when repeat keys are depressed fully and click again when released.

Check mechanical operation of the CAPS LOCK key. This key should latch down when depressed and release when depressed again. (Remove blocking keytop, if present, to check.) Check mechanical operation of spacebar mechanism. The spacebar should return to its unoperated position freely when depressed and released slowly.

Replace cover and pan.

5-5

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. INSPECTION (Cont)

External Inspection

Replace the KD opcon cover. The cover latch pawIs should operate freely and when latched should securely hold cover to console frame.

Check clearance between cover and keytop on the KD opcon.

The gap should be approximately equal in four places as shown.

Make Cover-to-Keytop adjustment (Page 5-121) if any keytops

are found rubbing against cover.

4. CONVERSIONS

Conversions from one KD opcon keyboard arrangement to another is accomplished in the following ways: a. Disabling certain mode selection by substituting blank blocking keytops for keytops having descriptive designations.

b. Enabling certain mode selection by substituting keytops with descriptive designations for blank blocking keytops.

Keyboard arrangements are directly related to the various Model 40 set arrangements relative to selectable controller and/or printer options. The variable keytops involved are shown and described.

5-6

Arrangements for 40K103 Opcon

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


All 40K103 KD Opcons have the same typewriter field, cursor controls and editing features keytop arrangement.

5-7

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


KEYTOP

SEND

REC

LOCAL

S/R

INTRPT

FORM SEND

OPT II

PRINT ON LINE

PRINT LOCAL

PARITY ERROR

TERM READY

KBD OVRN

CLEAR TO SEND

HIGH LIGHT

FORM ENTER

TAB SET

TAB CLEAR

CLEAR (TST)

BLANK (TST)

MSG WTG

4. CONVERSIONS (Cont)

TP PART NUMBER

346100

346101

346102

346103

346106

346121

346124

346104

346105

346126

346127

346159

346158

346107

346108

346110

346111

405933

405935

346123

4OC103 -- CONTROL KEYTOPS

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

USED ON KEYBOARD ARRANGEMENT

RCA RCB RCC RCD

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

5-8

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Arrangements for 40K108 Opcon

40K108/RDE or 40K108/RDH Opcon Layout

Have the same typewriter field, cursor controls and editing controls as a 40K108/RDF.

5-9

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. CONVERSIONS (Cont)

KEYTOP

SEND

LOCAL

S/R

FORM SEND

PRINT LOCAL

HIGH LIGHT

FORM ENTER

TAB SET

TAB CLEAR

DISP LINE

DISP LCL

DISP SEND

PTR LINE

PTR LCL

SEND TAPE LINE

SEND TAP LCL

REC TAPE LINE

REC TAPE LCL

MON TAPE

POLL/SEL

CNTRL MODE

CMND

NEXT OUTGO

FRM

NEXT INCOM

DEFEC

PRINT A

PRINT B

PAl

PA2

PF1 - PF1O

PF11

PF12

CLEAR (TST)

40C108 -- CONTROL KEYTOPS

TP PART NUMBER

USED ON KEYBOARD ARRANGEMENT

RDE RDF RDG RDH

346173

346174

346175

346176

346177

346178

346179

346180

346181

346182

346183

346184

346185

346186

346187

346100

346102

346103

346121

346105

346107

346108

346110

346111

346170

346171

346172

346188

346863

346864

346865-874

346877

346878

405933

X

X x

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

5-10

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5. MARKING AND PACKING

Marking

For record keeping purposes, the repair date may be marked on the opcon frame in a manner similar to that detailed below.

Packing

Factory-type packing may be duplicated by ordering the required PK materials from Teletype Corporation and applying, as follows.

Materials Required for KD Opcon

Qty Qty

1 9526PK Corrugated Carton

1 28164PK Set of Polystyrene Details

1 TC-135 Instruction Sheet

1 23456PK Plastic Bag

1 27643PK Label

1 21307PK Muslin Bag




(1) Place spare keytops in a 21307PK muslin bag and set aside.

(2) Place a 28164PK detail "A" base on work bench. Place muslin bag containing keytops in cavity provided.

(3) Remove KD opcon cover, if late design 28164PK packing details are used.

(4) Place unit in a 23456PK plastic bag. Place a TC-135 instruction sheet in bag on top of keytops. Close open end of bag and secure with a strip of 21480PK tape.

5-11

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

B. SHOP PROCEDURES (Contd)

5. MARKING AND PACKING, Packing (Contd)

5-12

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


(1) Form an 8762PK carton. Close and seal bottom flaps with a strip of 21719PK tape applied to the center seam and extending three inches down the ends of the carton.

(2) Place one 28327PK corrugated pad on top of the keytops. Tape securely to keyboard with two pieces of

21632PK tape (one piece across the length and one piece across the width of the pad).

(3) Cut a seventy six inch long piece of 27952PK air cap and place on bench.

(4) Place unit with open end down lengthwise on center of air cap approximately six inches from the end.

(5) Wrap the unit lengthwise and tape end of air cap with a strip of 21480PK tape.

(6) With manufacturers joint on the carton to the right side, place the unit into the carton with the-keytops to the side of the carton.

(7) Close and seal top flaps of carton as indicated in Step 1.

NOTE: 27952PK air cap deleted for clarity.

5-13

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING

1. GENERAL

Functional testing of the 40K103 or 40K108 KD Opcon is accomplished with the use of a full edit Model 40 KD Set. The

40K002 RO Opcon is tested in conjunction with a Model 40 ROP Set.

Functional testing provides a means for verifying the operational requirements of the KD or RO opcon units. The test procedure should be performed from start to finish without omissions. Possible causes of trouble are listed with the tests to provide aid in making the trouble correction.

Whenever the opcon fails a particular test, refer to Page 5-50, D. TROUBLESHOOTING to locate the trouble. After the

trouble has been corrected, repeat the test that disclosed the trouble and if found ok, resume testing from that point.

2. PRELIMINARY

With power off, install the opcon to be tested to the Model 40 KD or ROP Set serving-as a test set. Then proceed with either:

3.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40K103 Opcons

4.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40K108/RDE/RDH OPCONS

5.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40K108/RDG OPCON

6.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40K108/RDF

7.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40K002 OPCON

3. FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40K103 OPCONS

Remove all blocking keytops, if present. The location of the various control and data keys referred to in the KD opcon

test are shown below. Apply power and proceed to Page 5-15, 3. FUNCTIONAL TESTS.

5-14

a.

b.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTE:

The REC lamp lights immediately when power to the set is turned on. When using 40C430/AAT/017 controller, LOCAL lamp lights on power turn on.

STEP

KD OPCON TEST

PROCEDURE RESPONSE

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

1

2

Depress RETURN and ESC P simultaneously with additional force, and then release (Power Test).

TST CLEAR lamp lights(brightly) momentarily indicating power to opcon.

Dirty or broken connector pins.

Dirty or broken connection in feedthrough box.

Page 5-24

410074 interface and bell card.

Page 5-38, 5-47

Depress RETURN and simultaneously with additional force, and then release (Loop-Back Test).

TST CLEAR lamp lights (brightly) and remains lit indicating the loop-back test mode is activated.

Check

NOTE:

Occasionally the operational lamps may flash on and then off, or the alarm bell -may sound when the loopback test mode is activated. If this occurs, clear the test by depressing

RETURN and ESC P keys beyond their normal stop, and reenter the test mode.

Place opcon into the caps mode by depressing and latching CAPS LOCK.

Depress the following keys while observing lamps for proper indication.

keyswitch

5-15

3.

Functional Tests – 40K103 OPCONS (Contd)

STEP

2b.

(Cont)

PROCEDURE


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESPONSE

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-52

5-16

STEP

2b.

(Cont)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

c.

Depress RETURN and ESC P simultaneously with additional force, and then release.

TST CLEAR lamp extinguishes and returns opcon to normal operating mode.

5-17

3.


STEP

3

PROCEDURE

Depress each key on keyboard portion of opcon four or five times.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESPONSE

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-56, 5-64

4 Disengage CAPS LOCK by depressing it again momentarily. Again depress each key on keyboard portion of opcon four or five times.

The alpha characters described in Step

3 are displayed in lower case(ie, abcdef, etc).

Numerical 0-9 are displayed as numericals 0-9.

Check mechanical operation of CAPS

LOCK key.

Page 5-56, 5-64

5-18

STEP

5

PROCEDURE

Depress left SHIFT together with each nonalpha key (ie, '@#$, etc) on keyboard portion of opcon.

RESPONSE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-56, 5-64

6 Depress right SHIFT together with one of the keys depressed in Step 5.

The character on upper portion of depressed key is displayed..

Check operation of right SHIFT keyswitch

5-19

3.


STEP

7

PROCEDURE

Depress left CONTROL together with keys containing control characters four or five times each.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESPONSE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

Check operation of left CONTROL keyswitch.

NOTE:

On opcon being tested with a

40C430/AAT/017 controller, ENQ, US,

SYN, ACK, EOT, DLE and NAK cannot be generated from the opcon.

8

9

Depress right CONTROL together with one of the keys depressed in Step 7.

Depress the and SPACE with additional force than is normally required.

The corresponding control character is displayed.

Check operation of right CONTROL keyswitch.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … ..

The SPACE key repeatedly moves the cursor.

Another key may be stuck in the partially depressed condition (check mechanical operation of that keyswitch.

Page 5-55

5-20

STEP

10

PROCEDURE

Depress HOME. Then in sequence depress momentarily with more force than normally required, each cursor movement key shown.

RESPONSE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-55

11 Home the cursor and type alpha characters A through J on the display.

Place cursor over character E and depress

CHAR INSRT momentarily; then depress it fully -- releasing it after characters stop moving.

[ ]

ABCDEFGHIJ[ ]

ABCD[E]FGHIJ

ABCD[ ]EFGHIJ

ABCD[ ] EFGHIJ

12 Depress CHAR DELETE momentarily; then depress it fully.

ABCD[ ]

ABCD[ ]

ABCD[E]FGHIJ

EFGHIJ

EFGHIJ

ABCD[F]GHIJ

ABCD[G]HIJ

5-21

Page 5-55

Page 5-55

3.





SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS STEP

14

PROCEDURE

Depress LINE DLETE once; then depress

CLEAR.

RESPONSE

The line of data moves up, and then display is cleared of all characters.

Depress SEND, REC and LOCAL in sequence as shown.

SEND lamp lights when key is depressed (LOCAL lamp extinguishes).

REC lamp lights when key is depressed

(SEND lamp extinguishes).

LOCAL lamp lights when key is depressed (REC lamp extinguishes).

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

Check operation of LINE DLETE keyswitch.

Page 5-55

NOTE:

The following steps provide test procedures for the opcon to be used on KD or KDP Sets. As a reminder, any blocking keytops should be removed.

Depress HOME and numeric 1.

16

17 Depress NEW LINE 24 times.

Numeric 1 is displayed in home position.

Cursor moves down display, displaying new line character at 1st position of each line. On the 24th depression of

NEW LINE, the numeric 1 will disappear from display.

5-22

STEP

18

19


Type a numeric 2 and depress NEW LINE

24 times.

The numeric 2 will move up one line each time NEW LINE is depressed. On the 24th depression of the NEW LINE, the numeric 2 will disappear from screen.

Type a numeric 3.

A numeric 3 is displayed.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

20 Depress HOME.

21 Depress SEGMT ADV.

The cursor moves to the home position and a 1 is displayed under the cursor.

Cursor does not move, a 2 is displayed under cursor.

22 Depress SEGMT ADV again.

23

24

25

Depress SEGMT ADV again.

Depress SCROL UP once.

Depress SCROL UP fully.

The cursor does not move, the 2 is replaced by the 3 under the cursor.


The 1 disappears from the display and the 2 appears at bottom left of display.

The 2, then the 3 move up the display.

Scrolling stops when the 3 reaches top of display.

5-23

3.



TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS STEP

26

27

28

PROCEDURE

Depress SCROL DOWN once, then fully.

The 3 moves down one line, then moves down continuously and disappears as the 2 appears at top of display. Scrolling continues until the 1 appears at top of display.

Place cursor away from home position and depress TAB SET. Depress CURSR TAB twice.

Cursor moves to the same position on the next line. (Next tab mark -- not displayed.)

Home the cursor and depress TAB

CLEAR.

RESPONSE

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

Check operation of TAB SET and

CURSR TAB keyswitches.

Cursor returns to home position, and all tab marks are cleared.

Check operation of TAB CLEAR keyswitch.

29 Depress INTRPT, FORM SEND, PRINT

ON LINE, HIGH LIGHT and FORM

ENTER each twice.

Lamp lights when key is depressed; extinguishes when key is depressed again.

NOTE:

When HIGH LIGHT and FORM

ENTER are turned on and off, cursor will move one character position on display.

30 Depress S/R, PRINT LOCAL and LOCAL in sequence as shown.

S/R lamp lights when key is depressed.

PRINT LOCAL lamp lights when key is depressed (S/R remains on).

LOCAL lamp lights when key is depressed.

5-24

Page 5-55

Page 5-55

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTES

5-25

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40KlU8/RDE/RDH OPCONS 4.

Keytop Layout

The location of the various control and data keys referred to in the checkout procedures can be found in the following illustration.

Preliminary Instructions

Follow these preliminary instructions before testing of the opcon is started using a Tempest Model 40 set. The operational checks are to be performed in the order presented.

(a) Cassettes are in unlatched position; turn power on to cassette drive (if present).

(b) Turn on power to the set or station.

(c) Turn on power to the display and adjust brightness.

(d) Perform Erase function on each of the cassettes, if not previously preformatted. Refer to How To Operate

Manual 405 for procedure.

5-26

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTE:

Immediately when power is turned on, the poll/sel and mon tape (if monitor tape is present) lamps will light. PTR line lamp will light after approximately 14 seconds.

1


TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Depress RETURN or LINE FEED and TST CLEAR lamp lights(brightly) and remains lit indicating loopback test mode is activated and power is being supplied to opcon.

Page 5-73

and 5-88

simultaneously with additional force and then release

NOTE:

Occasionally the operational lamps may flash on and then off, when loopback test mode is activated. If this occurs, clear the test by depressing LINE FEED and ESC P beyond their normal stop, and re-enter test mode.

a.


b.


Page 5-76

Check operation of keyswitches.

A

CONTROL and A (SOH)

C

CONTROL and C (ETX)

D

CONTROL and D (EOT)

G

CONTROL and G (BEL)

F

CONTROL and ACK

E

CONTROL and E (ENQ)

B

CONTROL and B (STX)

J

NEW LINE

0

CONTROL and 0 (SI)

N

CONTROL and N (SO)

M

LINE FEED

DISP LINE

DISP LINE

DISP LCL

DISP ICL

DISP SEND

DISP SEND

PTR LINE

PTR LINE

PTR LCL

PTR LCL

SEND TAPE LINE

SEND TAPE LINE

SEND TAPE LCL

SEND TAPE LCL

REC TAPE LINE

REC TAPE LINE

REC TAPE LCL

REC TAPE LCL

MON TAPE

MON TAPE

POLL/SEL

POLL/SEL

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

5-28

4.

STEP

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



FUNCTIONAL TESTS –40K208/RDE/RDH OPCONS (Contd)


TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

1b.

(Cont) c.

Depress LINE FEED and ESC P simultaneously with additional force, and then release.

TST CLEAR lamp extinguishes and returns opcon to normal operating mode.

Page 5-73

2.

Home the cursor, enter opcon -- Display mode (DISP LINE, DISP LCL, DISP SEND lamp out).

Then depress each key on the keyboard portion of the opcon four or five times. Check monitor for character or function.

Pages 5-81

and 5-83

5-28

STEP

3

PROCEDURE

Disengage CAPS LOCK by depressing it again momentarily. Again depress each key on keyboard portion of opcon four or five times.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS

Alpha characters described in Step 2 are displayed in lower case (ie, abcdef, etc).

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Pages 5-81

and 5-83.

4

Depress left SHIFT together with each nonalpha key (ie, @i#$, etc) on keyboard portion of opcon.

Pages 5-81

and 5-83

5 Depress right SHIFT together with one of the keys depressed in Step 4.

The character on upper portion of depressed key is displayed.

Pages 5-81

and 5-83

6 Depress left CONTROL together with keys containing control characters four or five times each.

Page 5-89

5-29

4.

STEP

7

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40K108/RDE/RDH OPCONS (Contd)

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS PROCEDURE

Depress right CONTROL together with one of the keys depressed in Step 7.

RESULTS


8

Page 5-78

9

Depress and SPACE with additional force than is normally required.

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … …


Depress HOME. Then in sequence depress momentarily with more force than normally required, each cursor movement key shown.

Page 5-89

10

11

Home the cursor and type alpha characters A through J on the display.

Place the cursor over character E and depress CHAR INSRT momentarily; then-depress it fully -- releasing it after characters stop moving.

Depress CHAR DLETE momentarily; then depress it fully.

ABCDEFGHIJ[ ]

ABCD[E]FGHIJ

ABCD[ ]EFGHIJ

ABCD[ ]

↓

EFGHIJ

ABCD[ ]

ABCD[ ]

ABCD[E]FGHIJ

ABCD[F]GHIJ

ABCD[G]HIJ

EFGHIJ

EFGHIJ

12 Depress LINE INSRT once.

Page 5-78

Page 5-78

Cursor moves to beginning of line, and the line of data moves down one line.

Page 5-78

5-30

STEP

13

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS PROCEDURE

Depress LINE DLETE once; then depress CLEAR of all characters.

The line of data moves up, and then display is cleared

Page 5-78

14 Place the cursor away from home position and depress CURSOR TAB.

Cursor moves to first character position of next line(unformatted display).

Page 5-89

15 Place the cursor away from home position and depress TAB.

Cursor moves to first character position of next line(unformatted display).

Page 5-89

16

17


Depress NEW LINE 24 times.


Pages 5-81

and 5-89

Cursor moves down display, displaying new line character at 1st position of each line. On the 24th depression of NEW LINE, the numeric 1 will disappear from display

Pages 5-81

and 5-89

18 Type a numeric 2 and depress NEW

LINE 24 times

The numeric 2 will move up one line each time

NEW LINE is depressed. On the 24th depression of the NEW LINE, the numeric 2 will disappear from screen.

Pages 5-81

and 5-89

19

20

21

22

23

24

Type a numeric 3.

Depress HOME.

Depress SEGMT ADV.






Page 5-89


Page 5-89

The cursor does not move, the 2 is replaced by the

3 under the cursor.

The cursor does not move, the 3 is replaced by the

1 under the cursor.


5-31

Page 5-89

4.

STEP

25

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 40K108/RDE/RDH OPCONS (Contd)

PROCEDURE


RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

The 2, then the 3 move up the display. Scrolling stops when the 3 reaches top of display.

Page 5-89

26 Depress SCROL DOWN once, then fully.

The 3 moves down one line, then moves down continuously and disappears as the 2 appears at top of display. Scrolling continues until the 1 appears at top of display.

Page 5-78

27 Depress SEGMT ADV twice.

First the 2 then the 3 appear at top of display.

Page 5-89

28 Position cursor by means of the Cursor moves under direction of cursor control key. Us are displayed.

Page 5-78

to next to the last line of display. Type some Us on this line.


Depress LINE INSRT several times.

The Us move to last line of display. The cursor moves to the 1st character position of the line next to last line of display.

Page 5-78

Display does not change.

30

31 Home cursor and depress TAB CLEAR.

All tabs (on all segments) are cleared.

Page 5-89

32

33

Depress HIGH LIGHT.

Enter a full line of *s at top of display.

HIGH LIGHT lamp lights.

*s are displayed as intensified.

Alarm sounds at 73rd and 80th character positions.

Cursor remains at right end of line.

NOTE:

If option X1 is installed, the cursor will wrap to the beginning of the next line.

5-32

STEP

34

PROCEDURE

Depress HIGH LIGHT again.

36 Home the cursor and depress TAB

CLEAR.



RESULTS

HIGH LIGHT lamp extinguishes.

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-89

35 Place cursor away from home position and depress TAB SET. Depress

CURSR TAB twice.

Cursor moves to the same position on the next line. (Next tab mark – not displayed.)

Cursor returns to home position, and all tab marks are cleared.

5.




Follow these preliminary instructions before testing of the opcon is started using a Tempest Model 40 Set. The operational checks are to be performed in the order presented.

(a) Turn on power to the set or station (LOCAL indicator lights on each opcon).

(b) Turn on power to the display and adjust brightness.

(c) Perform Steps 1 through 19.

NOTE:

Immediately when power is turned on, the POLL/SEL and MON TAPE (if monitor tape is present) lamps will light. PTR line lamp will light after approximately 14 seconds.

5-33

5.

STEP

1 a.

b.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1





Depress ERASE INPUT and simultaneously with additional force and then release.

TST CLEAR lamp lights(brightly) and remains lit indicating loopback test mode is activated and power is being supplied to opcon.


NOTE:

Occasionally the operational lamps may flash on and then off, when loop back test mode is activated.


If this occurs, clear the test by depressing LINE

FEED and ESC P beyond their normal stop, and re-enter test mode.

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-73

and 5-88.

Check operation of keyswitches.

c.

A-

CONTROL and A (SOH)

C

CONTROL and C (ETX)

D

CONTROL and D (EOT)

G

CONTROL sad G (BEL)

F

CONTROL and ACK

E

CONTROL and E (ENQ)

B

CONTROL and B (SIX)

J

NEW LINE

O

CONTROL and O (SI)

N

CONTROL and N (SO)

M

ERASE INPUT

L

CONTROL and L (FF)

K

CONTROL and K (VT)

I

TAB

H

←

(Cursor Left)

S/R

S/R

LOCAL

LOCAL

PA1

PA1

PA2

PA2

PRINT LOCAL

PRINT LOCAL

PF1

PF1

PP2

PF2

PF3

PF3

PF4

PF4

PF5

PF5

PF6

PF6

PF7

PF7

PF8

PF8

PF9

PF9

PF10

PF10

Depress ERASE INPUT and ESCP simultaneously. TST lamp extinguishes.

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Page 5-73.

5-34

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


STEP

2


TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Home the cursor and depress a few keys on the keyboard portion of the opcon.

Note

: Each keytop need not be checked except for a trouble call. Each keytop shall function each time it is depressed.

Pages 5-81

and 5-83.

3

Disengage the key by depressing it again momentarily. Again depress a couple of keys on the keyboard portion of the opcon. (Opcons with no CAPS

LOCK key require no action; go to Step

4.)

The alpha characters described in Step 2 are displayed in lower case (de, abcdef, etc).

5-35

Pages 5-81

and 5-83.

5.

STEP

4

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING



TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Pages 5-81

and 5-83.

Depress the left then the right key while depressing and checking operation of one of the following alpha keys (ie, !@ #-$, etc).

5

Depress the key together with the key; then depress the key together with the

5-36

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Note:

Some characters may not be displayed or may be displayed as a character other than the character received online or entered from the opcon. See the table below which also provides printer actions for applicable characters.

LEGEND:

Will print with foldover option in printer enabled. Error symbol will print if foldover option is not enabled.

Note:

φ

is displayed as 0 but printed as

φ

.

9

5-37

5.

STEP

6

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING


PROCEDURE

Depress one of the following keys

RESULTS

- - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … .

The space key repeatedly moves the cursor.

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-78.

Page 5-89.

7 Depress the [HOME] key. Then in sequence depress momentarily with more force than normally required, each cursor movement key shown.

Note:

In local opcon operation, attempts to move the cursor off the display will result as shown:

8 Depress ERASE INPUT key.

Display clears and cursor goes to home position.

LOCAL indicator remains lit.

Pages 5-76

and 5-89.

9 Type the alpha characters A through J on the display. Place the cursor over the character E and depress

(1) ABCD[E]FGHIJ

(2) ABCD[ ]EFGHIJ

(3) ABCD[ ]

EFGHIJ

key once, then depress it fully releasing it after the characters move to the next line.

Note

:

CHAR INSRT and CHAR DLETE affect all

24 lines on a DCC KD. CHAR INSRT and CHAR

DLETE affect only 4 lines including the line with the cursor on MCC KD. Characters move slowly.

5-38

Page 5-78.

STEP

10

PROCEDURE

Depress the key momentarily, then depress it fully.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-78.

ABCD[ ] EFGHIJ

ABCD[E]FGHIJ

Characters delete one at a time or repeatedly when key is held depressed.

See Note in Step 9.

11

Depress the key three times.

The cursor remains at its present location, and the line of data moves down three lines.

Page 5-78.

The line of data moves up one line, then stops on the first line.

Page 5-78.

12

Depress the depress it fully.

key once, then

13

Depress key, (if printer is not provided, go to Step 14).

LOCAL indicator extinguishes, PRINT

LOCAL indicator lights and then goes off when printer buffer receives the message;

LOCAL indicator lights.

Printer copies entire display(24 lines):

• Flashing PRINT

LOCAL indicator indicates printer: a. is not print local.

b. cabinet lid is open.

c. form-out or paper-out condition.

d. ac power is off.

e. defective printer cable.

14 Place the cursor away from home position and depress the key.

The cursor returns to home position.

Note:

Displayed data is not affected by

CURSOR TAB and BACK TAB keys.

Page 5-89.

The cursor returns to home position.

Page 5-89.



Cursor returns to home position. Any characters to the right of and below cursor will be cleared.

5-39

Page 5-89.

5.

STEP

17

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING


PROCEDURE

Type some text on the opcon and then depress . Attempt to type some text on the opcon.

RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Text is displayed. LOCAL indicator extinguishes when S/R is depressed.

Page 5-89.

Attention bell sounds each time a key is depressed.

18 Alternately depress LOCAL then

is lit and extinguishes when a key is depressed (same for each key). Data on display remains unchanged, except when CLEAR key is depressed; all data clears from display and cursor goes to home position.

Page 5-76.

19 This step applies only to monocase opcons (blocking keytop over CAPS

LOCK position).

a. Depress ERASE INPUT and

QUOTES keys together with additional force

TST indicator lights and remains lit.

b. Depress A (do not depress SHIFT).

S/R key lights.

c. Depress ERASE INPUT and P keys together with additional force.

TST indicator light goes out.

Page 5-76.

•

Remove blocking keytop, check that plunger is in lower position.

•

Replace opcon.

Page 5-76.

5-40

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


6.


The location of the-various control and data keys referred to in the checkout procedures can be found in the following illustration.


Follow these preliminary instructions before testing of the keyboard is started. The steps are to be performed in the order presented.

(a) Power-up sequence:

(1) Turn power on to memory system.

(2) Insert properly formatted diskette into drive 3.

(3) Turn power on to KD1 (with controller in pedestal).

(4) Turn power on to KD2.

(5) Turn power on to Intr 2 (in Printer A pedestal).

(6) Turn monitor power switches on.

(7) Turn printer cabinet power switches on.

(b) When the power is turned on:

LOCAL indicator lights.

Monitor displays raster, cursor, time and date.

Diskette drives are initialized with lamps in door release latch dimly lit.

NEXT INCOM indicator may be lit.

Controller fans are on.

Power supply indicators light.

Input line is enabled and output line disabled.

(c) Insert blank 407640 diskettes at drive 1 and drive 2, refer to Manual 434 for instructions.

5-41

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING

6.


(d) Insert properly preformatted diskette in drive 3. Variable system information can be entered on diskette 3

(if required), by use of CMD procedure.

STEP

1


Depress RETURN and simultaneously with additional force and then release.

TST CLEAR lamp lights(brightly) and remains lit indicating loopback test mode is activated and power is being supplied to opcon.

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-73 and 5-88.

a.

b.



A

CONTROL and A (SOH)

CONTROL and C (ETX)

G

CONTROL and G (BEL)

FRMT

CONTROL and ACK

E

CONTROL and E (ENQ)

J

NEW LINE

O

CONTROL and O (SI)

I

TAB

H

←

(Cursor Left)

NOTE:

Occasionally the operational lamps may flash on and then off, when loop-back test mode is activated.

If this occurs, clear the test by depressing

LINE FEED and ESC p beyond their normal stop, and re-enter test mode.

Page 5-76.

Check operation switches.

LOCAL

LOCAL

CMND

NEXT OUTGO

NEXT OUTGO

ON

FRMT

SEND

NEXT INCOM

NEXT INCOM

DEFER

DEFER

HIGH LIGHT

HIGH LIGHT

FORM ENTER

FORM ENTER

FORM ENTER

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF c.

Depress RETURN and P keys.

TST indicator goes out.

Page 5-73.

5-42

STEP PROCEDURE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-81 and 5-83.

1.(d)

(Contd)

Depress LOCAL (if indicator is not lit), HOME, and CLEAR. LOCAL indicator lights, cursor at home position, and no characters displayed. Then depress each key on opcon four or five times. Check monitor for character.

2 Depress CAPS LOCK (if present).

Depress each alpha key on opcon. four or five times. Depress RETURN and/or

NEW LINE when required.

Character on each key is displayed

3 Depress and hold left SHIFT, then each nonalpha key (ie, !@#$, etc) on opcon.

Page 5-81 and 5-83.

Page 5-81 and 5-83.

4 Depress and hold right SHIFT. Depress one of the keys depressed in Step 3.

The character on upper portion of depressed key is displayed.

5-43

Page 5-81 and 5-83.

6.


STEP

5

PROCEDURE

Depress and hold left CONTROL

Depress keys containing control characters a few times each.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS


Page 5-89.

6 Depress and hold right CONTROL.

Depress one of the keys depressed in

Step 5.


7

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

… … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … … .


Page 5-78.

8 Depress HOME. Then in sequence depress momentarily with more force than normally required, each cursor movement key shown.

Page 5-89.

9

10

Home the cursor (depress HOME) and type alpha characters A through J on the display. Place the cursor over character

E and depress CHAR INSRT momentarily; then depress it fully – releasing it after characters stop moving.

[ ]

ABCDEFGHIJ[ ]

ABCD[E]FGHIJ

ABCD[ ]EFGHIJ

ABCD[ ] EFGHIJ

Depress CHAR DLETE momentarily; then depress it fully.

ABCD[ ] EFGHIJ

ABCD[ ] EFGHIJ

ABCD[E]FGHIJ

ABCD[F]GHIJ (E is deleted)

ABCD[G]HIJ (F is deleted, etc)

5-44

Page 5-78.

Page 5-78.

18

19

20

12

13

14

15

16

STEP

11

PROCEDURE

Depress LINE INSRT once.

Depress LINE DLETE once; then depress CLEAR.

Place the cursor away from home position and depress CURSOR

TAB

Place the cursor away from home position and depress TAB.


Depress NEW LINE 24 times;.

17 Type a numeric 2 and depress

NEW LINE 24 times.

Repeat Steps 16 and 17 for numeric 3, 4 and 5.

Depress HOME.

Depress SEGMT ADV.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS



Cursor moves to first character position of next line

(unformatted display).




Cursor moves down display, displaying new line characterat 1st position of each line. On the 24th depression of NEW LINE, the numeric 1 will disappear from display.


A numeric 3, 4 or 5 is displayedat the 1st line of each segment.


Cursor does not move; a 2 is displayed under cursor.

TERMINAL

ANALYSIS

Page 5-78.

Page 5-78.

Page 5-89.

Page 5-89.

Page 5-81

and 5-89.

Page 5-81

and 5-89.

Page 5-81

and 5-89.

Page 5-89.

5-45

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


6.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 4K108/RDF (Contd)

STEP

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

PROCEDURE

Depress SEGCT ADV three times more to advance the segments.

Depress SEGHT ADV again.


Depress SCROL UP fully and hold.

Depress SCROL DOWN once, then fully.

Depress SEGMT ADV four times.

RESULTS

The cursor does not move; the 2 is replaced by a 3 under the cursor, 4 replaces the 3, and 5 replaces the 4.

The cursor does not move; the 5 is replaced by a 1 under the cursor.

The 1 disappears from the display and a 2 appears at bottom left of display.

The 2 is replaced by a 3, then the 3 moves up the display

Then a 4 appears followed by a 5.

Scrolling stops when the 5 reaches top of display.

TROUBIE

ANALYSIS

Page 5-89.

Page 5-89.

.

The 5 moves down one line

Then moves down continues and disappears followed by 4, 3 and 2 until the 1

. appears at top of display

Page 5-78.

The 5 appears at top of display.

Cursor moves under direction.

of cursor control key

Us are displayed

Page 5-89.

Page 5-78

Page 5-78.


29

30


.

Depress HOME and CLEAR TAB.

The Us move to last line of display

The cursor moves to the 1st character position of the line next

.

to last line of display


All tabs and data (on all segments) are cleared

5-46

Page 5-89.

STEP

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

PROCEDURE

Enter a full line of dashes (-) at top of display.

Depress RETURN.

. Depress NEW LINE

Enter a full line of periods

(.) on the display.

Depress NEW LINE.

. Depress HOME and CLEAR

Type QUICK

. Depress SPACE (5 times)

Depress TAB SET

Depress HOME

Depress CHAR INSRT fully and hold until movement stops.

.

Depress CHAR DLETE twice

TM 11.5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 81W44-300-1


RESULTS

Dashes (-) are displayed.

Alarm sounds at 70th through

80th character positions.


Cursor moves to left margin.

No characters altered in any way.

. Cursor drops one line

TERMINAL

ANALYSIS

Page 5-78.

Page 5-89.

Page 5-89

Page 5-78.

Periods (.) are displayed across monitor

Alarm sounds at 70th and



Cursor moves to left margin and moves down one line (E is not added over 80th character).

Cursor to home position

Screen is cleared (data in all segments is cleared).

Word QUICK appears on line 1.

Cursor moves

No change (stop is set).

Cursor to home position.

Word QUICK moves to right and off display

Word QUICK in line 1 moves.

two positions left

Page 5-89.

Page 5-89.

Page 5-89

5-47

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


6. FUNCTIONAL TESTS -- 4OK108/RDF OPCON (Contd)

STEP

40

41

42

.

PROCEDURE

Depress CURSOR TAB.

Depress TAB.

Depress HOME, CLEAR, then

TAB CLEAR

RESULTS

Cursor moves to tab column.

No data is altered along the way.

Tab symbol ( ) appears at original position of cursor.

Cursor moves one space to

Tabs are not sent

Cursor goes to home position.

All characters and tab columnsare cleared from screen and on all segments.

TERMINAL

ANALYSIS

Page 5-89.

Page 5-89.

Page 5-89.

5-48

7. FUNCTIONAL TESTS— 40K002 OPCON

STEP PROCEDURE

RO OPCON TEST

1 Depress OPT II once.

2

3

RESPONSE

Depress OPT II again.

Depress TEST once.

Depress TEST again.

TERM READY is normally lit during operation. Depress key twice.

Key should latch down and lamp should light.

Key should unlatch and come up, lamp should extinguish.

Key should latch down and lamp should light.

Key should unlatch and come up, lamp should extinguish.

On the first depression, lamp should extinguish. On the second depression, lamp should relight.

5-49

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

SECTION D

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Wiring to keyswitch.

Open keyswitch

Defective lamp.


and 5-89.

Open keyswitch.

Defective lamp.


Open keyswitch.

Defective lamp.

Page 5-83

and 5-89.

Page 5-83

Page 5-76

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


1. GENERAL

This section provides the necessary information for locating and clearing troubles encountered in testing the 40K103 and

40K108 KD or 40K002 ROP opcon units per 5-14.

The detailed troubleshooting charts include voltage levels, oscilloscope waveforms, abbreviated schematics and step-bystep instructions for trouble diagnosis. apaplementary information such as block diagrams, functional schematics and

keyswitch assignments and coding is provided on Page 5-92 REFERENCE MATERIAL.

2. PRELIMINARY

KD Opcon.

CAUTION: TO AVOID POSSIBLE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE MOS DEVICES OR CIRCUIT CARDS WITH MOS

DEVICES DUE TO ELECTRICAL STATIC DISCHARGE BY SERVICE PERSONNEL, FOLLOW THE HANDLING AND

GROUNDING PROCEDURES ON PAGES 5-120 AND 5-121.

Arrange the KD-opcon on the bench as illustrated, following with cover, bottom pan, interface/bell card and coverplate removed.

Connect a ground strap having an alligator clip at each end from opcon side plate to green ground lead terminal as shown. Connect oscilloscope ground to keyboard side plate in the same manner.

Using two 346274 interface/bell card extender cables, connect card to console logic as shown; if the 410074 circuit card is present.

With power off, connect keyboard to KD set or station using a 401641 keyboard extension cable.

CAUTION: MAKE SURE THE NONCOMPONENT SIDE OF EITHER CIRCUIT CARD DOES NOT REST ON OR

AGAINST ANYTHING THAT WILL CAUSE SHORTING DURING TROUBLESHOOTING OPERATIONS.

5-50

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


ROP Opcon

ROP opcon troubleshooting consists solely of checking keyswitch operation and indicator lighting. Remove power, disconnect ROP opcon from ROP set and remove opcon cover and mounting bracket. · Arrange opcon as shown below.

Connect two test leads with probes to +12 (terminal 6) and GND (terminal 6) of a 40PSU103 power supply. The +12 test lead MUST include a series connected 430 ohm, 1/2 watt resistor most conveniently placed in the probe.

Use the multimeter (R X 1 scale) to check opcon keyswitch operation and the power supply and probes to check opcon indicator lamps per troubleshooting of this section.

3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS

The following charts pertain to the early design 40K103 (410059 and 410054 or 410074 circuit cards) or 40K108 (410096 circuit card) opcon:

Chart 1

Chart 2

Chart 3

Chart 4

Chart 5

Chart 6

Chart 7

Chart 8

Power Test Fails (Page 5-53)

Control Row Indicator Fails to Light (Page 5-54)

No Repeat Characters Output From the Opcon (Page 5-56)

Incorrect Characters From the Opcon (Page 5-57)

No Data Output From the Opcon and "Loopback Test Mode" Does Not

Function (Page 5-65)

No Alarm (Page 5-69)

Delay in Repeat (Page 5-71)

All Control Row Indicators Flash (Page 5-73)

The following charts pertain to the late design 40K108 (410096) opcons:

Chart 9

Chart 10

Chart 11

Chart 12

Chart 13

Chart 14

Chart 15

Chart 16

"TST" or "Console Test" Indicator Fails to Light (Page 5-74)

Control Row Indicator Fails to Light (Page 5-77)

No Repeat (Page 5-79)

Incorrect Characters From the Opcon (Page 5-82)

No Data Output From the Opcon (Page 5-84)

No Alarm (Page 5-88)

"Loopback" Test Does Not Work (Page 5-89)

Single Key Failure (Page 5-90)

The following chart pertains to the 40K002 ROP opcons.

Chart 17 ROP Opcon Troubleshooting Using 4OPSU1O1 or Equivalent (Page 5-18)

5-51

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

NOTES

5-52

STEP

1

ACTION

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART I

POWER TEST FAILS

NORMAL INDICATION AND

CORRECTIVE PROCEDURE

Check to see that supply voltages are present at B1,

A12 (VSS) and B2, A7 (VDD) on 410074 card.

2 Check for correct voltages on terminals of 405925

TST indicator assembly when lamp should be lit.

If voltages are not present, check for dirty or broken connector pins, open lands, cut leads, etc.

If voltages are present, go to Step 2.

Terminal Side of Indicator Keyswitch

5-53

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3

. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Contd)

CHART I (Con’td)

POWER TEST FAILS

STEP

2

(Cont)

ACTION



If voltages are correct, replace defective

405925 TST indicator assembly.

If voltages are incorrect, check for open

CR15 diode, open emitter to collector on Q7 transistor or shorted emitter to collector on Q6 transistor on 410059 circuit card.

NOTE: Refer to Pages 5-98 and 5-101, Functional Schematics FS-1 and FS-4 (410059) circuit card) and Page 5-

107, Functional Schematic FS-10 (410074 circuit card).

STEP

1

CHART 2

CONTROL ROW INDICATOR FAILS TO LIGHT

ACTION NORMAL INDICATION AND

CORPECTIVE PROCEDURE

Depress RETURN and ESC P fully and check to see that TST CLEAR lamp lights..

If TST CLEAR lamp fails to light, go

o Page 5-53

If TST CLEAR lamp lights, go to Step

2 Enter loop-back test mode and

perform test. Refer to Page 5-15

3. FUNCTIONAL TESTS, Step 2

5-54

If failing lamp fails to light in test mode, go to

Step 3

If failing lamp lights in test mode, check for defective keyswitch with ailing lamp (refer to

Pages 5-56 and 5-57, Steps 1 and 2).

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 2 (Contd)

STEP

3

CONTROL ROW INDICATOR FAILS TO LIGHT



Check to see that associated lamp driver output voltage is correct at MLB5-2, 3, 4, 8, 9, 10, 11,

31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 37, or 38 (SSI) on 410059 card when lamp should be lit.

5-55

If voltage output on lamp driver goes to VSS when lamp should be lit, replace defective indicator keyswitch.

If voltage output on lamp driver remains at VDD when lamp should be lit, replace defective MLB5.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3

. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Contd)

CHART 3

NO REPEAT CHARACTERS OUTPUT FROM THE OPCON

•Place opcon in local mode

.

STEP ACTION NORMAL INDICATION AND


1 Depress a repeatable key fully. Hold and check I/O signals on MLB8-8 through 12 (KL) on 410059 card

I/O signal of one scan period from any sense amplifier with a repeatable key depressed fully.

5-56

(1)I/O signal of one scan period (4.57 ms) from any sense amplifier with no depressed keyswitches.*

*When depressed, CAPS LOCK key will cause a depression pulse in I/O signal at MLB8-10. This pulse has no effect on any repeatable key.

If there are no other keyswitch depressions besides the desired repeat keyswitch depressions, replace

MLB8 on 410059 card.

If there are other unwanted keyswitch depressions present in the I/O signal, go to Step 2.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 3 (Contd)

NO REPEAT CHARACTER OUPUT FROM THE OPCON

STEP

2



Release depressed repeat keyswitch and check inputs of sense amplifier associated with unwanted keyswitch depression

If inputs to sense amplifier do not indicate a keyswitch depression replace sense amplifier associated with false depression.

Signal of Sense Amplifier Input Having a Keyswitch depression:

If input to sense amplifier does indicate a keyswitch depression.

a. Check for open connection to keyswitch associated with sense amplifier input having depression indicated.

b. Check for cold solder connections at terminals of keyswitch.

c. If above results show no difficulties, replace defective keyswitch.

NOTE: Refer to Pages 5-98 and 5-99, Functional Schematics FS-1 and FS-2 (410059 circuit card).

CHART 4

INCORRECT CHARACTERS FROM THE OPCON

*Place opcon in local mode.

STEP

1

ACTION

Check that all switch address signals which are sent from MLB8-17 through

25 to MLB6 (ROM) on 410059 card are correct (external trigger on AE --

MLB8-3).



5-57

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Contd)

STEP

CHART 4 (Contd)


ACTION

1

(Cont)



(1)MLB8-22 key depressed fully and held.

If switch address signal is not correct on MLB8-17 through 25 and the signal on each data level toggles, replace defective MLB8.

If switch address signal is incorrect on

MLB8-17 through 25 and the signal on each data level does not toggle, go to

Step 2.

If switch address signal sent to MLB6 on MLB8-17 through 25 is correct, go to Step 3.

NOTE 1: Depress a repeatable key fully and hold to view signals required in chart (ie, cursor

↑

).

NOTE 2: Refer to Page 5-99, Functional Schematic FS-2 (410059 circuit card) and Pages 5-102 and 5-103, Functional

Schematics FS-5 and FS-6 (410074 circuit card).

5-58

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W44-4-300-1


STEP

2 a

CHART 4 (Contd)




If one of the data levels is held at near VSS voltage, the defective MOS package can be found by the following technique

If lead which was held at near VSS goes to VDD the defective package may be either MLB8 or MLB5, go to

Step 2b

Cut the conductors on noncomponent side of

410059 card which go to VSS on MLB6-1 and to

VREF on MLB6-23.

b.

Next, cut the conductor on non component side of 410059 card for this data level at input MLB5-

16 through 24 (SSI).

If data level goes to VDD, replace defective package

MLB5; if it does not, replace defective package MLB8

NOTE: Replace package and make certain that all conductors that were cut are repaired by soldering a piece of wire in place where conductors were cut.

3 Check that all data bits which are sent from

MLB6-6 through 10 and 16 through 19 to MLB8 on 410059 card are correct (external trigger on -

OE MLB6-11).

5-59

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



STEP

3

(cont)

CHART 4 (Contd)




4

MLB6-9 waveform, with

key depressed fully and held.

If any data bit (ASCII -American National Standard Code for

Information Interchange) is incorrect on MLB6-6 through 10 and 16 through 19 and the signal on each data level toggles, replace defective MLB6.

If any data bit (ASCII) is incorrect on MLB6-6 through 10 and

16 through 19 and the signal on each data level does not toggle, go to Step 2.

If all data bits sent to MLB8 on MLB6-6 through 10 and 16 through 19 are correct, go to Step 4.

Check that L9 signal on MLB8-16 remains near VDD during output enable for a valid character generated

Top Signal -L9 signal at VDD during output of data bit -see. bottom signal

If L9 signal remains near VSS, check for shorted emitter to

collector on Q9 transistor

5-60

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


STEP

4(Cont)

5

CHART 4 (Contd)




Check that all ASCII character input signals on

MLB5-16 through 24 on 410059 card are correct

If L9 signal remains near VDD during output enable for a valid character generated, go to Step 5.

MLB5-19 waveform, with key depressed fully and held

6

If any data bit (ASCII) is incorrect on MLB5-16 through 24 and the signal on each data level toggles, replace defective MLB5 on 410059 card.

If any data bit (ASCII) is incorrect on MLB5-16 through 24 and the signal on each data level does not toggle, go to Step 2.

If all data bits are correct on MLB5-16 through 24, go to Step 6.

Check that serial out signal on MLB5-15 on 410059 card is correct Trigger oscilloscope internally to view this signal

NOTE: This signal consists of an 18 .bit character having a start bit, steer bit, and 16 data bits (only

.ASCII b

0 through b

7

are shown in waveform).

MLB5-15 waveform, with key depressed fully and held.

5-61

If serial out signal is incorrect, replace defective


If serial out signal is correct, go to Step 7.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 4 (Contd)


7

STEP ACTION NORMAL INDICATION AND


Check output data signal on MLD3-6 on 410074 card.

Trigger oscilloscope E key depressed fully and held.

externally on serial out data pin A6

MLD3-6 waveform, with key depressed fully and held

If signal is incorrect or not present, check for open

CR7 diode, replace MLD3.

If signal is present and correct, go to Step 8.

8 Check space bit timing signal on M1E4-1 on 410074 card. Trigger internally

MLE4-1 waveform

Continual signal

5-62

If signal is incorrect or not present, check for open

CRS diode, shorted C11 capacitor, replace MLE3.

If signal is present and correct, go to Step 9.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


STEP

9

CHART 4 (Contd)


ACTION

Check output data signal on MLE4-12 on 410074 card. External trigger on pin A6 (see step 12 for location of MLE4-12.)



MLE4-12 waveform, with key depressed fully and held

10 Check output data signal on MLC2-8 on 410074 card. External trigger on pin A6.

If signal is not present, replace MLE4.

If signal is present, go to Step 10

NOTE: This signal consists of an 18 bit character having a start bit, steer bit and 16 bits (only ASCII through b0 are shown in waveform).

MLC2-8 waveform, with key depressed fully and held.

5-63

If signal is not present, replace MLC2.

If signal is correct, go to Step 11.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. TROUBIESHOOTING CHARTS (Contd)

CHART 4 (Contd)



CORRECTIVE PROCEDURE STEP

11

ACTION

Check output data signal on MLA2-2 and 3 on 410074 card. External trigger on pin A6.

.

key depressed fully and held

12 Check output data signal at posts P5 and P6 of

410599 card. External trigger on pin A6

If signal is not present, replace MLA2.


key depressed fully and held.

13 Check output data signal at outputs

(2) and (4) of 410599 card.

External trigger on pin A6.

If signal is not present, check for open wiring to 410074 card. Check continuity of feed-through filter key depressed fully and held.

5-64

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 4 (Contd)


STEP

13(Cont)



If signal is not present, check for open output winding in T1 transformer, poor solder connections.

If signal is present, opcon is good, check associated controller logic.

CHART 5

NO DATA OUTPUT FROM OPCON AND LOOP-BACK TEST MODE DOES NOT FUNCTION

1

STEP ACTION



Depress RETURN, LINE FEED or ERASE INPUT to see that TST CLEAR lamp lights.

If TST CLEAR lamp fails to light go to Page 5-53

If TST CLEAR lamp lights,-go to Step 2

2 Check to see that VCC voltage is present on pin Al of

410074 card

5-65

If VCC voltage is not present, check switching

regulator. (Refer to Page 5-103, Functional

Schematic FS-11).

If VCC voltage is present, go to Step 3

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 5 (Contd)



CORRECTIVE PROCEDURE STEP ACTION

3 Check to see that 01H and 02H clocks are present on MLB1-22 and 21, respectively on 410059 card

4 Depress a repeatable key fully --hold -- and check

I/0 signals on MLB8-8 through 12 on 410059 card.

If

Φ

1H and

Φ

2H clocks are not present, check high

'frequency clock and drivers. (Refer to Page 5-100,

Functional Schematic FS-3).

If

Φ

1H and

Φ

2H clocks are present, go to Step 4.

5-66

(External trigger on EOS)

Pin 8 thru Pin 12, I/O signal of one scan period (4.57 ms) from any sense amplifier with no depressed keyswitches.*

*When depressed, the CAPS LOCK key will cause a depression pulse in

STEP

4

(Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 5 (Contd)


ACTION



I/O signal at MLB8-10. This pulse has no effect on any repeatable key.

5

Check that all switch address signals on MLB8-17 through 25 are correct on 410059 card

(Refer to Page 5-58, Step 1).

5-67

(4)I/O signal of one scan period from any sense amplifier with a repeatable key depressed fully.

If there are other unwanted keyswitch depressions

present in the I/O signal, refer to Page 5-57, Step 2.

If there are no other keyswitch depressions besides the desired repeat keyswitch depression go to

Step 5.

If switch address signal is not correct and the signal on each data .level toggles, replace defective MLB8.

If switch address signal is not correct and the signal on

each data level does not toggle, go to Page 5-59, Step

2.

If switch address signal is correct, go to Step 6.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 5 (Contd)

NO DATA OUTPUT FROM OPC AND LOOP-BACK TEST MODE DOES NOT FUNCTION

6

STEP

7

ACTION



Check that serial out signal on

MLB5-15 on 410059 card is correct

(Refer to Page 5-61, Step 6).

Check to see that

Φ

1L and

Φ

2L clocks are present on

MLB5-7 and 6, respectively on 410059 card.

If serial out signal is not present,. go to Step 7.

If serial out signal is present, go to Page 5-62, Step 7.

5-68

If

Φ

1L and

Φ

2L clocks are not present, check the low

frequency clock drivers. (Refer to Page 5-105,

Functional Schematic FS-8).

If

Φ

1L and

Φ

2L clocks are present, replace defective


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 6

NO ALARM



1

ACTION

Check for alarm signal on pin All of 410074

card (see Page 5-72, Notes 1 through 4.)

If waveform is not present, momentarily jump pin A12 to All.

If alarm sounds, replace defective 342553 TSS1 (MLB5),

410059 card.

If waveform is present, and alarm does not sound, go to Step

2.

2 Check for alarm signal on MLE7-3 on 410074

card (see Page 5-71, Note 3

If waveform is not present, check for shorted C25 capacitor or shorted input on MLE7 on 410074 card.

5-69

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 6 (Contd)

NO ALARM

STEP ACTION



2(Cont)

3 Check for alarm signal on MLE7-8 on 410074 card

(see Page 5-72, Note 3).

If the waveform is present and alarm does not sound, go to Step 3.

If waveform is present, and alarm does not sound, go to Step 4

If waveform is not present, check for

Φ

2L predrive signal on MLE7-4 on 410074 card.

5-70

If

φ

2L predrive signal is present, replace MLE7 on

410074 card.

If

φ

2L predrive signal is not present, replace MLD3 on

410074 card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

M40 SHOP MANUAL 359

CHART 7

DELAY IN REPEAT



1 Depress a repeatable key fully. Hold and check I/O signals on Pins 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 of MLB8 on

410059 card.

Note: Signal appears when key is depressed

2.

Check address enable (AE) on MLB8 Pin 3 as a repeatable key is fully depressed

1/0 signal of one scan period from any sense amplifier with a repeatable key depressed fully.

If signal is incorrect go to page 5-29. If signal is correct go to Step 2.

If the same delay exists in this signal, that appear in cursor

.response, replace MLB8.

5-71

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 7 (Contd)

DELAY IN REPEAT

STEP ACTION

4 Check for alarm signal on collector of Q14 transistor on 410074 card (see Note 3).



5 Check for alarm signal on emitter of Q15 transistor on 410074 card (see Q15 transistor

(shown in Step 4) on 410074 card (see Note

3).

If waveform is not present, replace defective Q14 transistor.

If waveform is present and alarm does not sound, go to Step 5.

If waveform is not present, check for shorted C21, C22 or C23 capacitors, or shorted emitter to collector on Q15 transistor, etc. on 410074 card.

If waveform is present, alarm should sound.

NOTE 1: Controller must have an alarm detect circuit.

NOTE 2: Generating a bell code at the opcon will not cause the alarm to sound.

NOTE 3: Depress the spacebar fully and hold to view signals required in chart.

NOTE 4: Refer to Page 5-105, Functional Schematic FS-9 (410074 circuit card).

5-72

All Control Row Indicators Flash-in Local Loopback Test Mode When a Character

Having the Eight Bit Spacing is Generated

NOTE 1: Place opcon in local loopback test mode.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTE 2: Depress PERIOD fully and hold to view signals required in chart.

ACTION

CHART 8



Check voltage at MLB5-24 on 410059 card when lamps are flashing (see Note 2)..

If this level remains at VDD while lamps flash, replace defective MLB5

5-73

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 9

'TST" INDICATOR FAILS TO LIGHT

STEP ACTION

1 Check to see that supply voltages are present at Pin 1

(O V), Pin 2 (-12 V) and Pin 4 (+12 V) of the dip connector on 346387 cable assembly.



If voltages are not present, check for dirty or broken connector pins, open lands, cut cable, etc.

If voltages are present, go to Step 2.

5-74

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2

STEP

CHART 9 (Contd)

"TST" INDICATOR FAILS TO LIGHT

Check for correct voltage at Pin 23 of MLA3 when

"TST" lamp should be on.

ACTION



"TST" or "CONSOL TEST" lamp "ON"

3 Check to see that 01 and 02 clocks are present on

Pins 22 and 21, respectively, of MLA1 on 410096 card.

5-75

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Contd)

3

STEP

(Cont)

CHART 9 (Contd)

"TST INDICATOR FAILS TO LIGHT

ACTION



If

∅

1 and

∅

2 clocks are not present, go to Chart 11, Step

3.

If

∅

1 and

∅

2 clocks are present, go to Step 4.

4 Check I/O signal at Pin 14 of MLA3 for depression of "RETURN" and "QUOTES" keys when depressed fully.

If I/O signal indicates the desired keyswitch depressions and "TST" indicator fails to light, replace MLA3 or MLA5 respectively.

5 Depress "RETURN" and "QUOTES" keys fully, hold and check inputs of MLB3 associated with depressed keyswitches.

If inputs to sense amplifier do not indicate the desired keyswitch depressions, replace defective keyswitch(es).

If inputs to sense amplifier do indicate the desired keyswitch depressions, replace MLB3 or MLA6.

5-76

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 10

CONTROL ROW INDICATOR FAILS TO LIGHT

STEP ACTION

1 Place keyboard in local loopback test mode per table below and check to see that test indicator lights and remains on.



If "TST" lamp fails to light, go to Chart 8.

LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST TABLE

If "TST" lamp lights, go to Step 2.

2 Perform "Loopback" test. Refer to Section C, Part

4. Testing for Functional Tests -- 40K108 Opcons.

If failing lamp fails to light in test mode, go to Step 3.

If failing lamp lights in test mode, check for defective keyswitch with failing 1a--(refer to Chart 8, Steps 1 and 2).

5-77

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 10 (Contd)

CONTROL ROW INDICATOR FAILS TO LIGHT



3 Check to see that associated lamp driver output voltage is correct at pin numbers per table below when the associated indicators should be on.

If voltage on the lamp driver output is correct when lamp should be on, check resistance of associated current limiting resistor and replace if necessary.

If resistor checks OK, replace defective indicator keyswitch. If voltage on the lamp driver output remains at an off state when lamp should be on, replace defective

MLA2.

Note: Vgg 1 = 0 V dc.

Vss = +12 V dc.

5-78

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 11

NO REPEAT

•

Place opcon in local mode.

STEP ACTION

1 Depress a repeatable key fully. Hold and check

I/O signals on Pins 10 through 14 of MLA3 on

410096 card.



If there are no other keyswitch depressions besides the desired repeat keyswitch depressions, replace MLA3.

If there are other unwanted keyswitch depressions present in the I/O signal, go to Step 2.

I/O signal of one scan period from any sense amplifier with a repeatable key depressed fully.

I/O signal of one scan period (4.57 ms) from any sense amplifier with no depressed keyswitches.*

‡

The "CAPS LOCK" key when depressed will cause a depression pulse in I/O signal at Pin 12 of MLA3. This pulse has no effect on any repeatable key.

5-79

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359




NO REPEAT

STEP ACTION

2 Release depressed repeat keyswitch and check inputs of sense amplifier associated with unwanted key-switch depression.



If inputs to sense amplifier, do not indicate a keyswitch depression, replace sense amplifier associated with false depression.

Signal of Sense Amplifier Input Having a Keyswitch

Depression

If input to sense amplifier does indicate a keyswitch depression: a. Check for open connection to keyswitch associated with sense amplifier input having depression indicated.

b. Check for cold solder connections at terminals of keyswitch.

c. If above results show no difficulties, replace defective keyswitch.

5-80

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



NO REPEAT

SENSE AMP TABLE

5-81

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

NOTES

5-82

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 12

INCORRECT CHARACTERS FROM THE KEYBOARD

STEP ACTION

1 Check that Serial Send Data signal on Pin 3 of

MLA3 is correct.



NOTE: This signal consists of an 18 bit character having a start bit, a steer bit and 16 data bits (only ASCII b

0

through b

7

are shown in waveform).

·-Key Depressed Fully and Held

Trigger oscilloscope internally to view this signal. See

Note 1 and 2 below.

If Serial Send Data signal is incorrect, replace defective

MLA3

.

If Serial Send Data signal is correct, go to Step 2.

NOTE 1: Depress a repeatable key fully and hold to view signals required in chart (i.e., cursor ).

NOTE 2: Refer to Functional

Schematics

.

2 Check that SSI data signal (ITC) on Pins 5 or 6 of

MLA2 is correct.

Key Depressed Fully and Held

External trigger on Pin 3 of MLA3.

If signal is not correct, replace

MLA2

.


5-83

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359




INCORRECT CHARACTERS FROM THE KEYBOARD

STEP ACTION

3 Check that SSI data signal is correct at Pin 13 and

Pin 14 of the dip connector on 346387 cable assembly.




If signal is not present, check for open output winding on

XFMR1 transformer or poor solder connections, etc.

If signal is present, opcon is good, check associated controller logic.

Bottom View of Dip Connector

5-84

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

M40 SHOP MAN'UAL 359

CHART 13

NO DATA OUTPUT FROM THE KEYBOARD

STEP ACTION

1 Place keyboard in local loopback test mode (see table below) and check to see that "TST" indicator lights and remains on. (See Note below.)



If "TST" indicator fails to light in local loopback mode, go to

Chart 9.

If "TST" indicator lights, place opcon out of local loopback test mode to extinguish "TST" indicator and go to Step 8.

(See Table).

NOTE: If "TST" indicator is lighted after power is on, go to

Step 2.

2 Check to see that 01L and 02L clocks are present at MLA2, MLA3 and 01 and 02 clocks at all sense amplifiers (See D. 4. REFERENCE MATERIAL).

If

∅

1 and

∅

2 clocks are not present, go to Step 3.

If

∅

1 and

∅

2 clocks are present, go to Step 8.

5-85

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359







3 Check to see that

∅

1 and

∅

2 clock predrives are present at Pins 18 and 19 respectively, of MLA2.

4 Check signal at timing Pins 2 and 3 of MLA2.

NOTE: The timing pins are very sensitive to stray capacitance. Many oscilloscope probes will cause improper operation of the phase-locked loop if they are attached to either Pin 2 or Pin 3 of MLA2.

If

∅

1 PRE and

∅

2 PRE clocks are present, replace MLB1.

∅

1 PRE and

∅

2 PRE are not present, go to Step 4.

If signal is not present, go to Step 5.

If signal is present, go to Step 7.

5-86

STEP ACTION

5 Check for correct signal at emitter of Q2.

TM 11-5815606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1






6 Check for correct PU signal at Pin 8 of MLA2.

If signal is present, check the timing components R31, R32 and C8.


7 Check to see that ITD signal is present at Pins 39 or 40 of MLA2.

If signal is present, check associated PU filter components

(C6, C7, R27, R29, and Q2).


If signal is present, replace MLA2 or MLA3. If signal is not present, check for open output winding on XFMR2 transformer, check R22, SSI cable, etc.

5-87

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359





STEP ACTION

8 Check that Serial Send Data signal is present on

Pin 3 of MLA3.



NOTE: This signal consists of an 18 bit character having a start bit, a steer bit and 16 data bits (only ASCII b

0

thru b

7 are shown in waveform).


If Serial Send Data Signal is incorrect, replace defective

MLA3.

9 Check that ITC signal is present at Pin 5 and Pin 6 of MLA2.

If Serial Send Data signal is correct, go to Step 2.


If signal is not correct, replace

MLA2.


5-88

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 14

NO ALARM

STEP ACTION

1 With alarm volume turned up, enter the loopback test mode, then depress the "RETURN" or "ERASE

INPUT" or "LINE FEED" key fully. (See Notes 1, 2 and 3.)



The "TST" indicator lights and remains lighted and the alarm sounds as long as the "RETURN", "ERASE INPUT" or "LINE FEED" key is fully depressed.

If alarm sounds, alarm circuit is working. Go to Step 3.

NOTE 1: Controller must have an alarm detect circuit.

If alarm does not sound, go to Step 2.

NOTE 2: Generating a bell code at the opcon will not cause the alarm to sound locally.

NOTE 3: Refer to Functional Schematic.

2 With keyboard in loopback test mode and the specified key in Step 1 is fully depressed, check alarm signal at Pin 21 of

MLA3

.

3 Clear the loopback test mode, then depress the space bar fully and hold. Check for alarm signal at

Pin 14 of MLA2.

If signal is present and alarm does not sound, check R17 and 346370 crystal assembly.

If signal is not present, replace MLA3 or MLA5.

5-89

TM I 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 3, W4-4-300-1

359



ACTION


NO ALARM



3

(Cont)

If alarm signal is present and alarm does not sound, replace MLA3.

If alarm signal is not present when alarm should sound, replace MLA2.

CHART 15

LOOPBACK TEST DOES NOT WORK

STEP ACTION

1 Depress "RETURN" "LINE FEED" or '"RASE

INPUT" and "QUOTES" keys fully and check to see that '"TST" indicator lights and remains on.



If 'TST" indicator fails to light, go to Chart 9.

If "TST" indicator lights, go to Step 2.

2 Check to see that L-LPBK/HALT lead (Pin 22 of

ML3) is high (approximately +11 V dc) when “TST" is lighted.

If L-LPBK/HALT lead remains at approximately O V dc, replace MLA3.

If L-LPBK/HALT lead is at approximately +11 V dc, and loopback test does not work, replace MLA2.

5-90

•Place opcon in local mode.

STEP ACTION

1. Depress key in question several times.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 16

SINGLE KEY FAILURE



Check for proper tactile feel. If key feels sluggish or clicks are not heard, replace keyswitch. If key feels normal; go to

Step 2.

2. Check input of sense amplifier associated with key in question, while depressing key.

3. Check Output of sense amplifier (pin 25) associated with key in question, while depressing key.


Depression

If signal is not present, replace keyswitch.



Depression

If signal is not present, replace keyswitch.


5-91

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Contd)


SINGLE KEY FAILURE

STEP ACTION

4 Check Serial Send Data (Pin 3) of TKL for proper signal when key is depressed.



This signal consists of an 18 bit character having a start bit, a steer bit and 16 character bits (only ASCII b

0

through b

7 are shown in waveform.

-Key Depressed Fully and Held

If Serial Send Data signal is incorrect, replace defective

MLA3.

5-92

ACTION

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 17

RO OPCON TROUBLESHOOTING



1 Using the equipment arrangement detailed on

Page 5-49, RO Opcon, hold GND probe on pin 9 of

opcon connector. Apply +12 probe with 430 ohms resistor progressively to pins 1, 3, 5 and 7 of opcon connector. All blocking keytops should be temporarily removed.

The corresponding lamps should light in the color indicated.

If all lamps fail to light, check for open ground lead. (Refer to schematic.)

If one lamp fails to light, check wiring to failing lamp or replace keyswitch.

If all lamps light as indicated, go to Step 2.

RO Opcon Schematic

2 Using the multimeter as a continuity checker, hold the common probe on pin 9 of the opcon connector. Hold OHMS probe on pin 2 of the opcon connector and depress OPT II. Repeat with

TEST, PARITY ERROR, and TERM READY, moving the OHMS probe to pins 4, 6 and 8, respectively.

Each keyswitch, when operated, should register continuity on the multimeter.

If a keyswitch fails the continuity check, check wiring to failing keyswitch, or replace open keyswitch.

Replace any blocking keytops removed.

5-93

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. REFERENCE MATERIAL

The opcon diagrams, functional schematics and keyswitch assignment tables are provided as aids in locating and clearing troubles encountered while testing and troubleshooting.

A.

B.

OPCON DIAGRAMS .............................................................................................................................

5-92

FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS ...............................................................................................................

5-93

A. OPCON DIAGRAMS

5-94

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


FS-7

FS-8

FS-9

FS-10

FS-11

FS-12

FS-13

FS-14

B. FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS

The following functional schematics support the troubleshooting analysis contained in D. 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

CHARTS (refer to Page 5-51).

FS-1 Keyswitches and Sense Amplifiers (410059 Circuit Card)

FS-2

FS-3

FS-4

FS-5

FS-6

Keyswitch and Interface Logic (410059 Circuit Card)

High Frequency Clock and Drivers (410059 Circuit Card)

Power Distribution (410059 Circuit Card)

Di-Phase Logic (410074 Circuit Card)

Serial Data Driver and Receiver (410074 Circuit Card)

Loopback Test (410074 Circuit Card)

Low Frequency Clock Drivers (410074 Circuit Card)

Flash Timer and Alarm (410074 Circuit Card)


Switching Regulator (410074 Circuit Card)

Keyswitches and Sense Amplifiers (410096 Circuit Card)

Keyswitch and Interface Logic (410096 Circuit Card)


5-95

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. REFERENCE MATERIAL (Contd)

Functional Schematics

The following functional schematics support the troubleshooting analysis beginning on Page 5-24, 3.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS.

For detailed circuit descriptions and/or complete data interchange and clock and interface timing diagrams, refer to

Wiring Diagram Package 0458WDP which may be ordered from Teletype Corporation.

Functional Schematic Notes

CIRCUIT NOTES

1. SUPPLY VOLTAGES:

THE FOLLOWING VOLT-

AGES ARE MEASURED

IN RESPECT TO VDD-

2. SIGNAL VOLTAGES:

THE INPUT VOLTAGES FOR PIN NUMBERS

A2, A3, A4, A8 AND THE OUTPUT

VOLTAGES FOR PIN NUMBERS A6, A9,

A10, A11, ALL SWING BETWEEN VSS

AND VDD. THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE FOR

PIN NUMBER A5 SWINGS BETWEEN VCC

AND V

DD

-

4. ALL CAPACITANCE IN MICROFARADS

UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

5. SYMBOLS:

SIGNAL GROUND

FRAME OR CHASSIS GROUND

LETTER OR TITLE IN CIRCLE

INDICATES PRESENCE OF AN

OPTION WHICH THE CUSTOMER CAN

ARRANGE TO SUIT HIS CHOICE OR

REQUIREMENT WITHIN THE POS-

SIBILITIES SHOWN.

CIRCUITRY WITHIN SINGLE SOLID

LINE ENCLOSURE. IS SHOWN FOR

REFERENCE ONLY. IT IS SHOWN

IN DETAIL ELSEWHERE IN THE

SAME SD.

NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT

INFORMATION NOTES

1. TERMINALS DESIGNATIONS ENCLOSED IN

PARENTHESES ARE FOR REFERENCE AND

ARE NOT MARKED ON COMPONENTS.

2. ALL RESISTANCE VALUES IN OHMS UNLESS

OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.

3. ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4 WATT UNLESS

OTHERWISE SHOWN.

TEST POINT

SUMMATION

EQUIPMENT NOTES

THE 410059 CIRCUIT CARD ASSEMBLY IS

MANUFACTURED FOR CAPS LOCK MODE OF

OPERATION.

5-96

Power Distribution (410059 Circuit Card) (FS-4)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-101

4. REFERENCE MATERIAL, Functional Schematics (Contd)

Di-Phase Logic (410074 Circuit Card) (FS-5)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


NOTE

: At customer identification issue 1B, R16 and associated connections added.

5-102

Serial Data Driver and Receiver (410074 Circuit Card) (FS-6)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-103

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

4. REFERENCE MATERIAL, Functional Schematics (Contd)

Loop-Back Test (410074 Circuit Card) (FS-7)


5-104

Low Frequency Clock Drivers (410074 Circuit Card) (FS-8)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969.LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300 1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MANUL 359

5-105

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4.

REFERENCE MATERIAL, Functional Schematics (Contd)

Flash Timer and Alarm (410074 Circuit Card) (FS-9)

359

5-107

Power Distribution (410074 Circuit Card) (FS-10)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-107

4.

REFERENCE MATERIAL, Functional Schematics (Contd)

Switching Regulator (410074 Circuit Card) (FS-11)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5-108

KD Opcon Keyswitch Assignments

Sense Amplifier Keyswitch Assignments

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40O SHOP MANUAL 359

NOTE 1: Unshift keytop symbols shown only.

NOTE 2: RCB arrangement shown.

5-109

4.

REFERENCE MATERIAL (Contd)

40K103 Keyswitch Codes -- Switch Address Coding

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5-110

5-111

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4.


40K103 Keyswitch Codes -- Switch Address Coding (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5-112

Circuit Block Diagram -- 40K103 Opcon

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-113

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.


Keyswitches and Sense Amplifiers (410096 Circuit Card) (FS-12)

5-114

Keyswitch and Interface Logic (410096 Circuit Card) (FS-13)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-115

4.


Power Distribution (410096 Circuit Card) (FS-14)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188o0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5-116

40K108 Keyswitch Codes -- Switch Address Coding

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-117

4.


40K108 Keyswitch Bodes -- Switch Address Coding (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5-118

5-119

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTES

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

5-120

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



1.

ADJUSTMENTS

NOTE:

The clearance between the cover and keytop is the only adjustment provided on the KD opcon. Normally, readjustment is not necessary unless the cover is replaced or if there is an interference between keytop and cover.

Cover-to-Keytop Adjustment

Requirement: Gap, approximately equal in four places shown.

To Adjust: Remove cover and loosen three mounting screws friction tight on both sides of console.

Insert screwdriver blade into adjusting slot and move keyboard assembly forward or to the rear to gain "gap" clearance.

Tighten screws, replace cover and check gaps. If the gaps are not approximately equal after reassembly, remove cover and repeat the adjustment.

2.

LUBRICATION

NOTE: Only the side frame slotted holes as detailed require occasional lubrication -and then sparingly. Lubrication of any other part, assembly, keyswitch or the opcon as a whole is NOT required and MUST be avoided.

Lubricate the slotted holes on each side sparingly only with 97116 grease. Oil is NOT permissible.


1.

GENERAL

This section covers KD or RO opcon removal from an assembly to an associated set and disassembly or reassembly of either opcon down to or up from basic components.

5-121

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


1.

GENERAL (Contd)

Precautions should be taken to assure that the opcon is disassembled and reassembled under clean conditions. No oil, grease, or other liquids should be allowed on unassembled parts, subassemblies, keyswitches, or the complete opcon.

The locations of major subassemblies and parts are shown on Page 5-123, 3. SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION -KD

and Page 5-140, 6. SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION -RO with references to applicable disassembly/reassembly

procedures.

Reference in the procedures to left or right and up or down and top or bottom, etc., refer to the opcon in its normal operating position.

When removing a subassembly or part from the opcon, follow the removal procedures and note how each part is removed and the sequence of its removal. For reassembly, reverse the removal procedure except where different instructions are given.

CAUTION: TO AVOID POSSIBLE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE MDS DEVICES, OR CARD WITH MDS DEVICES,

DUE TO ELECTRICAL STATIC DISCHARGE BY SERVICE PERSONNEL, THE DETAILED PROCEDURES LISTED

SHOULD BE FOLLOWED.

(1) ALL MOS DEVICES SHOULD BE DELIVERED AND STORED IN CONDUCTIVE CARRIERS SUCH AS

FOAM PADS OR ALUMINUM TUBES.

(2) ALL HANDLING OF MDS DEVICES, OR CARDS WITH MDS DEVICES, SHOULD BE DONE AT A

GROUNDED BENCH WITH A CONDUCTIVE FOAM PAD OR AT A LOCATION WHERE THE SERVICE

PERSONNEL CAN BE MAINTAINED AT GROUND POTENTIAL.*

(3) ALL PERSONNEL HANDLING MOS DEVICES, OR CIRCUIT CARDS WITH MDS DEVICES, MUST WEAR

A STATIC PROTECTION GROUNDING STRAP ADJUSTED TO MAKE FIRM CONTACT WITH THE SKIN

AT ALL TIMES.*

(4) MOS DEVICES DELIVERED IN ALUMINUM TUBES OR FOAM PADS MAY BE TRANSFERRED TO

WORK AREA PAD BY TOUCHING CARRIER OR PAD FIRST AND REMDVING DEVICE BY THEIR

PACKAGE (BODY), RATHER THAN BY THE LEADS, IF AT ALL POSSIBLE. HOWEVER, THESE

DEVICES SHOULD ALWAYS BE POSITIONED SO THAT THE LEGS ARE IN CONTACT WITH THE

FOAM AT ALL TIMES.

(5) SOLDERING IRONS, TEST AND INSERTION EQUIPMENT MUST BE GROUNDED.

*Service personnel are never to be connected directly to ground but rather through a high resistance discharge path of a minimum of one megohm where 115 V ac is present

A separate listing of part numbers, Page 5-144, 9. COMPONENT PARTS LIST -KD AND RO, is included to facilitate

ordering of replacement parts.

Refer to Page 5-2, Tools for a listing of the necessary tools.

5-122

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT -- KD AND RO

Removal

(1) Place thumb on inward tab of left latch and press downward to unlatched position.

(2) Hold opcon firmly with left hand. With right hand place thumb on right latch tab and press downward to unlatched position.

(3) Carefully pull opcon forward to disengage from cabinet.

Replacement

(1) Slide left and right latches down.

(2) Engage connectors and left and right guides into the slots.

(3) Slide left and right latches upward to latched position.

CAUTION: CHECK THAT OPCON IS FIRMLY ATTACHED ON BOTH SIDES BEFORE RELEASING HOLD.

3.

SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION -- KD

NOTE: The number indicated in parentheses after each assembly designates the page covering the disassembly/reassembly procedures.

5-123

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY -- KD

401100 Cover

5-124

410074 Interface and Bell Circuit Card

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-125

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLE -- KD (Contd)

Spacebar Mechanism

Keytops

To remove data keytops:

Place 346260 tool over the keytop and pull up to remove.

CAUTION 1: THE CAPS LOCK KEYTOP MUST BE IN

THE FULLY EXTENDED, UNLATCHED POSITION

BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMDVE THE KEYTOP.

FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS PRECAUTION WILL

RESULT IN A DAMAGED KEYSWITCH.

To remove control keytops and blocking keytops:

(1) Grasp keytop using thumb and index finger.

(2) Exert upward force until keytop releases.

In reassembly of the blocking keytop for the CAPS

LOCK switch only, operate the switch to the latched

(down) position. For all other blocking keytops, position keytop over switch housing and snap down until ridges are retained by notches in switch body.

5-126

To remove new line keytop.

(1) Remove TAB keytop directly above the NEW

LINE keytop.

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-3.00-1


(2) Insert the fork portion of the 406959 keytop extractor under the top edge of the keytop so that the tines of the extractor tool are around the metal post at the top of the keytop and the

340764 spring is depressed under the extractor tool.

(3) Pry up with the extractor tool being sure the tines of the extractor tool pry against the metal plate embedded in the keytop. Pry up until keytop pops loose.

CAUTION 2: CONTROL ROW BLOCKING KEYTOPS

ARE NOT THE SAME ON THE FRONT AND REAR

SIDE AND MUST BE ASSEMBLED WITH THE

PROPER ORIENTATION.

405906 Keytop Shield

Profile of Control Row Blocking Keytop

5-127

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

4.


DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY -- KD (Contd)

Keyswitches

•

Remove 401100 cover(5-124).

•

Remove 402255 pan (5-124).

•

Remove 410074 interface and bell circuit card (5-

125) (if present).

•

Remove keytops (5-126).

•

Remove 405906 keytop shield (5-127).

(1) Remove solder from around terminal pins of keyswitch to be removed.

CAUTION: USE A LOW WATTAGE SOLDERING

IRON (AVOID PROLONGED CONTACT WITH PINS)

ALONG WITH A DESOLDERING TOOL TO PREVENT

DAMAGE TO KEYSWITCH CARD CIRCUITS AND

COMPONENTS.

(2) Place 346257 tool over keyswitch and press downward. When tool bottoms and embossed projections snap into notches on keyswitch, squeeze and pull back on tool to lift keyswitch out.

NOTE: The tool tines must pass between keyswitch housing and inside of channel tines.

In reassembly, insert new keyswitch, observe position of locating lug, and press keyswitch into channel. Switch must snap fully into front and rear channel tines. Hold keyswitch in place and resolder.

5-128

405931 Cover Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


410599 or 410566 Transformer and Filter Circuit Card.

•

Remove 402255 pan (5-124).

•

Remove 405931 cover assembly (5-129).

5-129

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5.

PARTS -- KD

410051 Console Logic Circuit Card

5-130

410096 Console Logic Circuit Card

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-131

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5.

PARTS -- KD (Contd)

Left and Right Side Plate Mechanism

Left Side Plate Mechanism

5-132

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Opcons With Modification Kit 406715 Installed

5-133

5.

PARTS -- KD (Cont)

Keytop Shield and Opcon Frame

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5-134

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY -- RO

401161 Cover

Remove two 184056 screws w/lockwashers mounting cover to keyswitch bracket.

Keytops

(1) Grasp keytop using thumb and index finger.

(2) Exert upward force until keytop releases.

CAUTION: BLOCKING KEYTOPS ARE NOT

THE SAME ON THE FRONT AND REAR SIDE

AND MUST BE ASSEMBLED WITH THE

PROPER ORIENTATION.

Keyswitches

• Remove 401161 cover (see above).

• Remove keytops (see above).

In reassembly of blocking keytops, position blocking keytop over switch housing until ridges are retained by notches in switch body.

Remove two 152893 screws, 110743 lockwashers and 3599 nuts. Remove 402050 receptacle housing and 402046 cover. Unsnap

401149 connector from bracket.

5-141

Remove ten 151152 screws, 110743 lockwashers and 125011 flat washers.

Remove 402049 cover.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31 W4-4-300-1

359


7.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY -- RO (Contd

)

Remove two 184056 screws w/ lockwashers securing keyswitch channel.

Place 346257 tool over keyswitch and press downward. When tool bottoms and embossed projections snap into notches on keyswitch, squeeze and pull back on tool to lift keyswitch out.

NOTE: The tool tines must pass between keyswitch housing and inside of channel tines.

In reassembly, insert new keyswitch, observe position of locating lug, and press keyswitch into channel. Switch must snap fully into front and rear channel tines. Before resoldering, replace insulator, hold keyswitch in place and resolder.

Remove solder from terminal pins securing cable leads and jumpers, and remove insulator.

CAUTION: USE LOW WATTAGE SOLDERING IRON

(AVOID PROLONGED CONTACT WITH PINS) ALONG

WITH A DESOLDERING TOOL TO PREVENT

DAMAGE TO CABLE LEADS.

5-142

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-143

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEHBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS (Contd)

9. COMPONENT PARTS LIST -- KD AND RO

NOTE:

Part

Number

137442

137603

148832

151152

151346

151631

119649

121243

125011

125258

125802

129852

137302

137440

151632

151722

152893

2191

2539

3598

3599

6800

7002

42823

92260

98718

107116

110743

170282

When ordering parts, prefix each number with the letters "TP".

Description and

Page Number

LocwuAher 129,132,

133,135,137,143

Nut, 3/8-32 Hex 143

Nut, 640 Hex 129,

133,135,137,138

Nut, 4-40 Hex 129,

133,141,143

Screw, 640 Shoulder

143

Washer, Flat 137

Washer, Flat 143

Washer, Lock 137,138

Washer, Flat 130,131,

139

Lockwasher 125,129,

132,133,135

Lockwasher 124,129,

134,135,136,139,141,

143

Ring, Retaining 132

Clamp, 3/16 ID Cable

135,137

Washer, Flat 124,129,

133,135,136,139,141

Spring 132

Washer, Flat 143

Resistor, 2,200 OHM

137,138

Capacitor 136

Resistor, 1,000 OHM

139

Resistor, 1500 OHM

136,137,138

Resistor, 510 OHM

139

Capacitor, .47 MFD

137,138

Screw, 6-40 x 3/16

Hex 141,143

Screw, 640x 3/8 Fil

133,143

Screw, 640 x 5/16

Hex 137,138

Screw, 6.40 x 3/8

Hex 137

Screw, 6-40 x 3/16

Hex 125,132,133

Screw, 6-40 x 1/4

Hex 124,129,134,

135,136,139,141,

143

Nut, 6-40 Hex 132

Part

Number

171567

171580

177108

180904

181240

181618

182516

184043

184056

305821

305876

310921

310923

310929

315939

197464

198670

135

199015

300092

300102

300256

315946

315948

315951

315954

315957

315959

Description and

Page Number

Capacitor, .005 MFD

137,138

Resistor, 470 OHM

136

Diode 136,137,138

Tab, Terminal 129,135

Screw w/Lockwasher,

6-40 x 3/16 Hex 134,

136,139

Capacitor, .01 MFD

137,138

Resistor, 91 OHM

136

Resistor, 800 OHM

136

Screw w/Lockwasher

640 x 1/4 Hex 124,

132,141,142,143

Diode 136,137,138,

139

Screw w/Lockwasher,

6.40x 5/16 Hex 129,

Capacitor, .22 MFD

137,138

Resistor 6.8K OHM

137,138,139

Diode 136,137,138

Capacitor, .001 MFD

137,138

Capacitor, .1 MFD

136,137,138

Resistor, 35.7K OHM

137,138

Capacitor, .022 MFD

139

Capacitor, .39 MFD

139

Capacitor, 18 MFD

137,138

Capacitor, .002 MFD

139

Connector 136

Resistor, 100 OHM

137,138,139,140

Resistor, 560 OHM

136

Resistor 139

Resistor, 3300 OHM

139

Resistor, 4700 OHM

136,137,138,139

5-144

Description and

Page Number

Resistor &82K OHM

136

Capacitor, 470 PF

136

Resistor 136,137,

138,139

Resistor, 47000 OHM

137,138,139

Resistor, 220 OHM

137,138

Resistor, 3.9K OHM

137,138

Resistor, 7.5 OHM

139

Resistor, 10000 OHM

136,137,138,139

Resistor, 10K OHM

139

Resistor 136,137,

138,139

Resistor, 1.8K OHM

137,138

Resistor, 100000 OHM

139

Resistor, 18,000 OHM

136,139

Diode 136,139

Resistor, 27.4AK OHM

137,138

Transistor 136,137,138

Resistor, 7.5K OHM

137,138

Resistor, 30.1K OHM

137,138

Capacitor 137,138

Transistor 139

Connector 137,138

Spacer 137,138

Resistor 136,137,138,

139

Resistor, 360 OHM

137,138

Resistor, 22 OHM

136,137,138

Circuit, Integrated

137,138

Circuit, Integrated

137,138

Circuit, Integrated

136,137

Circuit, Integrated

137,138

Part

Number

320273

320275

320276

321213

321507

321508

315961

315976

315989

318801

318802

320026

323148

323606

323725

324144

324903

324908

325034

325077

325163

326553

326573

326602

326751

326823

326846

326852

326853

Part

Number

339408

339601

339602

339716

340701

340720

328783

328785

330640

330641

330645

333241

333407

333410

333411

333416

333417

333481

333482

333727

333736

334665

335622

335800

336470

336810

336948

337330

337336

337871

339002

340721

340722

340730

340731

340762

340764

340767

340770

Description and

Page Number

Resistor 137,138

Resistor 136,139

Resistor, 150 OHM

137,138,139

Resistor 139

Resistor, 560, 000

OHM 136

Transistor 137,138,

139

Resistor, 620 OHM

137,138

Resistor 137,140

Resistor 136

Resistor 137,138

Resistor 137,138

Capacitor 137,138

Capacitor 137,138

Capacitor 136,139

Diode 136,137,138

Diode 136

Resistor 137,138

Capacitor 136

Strap 136,137,138,

139

Plate, Identification

135

Capacitor 136

Capacitor 136

Capacitor 137,138

Plate, Identification

135

Circuit, Integrated

136

Circuit, Integrated

137,138

Circuit, Integrated

137,138

Circuit, Integrated

137,138

Circuit, Integrated

137,138

Keytop 143

Keyswitch, Basic 130,

131,136,139

Keyswitch, Repeat

130,131,136,139

Keyswitch, Latching

130,131,136,139

Channel 130,131,

136,139

Channel 143

Housing 130,131,

136,139

Spring, Compression

127,130,131,136,139

Keytop Assembly 127

Guide 130,131,136,

139

Part

Number

346260

346261

346262

346263

346264

346270

346271

346291

346311

346351

346370

346394

401000

401066

401067

401100

401136

401139

401141

401142

401143

401144

340777

341075

341089

341091

341097

341622

341648

342236

342244

342280

342288

342289

342506

342553

346124

346125

346126

346127

346212

346213

346214

346215

346238

346241

346257

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Description and

Page Number

Latch, Left Cover

132

Latch, Right Cover

132

Connector 129,141,

143

Cover 140,141,143

Capacitor 137,138

Diode 137,138

Transistor 137,138

Inductor 137

Bracket 143

Cable Assembly

140,142,143

Cover 141,143

Cover 141,143

Housing, Receptade

141,143

Pan 123,124,125,

128,129,135

Plate 124

Housing, Receptacle

135

Bracket 135

Receptacle 140

Transformer 140

Driver 139

Capacitor 136,137,

138,139,140

Diode 139

Filter 135

Cap 130,131,136,

139

Shield, Keytop 127,

128,134,136,139

Plate 132,133

Frame, Front 134,

136

Frame, Rear 134,136

Frame, Left 134,136,

139

Frame, Right 134,

136,139

Bail 126,130,131,

136,139

Spring 130,131,

136,139

Shield 139

Bar 127,134,136,

139

Spacer 130,131,

134,136,139

Spacer 130, 131,

136,139

Spacer 130,131,

136,139

Cable Assembly

135,140

Part

Number

402046

402049

402050

402255

402256

402257

402258

403611

403658

404027

405324

405688

405800

405870

401145

401146

401149

401161

401733

401734

401735

401737

402044

402045

405906

405908

405909

405910

405911

405912

405913

405914

405915

405919

405920

405921

405922

405923

Description and

Page Number

Bumper 130,131,

136,139

Resistor 136

Crystal 137,138

Transistor 136,137,

138

Keyswitch, Combination 130,136

Capacitor 137,138

Terminal 143

Circuit, Integrated

139

Circuit, Integrated

139

Circuit, Integrated

139

Logic Assembly 136

Amplifier 136

Logic Assembly 136

Logic Assembly 136

Keytop 143

Keytop 143

Keytop 143

Keytop 143

Keytop 143

Keytop 143

Keytop 143

Keytop 143

Capacitor 136,139

Insulator 142,143

Extractor, Keyswitch

128,142

Extractor, Keytop 126

Sink, Heat 136

Sink, Heat 136

Sink, Heat 136

Sink, Heat 136

Post 137,138

Sink, Heat 136

Spacer 143

Bumper 137,138

Capacitor 139

Crystal 139

Diode 139

Capacitor 137,138

Resistor 137,138

Resistor 137,138

Cover 123,124,

126.128

Plate, Spring 132

Post, Spring 132

Latch, Left Plate

132,143

Latch, Right Plate

132,143

Screw, 6-40x 11/32

Shoulder 132

Spring 132,143

5-145

Part

Number

405924

405925

405926

405927

405930

405931

405999

406618

406699

406701

406702

Description and

Page Number

Filler 136,139

Keyswitch, Indicator

130,131,136,139

Cable Asemly 123,

125,129,137,138

Bar 127,134,136,

139

Choke, R.F. 140

Cover Assembly

123,129,135

Spacebar 126,139

Spring 132

Plate, Nut 133

Support, Right 143

Support, Left 143

Part

Number

406703

406704

406959

408961

408962

406976

408977

409054

409055

409070

409599

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

F. DISASSEBLY/RE&SSEI BLY AID PARTS (Contd)

9.

COMPONENTS PARTS LIST -- KD AND RO (Contd)

Description and

Page Number

Support Right 133

Support Left 133

Extactor 127

Cable Assembly

139

Keyswitch 131,139

Frame, Front 134,

139

Frame, Rear 134,

139

Board, Circuit 136

Board, Circuit 137,

138

Board, Circuit 139

Board, Circuit 140

Part

Number

410051

410059

410074

410086

410096

410566

410590

410599

Description and

Page Number

Card, Circuit 123,

130

Card, Circuit 134,

136

Card, Circuit 123,

128,137,138

Card Circuit 123

Card, Circuit 131,

134,139

Card, Circuit 123,

129,140

Card, Circuit 140

Card, Circuit 123,

129,135,140

5-146

TM 11-5815-606,34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1,


PART 6 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 POWER SUPPLY 40PSU103

INDEX

A. GENERAL

1. DESCRIPTION .. ............... .......... ............................................................................................

2. TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT ...................... ...........................................................................

PAGE

2

2

B. SHOP PROCEDURES

1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................

2. CLEANING AND REFINISHING ....................................................................................................

3. INSPECTION ................................................................................................................................

4. MARKING AND PACKING ............................................................................................................

C. TESTING

1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................

2. FUNCTIONAL TESTING METHOD ..............................................................................................

3. FUNCTIONAL TESTING................................................................................................................

9

9

10

4

4

5

7

D. TROUBLESHOOTING

1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................

2. EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND LAYOUT ................................................................................

3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS ...................................................................................................

4. FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS AND COMPONENT LAYOUT ........................................................

E. ADJUSTMENTS

1. GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................

2. EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND LAYOUT ................................................................................

3. VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT ............................................................................................................

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS

1. GENERAL .....................................................................................................................................

2. SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION ...............................................................................................

3. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................

4. PARTS ..........................................................................................................................................

5. COMPONENT PARTS LIST ..........................................................................................................

42

42

43

14

15

16

33

43

44

45

58

61

6-1

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

PART 6 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 P(OWER SUPPLY 40PSU103

A. GENERAL

1. DESCRIPTION

The 40PSU103 Power Supply furnishes the following regulated voltages and currents for the 40C400 Controller Logic and attached keyboards under the listed operating limits.

Operating Limits

Cabinet Temperature (forced air) -- O°C to 450°C

Input Voltage -- 103 V ac to 127 V ac (115 V ac nominal)

Humidity

Altitude

-- 2% to 95% (no condensation)

-- 0 to 10,000 feet

Line Frequency -- 49 to 62 Hz

Regulated Voltages and Currents

Nominal

+5 V dc

+12 V dc

-12 V dc

Limits

4.90 V to 5.10 V

11.58 V to 12.42 V

-11.58 V to -12.42 V

Current Limits

5 amps to 25 amps

0.4 amps to 4 amps

0.4 amps to 4 amps

Max Ripple and/or Noise

0.25 V P-P

0.24 V P-P

0.24 V P-P

2. TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Tools

The tools listed below are supplementary to common type such as pliers, screwdrivers, etc, and may be procured locally or ordered from Teletype Corporation.

NOTE: When ordering parts, prefix each number with the letters TP unless specified otherwise.

Description

•Screwdriver (6 Inch Medium)

•Nut Driver Wrench 5/16 Inch

•Nut Driver Wrench 1/4 Inch

•Open-End Wrench 1/4 Inch



•Aligator Clip Lead (procure locally)

•Soldering Iron, Weller Model W-MCP-750 with MP2C

Tip, or equivalent (procure locally)

•Desoldering Tool, EDSYN Model MMSOO5 Soldapullt@, or equivalent (procure locally)

Part No.

100982

89955

89954

129534

152835

125765

6-2

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Test Equipment

The following equipment or equivalent is required for testing, troubleshooting, and adjusting the power supply.

• Digital Multimeter, Fluke Model 8100A

• Oscilloscope, Tektronix Model 7904, e/w:

2 -- 7A16A Single Trace Amplifier


• Model 40 Power Supply Test Base CP10.009.001.1

Supplied by: Teletype Corporation

Custom Product Division


Telephone No. (312) 982-2499

Alternate Test Equipment

The following ac input cable and dummy load resistance circuit can be used to test power supplies when a Model 40 power supply test set is not available.

6-3

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

Miscellaneous

Items a., b., and c. may be procured locally. Item d. may be ordered from Teletype Corporation, Part No. 401608, or fabricated locally as shown.

a.

Glyptol® , General Electric, Type 1201, Red b.

Alligator Clip Lead 3 Foot c.

Capacitor, 0.22 Microfarad, 100 W V dc, Mylar® or Polyester Film, e/w spade terminals d.

Wire with Ring Terminals (401608)


1. GENERAL

This section details the cleaning, refinishing, and inspection procedures to be followed prior to testing and troubleshooting the power supply. In many cases, careful inspection in particular, will save later troubleshooting by revealing broken or loose connections, damaged electrical components, possible short circuits, etc.


2. CLEANING AND REFINISHING

Cleaning

Immersion type cleaning is not recommended for the power supply.

The exterior of the power supply unit may be cleaned by wiping the case with a water dampened cloth, followed by wiping with a dry cloth. Solvents are not recommended.

Interior cleaning without removing the cover can be accomplished by, air blowing.

CAUTION: THE AIR SUPPLY SHOULD NOT EXCEED 20 PSI. HIGHER AIR PRESSURES MAY

DAMAGE SMALL COMPONENTS.

Interior cleaning, with the cover removed, can be accomplished by brushing lightly with a clean dry 1/2-inch nylon-bristle paint brush followed by air blowing.

6-4

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Refinishing

Damaged labels: a.

Scrape off the old label with.a putty knife. Make sure all the glue from the old label is scraped off before the new label is applied.

b.

Peel off the backing of the new label and apply the new label to the power supply cover. Make sure the label is applied so it is smooth with no trapped air bubbles present. Also the edges of all labels should be in line with the top edges of the power supply cover.

3.

INSPECTION

External Inspection

Examine the components detailed and replace any components missing or damaged.

Refer to Page 6-43, F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS.

6-5

3.

INSPECTION (Cont)

403740 Cover Removal

Actuate circuit breaker

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


Slightly pull latch and lift handle.

Remove cover by sliding heat sink.

Loosen studs 1/4 turn.

Unfold both heat sinks.

NOTE: Lip of cover must be positioned on heat sink fin as shown when replacing cover.

Internal Inspection

Examine the internal components detailed below, replacing any showing signs of damage.

a.

All wiring, particularly at the connector points.

b.

All circuit cards and components. Refer

to Pages 6-58, 6-59 and 6-60, 3. PARTS

for layouts and part numbers.

c.

Check the condition of the 405887 insulator on the underside of the 403740 cover. Any breaks, tears or skinned areas could result in short circuits between the 410010 circuit card and cover. Make sure that the insulator is present and in good condition.

6-6

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


d.

Fuses F1, F2, and F3 with an ohmmeter to insure continuity.

e.

403702 transformer.

f.

403705 and 403706 filter capacitors for ruptured vents.

g.

Bridge rectifier diode assembly and all transistors mounted on 403725 and 403726 heat sinks.

4.

MARKING AND PACKING

Marking

For record keeping purposes, the repair date may be marked on the heat sink as shown.

Use locally provided adhesive backed labels.

Packing

Factory-type packing may be duplicated by ordering the required PK materials from Teletype Corporation and applying as follows.

Qty Material Required Qty Material Required

1

1

8

1

1


9822PK Corrugated Shipping Container

28212PK Plywood Pallet



1

-

1

1

71692RM RH Machine Screw,

10-32 x 1-1/4" Long

2669RM No. 10 Lockwasher

72295RM No. 10 Steel Flat Washer

Glue or 2" Minimum Width

Sealing Tape (as required)

6-7

4.

MARKING AND PACKING (Cont)

(1) Assemble 28212PK pallet to bottom of power supply with one 71692RM screw, 72295RM flat washer and

2669RM lockwasher as illustrated

(2) Form 9362PK carton. Close and seal bottom flaps with glue or

2 inch minimum width sealing tape.

(3) Place palletized unit in carton.

Form 28213PK detail and place in carton as illustrated.

(4) Close and seal top flaps of carton.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


(5) Form 9822PK shipping container.

Form bottom flaps outward and place over inner container.

(6) Position a 28153PK corner detail on each of the four corners of the inner container as illustrated.

(7) Close and seal top flaps.

Invert shipping container and contents.

(8) Position a 28153PK corner detail on each of the four corners of the inner container as illustrated.

(9) Close and'seal bottom flaps.

Invert shipping container and contents.

(10) Mark each shipping container with quantity, code number and description of contents, for example:

"One

40PSU103 Power Supply"

6-8

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1l..


C. TESTING

1. GENERAL

Functional testing of the power supply is accomplished with the power supply test base which provides static loading for

the different voltages and an air stream for cooling. An alternate test circuit may be substituted, if desired (see Page 6-3,

Alternate Test Equipment.

Functional testing provides a means for testing the power supply to determine if it meets its operational requirements.

Certain test points will be probed with either an oscilloscope or a digital multimeter to determine operational status of power supply.

Each test procedure should be performed from start to finish with no omissions.

Whenever the power supply fails a particular test, refer to Page 6-14, D. TROUBLE-SHOOTING and/or Page 6-42, E.

ADJUSTMENTS to locate the trouble. After the trouble has been located and corrected, repeat the test that disclosed the trouble and if found ok, resume testing from that point.

2.

FUNCTIONAL TESTING METHOD (Using Power Supply Test Base)

6-9

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

C. TESTING (Cont)

2.

FUNCTIONAL TESTING METHOD (using Power Supply Test Base) (Cont)

Slide power supply towards rear so that back of supply is touching fan assembly.

Depress circuit breaker down.

Connect load cable no. 1 to terminal block as shown.

Connect load cable no. 2 to output terminal block on power supply, making sure that resistor on load cable terminal strip is facing up as shown.

Plug in ac cable to rear of power supply.

If the alternate test circuit is used for testing the power supply, the following steps should be performed.

(1) Place a fan at rear of power supply so that air is drawn through the power supply -- front to rear.

(2) Connect terminal strip of dummy load to power supply.

(3) Turn adjust switch on.

(4) Make sure power supply circuit breaker is in the up position.

(5) Connect ac input cable to rear of power supply and then to 115 V ac outlet.

(6) Turn power supply on by depressing circuit breaker.

6-10

3. FUNCTIONAL, TESTING

Preliminary- Bench Test

PROCEDURE

Turn on ac power to power supply test base.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESPONSE

LED indicators for +5 V, +12 V, and -12 V dc voltages should be lit.

The following field test is to be used to determine overall condition of the power supply (when assemblied in a station).

The logic cards mentioned in the test are those found in the system controller.

PROCEDURE RESPONSE

All 3 lights on.

All 3 lights off.

Power supply operative; go to logic card

"SELF TESTS".

Check: Main power switch, disconnected or condition of power cord and inoperable fan(s).

1 or 2 lights off.

Turn power switch off. Remove leads from screw terminals, then retighten screws.

Turn power switch on.

(a) If all lights off, replace power supply.

(b) If all lights on, turn power switch off and reconnect all terminal leads. Pull one logic card from controller. Turn power on.

1.

If all lights on, replace card pulled.

2.

If one or more lights off, continue pulling more logic cards

(one at a time) and checking for condition (b) 1.

6-11

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

C. TESTING (Cont)

3.

FUNCTIONAL TESTING (Cont)

Testing

Using a digital multimeter or oscilloscope, measure the output voltages present on each terminal of the power supply output terminal block. Attach the common lead of the test equipment to the CND terminal.

STEP PROCEDURE RESPONSE:

1 Correct voltage must be present;

+11.58 V to +12.42 V.

2

3

Measure +12 Vdc voltage on +12 V and

+12 V S.B. terminals of terminal

block. See illustration on Page 6-11.

Measure +5 Vdc voltage on +5 V and

+5 V S.B. terminals of terminal


Measure -12 Vdc voltage on -12 V and

-12 V S.B. terminals of terminal


Correct voltage must be present;

+4.9 V to +5.1 V.

Correct voltage must be present;

-11.58 V to -12.42 V.

Using an oscilloscope (or equivalent), measure the ripple on each of the dc voltages shown below. Ground the oscilloscope to the GND terminal of the terminal block.

Maximum Ripple Measurements

Terminal (Oscilloscope)

4

+12 V

+5 V

-12 V

Measure ripple present on +12 V terminal of terminal block.

0.24 V Peak-to-Peak

0.25 V Peak-to-Peak

0.24 V Peak-to-Peak

Ripple less than 0.24 V peak-to-peak.

5 Ripple less than 0.25 V peak-to-peak.

6

Measure ripple present on +5 V terminal of terminal block.

Measure ripple present on -12 V terminal of terminal block.

Ripple less than 0.24 V peak-to-peak.

7 With scope lead on terminal 1 of the terminal block, turn power supply off; then on.

+5 V

NOTE: Using an R X 1 probe, exter nally trigger on terminal 1 of output terminal block.

Observe a negative pulse, approximately 50 ms long.

6-12

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


As on alternate method of measuring the ripple at each output terminal of the power supply, use an ac (RMS) voltmeter.

The maximum ripple measurements should be as follows

Terminal

+12 V

+5 V

-12 V

Maximum Ripple

Measurements (RMS)

0.085 V (RMS)

0.089 V (RMS)

0.085 V (RMS)

6-13

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

D. TROUBLE SHOOTING

1. GENERAL

This section provides the methods used for correction of operational problems encountered in testing the 40PSU103

Power Supply.

All corrective steps for each trouble analysis for a particular trouble should be performed before proceeding to another trouble/symptom. After the trouble has been corrected, the unit should be tested to insure satisfactory operation.

Refer to Page 6-33, 4. FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS AND COMPONENT LAYOUT which is furnished to aid in

troubleshooting the power supply. Use of the functional schematics and component layout are explained on Page 6-16,

3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS.

Troubleshooting of the power supply should be done under no-load conditions.

Obtain the following equipment:

• Digital Multimeter

• Oscilloscope

• Power Supply Test Base or Alternate Test Circuit (see Page 6-3)

There are two distinct areas in the Troubleshooting Guide of Section D.4., the Major Component Troubleshooting Guide and the Regulator Circuit Card Troubleshooting Guide. The analysis and correction for each trouble or symptom in either area gives the specific checks and measurements necessary to isolate and correct that trouble.

The basic troubleshooting approach is to begin at the outputs of the power supply and work toward the input. Trouble isolation is largely confined to the major subcomponents (transformer, circuit card, etc) with additional aids given for troubles relating to the 410600 regulator circuit card, 410010, 410011 and 410012 circuit cards.

Ground Wire Continuity Failure

Select the R X 1 scale of the digital multimeter and check continuity of green wire from pin 2 of ac power receptacle to grounding terminal connected to power supply base. The reading should be essentially zero ohms.

6-14

2.

EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND LAYOUT

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Remove power supply cover and unfold

sides (see Page 6-56, Cover Assembly).

Connect a strap between terminals 10 and 11 of output terminal block.

Connect ac input as shown.

Make sure circuit breaker is in the down or on position.

DO NOT Connect load cable no. 2 to power supply unless instructed to do so in troubleshooting charts.

6-15

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.

EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND LAYOUT (Cont)

Using Alternate Test Equipment

(1)

Remove power supply cover and unfold sides (see Page 6-45, Cover Assembly).

(2) Connect a strap between terminals 10 and 11 of output terminal block.

(3) Making sure circuit breaker is in the up or off position, connect ac input cable to rear of power supply, and then connect ac input cable to 115 Vac source.

(4) Activate circuit breaker to ON position.

3.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS

When using the troubleshooting charts, refer to Page 6-33, 4. FUNCTIONAL SCHEMAT-ICS AND COMPONENT

LAYOUT.

Example: If told to check Q1-B transistor on the 410012 circuit card, go to the 410012 circuit card layout, find Q1 transistor and probe point B.

For any removal and/or replacement of components mentioned in the troubleshooting charts, refer to Page 6-43, F.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS.

Use the following charts for troubles observed while testing the 40PSU103 Power Supply.

No Output (+12 Vdc, -12 Vdc and +5 Vdc) (Page 6-17)

No +5 Vdc (Page 6-19)

No +12 Vdc (Page 6-22)

No -12 Vdc (Page 6-26)

No POR (Power On Reset) (Page 6-30)

Excessive Ripple on +5 Vdc Circuit (Page 6-30)

Excessive Ripple on +12 Vdc Circuit (Page 6-31)

Excessive Ripple on -12 Vdc Circuit (Page 6-31)

Low Outputs Under Load (Page 6-33)

6-16

No Output (+-12 V dc, -12 V dc and +5 V dc)

STEP

1

ACTION

Check for +12 V dc at terminal 116 of 410010 circuit card.

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9


Check for +24 V dc at F1-A fuse on

410010 circuit card.

Did new fuse blow?

Check for 22 V ac between terminals

106 and 107 of CR101 bridge rectifier located on 403725 heat sink.

Check for 115 V ac between terminal

2 of 403700 or 403728 CB1 circuit breaker and terminal 3 of ac input connector.


1 and 3 of ac input connector.

Check for -15 V dc at terminal 121 of 410010 circuit card.

Check for -15 V dc at ML2-4 located on 410012 circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MANUAL 3596-17


If present, check all wiring from

410010 circuit card to 410011 and

410012 circuit cards.

If not present, go to Step 2.

If present, replace 402201 ML1 regulator chip on 410010 circuit card.


If present, replace 403707 Fl fuse.

Go to Step 4.


Yes -- Go to Step 8.

No -- Test power supply.

If present, replace 401002 CR101 bridge rectifier.


If present, replace 405940 T1 transformer.


If present, replace 403700 or 403738

CB1 circuit breaker or 405936 line filter.

If not present, problem is not in power supply.

If present, go to Step 9.



If not present, check wiring between terminal 121 of 410010 circuit card and ML2-4 located on 410012 circuit card. Replace 403707 Fl fuse.

6-17

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-I88-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS, No Output (+12 V dc, -12 V dc- and +

STEP

10

11

12

13

ACTION

Check for -48 V dc at 402208 F3-A fuse on 410010 circuit card.


104 and 105 of the 410010 circuit card.

Remove 403712 Ql transistor from

403725 heat sink.

Insert new 403707 F1 fuse.

Turn power on.

Did new fuse blow?

Check NL1-25 on 410012 circuit card for the following or similar waveform.


If present, replace 402200 CR7 diode on 410010 circuit card. Replace

403707 F1 fuse on 410010 circuit card.


If present, check all 403709 diodes.

(CR2, CR3, CR8 and CR9) on 410010 circuit card. Replace defective diode and 403707 F1 fuse.

If not present, replace 403702 T1 transformer and 403707 F1 fuse.

Yes -- Replace 403750 CR1 diode assembly on 403725 heat sink.

Replace 403707 F1 fuse on 410010 circuit card. Also check 319999 C1 and 194606 C2 capacitors on 410012 circuit card for shorts. Replace if defective.

No -- Go to Step 13.


If not present (or at constant 0 V), replace 403722 ML1 regulator chip on


14 Check Q4-C transistor on 410012 circuit card for the following or similar waveform.


If 04-C does not switch to ground, replace 321517 Q4 transistor on


6-18

15

STEP ACTION

Check Q3-C transistor on 410012 circuit card for following or similar waveform.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188 0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




If Q3-C does not switch to +24 V dc, replace 403714 Q3 transistor on


16 Check Q2-C transistor on 410012 circuit card for following or similar waveform.

If present, replace 403712 Q1 transistor on. 403725 heat sink.

If Q2-C is at a constant +24 V dc, replace 403713 Q2 transistor on

403725 heat sink.

No +5 V dc

STEP

1

ACTION

Check for +5 V dc at terminal 9 of

TB102 output terminal block.

2 Check for +24 V dc at Q1-C transistor on 410012 circuit card and ground at terminal 7 of


6-19


If present, replace 341636 CR4 diode on 410010 circuit card.



If not present, check wiring between terminals 115 of 410010 circuit card and 11 of 410012 circuit card. Check wiring between terminals 112 of

410010 circuit card and 7 of 410012 circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS, No Output (+12 V dc, -12 V dc and 45 V dc) (Cont)

STEP

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

ACTION

Check for +12 V dc at ML1-14 on


Check for ground at ML1-24 on 410012 circuit card.

Disconnect blue lead at terminal 123 of 410012 circuit card.

If +5 V dc now present at terminal 9 of TB102 output terminal block?

Disassemble Q8 SCR from 403725 heat sink. Check for +5 V dc at terminal

9 of TB102 output terminal block.



Check for +2 V dc at MLl-15 on


Check for voltage level more negative than +2 V dc at Q5-B transistor on 410012 circuit card.



If not present, check wiring between terminal 116 of 410010 circuit card and connector 113-2 on 410012 circuit card.


If not present, check wiring between terminal 7 of 410010 circuit card and connector 113-3 on 410012 circuit card.

If present, replace 403735 TS-1 thermal sensor assembly on 403725 heat sink.

If not present, connect blue lead back to terminal 123 of 410012 circuit card. Go to Step 6.

If present, replace 403716 Q8 transistor and save. Go to Step 7.

If not present, reassemble original

Q8 SCR to 403725 heat sink. Go to

Step 8.

If present, scrap previously removed

Q8 SCR. Test power supply.

If not present, original Q8 SCR was probably OK. Replace 326823 ML3 regulator chip on 410012 circuit card.




10 Check for ground at Q5-E transistor on 410012 circuit card.


If present, replace 315931 Q5 transistor.

If not present, replace 403722 ML1 regulator chip on 410012 circuit card.

6-20

11

STEP ACTION

Check for following or similar waveform at M1Ll-25 on 410012 circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1





12 Check for following or similar waveform at Q4-C transistor on 410012 circuit card.


If not present, replace 321517 Q4 transistor on 410012 circuit card.




6-21

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

3596-22


3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS, No +5 V dc (Cont)

STEP

14

ACTION

Check for following or similar waveform at Q2-C transistor on 410012 circuit card.



If not present, replace 403713 Q2 transistor on 403725 heat sink.

15 Check for following or similar waveform at Q1-E transistor on 410012 circuit card.

If present, replace 403719 C8 capacitor on 410012 circuit card.


No +12 V dc

STEP

1

ACTION



2

3


Check for +48 V dc at Q2-E transistor on 410011 circuit card and ground at terminal 135-2 on 410011 circuit card.

6-22







If not present, check wiring between terminal 6 of 410011 circuit card and terminal 118 of 410010 circuit card.

Check wiring between terminal 5 of

410011 circuit card and terminal 119 of 410010 circuit card.

STEP

4

5

6

ACTION

Check for ground at ML1-24 on 410011 circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-3.00-1




Check for +24 V dc at MLl-14 on


If not present, check wiring between terminal 7 of 410011 circuit card and terminal 7 of TB102 output terminal block.


Check for following or similar waveform at ML1-25 on 410011 circuit card.

If not present, check wiring between terminal 1 of connector 122 on

410011 circuit card ;and terminal 116 of 410010 circuit card.





If not present, replace 334133 Q3 transistor on 410011 circuit card.-

6-23

TM 11l-58.i 5606-34/NAVELEX 0969:-LP-188-0010/TO 3lW4-4-300-1

3359



STEP

8

ACTION





9 Check for following or similar waveform-at terminal 135-1 on 410011 circuit card.


If not present, replace 403727 Ql transistor on 403726 heat sink.

10 Check for +2 V dc at MLl-15 on


11

12

Check for 0 V dc at ML1-26 on


Check for more negative voltage at

Q10-B transistor than at Q10-E on


13

14

Check for +48 V dc at F2-A fuse on


Did new fuse blow?

6-24





If present, replace 334133 Q4 transistor on 410011 circuit card.


If present, replace 402208 F2 fuse on

410010 circuit card. Go to Step 14.




STEP

15

16

ACTION

Remove 403727 Q1 transistor from

403726 heat sink.

Insert new 402208 F2 fuse on 410010 circuit card.

Turn power on.

Did new fuse blo,w?

Check for approximately 41 V ac between terminals 103 and 104 on


17 Check for following or similar waveform at ML1-25 on 410011 circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CORRECTIVE PROCEDURE-

Yes - Check 405884 Cl and 319999 C2 capacitors on 410011 circuit card for shorts. Replace if defective. Re place 402208 F2 fuse on'100:10 circuit card.


If present, check all 403709 diodes

(CR2, CP3, CR8 and CR9) on 410010 circuit card. Replace defective diode.

If not present, replace 405940 T1 transformer.






6-25

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




STEP

19

ACTION

Check for following or similar waveform-at Q2-C transistor on 410011 circuit card.


If present, replace 403727 Q1 transsistor on 403726 heat sink.


No -12 V dc

STEP

1

2

3

4

ACTION

Check for -12 V dc at terminal 5 of

TB102;output terminal block.

Check for -48 V dc at terminal 120 of 410010 circuit card.

Check for -48 V dc at terminal 140-4 of 410011 circuit card and ground at terminal 140-2 of 410011 circuit card.

Check for ground at terminal 7 of


5 Check for +12 V dc at R13-A resistor on 410011 circuit card.

6-26





If not present, replace 402208 F3 fuse on 410010 circuit card. Go to

Step 15.


If not present, check wiring between terminal 4 of 410011 circuit card and terminal 120 of 410010 circuit card. Check wiring between terminal

5 of 410011 circuit card and terminal

119 of 410010 circuit card.


If not present, check wiring between terminal 7 of 410011 circuit card and terminal 7. of TB102 output terminal block.


If not present, check wiring between terminal 116 of 410010 circuit card and terminal 1 of connector 122 on


STEP

6

ACTION

Check for approximately +1.6 V dc at ML2-25 on 410011 circuit card.

7 Check for following or similar waveform at ML2-24 on 410011 circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




If not present, replace 302844 CR1 diode on 410011 circuit card.



8 Check for following or similar waveform at Q8-B transistor on 410011 circuit card.


If not present, replace 321161 CR7 diode on 410011 circuit card.




6-27

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS, No -12 V dc (Cont)

STEP

10

ACTION





11 Check for following or similar waveform at terminal 140-1 on 410011 circuit card.



12 Check for -10 V dc at ML2-15 on


13 Check for -12 V dc at ML2-26 on


14 Check for a more negative voltage at

Q9-B transistor than at Q9-E.

15 Did new fuse blow?

6-28









STEP

16

17

ACTION

Remove 403730 Q6 transistor from

403726 heat sink.

Insert new 402208 F3 fuse.

Turn power on.

Did new fuse blow?

Check for following or similar waveform at ML2-24 on 4L0011 circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



Yes -- Check 405884 C7 and 319999 C8 capacitors on 410011 circuit card.

Replace defective capacitor. Replace

402208 F3 fuse.








If present, replace 403730 Q6 transistor on 403726 heat sink.

If not present, replace 325101 Q7 transistor on


6-29

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS, (Cont)

No POR (Power on Reset)

STEP ACTION

1 To check POR circuit, power supply must be fully connected to power supply test set (load cables connected). Alternate test circuit may be used if power supply test base is not available. Connect terminal strip of dummy load to power supply. At the same time power is turned on, check for the following waveform at terminal, on TB102 output terminal block.

NOTE: Use R X 1 scope probe and externally trigger on terminal 1 of

TB102 output terminal block.


If present, POR circuit is OK.


Excessive Ripple on +5 V dc Circuit

ACTION

Check for excessive ripple at terminal

115 (+24 V dc lead) on 410010 circuit card.

2 Check for following waveform at

ML2-3 on 410010 circuit card.


If not present, replace 404555 -L2 regulator chip on 410010 circuit card.


If present, replace 403705 C1 capacitor on power supply base (large capacitor under 410010 circuit card).

If not present, replace 403719 C8 capacitor on 410012 circuit card.

6-30

Excessive Ripple on +12 V dc Circuit

ACTION


118 (+48 V dc lead) on the 410010 circuit card.

Excessive Ripple on -12 V dc Circuit

ACTION


120 (-48 V dc lead) on the 410010 circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



If present, replace 403706 C3 capacitor under 410010 circuit card.



If present, replace 403706 C5 capacitor under 410010 circuit card.


6-31

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3. TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Cont)

Low Outputs Under Load


STEP

1.

2.

ANALYSIS

Check for -48 VDC+3v at

J-120.

If -45 VDC or less, go to Step 2.

Check for +48 VDC+3v at

J-118.

CORRECTION

If present, go to Excessive Ripple on

-12 V dc, Page 6-31.

3.

4.

5.

Check for 70 VAC+5v from

J-103 to J-105.

Check for 117 VAC+10% from J101-1 to J101-3.

Measure forward and reverse resistance of CR2, CR3, CR8 and CR9 on 410010 Circuit

Board, with J-103 and J-1C5 disconnected.

If present, replace C5 403706 under

410010 Circuit Card.

If +45 VDC or less, go to Step 3.


If 65 VAC or less, go to Step 4.

If present, replace T1.

If low, a low line voltage condition exists.

If ratio is 10:1 or -ore, replace C3

& C5.

If ratio is less than 10:1, re-lace bad diode.

Measure forward resistance

Reverse lead to measure reverse resistance.

6-32

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTES

6-41

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


E. ADJUSTMENTS

1. GENERAL

If Q1 or Q2 transistors mounted on the 403725 heat sink (right side) are replaced or if the 410012 circuit card is repaired

or replaced, refer to Page 6-43,

3. VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT. This adjustment should be made.

2. EQUIPMENT PREPARATION AND LAYOUT

Connect power supply to power supply test base as shown.

Use of Alternate Test Circuit for Making Adjustment on Power Supply

(1) Connect terminal strip to power supply.

(2) Turn adjust switch OFF.

(3) Making sure circuit breaker is in the up or off position, connect ac input cable to rear of power supply, and then to

115 V ac source.

(4) Turn circuit breaker on.

6-42

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3. VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT

The adjustment should be made with the power supply connected to the power supply test base with the adjust switch ON or the alternate test circuit with the adjust switch OFF.

Obtain the digital multimeter and select the 10 V dc range.

With the ac power supplied to the power supply, adjust R17 potentiometer (as shown) until the voltage at the +5 V terminal of the output terminal block reads +5 V dc ±0.01 V dc as measured on the digital multimeter.

NOTE

Connect the common side of the digital multimeter to the GND terminal of the terminal strip.

F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS

1. GENERAL

This section provides disassembly/reassembly 2nd parts information for the major components of the 40PSU103 Power

Supply.

Drawings are used to identify the replaceable components, and numbered instructions describe the procedures necessary to disassemble and reassemble those replaceable components.

Refer to Page 6-2, Tools for a complete listing of the various types of hand tools required to perform the

disassembly/reassembly procedures of the 40PSU103 Power Supply.

When removing a replaceable component, do not force or pry any parts to provide the necessary clearance for removal.

In reassembly, reverse the disassembly procedures except where specified otherwise.

6-43

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2. SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION

NOTE

The number indicated in parentheses after each assembly designates the page covering the disassembly/reassembly procedures.

6-44

3. DISASSEMBLY/ REASSEMBLY

Cover Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


In reassembly, make sure circuit breaker is depressed. See Note above.

6-45

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMLY (Cont)

403761 Cover Handle

• Remove cover assembly (6-56).

(6-45).

6-46

410010 Circuit Card


• Remove 403768 Insulator.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


In reassembly, make sure that all leads are twisted as shown. See Note above.

6-47

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




403705 +24 V Filter Capacitor (C1)


In reassembly, make sure that all leads are twisted as shown. See Note above.

6-48

403706 +48 V Filter Capacitors (C3 and C5)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


In reassembly, see Note above.

6-49

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 9969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



405940 Transformer (T1)


In reassembly, make sure that all leads are positioned and twisted as shown.

6-50

401002 Bridge Rectifier (CR-101)

403728 Toggle Type Circuit Breaker (CB1)

403735 Thermal Sensor Assembly (TS1)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Thermal Sensor (TS-1)

To remove 403735 thermal sensor assembly:

To remove 403728 circuit breaker.

(1) Disconnect two black leads to circuit breaker by removing screws and lockwashers.

(2) Remove bridge rectifier from 403725 heat sink by removing 181246 screw.

(2) Either remove 125129 screws and 2191 lockwashers from 403769 bracket or 181242 screws from and heat sink.

NOTE

When replacing bridge rectifier, apply thermal compound between bridge rectifier and heat sink.

To replace thermal sensor, circuit breaker, or bridge rectifier the above procedures.

6-51

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



403700 Circuit Breaker (CB1) - Early Design Push Type


6-52

*Part of 403700 circuit breaker.

401002 Bridge Rectifier (CR101) -- Early Design


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


In reassembly, apply thermal compound between bridge rectifier and heat sink.

6-53

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



410012 Circuit Card and Associated Transistors (Q1, Q2 and Q8)


NOTE 1

Use new insulators when replacing transistors.

NOTE 2

When replacing 403712 transistor, apply thermal compound between new insulator and heat sink.

NOTE 3

Tighten screws to approximately 4 inch pounds torque to avoid damaging sockets,

In reassembly, make sure all leads are twisted as shown.

6-54

403750 Diode Assembly (CR1)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


6-55

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMLY (Cont)

410011 Circuit Card and Associated Transistors (Q1 and Q6)


NOTE 1:

Tighten screws to approximately 4 inch pound torque to avoid damaging sockets.

NOTE 2:

When replacing 403727 and 403730 transistors, make sure that flat edges of transistors are facing toward the front of power supply.

NOTE 3:

Removal of 403725 or 403726 heat sink can be accomplished by removing two 401582 nuts and removing 403748 bracket. Heat sinks can then be slid forward and out.

6-56

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


General Wiring Layout

All wiring must be routed and twisted as shown below.

6-57

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

4. PARTS

410010 Circuit Card Components


NOTE

All power resistors larger than 1/2 watt to be spaced 0.062 inch from board. Leads to R4 and R5 resistors to be insulated.

6-58


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTE

All power resistors larger than 1/2 watt and C5 and C11 capacitors to be spaced 0.062 inch from board.

6-59

4. PARTS (Cont)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


NOTE

All power resistors larger than 1/2 watt and C2 and C8 capacitors to be spaced 0.062 inch-from board.

6-60

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


181241

181242

181246

184055

184056

186778

192269

305355

306085

312042

312918

323846

327954

327955

334874

336810

340269

340711

341650

Part

Number

2191

3606

82832

92260

98642

107116

119654

125200

125179

151631

180675

180904

180989

181240

5. COMPONENT PARTS LIST

Note:

When ordering parts, prefix each number with the letters "TP"

Description and

Page Number

Lockwasher 56

Nut, 6-40 Hex 58

Lockwasher 55

Lockwasher 56

Starwasher 47


Ring, Retaining 46

Screw, 10-32 x 1/2 RD 47

Screw, 6-32 x 3/16 RD 51

Screw, 6-40 x 5/16 Hex 58

Screw 6 Self-Tapping 56

Tab, Terminal 51, 53, 56

Screw 6 Spl 54

Screw w/Lockwasher, 6-40 x 3/16 53, 56


Screw w/Lockwasher, 6-40 x 5/16 Hex 51, 52, 54

Screw w/Lockwasher, 640 x 5/8 Hex 51, 53



Screw, 640 x 7/32 Hex 56

Nut, Speed 48

Terminal 60

Board, Terminal 58

Connector, 4 Pt Plug 53

Cable, Strap 47, 48, 50, 54,

59, 60

Pad, Transistor Mounting 59

Retainer, Split Ring 51, 52, 56

Nut, Speed 50, 56

Nut, 1/4-28 Hex 55

Plate, Identification 44

Clip, Fuse 58

Support 47, 48

Nut, Special 46

Part

Number

341651

341798

403726

403727

403728

403730

403735

403737

403740

403741

403742

403743

403744

403745

403748

403700

403705

403706

403707

403711

403712

403713

403715

403716

403721

403723

403725

401002

401582

402208

402212

402213

402214

402215

402216

402217

402318

403597

Description and

Page Number

Stud 45, 51, 56


9/16 Hex 48

Rectifier 44, 51, 53

Nut, 8-32 Spl 50, 51, 52, 56

Fuse 48, 49

Wire 59

Wire 59

Wire 59

Wire 55, 59

Wire 59

Wire 59

Insulator 54

Stud 46

Breaker, Circuit 52

Capacitor 44, 47, 48, 50

Capacitor 44, 47, 49

Fuse 48, 49

Support 46, 50, 56

Transistor 54

Transistor 54

Diode Assembly 55

Rectifier 54

Latch 45, 56

Socket 54

Sink, Heat 45, 51, 53, 54,

55, 56

Sink, Heat 45, 46

Transistor 56

Circuit Breaker 44, 51

Transistor 56

Thermostat 44, 51

Support 56

Cover 45, 46

Plate 48, 49

Pin 60

Clamp 48, 49

Wire 56

Bracket 52

Bracket 56

410011

410012

Part

Number

403750

493756

403757

403758

403759

403761

403762

403764

403767

403768

403769

403770

403771

403772

48, 49

403773

403774

405882

405886

405887

405888

405891

405936

405937

405939

405940

405941

405943

405944

410010

Description and

Page Number

Diode Assembly 44,

54, 55

Wire 60

Wire 60

Wire 60

Wire 60

Handle 45, 46

Cable Assembly 47

Socket, Transistor

54

Cable Assembly 55

Insulator 45, 47

Bracket 51

Lead, 24-1/2" Lg

Green 53

Lead, 25" Lg Red

53

Jumper, 7-3/4" Lg

Cable 60

Socket, Transistor

56

Insulator 69, 60

Label 46

Insulator 46

Label 46

Insulator 54, 55

Filter 53

Bracket 53

Label 46

Transformer 44, 50

Cable Assembly 53

Strap, 7-1/2" Lg 53

Strap, 11" Lg 53

Card, Circuit 44, 47,

48, 49, 50, 54, 56, 57,

58


56, 57


51, 54, 55, 57

6-61

TM 11-5815.606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


ISSUE 3

PART 7 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 CONTROLLER LOGIC

INDEX PAGE

A.

GENERAL

1.

DESCRIPTION . .......................................................................................................................................... 2

2.

CONTROLLER CODES ............................................................................................................................... 4

3.

CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS .................................................................................................. 9

4.

OPTION SWITCH SETTINGS9 ................................................................................................................. 80

B.

SHOP PROCEDURES

1.

CLEANING AND REFINISHING ............................................................................................................ 132

2.

INSPECTION ......................................................................................................................................... 132

3.

CONVERSIONS AND VARIATIONS........................................................................................................ 133

4.

PACKING FOR SHIPMENT OR STORAGE ............................................................................................ 133

C.

TESTING

1.

GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 134

2.

FUNCTIONAL TESTS ............................................................................................................................. 134

D.

TROUBLESHOOTING

1.

GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 135

2.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS.............................................................................................................. 136

E.

ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION ............................................................................................................. 197

F.


1.

GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 197

2.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT ........................................................................................................... 198

3.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY ............................................................................................................. 208

4.

PARTS . .................................................................................................................................................. 209

5.

NUMERICAL INDEX ............................................................................................................................... 228

7-1

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL

1.

DESCRIPTION

This section covers shop repair actions to be followed for Tempest Model 40 Controllers listed below. The scope of repair activity covered in this shop manual is limited to replacement of circuit cards, the printed circuit card frame, and components of the wired frame. Controller circuit card repair is not covered. More in depth circuit card analysis can be achieved through use of wiring diagram packages (WDPs), listed below (available from Teletype Corporation).

WDP DESCRIPTION

0478

0484

0485

0488

0489

0495

0519

0520

0461

0464

0465

0469

0470

0471

0476

0521

0522

0523

0524

0551

0554

0581

0582

0583

0584 and 0585

0592




40C430/AAT/017 Controller

40C431/ABE/026 and 40C432/ABF/027 Controllers

40C430/ABD/025 Controller


40C433/ACS/059 Controller




40C435/ACS/059 Controller

40C435/AEE/091 and 40C437/AEE/091 Controllers

40C436/ADK/075 Controller (SCC)

40C436/ADU/095 Controller (DCC-ASCI)

40C436/ADN/094 Controller (DCC-EBCDIC)

40C436/ADD/093 Controller (MCC-ASCII)

40C436/ADA/092 Controller (MCC-EBCDIC)


40C434/AEK/101 Controller



40C431/AEM/103 Controller

40C432/AEN/104 Controller

40C438/AEP/105 Controller


The controller consists of plug-in circuit cards with edge-type connectors mounted in a printed circuit card frame, a power supply, a ventilation system and an interconnection module. The controller is contained in a metal container with a removable top. Connections to associated devices are made through connectors mounted on the interconnection module. Signals to and from the various devices are transformer coupled on circuit cards mounted on the right wall of the controller container. Data and control lead signals to the external interface unit are optically coupled on a circuit card mounted on the right wall of the controller container.

All power for the controller operations is received from the associated power supply mounted in the left section of the controller container. The required voltages are +12 Vdc, -12 Vdc and +5 Vdc along with a circuit common. The ac power for the ventilation assembly and the power supply is brought in through a 3 pin connector on the interconnection module.

7-2

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


The ventilation assembly provides the necessary cooling for the power supply and the controller circuit cards.

The signals between the printer, the full opcon, the cassette drives and the controller are in the form of Teletype

Corporation Standard Serial Interface (SSI). The signals between the controller and the RO opcon are in the form of dc levels. The signal between the controller and the associated interface unit are in the form of optical isolator input and output signals. The associated interface unit converts these signals into MIL Standard 188C signals for use on-line.

(Refer to Part 8 for description of interface).

Identity

Exact identity of the controller must be known before servicing or repair is begun.

Identification plates are present on the lower portion of the wired frame. The code stamped on the plate identifies the complete assembly (with circuit cards).

Controllers modified with modification kits have modification kit number labels attached to the rear card extractor of the modified circuit card, or mounted to the left of the identification plate.

To aid in identifying a set or station, a Set Features and Options Record should be filled out and inserted in the pedestal document holder.

7-3

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP.188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

1.

DESCRIPTION, Identity (Cont)

Controller identity is aided by observing the quantity and part numbers of circuit cards included in controller and size of interconnection module. Refer to chart below for circuit card part number, location, and quantity for each controller.

2.CONTROLLER CODES

7-4

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-5

2.

CONTROLLER CODES (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TCO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

7-6

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-7

40C435, 40C437 or 40C438 series controllers have

410203 backpanel.

40C436 series controllers have 410206 backpanel.

* 40C436 series controllers require Issue 2A or higher of


† The 40C437/AEE/091 is identical to the

40C435/AEE/091, but contains a narrow interconnection module for rack mounting application.

* Various arrangements of additional 410403 cards are available. Refer to 3. CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT

FORMS for variations.

§ Many arrangements of the 40C438/AEP/105 are available. Refer to 3. CONTROLLER ARRANGE-

MENT FORMS for variations.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

2.

CONTROLLER CODES (Cont)

Options

Controller options are activated by positioning rocker switches on the 410408 Communication Interface Unit (CIU) circuit card and the 410403 Programmable Interval Timer/Station Identification Device (PIT/SID) circuit card on early design controllers and on the 410411 CIU/PIT/SID circuit card on late design controllers. The options and switch settings are listed below.

Refer to Pages 7-9 through 7-79, Controller Arrangement Forms for the following information:

a.

Circuit cards required, b.

Placement of circuit cards, d c.

Mandatory position of switches (on or off) on circuit cards, d.

Controller options selected.

Using the Controller Arrangement Forms, check each controller in the station for the following: a.

Circuit cards are in their proper positions, b.

Switches on circuit cards are on or off (i.e., as entered on Controller Arrangement Form).

Extracting circuit cards from controller.

(1) Lift up on the extractor handles of the circuit card.

(2) Lift circuit card straight up.

Locating switch packs on circuit cards.

NOTE: "1" is always at the top, and "ON" is always to the left.

Activating options.

7-8

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

3.

CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS

Controller 40C430/ABD/025 With 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards


Options

Refer to Pages 7-80 and 7-81, Option Switch Settings.

A.

Line code

B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.

Pre-empt local on receipt of receive data

E.

Substitute asterisk (*) for parity errored character

F.

Line parity on ITA5 data

G.

Transmit answer-back character on receipt of

ENQ

H.

Line feed printer on receipt of carriage return

I.

Asynchronous transmission speeds

J.

Answer-back character

If used, indicate answer-back character in box at right of chart.

K.

Insert line feed after 79th character from display.

L.

Mode KD switches to after sending

M.

Line copied by printer in on-line mode

N.

Send extended characters on-line in S/R mode

O.

Allow sending only if ETX is on display

P.

Mode KD switches to on receipt of ETX

7-9

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.

CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS (Cont)

Controller 40C430/ABD/025 With 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards and 408960 Modification Kit

7-10

Options

Refer to Pages 7-82 and 7-83, Option Switch Setting.

A.

Line code

B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.


E.


F.


G.


ENQ

H.


I.


J.



K.

Insert line feed after 79th character from display.

L.


M.


N.


O.


P.


AA.. Printer ON/OFF Control

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40OC430/ABD/025 With 410411 Circuit Card

Options

Refer to Pages 7-86 through 7-88, Option Switch

Setting.

A1.

Line code (Power Up)

A2.

Line code (Option II)

B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.


E.


F.


H.


ENQ

J.


7-11

K1.

Power up asynchronous transmission speed

K2.

Option II asynchronous transmission speed

L1.

Answer-back character -back to If used, indicate answer

L8.

character in box at right of chart

M.

Insert line feed after 79th character from display

N.


P.


R.


S.


T.


U.

High speed asynchronous baud rate

W.

Low speed asynchronous baud rate

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C430/ABD/025 With 410411 Circuit Card and 408960 Modification Kit

Options

Refer to Pages 7-89 through 7-91, Option Switch Setting

A1.


A2.


B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.


E. Substitute asterisk (*) for parity errored character

F.


H.


ENQ

J.


7-12

K1.


K2.


L1.

Answer-back character to If used, indicate answer-back

L8.

character in box at right of chart.

M.

Insert line feed after 79 th

character from display.

N.


P.


R.


S.


T.

Mode KD switches to on receipt ofETX

U.


W.


AA.. Printer ON/OFF control

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C430/AAT/017 With 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards

“CONTINUE”

LIGHT PATTERNS

NONE

(1) Determine terminal and device addresses from system installation information.

(2) Program the bits of each address per chart above. Program bit 8 for odd parity.

Mark = Switch Off

Space-= Switch On

(3) Record switch settings by writing o for mark,

• for space in the appropriate box in chart above.

(4) Write the character programmed for each address in box at right of chart.

Option A (SPA15-4) switch off (o) inserts terminal and device address in first block of transmit data.

7-13

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 3 lW4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C430/AAT/017 With 410411 Circuit Card

(1) Determine terminal and device addresses from system installation information.

(2) Program the bits of each address per chart above. Program bit 8 for odd parity.

Mark = Switch Off

Space = Switch On

(3)

(4)

Record switch settings by writing

O for mark, · for space in the appropriate box in chart above.

Write the character programmed for each address in box at right of chart.

Option A (SPB2-4) switch off (

O

) inserts terminal and device address in first block of transmit data.

7-14

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W44-300-1


Controller 40C431/ABE/026 With 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards

Options

Refer to Pages 7-80,and 7-81, Option Switch Setting.

A.

Line code

B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.


E.


F.


G.


ENQ

H.


I.


J.



7-15

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C431/ABE/026 With 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards and 408958 Modification Kit

7-16

Options


A.

Line code

B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.


E.


F.


G.

Transmit answer-back character on receipt of ENQ

H.


I.


J.



M.

Short buffer

N.

Printer paging

P.

Printer double line feed

R.

Printer formout on ETX and paper sequence (LF, LF,

N, N, N, N)

S.

Printer formout on motor off

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0 10/TO 31Vw -4:b06-1


Controller 40C431/ABE/026 With 410411 Circuit Card

7-17

Options


Setting.

A1.


A2.


B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.


E.


F.


H.


ENQ

J.


K1.


K2.


L1.

Answer-back character to If used, indicate answer-back:

L8.


U.


W.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C431/ABE/026 With 410411 Circuit Card and 408958 Modification Kit

7-18

Options

Refer to Pages 7-92 and 7-93, Option Switch

Setting.

A1.


A2.


B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.


E.


F.


H.


ENQ

J.


K1.


K2.


L1.

Answer-back character to If used, indicate answer-back

L8.


U.


W.


M.

Short buffer

N.

Printer paging

P.


R.

Printer formout on ETX and paper sequence

(LF, LF, N, N, N, N)

TM 11-5815-606;34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-T88-0010/TO 31fW,f-4-300-1


Controller 40C431/ABE/026 With 403019 Modification Kit

7-19

The basic modification kit does not provide any additional RAM memory. With the basic modification kit only, the receive buffer size can be increased from 1000 characters to 5000 characters. If additional receive buffer capacity is required, the receive buffer size can be increased to 9000 characters by the addition of a 410461 or 410465 4K RAM circuit card (ordered separately).

The basic modification kit provides an option to monitor received data for the sequence "XCRITIC". Two additional sequences of up to four programmable characters may be added by the addition of a 410403 PIT/SID circuit card (ordered separately).

Refer to Pages 7-94 through 7-100 for

options.

The identification label for this modification kit is found on the front left side of the controller, near the controller identification label.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C431/ABE/026 With 403019 Modification Kit and Additional RAM Circuit Card

7-20

41046X is 410461 or 410465 Circuit

Card.

Refer to Pages 7-94 through 7-100

for options.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX O969-LP.188-0010/TO 31W 4--300q1


Controller 40C431/ABE/026 With 403019 Modification Kit and 410403 Circuit Card

7-21

Refer to Pages 7-94 through

7-100 for options.

TM 1-15815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C431/ABE/026 With 403019 Modification Kit With 410403 and Additional RAM Circuit Card

7-22

41046X is 410461 or

410465 Circuit Card.

Refer to Pages 7-94 through

7-100 for options.

Controller 40C431/AEM/103

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVEtLEX 969-LP-i88Os00Oi/TO '3i1W-4-300-i


Refer to Pages 7-94 through 7-100 for options.

7-23

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C431/AEM/103 With Additional 410403 Circuit Card

7-24

The 410403 circuit card in slot 5 is a separately edited card to provide detection of additional

Urgent Traffic Sequences and is ordered separately.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C432/ABF/027 With 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards

Options


A.

Line code

B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.

**

E.


F.

Line parity ITA5 data

G.


H.


I.


J.



**Not applicable to ROP. Leave switch on (

•

).

Requires an additional line keyer card in interface and send line.

7-25

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010i/rO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C432/ABF/027 With 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards and 408958 Modification Kit

Options


A.

B.

Line code

Transmit stop bit

**Not applicable to ROP. Leave switch on (0).


7-26

C.

Transmission mode

D.

**

E.


F.

Line parity ITA5 data

G.


H.


I.


J.



M.

Short buffer

N.

Printer paging

P.


R.

Printer formout on ETX and paper sequence (LF, LF,

N, N, N, N)

S.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-1i88-0010TO 31W4.4-300-1


Controller 40C432/ABF/027 With 410411 Circuit Card


•

).


7-27

Options


Setting.

A1. Line code (Power Up)

A2. Line code (Option II)

B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode

D.

**

E.


F.


H.


J.


K1. Power up asynchronous transmission speed

K2. Option II asynchronous transmission speed

L1. Answer-back character to If used, indicate answer-back

L8. character in box at right of chart.

U.


W.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS (Cont)

Controller 40C432/ABF/027 With 410411 Circuit Card and 408958 Modification Kit

Options

Refer to Pages 7-92 and 7-93 Option Switch Setting.

A1.


A2.



•

).


7-28

Options


Setting.

B.

Transmit stop bit

C.

Transmission mode


F.


H.


J.


K1. Power up asynchronous transmission speed

K2. Option II asynchronous transmission speed

L1. Answer-back character to If used, indicate answer-back

L8. character in box at right of chart.

U.


W.


M.

Short buffer

N.

Printer paging

P.


R.

Printer formout on ETX and paper sequence (LLF, N. N, N. N)

S.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300:1

TEMPEST M40 ST.OP MANUAIL 359

Controller 40C432/ABF/027 With 403019 Modification Kiti

7-29

The basic modification kit does not provide any additional RAM memory. With the basic modification kit only, the receive buffer size can be increased from 1000 characters to 5000 characters. If additional receive buffer capacity is required, the receive buffer size can be increased to 9000 characters by the addition of a 410461 or 410465 4K RAM circuit card (ordered separately).

The basic modification kit provides an option to monitor received data for the sequence "'CRITIC". Two additional sequences of up to four programmable characters may be added by the addition of a 410403 PIT/SID circuit card (ordered separately).


options.

The identification label for this modification kit is found on the front left side of the controller, near the controller identification label.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


Controller 40C432/ABF/027 With 403019 Modification Kit With Additional RAM Circuit Card

7-30

41046X is 410461 or 410465 Circuit

Card.


options.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 3iW4-4-300-1


Controller 40C432/ABF/027 With 403019 Modification Kit and 410403 Circuit Card

7-31


options.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.


Controller 40C432/ABF/027 With 403019 Modification Kit With 410403 and Additional RAM Circuit Card

7-32


options.

Controller 40C432/AEN/104

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-33

Refer to Pages 7-94 through 7-100 for options

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Controller 40C432/AEN/104 With Additional 410403 Circuit Card

7-34


options.

Controller 40C433/ACS/059 ‡‡

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


OPTIONS: Refer to Pages 7-101 through

7-103 for Option Switch Settings.

A.

Line monitor by printer on send data

B.

ETX on premature end of message

C.

Colon lower case, semicolon upper case

D.

Keyboard on-line transmits blind

E.

Display received escape sequences

F.

Printer on-line required to send

G.

Send extended characters from keyboard

H.

Monitor tape on required to send

I. Automatic paging of printer (58 line/page)

J. Printer optioned for double line feed

K.

Keep letter-figtires shift characters (S

I

, S

O

)

L.

Printer select also selects receive tape

M.

Terminal on-line parity

N.

Mode display stays in at end of receive message

P.

Controller port for send tape

O.

Controller port for receive tape

R.

Controller port for monitor tape

S.

1st station identity character

T.

2nd station identity character

U.

Mode display goes to after sending

‡‡ The 40C433/ACS/059 is identical to the 40C435/ACS/059 with the exception that the 40C433/ACS/059 contains a narrow interconnection module for rack mounted applications.

7-35

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.


Controller 40C433/ACS/059 With 408826 Modification Kit

OPTIONS: Refer to Pages 7-101 through

7-103 for Option Switch Settings.

A.


B.


C.


D.


E.


F.


G.


H.


I.

Automatic paging of printer (58 line/page)

J.

Printer optioned for double line feed

K.

Keep letter-figures shift characters (SI,

S

0

)

7-36

L.


M.


N.


P.


Q.


R.


S.


T.


U.


ZZ. Eight-level asynchronous baud rate

ZZ.

Five-level asynchronous baud rate

V.

Transmission mode

Controller 40C434/ACW/063

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-37

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Controller 40C434/AEK/101

7-38

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-00i /TO3 iW4-4-300-i


Controller 40C435/ACS/059 (Identical to the 40C433/ACS/059, but with wide interconnection module.)

OPTIONS: Refer to pages 7-104 through 7-106

for Option Switch Settings.

A.


B.


C.


D.


E.


F.


G.

Send extended characters from keyboard -R.

H.


I.


J.


7-39

K.

Keep letter-figures shift characters (SI, SO)

L.


M.


N.


P.


O.



S.


T.


U.


ZZ.

Eight level asynchronous baud rate

ZZ.

Five level asynchronous baud rate

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Controller 40C435/ACS/059 With 408826 Modification Kit

OPTIONS: Refer to Pages 7-104 through

7-106 for Option Switch Settings.

A.


B.


C.


D.

Keyboardon4ine transmits blind

E.


F.


G.


H.


I.


J.


K.

Keep letter-figures shift characters (S

I

,

S

0

)

7-40

L.


M.


N.


P.


Q.


R.


S.


T.


U.


ZZ. Eight-level asynchronous baud rate

ZZ. Five-level asynchronous baud rate

V. Transmission mode

Controller 40C435/AEE/091

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




A.

Line monitored by printer on send data

B.


C.


D.


E.


F.


G.


H.


I.


J.


K.

Keep letters-figures shift characters

(S

I

, S

O

)

L.


M.


7-41

N.


P.


Q.


R.


S.


T.


U.


V.

Isochronous/Asynchronous operation

W.

Data terminal ready control

X.

Line wrap on display

Y.

Reject received Nulls

Z.

Home on send

AA.

Stop bits in five-level operation

ZZ.

Eight-level asynchronous baud rate

ZZ. Five-level asynchronous baud rate

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Controller 40C435/AEE/091 With Additional 410406 Circuit Card



A.

Line monitored by printer on send data

B.


C.


D.


E.


F.


G.


H.


I.


J.


K.

Keep letters-figures shift characters

(S

I

, S

O

)

L.


M.


7-42

N.


P.


Q.


R.


S.


T.


U.


V.

Isochronous/Asynchronous operation

W.

Data terminal ready control

X.

Line wrap on display

Y.

Reject received Nulls

Z.

Home on send

AA.

Stop bits in five-level operation

ZZ.

Eight-level asynchronous baud rate

ZZ.

Five-level asynchronous baud rate

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


MCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form

LINE CODE: ASCII • EBCDIC •

40C436 Controllers: ADA/092 (EBCDIC) or ADD/093 (ASCII)

HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 2-PTRs (1 Print Local) PATTERN LIGHTS OR SWITCH POSITIONS

¶¶

§§



7-43

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.


MCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form


Handles: 2-KDs and 1-PTR (Print Local)

40C436 Controllers: ADA/092 (EBCIC) or ADD/093 (ASCII) With Additional 410435 (EBCDIC) or

410431 (ASCII) Circuit Card.



7-44

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


SCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form


40C436 Controllers: ADK/075

HANDLES: Up to 4-DCCs

***



7-45

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.


SCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form


40C436 Controllers: ADK/075 With Additional 410406 Circuit Card

HANDLES: Up to 6-DCCs



7-46

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


DCC (EPROM Version) - Controller Arrangement Form

DCC: A • B • C • D • E • F •

40C436 Controllers: ADN/094 (EBCDIC), ADU/095 (ASCII)

HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 2-PTRs (1 Print Local)

7-47

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.



DCC: A • B • C • D • E • F •

40C436 Controllers: ADN/094 (EBCDIC) or ADU/095 (ASCII) With Additional DI/O (410435 or

410431) circuit Card.

HANDLES: 2-KD & 1-PTR (Print Local)

7-48

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


DCC (EPROM Version)- Controller Arrangement Form

DCC: A • B • C • D • E • F •

40C436 Controllers: ADN/094 (EBCDIC)-- ADU/095 (ASCII) With Additional 410406 Circuit Card.

HANDLES: 1-KD & Up To 5-PTRs (1 Print Local)

7-49

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.

CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENTS FORMS (Cont)


DCC: A • B • C • D • E • F •

40C436 Controllers: ADN/094 (EBCDIC) or ADU/095 (ASCII) With Additional 410406 Circuit Card,

410431 (ASCII) or 410435 (EBCDIC) Circuit Cards.

HANDLES: 2-KDs & Up To 4-PTRs (2 Print Local)

7-50

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


DCC (EPROM Version)- Controller Arrangement Form

DCC: A • B • C • D • E • F •

40C436 Controllers: ADN/094 (EBCDIC) or ADU/095 (ASCII) With Additional 410406 Circuit Card and 410435 (EBCDIC) or 410431 (ASCII) Circuit Card.

HANDLES: 2-KDs + Up To 4-PTRs (1 Print Local)

7-51

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Controller 40C437/AEE/091 †††


††† The 40C437/AEE/091 is identical to the 40C435/AEE/091 with the exception that the 40C437/AEE/091 contains a narrow interconnection module for rack mounting applications.

7-52

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C437/AEE/091 With Additional 410406 Circuit Card


7-53

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.


Controller 40C435/AEE/091 or 40C437/AEE/091 With 403142 Modification Kit ‡‡‡

‡‡‡ The identification label for this modification kit is found on the front left side of the controller, near the controller identification label.


7-54

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C435/AEE/091 or 40C437/AEE/091 With 403142 Modification Kit and Additional 410406 Circuit Card


7-55

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Controller 40C437/AEL/106


7-56

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C437/AEL/106 With Additional 410406 Circuit Card

Refer to Pages 7-117 through 7-122 for options.,

7-57

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.


Controller 40C437/AEL/106 Modified to be a 40C437/AEL/107


7-58

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C437/AEL/106 Modified to be a 40C437/AEL/107 With Optional Answer-Back Features ¶¶¶

¶¶¶


7-59

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

3.


Controller 40C437/AEL/106 Modified to be a 40C437/AEL/107 With Optional Urgent Traffic Detection Feature

¶¶¶

¶¶¶


7-60

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C437/AEL/106 Modified to be a 40C437/AEL/107 With Optional ZNY Feature

Refer to Pages 7-123 through 7-127 for options.

7-61

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. CONTROLLER ARRANGEMENT FORMS (Cont)

Controller 40C437/AEL/106 Modified to be a 40C437/AEL/107 With Additional 410406 Circuit Card****

****With an additional 410406 card added, terminal can only accommodate two optional 410403 cards instead of three.

7-62


TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C437/AEL/107

CARD POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


7-63

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Controller 40C437/AEL/107 With Optional Answer-Back Feature


7-64

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C437/AEL/107 With Optional Urgent Traffic Detection Feature


7-65

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Controller 40C437/AEL/107 With Optional ZNY Feature


7-66

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C437/AEL/107 With Additional 410406 Circuit Card****

Refer to pages 7-123 through 7-127 for options.

7-67



40C438/AEP/105 Controller - Basic-i Line

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


7-68

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C438/AEP/105 Controller - 1 Line. Urgent Traffic Detector,


7-69



40C438/AEP/105 Controller- Basic-2 Line

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


7-70

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C438/AEP/105 Controller - 2 Line, Urgent Traffic Detectors Lines 1 and 2


7-71

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



40C438/AEP/105 Controller - 2 Line, 9K Buffers


7-72

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C438/AEP/105 Controller - 2 Lines, 9K Buffers and Urgent Traffic Detector Line 1 and 2


7-73

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



40C438/AEP/105 Controller - Basic-3 Line


7-74

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C4381AEP/105 Controller - 3 Lines. Urgent Traffic Detectors Lines 1, 2 and 3


7-75

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



40C438/AEP/105 Controller - 3 Line, 9K Buffers*****


7-76

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C4381AEP/105 Controller - 3 Lines. 9K Buffers and Urgent Traffic Detectors Lines 1 and 2


7-77

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



40C438/AEP/105 Controller -- 3 Lines, 9K Buffers and Urgent Traffic Detectors Lines 1 and 3


7-78

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C438/AEP/105 Controller - 3 Lines, 9K Buffers and Urgent Traffic Detectors Lines 2 and 3


7-79

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. OPTION SWITCH SETTINGS

Controllers 40C430/AAT/017, 40C430/ABD/025. 40C431/ABE/026 and 40C432/ABF/027

With 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards

7-80

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-81

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4. OPTION SWITCH SETTINGS (Cont)

Controller 40C430/ABD/025 with 410408 and 410403 Circuit Cards and 408960 Modification Kit

7-82

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-83

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Controllers 40C431/ABE/026 and 40C432/ABF/027 With 410408 and 410403 and 408958 ,Modification Kit

7-84

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-85

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




Controllers 40C430/AAT/017, 400430/ABD/025, 40C431/ABE/026 and 40C432/ABF/027

With 410411 Circuit card

7-86

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-87

4. OPTION SWITCH SETTINGS (cont)

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


7-88

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller 40C430/ABD/025 with 410411 Circuit Card and 408960 Modification Kit

7-89


TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


7-90

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-91

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Controllers 40C431/ABE/026 and 40C432/ABF/027 With 410411 Circuit Card and 408958

Modification Kit

7-92

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-93

TM 11-5815.606-34 NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

4. OPTION SWITCH SETTINGS (Cont)

Option Switch Settings, for Controllers With 410411 or 410403 Circuit Cards

7-94

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300- 1


7-95

TM 11.5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Option Switch Settings for Controllers With 410411 or 410403 Circuit Cards (Cont)

7-96

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-97

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

4. OPTION SWITCH SETTINGS(Cont)

Option Switch Setting for Controllers With 410411 or 410403 Circuit Cards (Cont)

7-98

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1'


7-99

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Option Switch Settings for Controllers With 410411 or 410403 Circuit Cards (Cont)

Switch OFF( O ) = Mark

Switch ON (

•

· ) Space

7-100

Controller 40C433/ACS/059

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-101


Controller 40C433/ACS/059 (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

7-102


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188.0010/TO .1W4-4-300-1


7-103



TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-00:I0/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

7-104

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LF-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-105


Controller 40C435/ACS/059 (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)

7-106

Controller 40C435/AEE/091 or 40C437/AEE/091

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-107

TM 115815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Controller 40C435/AEE/091 or 40C437/AEE/091 (Cont)

7-108

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969- LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-109

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


Controllers 40C436/ADA/092, 40C436/ADD/093. and 40C436/ADK/075

Controller Option 401 - Station Poll and Select Addresses

Option 401 is determined by the station number entered in the SCC or MCC portion of the Station Configuration

Worksheet.

7-110

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


TABLE A

ASCII

STATION POLL ADDRESS (SCC or MCC)

Note: The "HEX" addresses shown above do not necessarily relate to the setting of the switches.

7-111

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


TABLE B

ASCII

STATION SELECT ADDRESS (SCC or MCC)

Note: The "HEX" addresses shown above do not necessarily relate to the setting of the switches.

7-112

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969; LP.-188-010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


TABLE C.

EBCDIC

OPTION 401 - STATION POLL ADDRESS (SCC OR MCC)

LEGEND: is "logical OR" (see Station No. 15).

is "logical NOT" (see Station No. 31).

7-113

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

A. GENERAL (Cont)


TABLE -D

EBCDIC

OPTION 401 - STATION SELECT ADDRESS (SCC OR MCC)

7-114

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller Options - 402-411

Options 402-411 are determined from the Service Order and Station Configuration Worksheet and apply to either

ASCII or EBCDIC Stations. The 410411 is present.

7-115

4. OPTION-SWITCH SETTINGS (Cont)

Controller Options - 402-411 (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



7-116

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controllers 40C435/AEE/091 or 40C437/AEE/091 With 403142 Modification Kit, or Controller 40C437/AEL/106.

7-117


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



7-118

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-119


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



7-120

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-119


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



7-120

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


LINE TERMINATOR FUNCTIONS TABLE

7-121


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



7-122

Controller 40C437/AEL/107

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-123

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



4. OPTION SWITCH SETTINGS, Controller 40C437/AEL/107 (Cont)

7-124

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-125

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


A. GENERAL Cont)


7-126

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-127

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



4. OPTION SITCH SETTINGS, Controller 40C437/AEL/107 (Cont)

PROGRAMMABLE URGENT TRAFFIC CHARACTERS

NOTE 1: Circuit card may be inserted in any available slot in controller.

NOTE 2: Sequence characters must be programmed in ASCII.

NOTE 3: Switch ON bit spacing (0), switch OFF = bit marking (1).

NOTE 4: Neither sequence may contain an imbedded "NUL" character.

NOTE 5: If either sequence contains less than four characters, the last valid character in that sequence must be followed by a “NUL" character.

NOTE 6: If the first character of a sequence is programmed as a "NUL", that sequence will be ignored.

NOTE 7: The eighth bit of each character must be set spacing (ON).

NOTE 8: Programmed sequences may be verified using the terminals Control mode menu.

7-128

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


ANSWER-BACK CHARACTERS.

NOTE 1: Circuit card may be inserted in any available slot in the controller.

NOTE 2: Sequence characters must be programmed in ASCII.

NOTE 3: Switch ON = bit spacing (0), switch OFF = bit marking (1).

NOTE 4: Sequence may not contain an imbedded 'NUL" character.

NOTE 5: The use of the "ENQ" character in the sequence is discouraged.

NOTE 6: If the sequence contains less than eight characters, the last valid character in the sequence must be followed by a “NUL" character.

NOTE 7: If the first character of the sequence is a "NUL", the answer-back sequence will not be transmitted.


7-129

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




PROGRAMMABLE "ZNY" CHARACTERS

NOTE 1: Circuit card may be inserted in any available slot in controller.

NOTE 2: Classification characters must be programmed in ASCII.

NOTE 3: Switch ON = bit spacing (O), switch OFF = bit marking (1).


NOTE 5: Each character programmed will represent a three character "ZNY" classification. (R=ZNY RRR).

NOTE 6: If less than eight characters are to be programmed, the last valid character must be followed by a "NUL".

NOTE 7: All characters programmed after a "NUL" will be ignored.

NOTE 8: Verification of all programmed classifications can be made through the terminals Control mode menu.

7-130

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTES

7-131

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



1. CLEANING AND REFINISHING

Cleaning is to be done with a damp cotton cloth (mild detergent solution) followed by buffing dry with a soft cloth or dusting using a soft brush and blow off with an air duster (not to exceed 20 pounds pressure). Open any lids, covers, door or panels that allow access to the interior of the electronics package. Look for dust accumulations, lint, ribbon particles, paper dust or foreign materials that may be visible only during servicing. Remove obstructions to ventilation in air ducts, grills, channels, vanes or the areas between the circuit cards.

Removal of circuit cards is required when cleaning the circuit card frame. Then, hand wipe all top and bottom surfaces of the frame. Dust away any particles or loose foreign material from this bottom area.

Refinishing

Since the controller is mounted inside a cabinet or a pedestal, is-not externally visible, and has only one painted part, refinishing is not necessary.

2. INSPECTION

Visual Checks

The following visual checks are made to maintain proper set condition: a. Visually inspect all card connector terminals and insulators for abnormal characteristics -- replace if necessary.

b. Visually inspect all connectors, cables, and wire leads for proper termination, no pinched, shorted, broken, or disconnected wires, etc, replace if necessary.

Protective Grounds

All Tempest Model 40 Sets require protective ground checks, to insure that potential shock hazards are not present.

These checks are to be made before power is turned on.

NOTE:

Prior to operational checkout, make sure all grounding straps are connected.

The protective ground terminal of the main ac power cable should have continuity to each unit frame in the station.

7-132

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTE: After cleaning and correction of all visually apparent defects, an operational checkout should be performed

(Page 7-134, C. TESTING). Also refer to Page 7-135, D. TROUBLESHOOTING.

3. CONVERSIONS AND VARIATIONS

Conversions

Converting a controller from one terminal-configuration code to another is possible by replacing or adding circuit cards in the controller frames. Different controller configuration possibilities are shown on Page 7-3, Identity.

Variations

Variations of the controller refers to changes in the options of the circuit cards or added cabling and Teletype Corporation units (printer, monitor, etc). The Model 40 equipment design makes terminal reconfiguration a simple plug-in operation, see Part 10 for examples of terminal configurations.

4. PACKING FOR SHIPMENT OR STORAGE

A repaired Tempest Model 40 Controller may be installed and shipped (or stored) in its appropriate position in the pedestal.

If a controller is to be packaged for individual shipment or storage, the following packing materials (available from

Teletype Corporation) are required:

For 40C430, 40C431, 40C432, 40C433, 40C437 and 40C438 Controllers.

Materials Required



28235PK Plywood Details

28236PK Plywood Details


Qty

1

1

2

2

8

For 40C434, 40C435 and 40C436 Controllers.

Same as above except:

Omit

28235PK Plywood Details 2

Add

28293PK Plywood Details 2

Materials Required

27643PK

21719PK

21298PK

21632PK

Labels

Tape (as required)

Tissue Paper (as required)

Tape (as required)

Qty

2

7-133

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



4. PACKING FOR SHIPMENT OR STORAGE (Cont)

(1). Use 28235PK Details for 40C430, 40C431, 40C432, 40C433, 40C437 and 40C438 Controllers

Use 28293PK Details for 40C434, 40C435 and 40C436 Controllers

C. TESTING

1. GENERAL

An operational checkout should be performed on all repaired controllers. To be tested, the controller must be installed in

a full capability Tempest Model 40 KD or KDP Set of known good condition. Refer to Page 7-197,

F.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS

.

If there is sufficient repair volume, it may be desirable to make extension cables such that the controller can be operated alongside the Tempest Model 40 Set without physically installing the controller into the set.

Before starting any tests, check that all cards and cable connectors are fully seated. If a printer is present check that paper and a ribbon are installed. Turn on power switches. Turn up the brightness control for the monitor.

Always perform the steps in the order given. A satisfactory result is based on all previous steps being satisfactory. If the desired response is not obtained at any step, repeat the step to make sure that the step was performed correctly.

2. FUNCTIONAL TESTS

If operational failure occurs, go directly to Page 7-136, 2.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS

and perform the analysis indicated. Note that there are cases where the test results vary due to the option used.

7-134

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



1. GENERAL

Use the troubleshooting chart as follows: a. Always start with Analysis. Question 1.

b. Answer analysis questions and follow proper response directive to isolate and correct trouble.

c. Where more than one component is specified for replacement, substitute one at a time in the order' specified.

The, original component shall be replaced if the' trouble is not corrected before making the next indicated substitution. When installing a replacement component, make certain that all options (if present) in this' component are .programmed for proper operation. If replacement of the part or subcomponent indicated does not correct the trouble, replace the next higher order' of component (ie, circuit card, wired frame, or entire controller).

The following caution procedures must be observed' when troubleshooting.

CAUTION 1

:

COMPONENT.

TURN OFF ALL PO F£R OR SIGNAL SOURCES BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING ANY

CAUTION 2

: TO AVOID POSSIBLE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO CIRCUITRY, WEAR A 346392 STATIC DISCHARGE

STRAP CONNECTED TO GROUND TO ALLOW STATIC DISCHARGE BEFORE HANDLING CIRCUIT CARDS FOR

REMOVAL OR REPLACEMENT. AVOID TOUCHING CIRCUIT LANDS AND CARD COMPONENTS AS MUCH AS

POSSIBLE.

NOTE

: Once the trouble has been corrected, repeat the operational checkout procedures to assure correct performance.

7-135

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




CHART 1

Controller Self-Test

The use of Controller Arrangement Forms is necessary to troubleshoot controller using controller self-test.

Refer to Pages 7-9 through 7-79, Controller Arrangement Forms.

Sample Controller Arrangement Form

NOTE:

Some arrangements have more than one continue light pattern.

For Controllers 40C430/AAT/017, 40C430/ABD/025, 40C431/ABE/026 and 40C432/ABF/027 only: For the self-test program to properly test the 410408 circuit card, the card must be programmed for the ITA5 code, isochronous mode with one stop bit (factory option).

"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to Part 6 POWER SUPPLY,

3.


.


1. Do all three voltage indicators light on power supply when power is turned on?

2. Depress and hold test switch. Do all pattern and run lamps light?

3. Do correct voltages appear at power supply output terminals? Refer to

Part 6 POWER SUPPLY,

3.


.

Go to 7.

Go to 4.

Go to 3.

Go to Part 6 POWER SUPPLY,

3.


.

7-136

ANALYSIS QUESTION

4. Replace 410401 circuit card in slot 2 of controller.

Depress test switch. Do all pattern lamps and run lamp light?

5. Replace 410400 circuit card in slot 1 of controller.

Depress test switch. Do all pattern lamps and run lamp light?

6. Remove remaining cards one

At a time. After each card is removed, push test switch to see if all pattern lamps and run lamp light. Replace defective card and go to 7.

7. Release test switch. Controller will automatically run self-test. Does a trouble light pattern appear on pattern lamps?

8. Before removing circuit card indicated by trouble light pattern, be sure card is properly seated in card connector. Does trouble light pattern repeat when test is run again?

9. Remove circuit card indicated by trouble light pattern. Check setting of address switches on card. Also check that all connector pins are straight, not bent over because they will not make contact. Refer to

Pages 7-9 through 7-79,

Controller Arrangement

Forms for appropriate form. Were switch settings correct?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 1 (Cont)

CONTROLLER SELF-TEST

Go to 7.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 5.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 7.

Go to 7.

Go to 8.

Go to 9.

Replace circuit card.

Go to 6.

Go to 7.

Go to 10.

Go to 10.

Correct switch settings and/or straighten connector pins and retest.

7-137


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969.LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


CHART 1 (Cont)

CONTROLLER SELF-TEST

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Push continue switch.

Go to.11.

Go to 11.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE ANALYSIS QUESTION

10. Does controller arrangement have continue light pattern? Refer to Pages 7-9

through 7-79, Controller

Arrangement Forms. Does a continue light pattern appear on pattern lamps?

11. At the end of the Controller Self-Test, the

Pattern lamps and the Run lamp will flash sequentially. If controller does not have an associated monitor the controller will automatically enter the idle mode at end of Controller Self-Test. If controller has an associated monitor(s) a test pattern will be displayed on the first monitor. Refer to chart below for correct pattern for the DI/O card(s) in controller under test. Is display pattern correct?

12. Depress continue switch and test pattern will appear on second monitor.

Is test pattern correct for second monitor?

If controller has second monitor go to 12.

If controller has one monitor, depress continue switch and controller returns to its normal idle mode.

Push continue switch to return controller to its normal idle mode,

Replace associated

DI/O card and retest.

Replace associated

DI/O card and retest.

7-138

Display Patterns

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-300-1


7-139

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



7-140

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


After the Controller Self-Test has been run, go to the chart indicated below for the controller under test.

CONTROLLER CODE

40C430/AAT/017

40C430/ABD/0 25

40C431/ABE/026

40C431/AEM/103

40C432/ABF/027

40C432/AEN/104

40C433/ACS/059

40C434/ACW/063

40C434/AEK/ 101

40C435/ACS/059

40C435/AEE/091

40C436/ADA/092

40C436/ADD/093

40C436/ADK/075

40C436/ADN/094

40C436/ADU/095

40C437/AEE/091

40C437/AEL/106

40C437/AEL/107

40C438/AEP/105

CHART

8

8

8

5

7

6

6

4

4

5

3

3

1

2

7

7

8

8

7

9

7-141

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 2

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C430/ABD/025

Go to 3.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

“NO” RESPONSE


1. In local mode do characters generated on opcon appear on monitor?

2. Do SSI signals appear at posts D25, 26, 27, and 28 and D11, 12, 13, and 14 of

410592 circuit card on right wall of controller?

Check wiring to opcon.

Check wiring to printer.

Refer to WDPs supplied with set.



56K BIT/SEC

7-142

ANALYSIS QUESTION

3. Can information on display be transferred to printer by depressing PRINT LOCAL?

(Place ETX at end of message, home cursor, depress

PRINT LOCAL.)

4. Depress S/R key. If set is full duplex, temporarily add a strap between terminals 2 and 3 of

TB101 terminal block in interface assembly. In above modes, do characters generated on keyboard appear on monitor?

5. When sending characters do the send mark and space lamps on 410408 or 410411

CIU circuit card flicker?

6. Is there approximately a

+5 V dc signal at pin 5 of

OPT 6 on 410596 circuit card on right wall of controller?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 2 (Cont)


Go to 4.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 12.

Go to 12.

Go to 9.

Go to 5.

Go to 6.

Go to 7.

7-143

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4300-1

359



CHART 2 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

7. Is the clear-to-send input being used in this set?

Check if there is a card in card connector Z4 of interface.

Go to 8.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check wiring in interface.

Refer to 9575WD in WDP supplied with set.


8. Is there a +1.5 V dc signal at post D14 of 410596 circuit card?

Clear to Send input is off. Turn

Clear to Send On or remove circuit card in slot 4 of

Interface.

Go to 10.

9. Is set programmed for isochronous operation?

10. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc clock signal at post D16

410596 circuit card?

NOTE: When checking this signal, the scope or meter common should be connected to post D6.

Go to 11.


Refer to 9575WD in WDP supplied with set.-


Go to 12.



Check that send clock is being supplied to interface.

11. Is there a 0 to +5 V dc clock signal at pin 5 of

OPT 5 of 410596 circuit card?

12. When sending a character, do the receive mark and space lamps flicker on

410408 CIU circuit card?

13. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc

Inverted character signal at post D5 of 410596 circuit card?


Replace 410408 or

410411 circuit card. card.

Replace 410408 or


Go to 14.

7-144

Replace 410596 circuit

Go to 13.



ANALYSIS QUESTION

14. Is there a 0 to +5 V dc character signal at pin 4 of OPT 2 on 410596 circuit card?

NOTE: For Sets modified with the 406621 modification kit, remove the 410608 circuit card from mounting posts, leave cables connected and swing out of the way for access to

OPT2 on 410596 circuit card.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 2 (Cont)


“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 15.


Go to 16.

Replace 410408 or 410411 circuit card.

16. If there a -5 V dc to +5

V dc clock signal at pin 5 of OPT 3 on old style

410596 circuit card or resistor 15 on the new style 410596 circuit card or resistor 2 of the 410608 circuit card for sets modified with the 406621 modifi cation kit?

Replace 410408 or


Go to 17.

7-145

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 2 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

17. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc clock signal at post D7 of



18. Is there a +5 V dc signal at post J3 of 410555 circuit card mounted on right side of controller?

19. Are the following signals present at posts indicated below?

cuit card.

Go to 19.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Replace 410596 cir-

Check wiring in interface. Refer to 9575WD in WDP supplied with set.

Check wiring to monitor.

Replace 410433

D I/O circuit card.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE



Check that receive clock is being supplied to the interface.

Check wiring to back panel.

Check 405807 cable assembly.

Go to 20.

7-146

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300


ANALYSIS QUESTION

20. Remove cable plugged into connector A of 410555 circuit card. Are the following signals present at pins indicated below?

CHART 2-(Cont)


“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Replace 410433 D I/O circuit card.

21. When Set has PRINT ON LINE on, does TERM READY lamp light?

22. Is there a 0 V dc signal at pin 1 of OPT 1 of



+5 V dc signal at post D2 of 410596 circuit card?

Go to 24.

Go to 23.



24. When Set has PRINT ON

LINE off, is TERM READY lamp off?


+1.5 V dc signal at pin 1 of OPT 1 on 410596 circuit card?

Go to 25.

Go to 26.

7-147

Go to 22.


Replace 410408 CIU circuit card.


Check SSI signal to opcon.


Replace 410408 CIU circuit card.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 2 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION


0 V dc signal at post D2 of 410596 circuit card?


“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Place controller in service.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


CHART 3

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS - 40C431/ABE/026 AND 40C431/AEM/103

ANALYSIS QUESTION

1. In local mode do characters generated on opcon appear on printer?

Go to 3.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

2. Do SSI signals appear at posts D25, 26, 27, and 28 and D11, 12, 13, and 14 of





(Continuity test)



56K BIT/SEC

7-148

ANALYSIS QUESTION

3. Place KP Sets in SEND. If set is full duplex, temporarily add a strap between terminals 2 and 3 of TB101 terminal block in interface assembly. In above mode, do characters generated on keyboard appear on printer?

4. When sending characters do the send mark and space lamps on 410408 or 410411

CIU circuit card flicker?



OPT 6 on 410596 circuit card on right wall of controller?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 3 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C431/ABE/026 AND 40C43i1AEM/103

Go to 17.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 4.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 8.

Go to 8

Go to 5.

Go to 6

7-149

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 3 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C431/ABE/026 AND 40C431/AEM/103

ANALYSIS QUESTION

6. Is the clear-to-send input being used in this set?

Check if there is a card in card connector Z4 of interface.

7. Is there a +1.5 V dc signal at post D14 of


Go to 7.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check that Clearto-Send signal is being supplied to interface.

Go to 9.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE







Go to 11.


9. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc bit clock signal at post

D16 of 410596 circuit card?

NOTE: When checking this signal, the scope.or meter common could be connected to post D6.

Go to 10 Check wiring in interface.


Check that bit clock is being supplied to interface.


OPT 5 of 410596 circuit card?

11. When sending a character, do the receive mark and space lamps flicker on 410408 or

410411 CIU circuit card?

12. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted character signal at post D5 of 410596 circuit card?


Replace 410408 or


Replace 410408 or


Go to 13.

7-150


Go to 12.



TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


ANALYSIS QUESTION


NOTE: For Sets modified with the 406621 modification kit, remove the

410608 circuit card from mounting. posts, leave cables connected and swing out of the way for access to OPT2 on

410596 circuit card.

CHART 3 (Cont)


Go to 14.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE



15. Is there a -5 V dc to +5

V dc clock signal at pin

5 of OPT 3 on old style

410596 circuit card or resistor 15 on the new style 410596 circuit card or resistor 2 of the

410608 circuit card for sets modified with the

406621 modification kit.

Go to 15.

Replace 410408 or


Replace 410408 or


Go to 16.

7-151

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

D. TROUBLESHOOTTNG (Cont)


CHART 3 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION




“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE




17. When KP Set is in RE-

CEIVE, does TERM READY lamp light?

18. Is there a 0 V dc signal at pin 1 of OPT 1 of 410596 circuit card on right wall of controller?

19. Is there approximately .a

+5 V dc signal at post D2 of 410596 circuit card?

Go to 20.

Go to 19.


Go to 18.


Replace 410408 or 410411

CIU circuit card.



20. When KP Set is in LOCAL, is TERM READY lamp off?


+1.5 V dc signal at pin 1 of OPT 1 on 410596 circuit card?


0 V dc signal at post D2


Go to 21.

Go to 22.

Place controller in service.

Check SSI signal to opcon.


Replace 410408 or 410411

CIU circuit card.


7-152

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 4

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C432/ABF/027 AND 40C432/AEN/104

Go to 6.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

“NO” RESPONSE


1. After completing controller self-test, does TERM READY lamp light? (Paper in printer, printer cover closed.)

2. Did all lamps flash during controller self-test?

Go to 3.

Go to 5.

Check wiring from back panel to 410592 circuit card.

Check wiring in interconnection module.

Check wiring from controller to opcon.

Go to 4.

3. Do SSI signals appear at posts D28 and 27 of 410590 circuit card mounted on right wall of controller?

56K BIT/SEC

7-153

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 4 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

4. Disconnect ribbon connector

B from 410590 circuit card.

Are SSI signals present at pins 1 and 2 of connector?

5. Are SSI signals present on posts D25 and D26 of

410590 circuit cards?

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


One SSI lead from printer could be open.


Go to 8.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


SSI circuit to printer open.

Check wiring in interconnection module.


Refer to wiring diagrams furnished with set.

Go to 7.

6. When test switch is depressed, does printer print U*U* or RYRY test pattern?

7. Does a 0 V dc signal appear at post D10 of 410590 circuit card when test switch is depressed?

8. When OPT II key is depressed, does 0 V at post D13?



Go to 9.

appear

Place set in service.

Check wiring of interconnection module.


Check keyswitch in opcon.

Check wiring of interconnection module.


Check keyswitch in opcon.

Go to 10.

9. When set is receiving data from an external source, does printer copy message correctly?

10. When receiving a character, do receive mark and space lamps on 410408 or 410411 circuit card flash?

Replace 410408 or


Go to 11.

7-154

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 4 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

11. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted character signal at post D5 of 410596 circuit card?


Go to 12.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE





Go to 13.

Go to 14.


OPT 3 on 410596 circuit card?




Replace 410408 circuit card or



7-155


Replace 410408 circuit card or 410411 circuit card.

Go to 15.



Check that receive character clock is being supplied to the interface.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 5

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C433/ACS/059 AND 40C435/ACS/059

Go to 3.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

“NO” RESPONSE


1. In keyboard display mode, do characters generated on opcon appear on display?

2. Do SSI signals appear at posts 13, 14, 15, and 16

(opcon SSI) of 410157 circuit card on right wall of

40C435 Controllers or do

SSI signals appear at posts

D11, .12, 13, and 14 (Opcon

SSI) of 410593 circuit card on right wall of

40C433 Controllers.

Check wiring to opcon. Refer to

WDPs supplied with set.

(Continuity test)

Go to 18.

Replace 410406 circuit card in slot 4.


410157 Circuit Card

40C435 Controller

7-156



ANALYSIS QUESTION

3. On sets with printers, can information-on display be transferred to printer by depressing PTR LCL? (Place

EXT at end of message, home cursor, depress PTR LCL,

DISP SEND, and DISP LCL.)


(printer SSI) of 410157 circuit card on right wall of 40C435 controller or do SSI signals appear at.

posts D25, 26, 27, and 28

(Printer SSI), of 410593 circuit card on right wall of 40C433 controller?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 5 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C433/ACS/059 AND, 40C435/ACS/059

Go to 5.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 4.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check wiring to printer Refer to


(Continuity test)



410157 Circuit Card

40C435 Controller

5. On KDPM

3

Sets, when in control mode, do block numbers appear for send, receive and monitor tape block numbers?

Go to 7.

410593 Circuit Card

40C433 Controller

7-157

Go to 6.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 5 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

6. Do SSI signals appear at posts 29, 30, 31 and 32

(send cassette), and 25,

26, 27 and 28 (receive cassette), and 21, 22, 23 and 24 (monitor cassette) of 410157 circuit card mounted on right wall of the

40C435 controllers or do SSI signals appear at terminal posts D15, 16, 17, and 18

(SEND CASSETTE) and posts

D20, 21, 22, and 23 (Rec.

Cassette) of the 410593 circuit card on the right wall of the 40C433 controller?

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check wiring to each cassette drive (continuity check).

Refer to wiring diagrams supplied with set.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Replace 410406 circuit card in slot 4 for send and receive cassettes.

Replace 410406 circuit card in slot 5 for monitor cassette (40C435 Controllers only).


7-158

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 5 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C433/ACS/059 AND 40C435/ACS/059.

Go to 9.

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check receive tape cassette drive.

ANALYSIS QUESTION

7. Can messages be sent from display to receive tape locally?

(1) Prepare message ending with ETX.

(2) Home cursor.

(3) Depress REC TAPE LCL.

(4) Depress DISP SEND.

(5) Depress DISP LCL.

Check receive tape by listing receive tape headings and checking first 55 characters of message.

8. Can message be transferred from send tape to display locally?

(1) Position send tape to a recorded block and select single message mode.

(2) DISP SEND lamp not lit.


(4) Depress SEND TAPE LCL.

Go to 9.

Check send tape cassette drive.

7-159

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 5 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C433/ACS/059 AND 40C435/ACS/059 L

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

“NO” RESPONSE


9. Place set in manual on-line mode (POLL/SEL lamp not lit). If set is full dup-

-lex, temporarily add a strap between terminals 2 and 3 of TB101 in interface assembly. For this test, clear-to-send input must be turned on or temporarily remove 303181 circuit card in slot Z4 of interface assembly.

(1) Select keyboard on-line mode.

(2) Disp Rec (DISP SEND lamp not lit).

(3) Depress DISP LINE.

(4) Depress PTR LINE (if set has printer).

(5) Depress REC TAPE LINE (if set has cassette drive).

Do characters generated on the keyboard appear on dis play printer and receive tape?

Place in service:

(1) Remove strap on

TB101 if instal led.

(2) Replace 303181 circuit card in slot Z4 of interface assembly if removed.

Go to 13.

Go to 10.

Go to 11.

10. When sending characters, do the send mark and space lamps on 410411 CIU circuit card flicker?



OPT5 on 410157 circuit card on right wall of the 40C435

Controller or is there approximately a +5 V dc signal at pin 5 of OPT 6 on

410596 circuit card on right wall of the 40C433

Controller?


If 303181 circuit card was removed from interface assembly, replace 410157 circuit card.

If clear-to-send input to set was turned on, go to

12.

7-160

ANALYSIS QUESTION

11. (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP 188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 5 (Cont)


“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

7-161

TM 11-5815-606-34/NA'VELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 5 (Cont)


“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


ANALYSIS QUESTION

12. 40C435 Controller

Is there a +1.5 V dc signal at post 42 of 410157 circuit card?

NOTE: When checking this signal, the scope or meter common should be connected to post 38.


Is there a +1.5 V dc signal at post D14 of 410596 circuit card?


Replace 410596 circult card.

Check that Clear-To-Send signal is being supplied to interface.




“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check wiring to interface.



Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted data signal at pin 1 of OPT4 on 410157 circuit card?

40C433 Controller

Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted data signal at pin 1 of OPT4 on 410596 circuit card.


Is there a 0 to +1 V dc inverted data signal at post 43 of 410157 circuit card?



Is there a 0 to +1 V dc inverted data signal at post D17 of 410596 circuit card?


Go to 14.

Go to 15.

Go to 15.

Check cable to 410157 circuit card.






7-162

ANALYSIS QUESTION

11. (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 5 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 4oC433/ACS/059 AND 40C435/ACS/059

“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

7-161

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO031W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 5 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION


Is there a +1.5 V dc signal at post 42 of 410157 circuit card?


“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE





Is there a +1.5 V dc signal at post D14 of 410596 circuit card?




Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted data signal at pin 1 of OPT4 on 410157 circuit card?

40C433 Controller

Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted data signal at pin 1 of OPT4 on 410596 circuit card.


Is there a 0 to +1 V dc inverted data signal at post 43 of 410157 circuit card?



Is there a 0 to +1 V dc inverted data signal at post D17 of 410596 circuit card?


Go to 14.

Go to 15.

Go to 15.

7-162










ANALYSIS QUESTION

15. When sending a character, do the receive mark and space lamps on 410411 CIU circuit card flicker?


Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted character signal at post 47 of 410157 circuit card?

40C433 Controller

Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted character signal at post D5 of 410596 circuit card?


Is there a -5 to +5 V dc character signal at pin 4 of OPT2 on 410157 circuit card?

40C433 Controller

Is there a -5 to +5 V dc character signal at pin 4 of OPT 2 on 410596 circuit card?


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 5- (Cont)


“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


Go to 16

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 17.

Go to 17.



Go to 19.








Check 407548 cable assembly

(40C435 Controller) or 405807 Cable Assembly

(40C433 Controller).

7-163

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



CHART 5 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION


“YES” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


Go to 20.

“NO” RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

7-164

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 5 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C433/ACS/059 AND 40C435/.ACS/059

ANALYSIS QUESTION

20. Remove cable plugged into connector A of 410555 circuit card.. Are the following signals present at pins of the cable indicated below?

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


7-165

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Cont)

CHART 6

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C434/ACW/063 AND 40C434/AEK/101

ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

Refer to Manual 371 for Start Up and Initialization Procedure.

1. Has Station Start Up and

Initialization procedure been done?

2. In local mode, do characters generated on opcon appear on display?

3.

Do SSI signals appear at posts 29, 30, 31 and 32

(Printer A SSI), posts 9,

10, 11 and 12 (Printer B

SSI), and posts 25, 26,

27 and 28 (Opcon 1 SSI), posts 13, 14, 15 and 16

(Opcon 2 SSI) on the 410158 circuit card on right wall of controller?

Go to 4.




(Continuity test)

Go to 3.



4.

Can information on display be transferred to printer? (Place ETX at end of message, home cursor and depress PRINT A or PRINT B.)

5.

Using CMND/V can messages be recalled from CD1, 2 and 3 to either display? Using CMND/O can OTL be recalled from CD4 to either display?

Go to 5.

Go to 7.

7-166

Go to 3-

Go to 6.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 6 (Cont.)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C434I/ACW/063 AND, 40C434,/AK/101

ANALYSIS QUESTION

6. Do SSI signals appear at posts

17, 18, 19 and- 20 (CDI SSI), posts '21?: 22-i .23 and 24 (CD2

SSI), posts 1; 2, 3 and 4 (CD3

SSI) and posts 5, 6, 7 and 8

(CD4 SSI) of the 410158 circuit card on the right wall of controller?

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check wiring to each cassette drive

(continuity check).

,

Refer, to wiring diagrams supplied with set.

card.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Replace.-410'158 circuit card.


7.

Can messages be sent from display to receive tape (CD1) locally?

(1) Prepare message ending with ETX (ACP127 Format).

(2) Home cursor.

(3) Depress LOCAL.

(4) Depress SEND.

NOTE: Check by depressing CMND

@ and recheck the display.

Go. to 8.

7-167

Check cassette drive 1.

KD goes from SEND back to LOCAL. ERROR lamp on indicates improper format.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 6 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C434/ACW/063 A-ND 40C434/AEK/101

ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

8.

Can messages be transferred from (Send) CD2 tape to display locally?

(1) Depress LOCAL.

(2) Depress CMND/V

"WHICH TAPE ______", type 2.

"WHICH BLOCK ______", type recorded block number (1, 2,

3, etc).

(3) Depress RETURN.

NOTE: Depressing CMND/N displays next block.

Go to 9 Check cassette drive 2.

9.

Can messages be transferred to the paper tape devices?

(1) Depress LOCAL.

(2) Type message with ETX.

(3) Depress CMND/P (CHECK

CLASS may be displayed, if so, depress CMND/P again).

10. When sending a character to the paper tape punch (CIU3), does the Send Space lamp flicker (lamp 5) on the


Go to 15.

Go to 13.

Go to 10.

Go to 11.

7-168

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 6 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS – 40C434/ACW/063 .AND 40C434/AEK/101

ANALYSIS QUESTION

11. Is there approximately

+5.V dc on pin 5 of OCI10 on the 410158 circuit card mounted on the right wall of the controller?

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 13.

"NO" RESPONSE

Go to 12.

DIRECTIVE

12. Is there 0 V dc at post 70 of the 410158 circuit card?

supplied with set.

NOTE: Ground scope to post 69 when checking this signal.

13. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc data signal (0 V mark,

+1.5 V space) at pin 1 of

OC17 of the 410158 circuit card?

14. Is-there a 0 to +5 V data signal at post 68 of the


NOTE: Ground scope to post 69 when checking this signal.


Check wiring to interface. Refer to WDP

Go to 14.

Check wiring to interface. Refer to

WDP supplied with set.

Check wiring from controller back panel to




7-169

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




CHART 6 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 21. Same as 16.

15. Can paper tape reader be accessed?

(1) Place message tape in reader, bat handle to run position.

(2) Depress LOCAL and CMND/R

("READ" is displayed).

(3) Message is displayed.

(4) Depress LOCAL to disable mode.

16. When receiving from the tape reader (CIU3), does the receive space lamp flicker (lamp 6) on the



Go to 17.

17. Does a -5 V to +5 V data signal (-5 V mark, +5 V space) appear at pin 4 of

OCI12 of the 410158 circuit card mounted on the right wall of the controller?

Check wiring from controller back panel to 410158 circuit card.

Replace the 410421 circuit card.

Go to 30.

7-170

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 6 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


Go to 19.

18. Does a 0 to +1.5 V data signal appear-at post 74 of 410158 circuit card ?

NOTE: Ground scope at post 69 when checking this signal.

19. Is there a 0 to 1.5 V dc voltage on pin 1 of OCI8 on 410158 circuit card ?

20. Is there approximately 0

V at post 66 of 410158 circuit card?


Go to 20.

circuit card.



Replace the 410421


21. Can message be received from the OCR page reader?

(1) Place message in OCR reader.

(2) Depress NEXT OUTGO.

(3) Message appears on display.

22. When receiving from the

OCR reader (CIU2), does the receive space (lamp 4) flicker on the 410421 circuit card?

Go to 27.


Go to 22.

Go to 23.

7-171'

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




CHART 6 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

23. Is there a -5 V to + 5 V data signal (-5 V mark, k +5 V space) at pin 4 of

OCI2 on the 410158 circuit card mounted on the right wall of the controller.?

circuit card.


Replace the 410421

Go to 24.

24. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V data signal (O V mark,

+1.5 V space) at post 47 of the 410158 circuit card?


25. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc at pin 2 of OCI3 of the


26. Is there a +5 V at post 66 of 410158 circuit card?



Go to 25.

Go to 26.

panel to 410158 circuit card.



Check wiring from back



7-172

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 6 (Cont)

ANALYSIS QUESTION

27. Can message be sent online properly?


28. When sending on-line

(CIU1), does the send space lamp (lamp 1) flicker on the 410421 circuit card?

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 36.

Go to 29.

"NO" RESPONSE

Go to 28.

Go to 31.

DIRECTIVE

29. Does a 0 to +1.5 V data signal (O V mark, +1.5 V space) appear at pin 1 of

OCI16 of the 410158 circuit card?

Go to 30.




30. Does a 0 to +5 V data signal (O V space, +5 V mark) appear at post 52 of the 410158 circuit card?





7-173

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 6 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

31. Is there a +5 V voltage at pin 5 of OCI15 of the


"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE




"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 32.


Refer to WDP supplied with set.

32. Is there a O V voltage at post 58 of the 410158 circuit card?

NOTE: Ground scope at post 57 when checking this signal,

33. Can message be received from the line properly?

34. When receiving a message, does the receive space lamp (CIU1, lamp 2) flicker in the 410421 circuit card?

Place in service.


Go to 34.

Go to 35.

35. Does a -5 V to +5 V data signal (-5 V mark, +5 V space) appear at pin 4 of

OCI14 on the 410158 circuit card ?


Replace- the 410421 circuit card.

7-174

Go to 36.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 6 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

36. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V data signal (O V mark, +1.5 V space) at post 60 of the



37. Is there a 0 V voltage at pin 2-of OCI17 on the


38. Is there a +5 V voltage at post 54 of the 410158 circuit card?




Go to 37.

Go to 38.



Go to 40.

panel.





Check wiring to back

Check 407548 cable assembly.

7-175

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 6 (Cont)


ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


Go to 41.

Check wiring in interface. Refer to



Replace 410433

D 1/O circuit card.

41. Remove cable plugged into connector A of 410555 circuit card. Are the following signals present at pins indicated below?



7-176

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 7

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C435/AEE/091,

40C437/AEE/091, 40C437/AEL/106, AND 40C437/AEL/107

ANALYSIS QUESTION

1. In keyboard display mode, do characters generated on opcon appear on display?

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 3. Go to 2.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

2.

Do SSI signals appear at posts 13, 14, 15, and 16

(opcon SSI) of 410157 circuit card on right wall of controller?



(Continuity test)

Go to 21.



7-177

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 7 (Cont)



"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go. to 5. Go to 4.

"NO" RESPONSE


3.

On sets with printers, can information on display be transferred to printer by depressing PTR LCL?

(Place ETX at end of message, home cursor, depress PTR LCL,

DISP SEND, and DISP LCL.)

4.


(printer SSI) of 410157 circuit card on right wall of controller?

Check wiring to printer. Refer to


(Continuity test)



5.

On KDPM3 Sets, when in control mode, do block numbers appear for send, receive and monitor tape block numbers?

6.

Do SSI signals appear at posts

29, 30, 31 and 32(send cassette), and 25, 26, 27 and 28(receive cassette), and 21, 22, 23 and 24 (monitor cassette) of 410157 circuit card mounted on right wall of controller?

Go to 7.

Check wiring to each cassette drive (continuity check).

Refer to wiring diagrams supplied with set.

7-178

Go to 6.

Replace 410436 circuit card in slot 4 for send and receive cassettes.

Replace 410406 circuit card in slot 5 for monitor cassette.


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 7 (Cont)



"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

6.

(Cont)

ANALYSIS QUESTION

7.

Can messages be sent from display to receive tape locally?

(1) Prepare message ending with ETX.

(2) Home cursor.

(3) Depress REC TAPE LCL.

(4) Depress DISP SEND.


Check receive tape by listing receive tape heading and checking first 55 characters of message .

8.

Can message be transferred from send tape to display locally?

(1) Position send tape to a recorded block and select single message mode.

(2) DISP SEND lamp not lit.


(4) Depress SEND TAPE LCL.

Go to 9 .

Go to 9.

7-179

Check operation of cassette drive.

Check operation of cassette drive.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 7 (Cont)



"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE


9.

Place set in manual on-line mode (POLL/SEL lamp not lit).

If set is full duplex, temporarily add a strap between terminals 2 and 3 of TB101 in interface assembly. For this test, clear-to-send.

input must be turned on or temporarily remove 303181 circuit card in slot Z4 of interface assembly.

If Option V1 has been installed, the external bit clock will have to be turned on.

(1) Select keyboard on-line mode.

(2) Disp Rec (DISP SEND lamp not lit).

(3) Depress DISP LINE.

(4) Depress PTR LINE (if set has printer).

(5) Depress REC TAPE LINE (if set has cassette drive).

Do characters generated on the keyboard appear on display printer and receive tape?

Go to 10.

Place in service:

(1) Remove strap on

TBO11 if installed.

(2) Replace 303181 circuit card in slot Z4 of interface assembly if removed.

Go to 13. Go to 11.

10. When sending characters, do the send mark and space lamps on 413411 CIIU circuit card flicker?



OCI5 on 410157 circuit card on right wall of controller?


If 303181 circuit card was removed from interface assembly, replace


If clear-to-send input to set was turned on, go to 12.

410157

CIRCUIT CARD

7-180

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 7 (Cont)



ANALYSIS QUESTION

12. Is there a 0 V dc signal at post 42 of 410157 circuit card?

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE



NOTE: When checking this signal, the scope or meter common should be connected to post 38.

Check that Clear-To-Send signal is turned on to interface.

13. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted data signal at pin 1 of OCI4 on 410157 circuit card?

Go to 14.

Go to 15.




14. Is there a 0 to +1 V dc inverted data signal at post 43 of 410157 circuit card?


15. Is Option V1 (Isochronous operation) installed in the set ?

16. Is there an inverted bit clock signal (O to 1.5 V dc) at post 45 (send clock) and post 40 (receive clock) of the 410157 circuit card?

interface.

17. Is there a bit clock signal (+5 V to -5 V) at pin 5 of OCI1 (send clock) and pin 5 of OCI6 (receive clock) on the 410157 circuit card?

18. When sending a character, the receive mark and space lamps on 410411 CIU circuit do card flicker?

Go to 16;

Go to 17.

Go to 18.


Go to 18.



Check that external bit clock is turned on to


Go to 19.

7-181

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 7 (Cont)



ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

19. Is there a.0 to +1.5 V dc inverted character signal at post 47 of 410157 circuit card?

20. Is there a -5 to +5 V dc character signal at pin 4 of OCI2 on 410157 circuit card?

21. Is there a +5 V dc signal at post J3 of 410555 circuit card mounted on right side of controller? assembly.


Go to 21.


Go to 22.






Check 407548 cable

Go to 23.

7-182

ANALYSIS QUESTION

23. Remove cable plugged into connector A of 410555 circuit card. Are the following signals present at pins of the cable indicated below?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 7 (Cont)

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C435/AEE1/091,


"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


7-183

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 8

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C436/ADA/092, 40C436/ADD/093,

40C436/ADK/075, 40C436/ADN/094 AND 40C436/ADU/095

ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

1.

Does controller contain the 413330 modification kit (distinguished by a

410602 circuit card connected to the 410157 circuit card on right sidewall of controller)?

2. Is there a -5 V to +5 Vdc bit clock signal at Pin 1 of ML7 of the 410602 circuit card?

Go to 2.

Go to 3.

Go to 5.

Go to 3.

7-184

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 8 (Cont)

3.

Is there a -5 V to +5 Vdc bit clock signal at collector of Q1?



ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 4.


"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

4.

Remove 410602 circuit card for access to 410157

circuit card. Refer to Page

7-203 for procedure. Connect

cables to 410157 as shown. Go to 5.

7-185

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 8 (Cont)



"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 6.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 10.

ANALYSIS QUESTION

5.

Is controller under test a DCC?

6. In the local mode, do characters generated on opcon appear on display?


(opcon SSI) for opcon connected to J309 or posts

25, 26, 27 and 28 for opcon connected to J308 or posts 9, 10, 11 and 12 for opcon connected to

J310 or post 21, 22, 23 and 24 for opcon connected to J311 of 410157 circuit card on right wall of controller?

Go to 8.



(Continuity test)

Go to 24.

Go to 7.



7-186

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 8 (Cont)



ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

8. On sets with printers, can information on display be transferred to printer by depressing PRINT LOCAL?

NOTE: The printer under test must be connected to a Print Local controller part. Refer to applicable controller arrangement form.


(printer SSI) for printer connected to J310, posts

13, 14, 15 and 16 for printer connected to J309 or posts 1, 2, 3 and 4 for printer connected to

J310 of 410157 circuit card on right wall of controller?

Place DCC in service

Check wiring to printer. Refer to


(Continuity test)

Go to 9.



7-187

10. SCC or MCC CONTROLLER

When the station is connected to the line and the LCU is polling the station and station is not responding to poll do the receive mark and space lamps flash on the 410411 circuit card in the SCC or MCC?

11. Is there a -5 to +5 V dc

(-5 V mark +5 V space) character signal at pin 4 of OCI2 on the 410157 circuit card mounted on the right wall of the controller container?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 8 (Cont)



ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 12.

Go to 12.

Go to 11.

Go to 14.

12. Is there -5 to +5 V dc bit clock signal at pin

5 of OCI6 of the 410157 circuit card.

13. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V bit clock signal at Post

40 of the 410157 circuit card.

NOTE: Ground scope to

Post 39 to measure this signal.

Check wiring to controller backpanel. Replace



Go to 13.

Check wiring to interface assembly.


7-188

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 8 (Cont)



ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

14. Is the 0 to 1.5 V (O V mark

+ 1.5 V dc space) character signal at post 47 of the 410157 circuit card.

NOTE: Ground scope at post 48 to measure this signal.

15. When the station is sending, do the send mark and space lamps flash on the



Go to 16;


Go to 18.

16. Is the 0 to +1.5 V dc (O V mark, +1.5 V space) character signal at pin 1 of

OCI4 of the 410157 circuit card mounted on the right wall of the controller.

17. Is there a 0 V to +1 V

(O V mark , 1 V space) at post 43 of the 410157 circuit card?

Go to 17.



Check wiring to controller back panel.


NOTE: Connect scope ground to post 39 to measure this signal.

18. Is there a -5 to +5 V dc bit clock signal at pin 5 of OCI1 on the 410157 circuit card?

19. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc character clock signal at post 45 of the 410157 circuit card.

NOTE: Ground scope at post 48 to measure the signal.

Go to 20.


Go to 19.

Check wiring to interface assembly. Check that bit clock is being supplied to interface.

7-189

ANALYSIS QUESTION

20. Is there a +5 V dc signal at pin 5 of OCI5 on the


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 8 (Cont)



"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 18.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 17.

21. Is there 0 V dc signal at post 42 of the 410157 circuit card.


22. Is there a +1.5 V dc signal at pin 2 of OCI3 on the



I V dc signal at post 50 on the 410157 circuit card.


24. Is there a +5 V dc signal at post J3 of 410555 circuit cards mounted on right side of controller?


Go to 19.


Go to 25.


Check that Clear-to-

Send signal is being supplied to interface.




Check 407548 and 407549 cables.

7-190

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 8 (Cont)



ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE



Go to 26.

7-191

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.


CHART 8 (Cont)



ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" 'RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

26. Remove cable plugged into connector A of 410555 circuit card. Are the following signals present at pins of the cable indicated below?


Replace D I/O circuit card.

7-192

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



1. Does set have a full opcon?

2. Do SSI signals appear at posts 13, 14, 1'5, and 16

(opcon SSI) of 410158 circuit card on right wall of controller?

CHART 9

CONTROLLER ANALYSIS -- 40C438/AEP/105

"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

Check wiring. to opcon. Refer to


(Continuity test)

"NO"' RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE



7-193

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Cont)

CHART 9 (Cont)



3.


(printer SSI) of 410158 circuit card on right wall of controller?

"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check wiring to printer. Refer to supplied with set.

card.

(Continuity test)

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE



4.

Place set in LOCAL mode. If set is full duplex, temporarily add a strap between terminals 2 and 3 of TB101 in interface assembly. For this test, clear-to-send input must be turned on or temporarily remove 303181 circuit card in slot Z4 of interface assembly.

Do characters generated on the keyboard appear on printer?

Place in service:

(1) Remove strap on

TB101 if installed.

(2) (Replace 303181 circuit card in slot Z4 of interface assembly if removed.

7-194

Go to 5.


5. When sending characters, do the send mark and space lamps on 410411 CIU circuit card flicker?



OCI5 on 410158 circuit card on right wall of controller?

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CHART 9 (Cont)


YES" RESPONSE

Go to 8.

DIRECTIVE

Go to 6.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


If 303181 circuit card was removed from interface assembly, replace


410158

CIRCUIT CARD

If clear-to-send input to set was turned on, go to 7.

410158

7. Is there a 0 V dc signal at post 42 of 410158 circuit card?

set.


8. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted data signal at pin 1 of OCI4 on 410158 circuit card?

9. Is there a 0 to +1 V dc inverted data signal at post 43 of 410158 circuit card?

NOTE: When checking this signal, the scope or meter common should be, connected to post 38.

10. Is Option VI (Isochronous operation) installed in the set?


in WDP supplied with

Go to 11.

7-195

Check wiring to interface. Refer to 9617WD

Go to 9.


Go to 10.


card.


Go to 13.

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHARTS (Cont)

CHART 9 (Cont)



11. Is there an inverted bit clock signal (O to 1.5 V dc) at post 45 (send clock) and post 40 (receive clock) of the 410158 circuit card?

"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 12.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check. wiring to interface.



12. Is there a bit clock signal (+5 V to -5 V) at pin 5 of OCI1 (send clock) and pin 5 of OCI6 (receive clock) on the 410158 circuit card?

13. When sending a character, do the receive mark and space lamps on 410411 CIU circuit card flicker?

14. Is there a 0 to +1.5 V dc inverted character signal at post 47 of 410158 circuit card?

Go to 13.


Go to 15.

15. Is there a -5 to +5 V dc character signal at pin 4 of 0CI2 on 410158 circuit card?


Go to 14.




7-196

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



There are no adjustments in the Tempest Model 40 Controller, except that the circuit cards should be seated firmly to assure proper connection.

The controller and back panel should be free of lubrication.

The fans in the ventilation assembly contain sealed bearing assemblies and do not require lubrication.


1.

GENERAL

This section provides the disassembly/reassembly and parts replacement information needed to service the Tempest

Model 40 Controller. Step-by-step procedures are given for all component removal. Disassembly/reassembly of components are given in the form of exploded views.

The following caution procedures must be observed when disassembling.

CAUTION 1:

COMPONENT.

TURN OFF ALL POWER OR SIGNAL SOURCES BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING ANY

CAUTION 2:

TO AVOID POSSIBLE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO CIRCUITRY, WEAR A 346392 STATIC DISCHARGE

STRAP CONNECTED TO GROUND TO ALLOW STATIC DISCHARGE BEFORE HANDLING CIRCUIT CARDS FOR

REMOVAL OR REPLACEMENT. AVOID TOUCHING CIRCUIT LANDS AND CARD COMPONENTS AS MUCH AS

POSSIBLE.

7-197

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



2.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT

To install controller in pedestal reverse removal procedures.

7-198

40PSU103 Power Supply (All Controllers)

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP MANUAL359

To install power supply reverse removal procedures.

410202 Backpanel or 410205 Backpanel

(40C430, 40C431, 40C432 and 40C433

Controllers.)

(1) Turn main power switch off.

To install backpanel reverse removal procedures.

7-199

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.

REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT (Cont)

410203 Backpanel (40C434, 40C435, 40C437 or 40C438 Controllers).

410206 Backpanel (400C36 Controller).

Controller Interface Cards

(40C430, 40C431, 40C432 and 40C433 Controllers)

(4) Early Design Controllers

Remove four 3599 nuts, 3640 lockwashers and

125011 flat washers for each circuit card.

7-200

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controllers Equipped with 406621 Modification Kit.

7-201

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.



(40C434, 40C435, 40C436, 40C437 and 40C438 Controllers)

To install circuit cards, reverse removal procedures.

7-202

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C436 Controllers Equipped With 413330 Modification Kit

NOTE 1: (Early design) 407548 cable connects 410206 and 410157 circuit cards. (Late design) 407548 cable connects 410206 and 410602 circuit cards.

NOTE 2: (Late design) 413328 cable connects 410602 and 410157 circuit cards. (413328 is part of 410602 card).

NOTE 3: (Late design) 413329 cable connects 410206 to 410602 to 410157.

To install the 413330 modification kit (comprised of the 410602 circuit card) reverse the removal procedure.

7-203

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


Interconnection Module

(40C430, 40C431, 40C432 and 40C433 Controllers)

(1)Turn main power switch off.

To install interconnection module reverse removal procedures. Refer to 9575WD in WDP0461 for 40C430 Controllers,

9575WD in WDP0464 for 40C431 Controllers, 9575WD in WDP0465 for 40C432 Controllers and 9609WD in WDP0476 for 40C433 Controllers.

7-204

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Interconnection Module (40C434, 40C435 and 40C436 Controller)

To install interconnection module, reverse removal procedures. For wiring of filter assemblies, refer to WDP0484 for 40C434 Controller, WDP0488 for 40C435

Controller and WDP0524 for 40C436 Controller.


(40C437 and 40C438 Controllers)

To install interconnection module, reverse removal procedures. For wiring of filter assemblies, refer to WDP0554 for

40C437-Controller and WDP0584 for 40C438 Controller.

7-205

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


Filter Assemblies

When installing filter assemblies, orientate assembly so that the long filter pins are toward the inside of the controller container.

When installing the 407409 filter assembly in position 1, it must be orientated with the long filter pins toward the inside of the controller and the top row must have two feed-through connectors in positions 2 and 3. When installing the 407409 filter assembly in position 2, it must be orientated with the long filter pins toward the inside of the controller and the bottom row must have feed-through connectors in positions 2 and 3. Feed-through connectors are identified by a glass bead at bottom of connector pin.

7-206

402090, 402091 or 403656 Filter Assembly

• Remove controller interface cards.

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Fan Assembly

(40C430, 40C431, 40C432, 40C433, 40C437 and 40C438 Controllers)

• Remove interconnection module.

Only disconnect fan ac connector.

• Remove 40PSU103 power supply.

• Remove 410202, 410203, or 410205 back panel.

NOTE: On late design controllers the upper right fan assembly mounting screw is also used to mount a clamp/ ground for the 402236 or

402237 monitor cables.

To install fan assembly reverse removal procedures.

7-207

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.


Fan Assembly

(40C434, 40C435 and 40C436 Controllers)

To install fan assembly, reverse removal procedures.

3.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

Fan Assembly

(All Controllers)

To reassemble fan assembly reverse disassembly procedures. Refer to 9562WD in WDP0461, 0464, 0465, or 0476 for wiring of fan.

7-208

4.

PARTS

Controller

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C430, 40C431, 40C432 and 40C433 Controllers

7-209

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.

PARTS, Controller (Cont)


7-210

Connector Cables

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-211

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.

PARTS (Cont)

Controller Interface Circuit: Cards

40C430, 40C431, 40C432 and 40C433 Controllers

7-212

Feed-Through Panel

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



7-213

4.

PARTS (Cont)


TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



7-214

Controller

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C434, 40C435 and 40C436 Controllers

7-215

4.

PARTS (Cont)


TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


40C434, 40C435 and 40C436 Controllers

7-216


TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40C434, 40C435 and 40C436 Controllers

7-217

4.

PARTS (Cont)


TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



7-218


TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


400434, 400435 and 400436 Controls

7-219

4.

PARTS (Cont)

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



7-220

Controller

TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTE: Later design controllers have 328634 metal cable clamp for clamping monitor cable.

40C437 and 40C48 Control

7-221

4.

PARTS (Cont)


TM 11 5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


40C437

7-222

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-223

4. PARTS (Cont)


TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


F. DISASSEBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS (Cont)

7-224


TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-225

4. PARTS (Cont)


TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



7-226

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


7-227

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



5. NUMERICAL INDEX

Note: When ordering replaceable parts or components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with the letters "TP" (ie, TP410055).

Part

Number

2191

3598

100011

107116

119652

125011

142923

151632

151724

152441

3599

3640

7002

76099

81258

98642

152820

173842

179782

181241

181242

181243

181245

184055

184056

198670

Description and

Page Number

Lockwasher 205,206,208,

210,211,213,215,217,220,

222,223

Nut, 640 Hex 205,206,

208,210,211,215 217,222,

223

Nut, 4-40 Hex 208,213


215,216,222,223

Washer, Flat 208,210,215,

222,223


217

Screw, 6-40 x 5/8 Flat 223


217

Nut, 640 Hex 208,213,

220


211,215,217,222

Ring, Retaining 205,206,

211,217

Washer, Flat 208,213

Post 208

Screw, 6-40 x 3/8 Hex 210,

215,222

Screw,4-40x1/4 Hex

205,206,211,217


2-.17

Screw 1032 4-40 x 1/4 Hex

210,215,216,222223

Stud 208


205,06,211,217

Screw, w/Lockwasher,

6-40 x 1/4 Hex 211,214,

215,217,221,222

Screw w/Lockwasher,

6i40' 5/16 Hex 210,215,

222

Screw w/Lockwasher,

6-40 x 3/8 Hex 215,222

Screw w/Lock-washer,

6-40 x 1/2 Hex 215 -

Screw w/Lockwasher,

640 x 3/16 Hex 109,210

Screw w/Lockwasher,

640x 1/4 Hex 205,206

Screw w/Lockwasher,

6-40 x 5/16 Hex 205,206

Part

Number

300214

312314

321955

403646

403647

403648

403649

403656

403681

403685

402060

402061

402062

402063

402090

4020'91

402095

402097

402241

402244

403613

403634

324142

215,222

324612

328634

328678

341647

210,215

341648

344091

400574

401647

401649

402031

402054

402056

402057

402058

Description and

Page Number

Filter 210,215,222

Screw, 640 x 1 Hex 205,

206,211,217

Fuse, 2.5 Amp 206,211,

217

Connector, 3 Pt Plug 210,

Fan 223

Clamp, Cable 205,206,

215,222

Jumper w/Terminal 205,

206,211,217



Screen 223



210,215,216,222

Connector, 3 Pt Plug 216

Plate 222

Panel 205,206,211,217

Plate 223

Cover 205,206,211,217

Screw, 8-32 x 13/16 Hex

205,206,211,217

Cover 210

Bracket 210

Cable Assembly 223

Filter Assembly 210

Filter Assembly 209

Filter Assembly 209

Receptacle 216

Pin 216

Cable Assembly 210,216,

223

Sleeve 208,221

Pad 205,206,211,217

Screw, 640 x 3/16 Flat

210,215,222


223

Cable Assembly 210,216


223


223

Filter Assembly 209 thru

Label 210

7-228

407544

407546

407547

407548

407549

407550

410157

410158

410202

410203

410206

410555

410592

410596

410608

405803

405804

405805

405807

405808

405938

406164

406165

406229

406611

406621

406689

406955

406956

406957

406958

407391

407392

407393

407395

407405

407406

407407

407409 thru

407412

407543

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

Module 205,206

Cable Assembly 207

Cable Assembly 207

Cable Assembly 207

Insulator 205,206,211,217

Screen 205,206,211,217

Cable Assembly 216

Cable Assembly 216

Cable Assembly 216

Insulator 208

Modification Kit 207,208

Spacer 205,206,211,217

Filter Assembly 222

Bracket 222

Housing 222

Lable 222

Screw, 8-32 Shoulder 205,

206,211,217

Plate 214,221

Plate 2)4,221

Module 211,217

Housing 215

Bracket 215

Filter Assembly 215

Filter Assembly 214,221


219


219

Cable Assembly 212,218.



219


Label 215

Card, Circuit 213,220


Card, Circuit 205


410205 Card, Circuit 206

Card, Circuit 211

Card, Circuit 208,213,220


Card, Circuit 208


Card, Circuit 208


TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


ISSUE 3

PART 8 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 CABINETS, PAPER WINDER. AND FACILITIES

INDEX PAGE

A.

GENERAL

1.

DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................

2.

TOOLS AND TEST-EQUIPMENT ..........................................................................................

B.

SHOP PROCEDURES

1.

GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................

2.

CLEANING AND REFINISHING .............................................................................................

3.

INSPECTION .........................................................................................................................

4.

CONVERSIONS.....................................................................................................................

5.

MARKING AND PACKING .....................................................................................................

C.

TESTING

1.

GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................

2.

VOLTAGE AND CONTINUITY CHECKS................................................................................

D.

TROUBLESHOOTING

1.

GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................

2.

PRINTER CABINETS.............................................................................................................

3.

MONITOR CABINET ..............................................................................................................

4.

TROUBLE ANALYSIS - PAPER WINDER..............................................................................

5.

TROUBLE ANALYSIS - INTERFACE .....................................................................................

E.

ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION

1.

CABINET AND PAPER WINDER ADJULSTMENTS ..............................................................

2.

CABINET AND PAPER WINDER LUBRICATION ..................................................................

F.


1.

GENERAL ..............................................................................................................................

2.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY .............................................................................................

3.

PARTS ...................................................................................................................................

4.

COMPONENT PARTS LIST...................................................................................................

2

5

5

6

7

8

9

19

20

24

24

28

29

31

37

55

57

58

64

106

8-1

A. GENERAL

1. DESCRIPTION

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,

PART 8 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 CABINETS, PAPER WINDER, AND FACILITIES

The Tempest Model 40 Cabinets covered in this manual provide mounting and housing facilities for Model 40 Printers.

In reviewing the cabinets illustrated in this section, note that many, though similar in size and general appearance, are equipped for different applications in sets and stations.

The 40PWU101 and 40PWU102 Paper Winder mounts on friction feed printer cabinets and serves to take up and store single-ply paper issuing from Model 40 Friction Feed Printer. Several paper guide and storage rack combinations are available for handling fanfold page copy issuing from Model 40 Tractor Feed Printer.

Facilities covered in this section are cable assemblies for interconnecting Model 40 components and the hardware and cables for mounting and connecting to data sets or modems.

The following pages illustrate typical Tempest Model 40 Cabinets, Paper Winder, and Facilities covered in this part.


"TP" (ie, TP410055).

8-2

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-3

1. DESCRIPTION (Cont)

Interface Modules

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



8-4

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2. TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

Tools

The tools listed below are supplementary to common types such as pliers, screw-drivers, etc, and may be procured locally or ordered from Teletype Corporation.

• Spring Hook, Pull




• Open-End Wrench 1/4 Inch

• Open-End Wrench 5/16 Inch

• Retaining Ring Pliers


• Soldering Iron, Weller Model W-MCP-750 with

MP2C Tip, or equivalent (procure locally)

• Desoldering Tool, EDSYN Model MMSOO05 Soldapullt® , or equivalent (procure locally)

• Soft-Bristle Brush 1/2 Inch (procure locally)

Test Equipment

Description

• Terminal Extractor (Miniature)

• Scale 6 Inch, L.S. Starrett No. 338, or equivalent (procure locally)

Part No.

75765

89954

89955

125752

129534

152835

160396

182697

402840

• Volt-Ohm-Milliameter, Triplett Model 630 APL or equivalent

• Oscilloscope, Tektronic Model 7904 e/w:


1 -- 7B70 Time Base Unit or equivalent

B. PROCEDURES

1. GENERAL

This section details cleaning, refinishing, and inspection procedures to be followed prior to testing and troubleshooting

Tempest Model 40 Cabinets, Pedestals, etc. In many cases careful inspection will save later trouble by revealing defective or damaged cabling, connectors, or other components.

Refer to Page 8-57, F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS whenever detailed information on removing

assemblies or parts is required.

The packing materials described in this section are designed for protection against damage from rough handling in shipping.

8-5

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,

B. PROCEDURES (Cont)

2. CLEANING AND REFINISHING

Cleaning

Immersion type cleaning is NOT recommended for Tempest Model 40 Cabinets, Pedestals, Paper Winders, o- Facilities.


SCRATCH OR DAMAGE EXTERIOR PLASTIC OR PAINTED SURFACES.

Cleaning can be accomplished as follows:

Exterior Surfaces -- Wash and Wipe Dry.

Interior Surfaces -- Vacuum or Air Dust.

8-6

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Refinishing

Scuffed or scratched painted surfaces may be touched up with air-dry brush lacquer. Matching lacquer may be ordered from Teletype Corporation. Specify: 344963 (KB) Black Spattered Texture Brushing Lacquer.

3. INSPECTION

Ground Straps

Verify that cabinet or pedestal ground straps are in good condition and securely fastened at each end. To check electrically, measure continuity between connected parts with multimeter set on R X 1 scale. The reading must be essentially zero ohms.

Warning Labels

Check for the presence and legibility of all warning labels.

8-7

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,

B. PROCEDURES (Cont)

3. INSPECTION (Cont)

Mechanical Checks

Check all doors and panels for proper opening and closing without binds or interferences and for proper alignment.

Check all latches, hinges, interlock switches, etc, for proper alignment of mating surfaces.

Check all slides, guides, and mounting surfaces for proper alignment and configuration.

Check for the presence and proper condition of all feet, bumpers, and padding.

All padding should adhere and conform to cabinet interior surfaces.

Check fan assemblies for free rotation, no binding, wobble or eccentricity.

Check that two spindles of paper spool are mated and that spool is seated properly and engages with drive clutch.

4. CONVERSIONS

Cabinets or pedestals may be converted to types having different features and functions. This will ordinarily require

removal and/or addition of certain components, cables, assemblies, or modification kits. Refer to Page 8-57, F.

DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS for detailed part numbered views of various cabinets, pedestals and

related apparatus. Also see Page 8-3, Pedestals With Table Tops for dimensional data on pedestals and available table

tops.

8-8

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5. MARKING AND PACKING

Marking

For record keeping purposes, the repair date may be marked in REPAIR MARK designated areas.

8-9

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,


5. MARKING AND PACKING (Cont)

Packing

Factory-type packing may be duplicated by ordering materials listed for each group of equipment and applying as described. PK designated items are available from Teletype Corporation.

40CAB202/RA. RC. RD

40CAB252/RA

Materials Required

(1) 9867PK Carton

(1) 28218PK Set of Polystyrene Details

(1) 28130PK Label

(1) 27542PK Label

(1) 23457PK Plastic Bag

As Required

21719PK Tape

21480PK Tape

21298PK Tissue Paper

NOTE: Required for printer cabinets. Install 401842 shipping bar and 401844 shipping hook as shown. Fold copy of

TC-113 Unpacking Instruction Sheet around shipping bar and fasten with 21480PK tape. TC-113 Unpacking Instruction

Sheet (following page) may be duplicated locally.

8-10

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


CAUTION

READ BEFORE COMPLETING UNPACKING OPERATIONS

PRINTER MOUNTING HARDWARE UNDER SPRING TENSION

TO DISENGAGE, PERFORM THE FOLLOWING

STEP BY STEP INSTRUCTIONS.

1. Grasp shipping bar and push downward far enough to disengage shipping hook.

2. Disengage shipping hook from shipping bar. Gently allow bar to rise to its full upward position.

3. Lift front of cabinet and disengage shipping hook from cabinet bottom.

4. Remove shipping bar from printer mounting rails.

5. Retain shipping bar and shipping hook for future reshipments of this cabinet.

8-11

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


B, SHOP PTOCEDURES (Cont)

5. MARKING AND PACKING, Packing (Cont)

40CAB202/RA. RC. R

Packing, Procedures

Step 1.

Form a 9867PK carton. Clos and seal bottom flaps with glue or sealing tape.

Step 2.

Make certain shipping latches and bar on cabinet are properly installed. Cover cabinet with 23457PK plastic bag.

Step 3.

Step 4.

Step 5.

Step 6.

Position a plastic 28218PK Detail A on right side of cabinet.

Position a plastic 28218PK Detail B on left side of cabinet.

Coil cable on top of cabinet and position prepacked cabinet in shipping container.

Clow and seal top flaps of shipping container as outlined in Step 1.

8-12

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40CAB352/RA, RC, RD

Qty

1 10532PK

1 28186PK

1 28187PK

1 28188PK

Corrugated Carton

Cushioning Detail

Corrugated Liner

Top Detail

Materials Required

Qty

1

1

23457PK Plastic Bag

28130PK Unpacking Instruction Label



8-13



40CAB354/RA, RB, RC

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-14

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40CAB902/AA

Materials Required

Qty

(1) 70144PK Detail "A" Carton

(1) 70144PK Detail "B" End Cap

(1) 28253PK Polystyrene Detail "A"

(1) 23461PK Plastic Bag

(1) 28253PK Polystyrene Detail "B"

(2) 28253PK Polystyrene Detail "C"

(1) 21431PK Clip Seal

As Required

21719PK Tape

50136PK Twist Tie

21207PK Steel Strapping

Step 1.

Cover cabinet with a 23461PK plastic bag (not shown).

Step 2.

Place one 70144PK Detail B end cap on floor.

Step 3.

Position cabinet on top of bottom end cap.

Step 4.

Lift left side of cabinet and place a 28253PK Detail A onto the left foot. Set cabinet with detail back down on end cap.

Step 5.

Lift right side of cabinet and place a 28253PK Detail B onto the right foot as indicated in Step 4.

Step 6.

Place a 28253PK Detail C on left and right top corner of the cabinet.

Step 7.

Form a 70144PK carton Detail A and with bottom flanges down and outward, place carton over top of cabinet nd details and slide to bottom.

Step 8.

Interlock flanges of bottom end cap with corrugated carton flanges. Standard procedure is to apply a band of

21207PK strapping around center of flanges of end cap.. For standard removal, use nylon reinforced tape.

Step 9.

Close top flaps of carton and seal center seam with a strip of 21719PK tape. The tape should extend approximately three inches down the side of the carton.

8-15

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,



40CAB903/RH, RJ, RK, RL, RM, RN, RP, RQ, RS, RT, RU, RV

Materials Required

Qty

1

1 11464PK

1 28157PK

1

1

11455PK

28182PK

23461PK

Corrugated Carton (See

Note 1)

Corrugated Carton (See

Note 2)

Set of Details (See

Note 1)

Set of Details (See

Note 2)

Plastic Bag (See Note 2)

Qty

1

1

23466PK

28130PK

21719PK

21632PK

50136PK


Unpacking Instruction

Label

Tape (as required)

Tape (as required)

Twist Tie (as required)

8-16

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Qty

1

1

8564PK

85b5PK

Materials Required

Qty

Corrugated Folder (See

Note 1)

Corrugated Folder (See

Note 2)

NOTE 1: Required for 401532, 401533 and 401912.

NOTE 2: Required for 401530, 401531, 401911 and 401914.

NOTE 3: Required for 401911.

1

1

2

23451PK

23457PK

28214PK

21719PK



Wood Details (See Note 3)

Tape (as required)

8-17

Qty

1

1

1

1

1

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1




40PWU101 and 401PWU102 Paper Winder

Materials Required

Qty

1 9644PK

8563PK

28192PK

28193PK

23457PK

Corrugated Carton

Corrugated Folder

Corrugated Detail

Corrugated Detail

Plastic Bag

21307PK

21719PK

21632PK

21298PK

Muslin Bag

Tape (as required)

Tape (as required)

Tissue Paper (as required)

8-18

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING

1. GENERAL

Testing of the Tempest Model 40 Cabinets consists primarily of making certain continuity checks, using a volt-ohmmilliammeter (VOM) switched to the appropriate range. Whenever a check fails, refer to schematic diagrams beginning

on Page 8-24 for point-to-point wiring information.

Testing of the Tempest Model 40 Pedestals requires the mechanical checks outlined on Page 8-7, 3. INSPECTION.

Each repaired interface assembly should be given an operational check in a known good Tempest Model 40 Set. Refer

to Page 8-57, F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS for disassembly/reassembly procedures.

Before starting any test, check that all circuit cards and connectors are fully seated. If a printer is present check that paper and ribbon are properly installed.

Always perform the steps in the order given. A proper test result is based on all previous steps being satisfactory. If the desired response is not obtained, repeat the step to make sure the step was performed correctly.

Preparation for Testing a. Remove interface cover.

b. Disassemble card connector frame and place upside down in front of unit for access to card connector pins. (Refer to

Page 8-57, F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY AND PARTS.

8-19

STEP

1

2

PROCEDURE

With power applied, do the proper voltages appear at the proper pins?

With a MIL STD 188 data signal applied to pin 5 of

TB101O terminal block, does a 0 to +1.5 V square wave signal appear at pin L of card in card connector Z6?

RESPONSE

-7 V dc

Pin

N and K

N

F

F

Card

Connector

Z3

Z4

Z5

Z7

+7 V dc

Pin

D

D

Card'

Connector

Z5

Z7

+9 to +11 V dc

Card

Connector Pin

A

A

A

Pin L card connector Z6

Z3

Z4

Z6

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

+7 volt regulator

+7 volt regulator

F1 fuse

Q1 transistor

Refer to PageC

8-24,

D. TROUBLE-

SHOOTING

8-20

STEP

2

(Cont)

3

4

PROCEDURE

Input Signal

RESPONSE

If pin L is steady 0 V,

+1.5 V or +5 V.

If pin L, waveform is:

Temporarily move input data lead from terminal 5 to terminal 3. Remove strap from terminal 2 to terminal 3 of TB101 terminal block.

Repeat Step 2.

Replace strap between terminals 2 and 3. Return input data lead to terminal 5 of TB1Ol terminal block.

Send characters from set.

Same as Step 2.

Does a 0 V to 1 V signal appear at pin M of card connector Z7?

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

303181 circuit card

Open output wiring to controller.

Refer to Page

8-24,

D. TROUBLE-

SHOOTING.

Same as Step 2.

Open wiring from controller.

Check wiring.

8-21

STEP

4

(Cont)

5

6

PROCEDURE

Mark +6 V

Space -6 V

Apply a MIL STD 188 signal to terminals 1 (send clock) and 3 (receive clock) of

TB102 terminal block.

Input Signal

+6 V

-6 V

Place a +5 V dc signal on terminal 4 of TB102 terminal block.

RESPONSE

Does a +6 V to -6 V signal appear at terminal 2 of

TB101 terminal block.

Pin L and C card connector

Z3 normal signal

+1.5 V

O V

If pin L or C is steady O V,

+1.5 V or +5 V.

If pin L or C, waveform is:

+5 V

O V

Pin L of card connector Z4 should go from +1.5 V to

O V.

+1.5 V CTS

CTS

If initial condition of pin L is +5 V.

8-22

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Open wiring from pin M of card connector Z7 to terminal 2 of TB101 terminal block.

303180 circuit card

Check wiring.

Refer to Page

8-24,

D. TROUBLE

SHOOTING.

303181 circuit card

Open wiring to controller.

303181 circuit card


Refer to Page

8-24,

D. TROUBLE

SHOOTING

Check wiring.

Refer to Page

8-24,

D. TROUBLE

SHOOTING.

Check wiring.

STEP

7

PROCEDURE

With TERM READY lamp on the set on, check input to pin M of card connector

Z5.

Check output pin H of card connector Z5.

RESPONSE

Pin M should be approximately +1 V dc.

Pin H should be

+6 V dc. Terminal 4 of TB102 terminal block should be +6 V also.

Push TERM READY keyswitch

On opcon, TERM READY lamp extinguishes.

Pin M should go to 0 V.

Pin H should go to -6 V.

Push TERM READY keyswitch again.

TERM READY lamp lights.

Pin M should go approximately +1 V dc.

0

Pin H should go to

+6 V dc.

8-23

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,

POSSIBLE CAUSE

OF TROUBLE

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS


Check wiring.

303180 circuit card Refer to Page

8-24,

D. TROUBLE-

SHOOTING.

Check wiring.

Open wiring between card connector and terminal block.


303180 circuit card

Check wiring

Refer to Page

8-24,

D. TROUBLE-

SHOOTING.

TM-11-5815-606-34/ NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359,


1. GENERAL

This section provides information for locating troubles encountered in testing Tempest Model 40 Cabinet, Paper Winders and Facilities. This section is divided into two parts. The printer cabinet troubleshooting guide will normally consist of

isolating wiring and/or cable problems encountered in testing in accordance with Page 8-19, C. TESTING or when

testing other Model 40 components after assembly into their cabinets. Refer to the appropriate diagram in this section and use the VOM as a continuity checker (R X 1 range) to find wiring opens, crosses or grounds. For locating intermittent troubles, manually moving the cabling or connectors involved may be helpful.

CAUTION: WHEN MAKING CONTINUITY CHECKS MAKE SURE ALL 115 V AC POWER IS DISCONNECTED.

The troubleshooting guide for the interface assembly is a step-by-step question and response sequence, which determines the correct directive for the repair of the trouble. Use the troubleshooting guide in the following manner: a. Always start with Analysis Question 1.

b. Answer analysis questions and follow proper response directive to isolate and correct the trouble.

c. Where more than one component is specified for replacement, substitute one at a time in the order specified.

The original component should be replaced if the trouble is not corrected before making the next indicated substitution. When installing a replacement component, make certain that all options (if present) in this component are programmed for proper operation. If replacement Of the part or subcomponent indicated does not correct the trouble, replace the next higher order of component (ie, circuit card, wired frame, or entire interface).

Once the trouble is corrected, repeat the checkout to assure correct performance. Remember, in all trouble analysis, response is directly affected by the options selected. The actual response should always be checked against how the interface is optioned to response.

2. PRINTER CABINETS

Cabinets -Friction Feed Printer

The interlock switch has a three position activator. Check for continuity at interlock connector terminals 1 and 2 when activator is lifted to position 1 and held down (audible click) in position 3. No continuity should be observed in position

2.

Check for continuity of the SSI cable at connector

(terminals 1 to'2 and 3 to 6) at rear of printer cabinet and at printer connector (J400).

8-24

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


SSI Schematic for Friction Feed Printer in 40CAB202 Cabinet

Opcon Wiring -- Friction and Tractor Feed Printer Cabinets

8-25

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2. PRINTER CABINETS (Cont)

AC Wiring -- Friction and Tractor Feed Printer Cabinets

NOTE 1 : ON friction feed printer cabinet this connector is plugged directly into printer

NOTE 2: Fan and connector not used on friction feed printer cabinet.

Cabinets -- Tractor Feed Printer

Check for continuity of SSI cable connector (terminals 1 to 2 and 3 to 6) at rear of printer cabinet (J400) and at printer connector (J115).

Check for continuity of paper advance switch at connector (P114) terminals 3 to 4 when switch is depressed.

Check for continuity of lamp in paper switch at connector (P114) terminals 1 to 2.

The interlock switch has a three position activator. Check for continuity at connector terminals 6 to 7 and 3 to 5 when activator is lifted to position 1 and held down (audible click) in position 3. No continuity should be observed in position 2.

8-26

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


SSI Schematic for Tractor Feed Printer in 40CAB352 and 40CAB354 Cabinets

Opcon Wiring

Refer to Page 8-25, Opcon Wiring -- Friction and Tractor Feed Printer Cabinets.

AC Wiring

Refer to Page 8-26, AC Wiring -- Friction and Tractor Feed Printer Cabinets.

8-27

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2. PRINTER CABINETS (Cont)

40PWU101 Paper Winder (Early Design)

40PWU101 (Late Design) and 40PWU102 Paper Winders

8-28

3. MONITOR CABINET

Opcon Wiring for 40CAB252/RA

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


AC Wiring for 40CAB252/RA

8-29

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

D. TROUBLESHOOTING (Cont )

4. TROUBLE ANALYSIS -- PAPER WINDERS

TABLE A

EARLY DESIGN 40PWU101 PAPER WINDER

SYMPTOM

Paper too loose on paper winder (egg shaped roll).

Paper edge ruffled on either side of roll.

Extraneous or irregular line feed on printer.

PROBABLE CAUSE

Clutch Torque adjustment.

Lubrication on clutch discs, clutch discs should be dry.

Lateral Winder Position adjustment.

Paper not tracking correctly on printer paper rollers.

Clutch Torque adjustment.

TABLE B

LATE DESIGN 40PWU101 PAPER WINDER

SYMPTOM




PROBABLE CAUSE

High Clutch Torque adjustment.

Requirement not met.



High clutch torque crossing over before 3 inch diameter roll is on paper winder.

TABLE C

PAPER WINDER (40PWU102)

SYMPTOM




PROBABLE CAUSE

High Motor Torque adjustment.

Requirement not met.



High motor torque crossing over before

3-inch diameter roll is on paper winder.

8-30

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5. TROUBLE ANALYSIS -- INTERFACE

ANALYSIS QUESTION

1. Is +7 V dc present at pins

H and J of card in card connector Z2 with respect to pins N and P (circuit common) of that card connector?

2. Is -7 V dc present at pins

L and M of card in card connector Z2 with respect to pins N and P (circuit common) of that card connector?

3. Is +9 to +11 V dc present at pin A of card in card connector Z6 with respect to circuit common?

4. Is +12 to +22 V dc present at pins A and B of card in card connector Z2 with respect to circuit common?

Is -12 to -22 V dc present at pins E and F of card in card connector Z2?

5. Are +12 to +22 V dc present at pins M and N and -12 to

-22 V dc present at pins

P and R of card in card connector Z1 with respect to circuit common?

6. Is 28 to 42 V ac present between pins H and S of card in card connector Z1 ?

7.

Does F2 fuse check good?

(Continuity test)

8. Is 115 V ac present between connectors J101 and P103?

(AC input to filter and transformer assembly)

'"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

Go to 3.

Go to 15.

Replace 303168 circuit card in card connector Z2.

Check wiring between card connectors Z1 and Z2. Refer to

9559WD in WDP0457.


Go to 8.

Check wiring of filter and transformer assembly. Refer to

9559WD in WDP0457.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 4.

Go to 4.

Go to 11.

Go to 5.

Go to 6.

Go to 7.

Replace 143630 fuse.

Go to 9.

8-31

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


5. TROUBLE ANALYSIS -- INTERFACE (Cont)

"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

"NO" RESPONSE


8. (Cont)

9.

Is 115V ac present between terminals 4 and 5 of TB200 terminal block in ac compartment of interface?

10. Is 115 V ac present between terminals 1 and 2 of TB200 terminal block in ac compartment of interface?

11. Is +9 to +11 V dc present at emitter of Q1 transistor mounted on heat sink of card connector frame?

12. Does Fl fuse check good?

(Continuity test)

13. Is approximately +13 V dc present at pins A and B of card in card connector

Z1?

14. Is 13.5 to 18.5 V ac present between pins C and L of card in card connector Z1 ?

Replace 366021 transformer.

Replace 334187 inductor.

Check wiring of

FL100 and FL101 filters.

Refer to 9559WD in WDP0457.

Replace 402085

FL100 filter.

Replace 402086

FL101 filter.

Check wiring of CB1 circuit breaker.

Refer to 9559WD in

WDP0457.

Replace 402026 CB1 circuit breaker.

Check wiring of card connector frame. Refer to

9559WD in WDP0457.

Go to 13.

Check wiring to Q1 transistor.

Replace 326594

Q1 transistor

(2N3764).


Go to 10.

AC power is not being supplied to set. Check external ac power circuit.

Go to 12.

Replace 143630 fuse.

Go to 14.

Go to 7.

8-32

'"YES" RESPONSE

ANALYSIS QUESTION

15. Is -7 V dc present at:

Pin Card

N and K

N

F

F

Connector

Z3

Z4

Z5

Z7

Is +7 V dc present at:

Pin Card

D

D

Is +9 to +11 V dc present at:

Connector

Z5

Z7

Pin Card

A

A

A

Connector

Z3

Z4

Z6

16. Is interface equipped with

303180 and 303181 circuit cards in card connectors

Z3 and Z5?

17.

Are bit clock signals (+6 V to -6 V shaped waveforms) present on terminals 1 and

3 of TB102 terminal block?

Refer to Page 9-10a or b,

Set Features and Options

Record. If Option C.1.

(asynchronous transmission mode) is optioned, go to 19.

18. Does clock signal appear at pins C and L of card in card connector Z3?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 17.

DIRECTIVE

Check wiring of card connector frame. Refer to

9559WD in WDP0457.

Go to 17.

Go to 18.

Go to 19.

Go to 33.

External clock is off to set. Check external clock circuit.

Check wiring to controller for shorts or opens. Refer to 9559WD in WDP0457 and

9575WD in WDP supplied with controller.


19. Is a 303181 circuit card in.

card connector Z4?

Go to 20

8-33

Go to 22.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



ANALYSIS QUESTION

"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

20.

Is +6 V dc present at terminal 4 of TB102 terminal block in interface?

21.

Is approximately +1.5 V dc present at pin L of card in card connector Z4?

Go to 21.

Go to 22.

Clear-to-send signal is off to set. Check external clear-to-send circuit.




22. Is +6 V dc present on terminal 7 of TB102 terminal block when TERM READY lamp on opcon is lit or paper in printer with cover closed, and in REC mode?

Go to 24.

23.

Is voltage at pin M of card in card connector Z5 approximately 1 V dc or more?

Go to 23.

Replace 303180 cirGo to 24.

cuit card in card connector Z5.

24.

Depress TERM READY key on Go to 26.

opcon or open printer cover. Does voltage on terminal 7 of TB102 terminal block change from

+6 V dc to -6 V dc?

25.

Is voltage at pin M of card in card connector Z5 less than +0.5 V dc?

26. Is +6 V dc present at terminal 5 of TB101 terminal block in interface?

27.

Is half-duplex strap installed (strap between terminals 2 and 3 of TB101 terminal block) and is +6 V dc present at terminal 3?

If no card in card connector Z7, go to 28.


Go to 27.

Go to 28.

Go to 25.

Check wiring to controller.

Receive line off or open.

Check external receive line circuit.

Remove half-duplex strap.

Go to 28.

8-34

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

ANALYSIS QUESTION

28. Is approximately +1.5 V dc present at pin L of card in card connector Z6?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 29.

Go to 30.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


Refer to 9559WD in WDPO457 and 9575WD in WDP supplied with controller.


Replace half-duplex strap if removed.

Place interface in service.

Go to 32.

Go to 31.

29.

Is there a circuit card in card connector Z7?

30.


31. Is approximately 1 V present at pin M of card in card connector Z7 when set is not sending?

32. When a character is sent from-the set, does voltage at terminal 2 of TBlO1 terminal block switch from

+6 V to -6 V for mark to space bit transitions?

Replace 303180 cirGo to 32.


Place interface in service.


External clock is off to set. Check external clock circuit.

33. Are bit clock signals (+6 V to -6 V shaped waveforms) present on terminals 1 and

3 of TB102 terminal block?

Refer to Page 9-10a or b,

Set Features and Options

Record. If Option C.1.

(asynchronous transmission mode) is optioned, go to

19.

Go to 34.

8-35

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



ANALYSIS QUESTION

34. Does clock signal appear at pins C and L of card in card connector Z3?

"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 35.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE




35.

36.

37.

Is a 303184 circuit card


Is approximately +1.5 V dc present at pin L of card in card connector Z4?

Go to 36.

Go to 37.

Go to 38.

Go to 38.

in card connector Z4?

Clear-to-send signal is off to set. Check external clear-to-send circuit.




Go to 39.

38.

Is -6 V dc present at terminal 7 of TB102 terminal block when TERM READY lamp on opcon is lit or paper in printer with cover closed, and in REC mode?

Go to 40.

39.

Is voltage at pin M of card in card connector Z5 approximately 1 V dc or more?

41.

Is voltage at pin M of card in card connector Z5 less than +0.5 V dc?


40.

Depress TERM READY key on Go to 26.

opcon or open printer cover. Does voltage on terminal 7 of TB102 terminal block change from

-6 V dc to +6 V dc?

Go to 40.

Go to 41.

Replace 303180 cirCheck wiring to controller.


8-36

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



1.

CABINET AND PAPER WINDER ADJUSTMENTS

Door - Friction Feed

Door closed and latched.

Requirement

Gap between the door and the two end panels should be equal both front and rear to within 0.040 inch, and door may be over flush, under flush, or in nominal position.

To Adjust

Loosen mounting nuts friction tight.

Position door to meet requirement.

Tighten mounting nuts.

8-37

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION (Cont)

1. CABINET AND PAPER WINDER ADJUSTMENTS (Cont)

Cradle Torsion Spring - Friction Feed

NOTE: This is a factory Adjustment, adjusted to the optimal force. If it becomes necessary to readjust, then proceed as follows.

Printer installed in the cradle assembly of the cabinet and it is latched up (service position).

Requirement

When left and right latches are released, printer should free-fall no more than 1-1/2 inch when measured at the front of the printer base. When the left and right catches are released with a printer in the operate position the printer and cradle shall not pop up with sufficient energy to latch in the service position.

To Adjust

Remove printer from cradle assembly. Carefully remove shoulder screws (old design) or shoulder busing and flat head screw that secure left and right latches to the printer cabinet. The cradle assembly should be in the up position when the above removal is accomplished.

8-38

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


To Adjust (Cont)

With cradle assembly channels positioned past vertical, check outside hook portion of spring relative to hook stops.

Any adjustments that are made to increase or decrease spring force shall be made with the intent of keeping both springs equal in force. In essence, clearance between the hooks of left and right torsion springs and stop bushings should be approximately equal. Therefore, to increase the force, torsion spring whose hook is farther away from stop bushing should be adjusted to decrease clearance. To decrease the force, torsion spring whose hook is closer to the stop bushing should be adjusted to increase clearance. Loosen pilot screw in the hub to be adjusted until pilot is out of the locating hole in the cradle upright. Rotate torsion spring to increase or decrease force.

Note: There are five holes in each cradle upright to accept pilot portion of pilot screw.

It may be necessary to reposition the pilot screw on hub if an angular adjustment of only 10 degrees is required from nominal. Reassemble with care.

8-39

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATIONS (Cont)

1.

CABINET AND PAPER WINDER ADJUSTMENTS (Cont)

Dome-Tractor Feed

• Door closed and latched.

Requirement

Gap "A" must be equal to Cap "B" within 0.062" and dome may be flush, over flush or under flush with respect to trim band. (Both Sides)

To Adjust

Loosen five dome mounting screws friction tight. Position dome to meet requirement. Tighten mounting screws.

8-40

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 09( )-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Requirement

The top apron of the dome shall be from 0.060" under flush to 0.060" over flush with respect to the top surface of the end panel trim band. (Both Sides)

To Adjust

Place the left and right dome latches in the middle of their adjustment range and tighten the latch height adjustment screws. Close dome.

Check height requirement. Readjust if necessary.

8-41

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Cradle Torsion Spring - Tractor Feed 80-Column

Note: This is a factory adjustment, adjusted to the optimal force. If it becomes necessary to readjust, then proceed as follows.

• Printer in the cabinet.

• Left and right cradle latches released (pressed inward).

Requirement

(a) Printer shall move out of the latched position.

(b) With the printer in the service position, when the left and right latch lever on each side of the cradle assembly are pushed to the rear, the printer and the cradle shall move out of the latching position by their own weight or a force of Max. 16 oz. applied to each of the cradle front tips.

To Adjust

Use printer to check adjustment. Remove printer from cradle assembly. If cradle assembly fails to remain in up position, raise it up until it latches. Carefully remove shoulder screws that secure left and right latches to the printer cradle.

8-42

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4A4-300-1


To Adjust (Cont)

With cradle assembly channels positioned past vertical, check outside hook portion of spring relative to hook stops.

Any adjustments that are made to increase or decrease spring force shall be made with the intent of keeping both springs equal in force. In essence, clearance between hooks of left and right torsion springs and stop bushings should be approximately equal. Therefore, to increase the force, torsion spring whose hook is farther away from stop bushing should be adjusted to decrease clearance. To decrease the force, torsion spring whose hook is closer to the stop bushing should be adjusted to increase clearance. Loosen pilot screw in the hub to be adjusted until pilot is out of the locating hole in the cradle upright. Rotate torsion spring to increase or decrease force.

Note: There are nine holes in each cradle upright to accept pilot portion of pilot screw.

It may be necessary to reposition the pilot screw on hub if an angular adjustment of. only 10 degrees or 30 degrees is required from nominal.

Reassemble with care.

8-43

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4.4-300-1

359



Cradle Torsion Sprint - Tractor Feed 132-Column

• Printer in the cabinet.

• Left and right cradle latches released (pressed inward).

Requirement

(a) The printer and cradle shall move out of the latched position.

(b) With the printer in the service position, depressing the left and right latch lever shall allow the printer and cradle to move out of the latching position by their own weight or a force of Max. 16 oz. applied to each side of the cradle front tip.

To Adjust

Turn the adjustment screw (one on each side of the cradle) counterclockwise to increase the torsion spring force and clockwise to decrease the torsion spring force. Any adjustments to increase or decrease the spring force shall be made with the intent of keeping both springs in equal tension.

8-44

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Lateral Winder Position

Requirement

The paper spool flange must align with spent paper exiting from printer, and the paper should be flat on cabinet top when being wound.

To Adjust

Loosen the three winder assembly mounting, screws. Position the winder left or right to meet requirement.

Friction Clutch Torque (40PWU101 Early Design)

Note: Remove paper spool assembly and motor cover.

Requirement

It should require 7 to 11 ounces to stop rotation of the drive brace with hub.

To Adjust

Operate the winder and hook a spring scale over one of the spacers between the drive disc and drive brace w/hub.

Loosen the locknut and rotate the friction nut in or our to meet the requirement. Tighten the locknut.

8-45

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Paper Spool Endplay

• Remove motor cover.

• Frame assembly secured to its mounting plate.

• Plastic pivot seated in the retaining spring and drive pin seated in the spool hub.

Requirement

With the plastic pilot seated in the retainer spring on the right and the drive pin seated in the spool hub on the left, there should be a clearance of

Min Some---Max 0.040 inch between the plastic pivot and frame when the endplay in the motor shaft is taken up to make the clearance a minimum.

To Adjust

Loosen the two setscrews that secure the clutch assembly to the motor shaft. Position the. clutch assembly to meet the requirement. Tighten both setscrews. Check that the spool drive pin seats in the spool hub and that the spool rotates freely through the complete revolution.

NOTE: Check that the spool rotates freely through the complete revolution.

CAUTION: DO NOT DISTORT THE VERTICAL ENDS OF THE WINDER FRAME WHEN MAKING THE

ADJUSTMENT.

8-46

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Clutch Torque (40PWUl01 Late Design)

Requirement

With the motor side of the clutch in a locked position (use spanner wrench on friction nut) and the hook of a spring scale applied over the spacer on the clutch, it shall require 40 to 50 ounces to move the drive flange. (Take up play in direction of pull before reading scale.)

To Adjust

Loosen the locknut. Rotate the friction nut in or out to meet the requirement.

Tighten the locknut.

8-47

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Sensing Arm (40PWU101 Late Design and 40PWU102)

Requirement

With an empty paper spool installed in the winder and the stop lever engaging its stop post, there shall be approximately a 1/8 inch gap between the closest paper spool rod and the sensing arm extension post.

To Adjust

With the set screw associated with the sensing arm friction tight, position the arm to meet the requirement. Tighten the set screw.

8-48

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Mercury Switch (40PWU101 Late Design card 40PWU102)

Requirement

The mercury switch shall be activated to the on position at 3 to 3-1/2 inches roll diameter.

To Adjust

DANGER: ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE WITH THE UNIT IN THE OFF CONDITION.

With the mercury switch friction tight and the sensing arm rotated to obtain a 3 to 3-1/2 inches roll diameter, position the switch to a point of just making contact. Tighten screw and recheck requirement.

8-49

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Low Clutch Torque (40PWU101 Late Design)

Requirement (without paper spool)

With the unit in the on position, sensing arm in upper position and the hook of a spring scale applied over the spacer on the clutch, it shall require 7-1/2 to 9-1/2 ounces to allow the clutch to rotate. (Apply greater spring tension than required, then relax the tension to obtain values of adjustment.)

To Adjust

DANGER: ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE WITH UNIT DISCONNECTED FROM THE AC LINE VOLTAGE.

Loosen the clamp locking screw friction tight, position the resistor slide clamp to obtain the requirement. Tighten clamp screw (caution not to damage resistor by over tightening the clamp) and recheck requirement.

8-50

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


High Clutch Torque (40PWU101 Late Design)

Requirement (without paper spool)

With the unit in the on position, sensing arm held down and the hook of a spring scale applied over the spacer on the clutch, it shall require 15 to 20 ounces to allow the clutch to rotate. (Apply greater spring tension than required, then relax tension to obtain values of adjustment.)

To Adjust

DANGER: ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE WITH UNIT DISCONNECTED FROM THE AC,LINE VOLTAGE.

Loosen the clamp locking screw friction tight, position the resistor slide clamp to obtain the requirement. Tighten clamp screw (caution not to damage resistor by over tightening the clamp) and recheck torque requirement.

8-51

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Lateral Winder Position (40PWU102)

Requirement

The paper spool flange must align with spent paper exiting from printer, and the paper should be flat on cabinet top when being -wound.

To Adjust

Loosen the four winder assembly mounting screws. Position the winder left or right to meet requirement.

Clutch Torque (40PWU102)

Requirement (Preliminary)

With motor side of the clutch in a locked position (use spanner wrench on friction nut) and spring scale hook applied over one of the spacers on the clutch, it should require

Min 40 ounces---Max 50 ounces to move drive flange.

NOTE: Take up play in direction of pull before reading scale.

To Adjust

Loosen locknut. Rotate friction nut in or out to meet requirement.

Tighten locknut.

Requirement (Final)

After installing the clutch on motor shaft, and operating unit for a period of time, clutch torque should measure

Min 25 ounces.

If below 25 ounces, readjust clutch.

8-52

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Low Motor Torque (40PWU102)

Requirement

With unit in the ON position, sensing arm in upper position, and spring scale hook applied into the hole of spool flange, it should require

Min 3 ounces---Max 4 ounces to allow the clutch to rotate.

NOTE: Apply greater spring tension than required, then relax tension to obtain values of adjustment.

DANGER: ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE WITH UNIT DISCONNECTED FROM AC LINE VOLTAGE.

To Adjust

Loosen slide clamp locking screw friction tight. Position resistor slide clamp to obtain requirement. Tighten clamp screw. (To prevent damage to resistor, do not overtighten clamp.) Recheck requirement.

8-53

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969. LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



High Motor Torque (40PWU102)

Requirement

With unit in the ON position, sensing arm held down, and spring scale hook applied into the hole of spool flange, it should require

Min 6 ounces---Max 8 ounces to allow clutch to rotate.

NOTE: Apply greater spring tension than required, then relax tension to obtain values of adjustment.

DANGER: ADJUSTMENT TO BE MADE WITH UNIT DISCONNECTED FROM AC LINE VOLTAGE.

To Adjust

Loosen slide clamp locking screw friction tight. Position resistor slide clamp to obtain requirement. Tighten clamp screw.

(To prevent damage to. resistor, do not overtighten clamp.) Recheck requirement.

LUBRICATION

NOTE Lubrication interval is 2000 hours or 1 year, whichever comes first.

3.01 The following symbols are used to indicate the kind and quantity of lubricant to be used in a specific area:

SYMBOL

02

015

SAT

D

MEANING

Apply two drops of KS7470 oil.

Apply 15 drops of KS7470 oil.

Saturate.

Dry (no lubricant required).

3.02 The paper winder cover must be removed to provide access to lubrication points.

8-54

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2. CABINET AND PAPER WINDER LUBRICATION

Note: Lubrication interval is 2000 hours or 1 year, whichever comes first.

Motor Assembly (Paper Winder) (Late Design -- TP403393)

Motor Assembly (Paper Winder) (Early Design -- TP198062)

8-55

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2. CABINET AND PAPER WINDER LUBRICATION (Cont)

Sensing Arm Shaft Mounting Holes

8-56

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


F. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEIMLY AND PARTS

1. GENERAL

This section provides disassembly/reassembly and parts information for Tempest Model 40 Cabinets, Paper Winders,

Pedestals, and also the modification kits for providing rack mounting and ruggedized rack mounting of Tempest Model

40 Terminals.

Included in this section are procedures for disassembly and reassembly of subassemblies. Also, there are included exploded views detailing individual part numbers. A numerical listing of parts referenced to page numbers of the

exploded view begins on Page 8-136.

After disassembly and reassembly of a subassembly or component is completed, the associated adjustments should be

checked and relubrication (if applicable) should be performed, see Page 8-37, E. ADJUSTMENTS AND LUBRICATION.

After cable repairs, the conductors should be checked for continuity using the connector-to-connector wiring diagrams associated with the cable assembly illustrations. Use of VOM set to the R X 1 range is required.

It is recommended that the ac power cord be disconnected during all disassembly or reassembly activity.

8-57

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2. DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY

40CAB202/RA, 40CAB202/RC and 40CAB202/RD Cabinet Parts

8-58

403615 Filter Panel Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


40CAB352/RA, 40CAB352/RC and 40CAB354/RA Cabinet Parts

8-59

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2. DISASSEMBLY/.REASSEMBLY (Cont)

410551 or 410549 Transformer Assembly

To install the transformer assembly reverse the disassembly procedure.

8-60

403615 Filter Panel Assembly

TM 11-5815-o06-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 3 W4-4-300-1


8-61

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Interface Assembly

To install interface assembly reverse removal procedures.

8-62

Interface Circuit Card Mounting Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


To install interface circuit card mounting assembly reverse removal procedures.

Refer to 9559WD in WDP0457 for reconnecting leads to terminal blocks.

8-63

3. PARTS

Monitor Support

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 3 I1W4-4-300-1

359


8-64

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-65

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS, Monitor Support (Cont)

8-66

402247

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-67

3. PARTS (Cont)

Friction Feed Printer

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-68

Printer Mounting Cradle -- RO and Adjacent

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-69

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969 LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300 1

359

F. DISASSEMBLYIREASSEMBLY AND PARTS (Cont)

3. PARTS (Cont)

Printer Cabinet -- RO and Adjacent

8-70

Panels

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 3l1W4-4-300-1


Foot and Foam Pads (Printer RO and Adjacent Cabinet)

8-71

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

Printer Door -- RO and Adjacent

8-72

Panel Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-73

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

405716 Cable Assembly -- Friction Feed

405715 Cable Assembly -- Friction Feed

400598 Interlock Cable Assembly -- Friction Feed

8-74

Printer Cabinet -- 80-Column Tractor Feed

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-75

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS, Painter Cabinet -- 80-Column Tractor Feed (Cont)

8-76

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Window, Latch, and Stop Arm -- 80-Columnn Tractor Feed (Early Design -- Sheet Metal

8-77

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300 1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

Window, Latch, and Stop Arm -- 80-Column Tractor Feed (Intermediate Design --

Sheet Metal)

8-78

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Window, Latch, and Stop Arm -- 80-Column Tractor Feed (Late Design -- Die Cast)

8-79

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

Dome, Blower, and Duct -- 80-Column Tractor Feed

8-80

Cradle Mechanism -- 80-Column Tractor Feed

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-81

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300- 1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

Interlock and Paper Alarm -- 80- and 132-Column Tractor Feed

8-82

AC Power Cable -- Tractor Feed

TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-83

3. PARTS (Cont)

405718 Cable Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


405717 Cable Assembly

8-84

Printer Cabinet -- 132-Column Tractor Feed

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-85

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

Printer Cabinet -- 132-Column Tractor Feed (Cont)

8-86

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Dome, Blower, and Duct -- 132-Column Tractor Feed (Early Design -- Sheet Metal)

8-87

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

Dome, Blower, and Duct -- 132-Column Tractor Feed (Late Design -- Die Cast)

8-88

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Window, Latch, and Stop Arm -- 132-Column Tractor Feed (Early Design -- Sheet Metal.)

8-89

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP 188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

Window, Latch, and Stop Arm -- 132-Column Tractor Feed (Late Design -- Die Cast)

8-90

Cradle Mechanism -- 132-Column Tractor Feed

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300- 1


8-91

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP.188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-92

Interface - - Pedestal

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-93

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-94

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-95

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-96

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-00Q10/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-97

3. PARTS (Cont)

Interface -- Terminal Blocks

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-98

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-99

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

3. PARTS (Cont)

402077 Transformer Assembly


8-100

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 3 1W4-4-300-1


8-101

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-102

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-103

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-104

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-105

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

406863 Modification Kit (Interface) Front Accessibility 19 Inch Rack (Part of

406862 Modification Kit Required) and 411097 Modification Kit

§ Hardware used for the 406863 modification kit.

¶ Hardware used for the 411097 modification kit.

8-106

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Left Side Shown

**Front hole on each slide assembly only.

Note: When rear accessibility for the interface assembly is desired, the interface pan is mounted on the rear of the controller slide assemblies and replaces the rear slide brace.

8-107

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


Mount the slide bracket using flat head screws and Kepsnuts supplied with slide assembly. Use four screws and nuts for 16 inch slides; five screws and nuts for 22 inch slides.

8-108

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-109

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

24 Inch Rack Front Accessibility for 406863 Modification Kits Part of 406859 Modification Kit Required (For 411097

Modification Kits the 411098 Modification Kit is Required)

Mounting hardware for 406863 modification kit, part of 406859 modification kit required.

§§ Mounting hardware for 411097 modification kit using 411098 extender modification kit.

24 Inch Rack Rear Accessibility (Part of 406859 Modification Kit Required)

8-110

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-111

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

406859, 406860 and 406861 Modification Kits (19 to 24 Inch Extender Modification)

8-112

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


406858 Modification Kit (To Mount an 80-Column Tractor Feed Printer in a 24 Inch Rack)

8-113

3. PARTS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-114

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-115

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. PARTS (Cont)

406694, 406719 or 406759 Isolator Assemblies, Part of 406650, 406660, 406670, 406680 or 406760 Modification Kits

NOTE: In the 406719 assembly for the printer, the two isolator assemblies in the front are 406686 instead of 406685. In all other assemblies, all four isolator assemblies are 406685.

8-116

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


406709 Assembly, Part of 406650, 406660, 406670, 406680 or 406760 Modification Kits

8-117

TM 11 -5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3.

PARTS, 406709 Assembly, Part of 406650, 406660, 406670, 406680 or 406760 Modification Kits (Cont)

8-118


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


¶¶1 Use only if rack is not tapped.

*** Same lockwasher but at a different location if rack is not tapped.

8-119

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.

PARTS, 406680 Modification Kit (Cont)

Left Side Shown

8-120

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-121

***Same lockwasher but at a different location if rack is not tapped.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.

PARTS (Cont)

406650, 406660, 406670, 406760 Modification Kits

¶¶Use only if rack is not tapped.


8-122

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


¶¶ Use only if rack is not tapped.

8-123

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W44-300-1

359


3.

PARTS, 406650t 406660, 406670, 406760 Modification Kits (Cont)

(Keyboard Display Only)

8-124

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-125

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.

PARTS, 406650, 406660, 406670, 406760 Modification Kits (Cont)

8-126

(Right Side Shown)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



8-127

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


8-128


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-129

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-001O/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3.


8-130

Mounting of Assemblies Into Rack

Controller

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-131

3.

PARTS (Cont)

Display

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-132

Cassette Drive

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


8-133

3.

PARTS (Cont)

Printer

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


8-134

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0000/TO 31W4-4-300-1


406700 Modification Kit (Required Only if Printer is Part of an ROP Terminal)

8-135

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.

COMPONENT PARTS LIST

Note: When ordering replaceable parts or components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with the letters "TP" (i.e., TP410055).

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

1093 Screw, 8-32 x 7/16 Fil 105

1158 Screw, 6-32 x 5/16 Fil 97

1178 Screw, 2-56 x 7/8 Fil 82

1248 Screw, 640 x 1/2 Flat 105

2191 Lockwasher 72, 73, 77, 81,

89, 91,97,101,102,103,

104,105,109,112,130,

135

2201 Nut, 5/16-32 Hex 124, 126

2322 Lockwasher 81, 91, 116,

118,120,130, 133, 134

2382 Lockwasher 68

2422 Lockwasher 82

2449 Lockwasher 92, 95, 114

2669 Lockwasher 93, 106, 107,

108, 110, 117,119, 121,

122, 123,125, 127, 129

2846 Washer, Flat 92

2920 Lockwasher 116,118

3339 Nut, 9/26-32 Hex 103

3340 Lockwasher 103

3438 Washer, Flat 80, 87, 93

119, 121,122, 127

3598 Nut, 6-40 Hex 70,73, 76,

77, 81, 86, 89, 91,99,

100, 101,103, 105,

109, 112

3599 Nut, 440 Hex 70, 76, 86,

116

3640 Lockwasher 67, 68, 73,

74, 77, 78, 79, 89, 90,

97

3646 Lockwasher 105, 113

3949 Collar 103

6345 Nut, 6-32 Hex 72

6807 Screw, Set 103

6987 Washer, Flat 103, 130

7002 Washer, Flat 73,81,91,

99, 100, 102, 104

7415 Nut, 1/2-32 Hex 116, 118

25123 Screw, 1/4-32 x 7/16 Hex

120


45815 Lockwasher 65, 69, 79, 90

55090 Spring 104



74014 Screw, 10-32 x 3/4Hex

122

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

74695 Sleeve, Clutch 103

75750 Washer, Insulating 105

76085 Disc, Friction 103

76086 Washer, Spring 103

76087 Nut, 9/16-32 Friction 103


76178 Stud 103


76474 Nut, 10-32 Hex 65, 117

76953 Washer, Flat 80, 87

76968 Setscrew 104

77902 Screw, 640 x 2-3/8

Round 105

80342 Screw, 640 x 23/64 Hex

103

82832 Lockwasher 92, 95

84354 Washer, Flat 116, 118

130, 133,134

84579 Washer, Flat 68, 108

85422 Screw, 10-32 x 15/16 Hex

123 121245

86850 Screw, 10-32 x 1-1/4 Fil

65, 117

92146 Nut, 1/4-20 Hex 114

92527 Lockwasher 72, 93, 102

93582 Washer, Flat 79, 90

97402 Screw, 6-40 Shoulder 77

97799 Screw, 6-40 x 9/64 Flat

113

98642 Lockwasher 65

98725 Screw, 6-40 x 3/8 Flat

109,112 125390

100848 Screw, 20-1/4 x 1 Hex

81,91 128360

101421 Screw, 1/4-20 x 1-1/4 Hex

116, 118 138401

102855 Screw, 3/8-16 x 11/16 Hex

116, 118 143287

103092 Cord, Connector 93


104807 Washer, Flat 77, 78, 79

89, 90 150966

107116 Lockwasher 70,; 73, 76,

86, 99, 100

108713 Lockwasher 124, 126

110126 Lockwasher 79, 81, 90,

91

110743 Lockwasher 70, 76, 86,

93, 99, 117

8-136

116743

116783

117535

119649

119651

119653

119654

121018

121242

121246

121551

125011

125015

125098

125100

125224

125239

125313

128357

128836

Part

Number

111017

111064

112626

121243

121244

143630

150711

150978

151335

151346

151349

151415

Description and

Page Number

Screw, 640 x 5/16 Fil 102

Screw, 8-32 x 3/8 Round

102

Nut, 10-32 Hex 69, 106,

107,108,110,119,

121,122,127

Pallet, Type 99

Holder, Fuse 99


Ring, Retaining 72

Ring, Retaining 94

Ring, Retaining 104


79, 89, 90

Nut, 440 Hex 72

Clamp, 1/8 ID Cable 75,

87,88


85



88, 99, 102, 104


Screw, 8-32 x 1/4 Hex 93

Washer, Flat 76, 86, 117


Locknut 93


Nut, 1/4-32 Hex 120

Spring, Compression 72

Washer, Insulating 105

Washer, Flat 105

Ring, Retaining 65

Ring, Retaining 101

Nut, 10.32 Hex 116, 118

Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/4 Hex

92,95


103,130

Lock, Mounting 99

Washer, Flat 94

Insulator, Terminal Block

102

Screw, 640 x 1-1/8 Fil

80, 87, 88

Stud 102

Screw, 640 x 3/8 Fil 135

Nut, Speed 102,; i03

Block, Terminal 102

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

151416 Nut, 6-40 Hex 102

151630 Screw, 6-40 x 1/4 Hex

81,91,102,104

151631 Screw, 6-40 x 5/16 Hex

73 184055

151632 Screw, 640 x 3/8 Hex

73, 81,91, 99,104,112

151686 Screw, 440 x 3/8 Fil 99

151723 Screw, 10-32 x 3/8 Hex

93, 110,117

151724 Screw, 10-32 x 5/8 Hex

119, 121

151827 Strap, Terminal 98

152426 Nut, 6-40 Self-Locking 99

152445 Spring, Compression 116,

118

152760 Stud 100

152848 Screw, 1/4-20 x 3/4 Rd

69,114

152893 Screw, 440 x 1/4 Hex

66, 67, 68, 70, 73, 74,

76, 86,97

153441 Screw, !0-32 x 7/16 Hex

125

153442 Screw, 10-32 x 1/2 Hex

79,90,98,106,107,

108,110,127,129

153538 Screw, 6-40 x 7/16 Hex 99

153803 Jumper 5" Slate 102

153806 Spring 101

153817 Screw, 4-40 x Hex 93

153841 Screw, 6.40 x 9/16 Hex

81,91,101

154249 Screw, No. 8B Self-Tapping

79,82

154259 Screw, No. 62 Self-Tapping

102,103

155081 Post, Spring 104

155752 Sleeve, 5/64 ID x 1/2"

Lg Insulating 99

156740 Screw, 640 x 7/32 Hex

102

156768 Screw, 8-32 x 9/32 Hex

113

162730 Screw, 1/4-20 x 7/16 Hex

92,95,133

162886 Screw, 4-40 x 7/32 Hex

77, 78, 79,89, 90

172727 Post 104

180904 Tab, Terminal 70, 76, 86


181240 Screw w/Lockwasher x 3/16 Hex 96, 99

181241 Screw w/Lockwasher, 6-40 x 1/4 Hex 66, 96,100,

102,113,114,115

181242 Screw, w/Lockwasher,

6-40 x 5/16 Hex 92

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

182523 Clamp, 1-3/8 ID Mounting

99

182726 Terminal, Receptacle Type

83


184056 Screw w/Lockwasher, 640 x 1/4 Hex 70, 76, 82,

86, 99, 135

184058 Screw w/Lockwasher, 640 x 7/16 Hex 76

185871 Screw w/Lockwasher, 8-32 x 3/8 Hex 77, 78, 87, 89,

90, 92

186749 Bolt w/Cap 92, 95

186755 Screw, 8-32 Self-Tapping

132,135

186823 Screw, 8-32 Shoulder

78,79,89,90

187072 Network 102

188483 Arm Stop 77

188732 Screw, 8-32 x 3/8 Hex

78, 79, 80, 8&, 90

192557 Grommet, Rubber 81, 91,

101

192980 Lug, Terminal 99

194987 Screw, 8-32 x 3/8 Hex 98

195245 Sleeve, 1/2 ID x 1-1/2"

Lg Insulating 99

198670 Screw w/Lockwasher 97,

99,100

300214 Filter 73

310640 Jumper, 5-1/2 IN Black 99

310751 Insulator, Terminal Block

98

310752 Block, Terminal 98

311763 Mount, Vibration 80, 87,

88

312573 Jumper 6" Red 102

312574 Jumper 6" Black 102

312829 Strap, 2-1/2" Braided 64

312918 Strap, Cable 73

318630 Jumper, 6-1/8" Braided 93

320119 Spacer, .497" Thk 77

320418 Terminal, Ring Type 102

321213 Resistor 82

324142 Connector, 3 Pt Plug 67,73

324148 Label 96

325938 Connector, 3/4 In 90

Degree 93, 106, 107,

120

325959 Insulator, Terminal Block

98

325961 Block, Terminal 98

326023 Screw 440 x 9/32 Hex 117

326270 Connector, 15 Pt Circuit

Card 99

326594 Transistor 99

401152

401153

401156

401158

401169

401170

401174

401191

401194

401195

401203

401204

401216

401217

401219

401220

401223

401225

401230

401232

3541649

341691

346995

400575

400598

400628

400920

401128

401132

401150

Part

Number

327444

327464

328378

328793

330183

330212

330213

330443

332860

333588

334178

334187

334422

335123

336021

336027

336810

341647

341648

Description and

Page Number

Capacitor, 2 MFD 73, 100

Screw, 1/4-20 Hex 131

Washer, Insulating 99

Capacitor, .001 MFD 99

Flange 105

Flange, Right 105

Flange, Left 105

Spring 105

Bumper 92

Lamp, 28V Miniature 82

Reducer, Female 93

Inductor 73, 100

Bushing, Soulder99

Switch, Pushbutton 82

Transformer 100


Plate, Identification 103


67,74,82, 84


74, 84

Connector 84

Connector, 15 Pt Receptacle 67, 82, 83

Guide 65, 117

Switch Assembly 74


Connector, 15 Pt Receptacle 74

Connector, 4 Pt Receptacle 74

Plate, Front 68

Cover 64

Connector, 9 Pt Receptacle 66, 67, 74,

84

Table 92

Door 94

Foot 92

Spacer 92

Arm, Stop 64

Spacer 64

Door 65

Panel, End 71

Band, Trim 71

Clip 71

Bumper 92, 95

Bumper 71, 75, 85

Door, Printer 72

Bracket, Left Door 72

Bracket 72

Post 68

Screw, 10-32 Shoulder 64,

68


Bumper 65

Bumper 72

8-137

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.

COMPONENT PARTS LIST (Cont)

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

401239 Screw, 8-18 Spl 64,

66, 68, 82

401268 Screw, 640 Shoulder 64

401269 Washer, Spring 65

401273 Latch 72

401274 Handle 72

401275 Bracket, Left Window 72

401276 Bracket, Right Window 72

401278 Guide, Paper 72

401280 Foam 72

401285 Spring 72

401287 Latch 65

401288 Handle 65

401299 Window 72

401301 Plate 71

401302 Plate 71

401512 Screw, 1/4-20 Captive 92

401514 Bracket, Left 66

401515 Bracket, Right 66

401518 Screw w/Lockwasher,

No. 6 Hex 66

401555 Holder 92

401556 Latch 94

401564 Plate, Trim 68

401566 Button, Plug 92

401568 Spring 94

401582 Nut, 8-32 Spl 75, 85,

92, 95

401586 Bushing 69, 81,91

401599 Spring, Torsion 69

401646 Connector, 3 Pt Receptacle 73

401649 Connector, 3 Pt Plug 83

401745 Pad, Upper Front 71

401746 Pad, Rear Lid 72

401757 Label 94

401765 Latch 94

401842 Bar 69

401844 Hook 69

401861 Screw, 1/4-32 Pilot 69,

81

401865 Cradle Assembly 69

401868 Spring 69

401869 Bushing 69

401870 Plate, Retaining 69, 81,

91

401871 Hub 69, 81,91

401872 Bushing 69, 81, 91

401911 Top, Table 95

402007 Bracket 74

402008 Retainer 74

402009 Lever, Actuating 74

402010 Spacer 74

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

402011 Spring 74

402012 Switch 74

402023 Box 97

402024 Cover 96

402025 Bracket 97

402026 Breaker, Circuit 97

402031 Plate, Cover 97

402032 Frame 99

402034 Plate 100

402035 Spacer 92

402036 Screw, 1/4-20 Shoulder 92

402037 Lever 92

402038 Spacer 93

402039 Screw, 10-32 Shoulder 93

402040 Arm 93

402041 Bracket 92

402051 Housing 66, 70, 76, 86

402055 Bracket 92

402060 Cover, Filter 73

402061 Bracket, Filter 73

402064 Cabinet 69, 70

402070 Bracket 72

402071 Gasket, Front 72

402072 Gasket, Left 68

402073 Gasket, Right 68

402074 Bracket 73

40207'7 Transformer Assembly

97, 100

402085 Filter 97

402086 Filter 97

402092 Cable Assembly 99, 100

402093 Cable Assembly 100


402095 Receptacle 67, 73

402097 Pin 67

402121 Cable 100

402233 Label 73

402234

402235 Label 73

402247 Cable Assembly 65, 67,

117

402248 Housing 67

403351 Frame, Winder 102,

103,104, 105,129

403353 Disc, Drive 103

403355 Cover 102

403356 Cover 103

403357 Bracket 102

403358 Washer, Clutch 103

403359 Disc, Drive 103

403360 Brace. Drive 103

403362 Cord Assembly 102

403368 Post 103

8-138

403802

403807

Label 73

403813

403814

403819

403820

403821

403824

403825

403828

403832

403835

403836

403837

Part

Number

403616

403617

403618

403619

403620

403622

403623

403634

403644

403698

403785

403787

403788

403789

403790

403791

403792

403793

403794

403795

403796

403800

403369

403393

403493

403601

403602

403603

403604

403605

403606

403610

403614

403615

Description and

Page Number

Bearing 103

Motor 102, 105

Bracket 90

Cable Assembly 97

Cable Assembly 99

Cable Assembly 99

Cable Assembly 99

Cable Assembly 99

Connector Assembly 97

Cable Assembly 99

Cabinet 64

Panel, Filter 70, 76,86

Post 70, 76, 86

Cable Assembly 73

Cable Assembly 74

Cable Assembly 73


Cover 67

Housing 66

Screw, 6-40 x 3/16 Flat 73

Decalcomania 99

Cable Assembly 84

Blower 80, 87, 88

Arm, Left Latch 81, 91

Arm, Right Latch 81, 91

Screw,8-32Shoulder81,91

Plate 80, 87, 88


Cradle 81, 101

Channel, Right 81, 91

Channel, Left 81, 91

Bracket 81,82, 83, 91

Spring, Torsion 81, 91

Button 82

403801 Button 82

Table 95

Plate, Trim 75

403812 Plate, Front 75

Bracket 77

Screw, 8-32 Shoulder

81, 91

Dome 77, 79, 80

Window 77, 78

Clamp 77, 79

Bracket 82

Shield 80.,

Plate 75

Plate 77, 78, 79, 89, 90

Switch 82

Latch, Left 77,78,79,89,

90

Latch, Right 77, 78, 79,

89, 90

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

403838 Bracket 77, 78, 79, 89,

90

403840 Spring, Latch 77, 78, 79,

89, 90

403844 Spring, Compression 82

403847 Spacer 82

403848 Spring, Actuator 82

403849 Lever, Actuating 82

403850 Bracket 82

403853 Plate 82

403888 Spring, Torsion 81, 91

403889 Spring, Torsion 81, 91


405520 Dome 78, 80

405523 Clamp, Window 78,89

405540 Dome 87


405554 Spring, Torsion 77

405555 Label 81,91

405557 Foot w/Bumper 92, 95

405560 Trim, Front 64

405568 Shield 82

405569 Screw, 8-32 Shoulder 80,

87, 88

405575 Duct, Narrow 80

405576 Duct, Wide 87, 88

405589 Arm, Stop 89, 90

405590 Cradle 91

405600 Cabinet 88

405604 Shield 87, 88

405605 Arm 78, 79, 89, 90

405606 Plate, Front 85

405634 Bracket, Left 91

405635 Bracket, Right 91

405636 Screw, 1/4-20 Spl 91

405637 Nut, 1/420 Spl 91

405638 Screw, 1/4-32 x 31/64

Flat 91

405639 Spacer 91

405642 Spring, Right Torsion 89,

90

405643 Spring, Torsion 78, 79, 89,

90




405718 Cable Assembly 76, 84, 86

405722 Duct, Inlet 76

405723 Screen 76

405726 Cabinet 75, 76, 80, 81

405766 Cover 65


405954 Capacitor 98

406216 Post 101

406219 Latch Assembly 101

406221 Channel, Right 101

406222 Channel, Left 101


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

406580 Plate, Nut 108

406647 Bracket, Rear 119, 123

406648 Plate, Washer, 119, 123,

125

406649 Plate, Nut 119, 122, 123

406650 Modification Kit 116, 117,

118, 122, 124, 126, 128


118, 122, 124, 126, 128

406661 Plate, Bottom 116

406662 Plate, Top-Printer 116,130

406663 Bracket, Slide 116

406664 Support 116

406665 Plate w/Bushing 116

406667 Screw, Captive 116, 118

406668 Block, Mounting 122

406669 Block, Mounting 122


118, 122, 124, 126, 128

406671 Pin Shock 124, 126, 128

406672 Plate, Top Printer 116, 118

406673 Bushing, Shock 116, 118

406674 Washer, Flat 116, 118

406675 Plate, Rear 123

406676 Lockwasher 116, 118

406677 Plate, Bottom-Controller 116

406678 Plate, Top-Controller 116


118, 119, 120

406681 Rail 119, 121

406682 Bushing, Guide 120, 121

406683 Post 120

406684 Frame, Interface 120

406685 Isolator, Assembly 116

406686 Isolator, Assembly 116,

118

406687 Slide Assembly-24" 125

406688 Plate, Nut 116, 118

406694 Isolator Assembly 116

406695 Modification Kit 129, 130

406696 Support, Spindle 129, 130

406697 Rod, Reinforcing 129

406698 Plate, Stiffener 130

406700 Modification Kit 135

4,3670).

Support, Opcon-Right 135

406702 Support Opcon-Left 135

436706 Carrier, Cable 128

406708 Bracket, Carrier 127

406709 Isolator Assembly 117,118

406719 Isolator Assembly 116

406721 Bracket, Guide-Left 134

406722 Bracket, Guide-Rear 134

406735 Screw, 1/4-20 Fil 116, 118

406736 Screw, 20 x 1./4-20 Fil 116,

118, 130, 133, !34

406737 Screw, 10-32 Fil 116, 117,

118

8-139

406850

406851

406852

406853

406854

406855

406856

406857

406858

406859

406860

406861

406862

406863

406864

406865

406866

406867

406749

406750

406751

406752

406753

406754

406757

406758

406759

406760

406868

406869

406870

406871

406872

406873

406874

Part

Number

406738

406739

406740

406741

406742

406745

406746

406747

406748

Description and

Page Number

Screw, 6-32 Fil 117

Plate, Nut-Left 117

Plate, Nut-Right 117

Plate, Monitor Front 118

Bar, Stiffener 117

Bar, Mounting-Monitor

Left 122

Plate, Support Monitor 118

Bar, Support Front 118

Plate Mounting-Monitor

Lower 118

Housing, Front 117

Plate, Mounting-Monitor

Upper 117

Cable Assembly 117

Housing, Plug 117

Bar, Mounting-Front 133

Bar, Mounting-Rear 133

Plate, Bottom-Cassette 116

Plate, Top Cassette 116,

133

Isolator Assembly 116

Modification Kit 116, 117,

118, 122, 124, 126, 128

Bracket, Spacer 110

Shelf, Mounting-Printer

109,113

Tray, Paper 113

Bracket, Tray 113

Brace, Slide 108

Plate, Extender-22" 112

Plate, Extender-16" 112

Post 110


Modification 110








Bracket, Mounting-Left

108

Bracket, Mounting-Right

108

Bracket, Mounting-Left

108

Bracket, Mounting-Right

108

Shelf, Mounting-Controller 109

Shelf, Mounting-Printer

109

Shelf, Mounting-Monitor

109

Shelf, Mounting-cassette

109, 115

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


4.

COMPONENT PARTS LIST (Cont)

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

406875 Screw, Captive 108, 109,

112

406876 Plate, Slide Mounting 108

406877 Pan, Interface 106, 107,

110

406879 Bracket, Hold Down 115

406881 Shield Assembly-22" 108

406882 Slide Assembly-16" 107,

108

406883 Bracket, Mounting 106,

110

406954 Cap 96

407001 Adhesive, 5/8 x 14-5/16

64, 68

407002 Adhesive, 5/8 x 18-15/32

75

407003 Adhesive, 5/8 x 26 85

407048 Bracket 79

407057 Post 79, 90

407064 Clamp, Left 79, 90

407065 Clamp, Right 79, 90

407080 Window 79

Part

Number

Description and

Page Number

407081 Window 89, 90

407151 Screw w/Washer 80, 88

407196 Guide 72


07300 Dome 88, 90

407351 thru

407354 Decal 96

407390 Decal 73

407401 Cabinet 85, 86, 87, 91

407413 Connector Coupling 93

407469 Bracket 105

407470 Shaft 104

407471 Resistor, 750 Ohm 105

407472 Insulator 105

407473 Lever, Stop 104

407474 Arm 104

407476 Switch, Mercury 104

407477 Bracket 102

407480 Resistor, 500 Ohm 105

407533 Bushed Elbow 93


Part

Number

407535

407536

407537

407538

407539

408043

408064

408610

408611

408885

408896

408897

408986

410549

410551

410553

411097

411098

411114

430566

Description and

Page Number




Cable Assembly 93

Cable Assembly 93

Holder 92

Foot w/Nut 92, 95

Choke 96

Plate 96

Clamp 89

Cradle 101

Cradle 101

Guide, Paper 75

Card, Circuit 70, 76

Card, Circuit 70, 76,86

Card, Circuit 74, 84



Plate, Nut 106

Switch, Rocker 73, 102

8-140

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART 9 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 SETS

INDEX PAGE

GENERAL ..................................................................................................................................................... 2

SET IDENTIFICATION

1.

GENERAL.............................. ............................................................................................................... 2

2.

IDENTIFICATION .................................................................................................................................. 6

3.

OPTIONS .............................................................................................................................................. 7

4.

CODE CONVERSION TABLES ........................................................................................................... 13

5.

SET INTERFACE ........................ ....................................................................................................... 15

6.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS ........................................................................................................... 18

TESTING

1.

GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................... 19

2.

PROTECTIVE GROUND AND PREOPERATIONAL CHECKS...... ...................................................... 20

3.

OFF-LINE CHECKOUT. ...................................................................................................................... 21

4.

BACK-TO-BACK CHECKOUT ............................................................................................................. 36

TROUBLESHOOTING

1.

GENERAL........... ................................................................................................................................ 37

2.

SET ANALYSIS ................................................................................................................................... 38

CABLE INTERCONNECTION

1.

CABLING FOR ROP (80 and 132 COLUMN) ................ ..................................................................... 43

2.

CABLING FOR KP............................................................................................................................... 44

3.

CABLING FOR KD . ............................................................................................................................ 44

4.

CABLING FOR KDP -- TRACTOR FEED PRINTER . .......................................................................... 45

5.

CABLING FOR KDP -- FRICTION FEED PRINTER.... ........................................................................ 45

9-1

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

PART 9 -- TEMPEST MODEL 40 SETS

A. GENERAL

This section provides information to identify the types of Tempest Model 40 Sets and to test, troubleshoot and service them. It includes a description of options that may be implemented and variable features that may be ordered for the set.. Also provided is information on set cable interconnection.


"TP" (i.e., TP410055).

B. SET IDENTIFICATION

1.

GENERAL

A Tempest Model 40 Set is a combination of modular components (i.e., display monitor, opcon, electronics package, etc.) interconnected to provide data communications on private line applications.

There are four basic set configurations: Keyboard Display (KD), Keyboard Display Printer (KDP), Keyboard Printer (KP) and Receive-Only Printer (ROP). The KD and KDP configurations provide send and receive operation with facilities to prepare and edit data for send operation. The KDP configuration provides a means of obtaining a hard copy of send and/or receive data. The EP configuration provides a full opcon for on-line conversational mode operation and a printer for hard copy of send or receive data. The ROP configuration provides hard copy of received data. The ROP sets can be configured with 80-column friction or tractor feed printer or with a 132-column tractor feed printer.

9-2

Keyboard Display (KD)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Keyboard Display Printer (KDP) -- Tractor Feed Printer

9-3

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

B. SET IDENTIFICATION (Cont)

1.

GENERAL (Cont)

Keyboard Display Printer (KDP) -- Friction Feed Printer

Receive-Only 80-Column Printer (ROP)

9-4

Receive-Only 132-Column Printer (ROP)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Keyboard Printer (KP)

9-5

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


2.

IDENTIFICATION

Knowing what features are provided and how those features are programmed to operate is necessary for installation and operational checkout. Several methods are presented in the following paragraphs for determining terminal features and programming.

Features included in a terminal can be identified by observing if certain keytops are provided on the operator console, or if a certain type or quantity of printed circuit boards are present in the controller and display logic circuitry.

Options programmed in the Tempest Model 40 Set should be recorded on a Set Features and Options Record. Typical

forms for this purpose are shown on Pages 9-9 and 9-10, 3. OPTIONS. Storage locations for Set Features and Options

Record forms are provided in cabinetry. A record form should be maintained with each terminal to indicate how the optional features are programmed.

NOTE: References in this manual to TELETYPE® Standard Serial Interface (SSI) describe input/output signaling characteristics for devices using high speed SSI signals..

Opcon

NOTE: Actual keytops may be slightly different in appearance. Nomenclature is the same.

NOTE: The ROP Sets have an approximate 1000-character storage buffer.

9-6

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3. OPTIONS

The Tempest Model 40 Set components provide a number of field options to satisfy operating requirements of the user.

These options are implemented .by, switches on the logic cards. Location of ail circuit cards with options can be found in the appropriate individual component parts of this manual.

The following options are grouped according to the type of set. The options in any group apply only to the type of set(s') indicated. Any change in options should be entered on the Set Features and Options 'Record.

Before assembly, checkout or servicing, a review of features and field options or other descriptions and records .should

be made to determine which options, if any, should be changed from the way -they were furnished by the factory, or altered during earlier service applications.

A Set Features and Options Record (Page 9-lOa or b) should be maintained and attached to -equipment to facilitate checkout or. operation. The blank forms may be duplicated locally, and marked up for this purpose.

9-7

3. OPTIONS (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



NOTES

9-8

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

K.

OPTION

A.

B.

L.

M.

N.

O.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Set Features and Options Record for KD, KDP. KP and 80-Column ROP Sets

DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE

FROM MANUAL.

Set: Printer: Interface:

ROP

KP

KD

KDP

40P101/AA (Monocase)

40P101/AB (Up-Low)


40P151/AB (Up-Low)

Clear to Send +6 V (EC181)

Clear to Send -6 V (EC184)

Receive Ready +6 V (EC180)

Receive Ready -6 V (EC185)

Controller

P.

Printer

17.

18.

Line code

Transmit stop bit

DESCRIPTION OPTION CONDITION

1. ITA2 AV (Baudot) 2. ITA6 (ASCII)

1. 1 stop bit

1. Asynchronous

2. 2 stop bits

(1.56 on ITA2)

2. Isochronous Transmission mode

Pre-empt local on receipt of data



3. Even parity

Transmit answer-back character on receipt of ENQ 1. No answer-back

Line feed printer on receipt of carriage return 1. No line feed

Asynchronous transmission speed on power up

Option II speed


Insert line feed after 79th character from display

1. Do not pre-empt

1. Do not substitute

1. No parity

1. 110 baud

3. 110 baud

Character selected from ASCII code chart

1. Insert line feed

2. Pre-empt

2. Substitute

2. Odd parity

2. Answer-back

2. Line feed

2. 1200 baud

4. 1200 baud

2. Do not insert line






1. Local

1. Send

1. Send characters

1. Send only if ETX is on display

1. Switch to local feed

2. Receive

2. Receive

2. Do not send characters

2.Send without ETX on display

2. Stay in receive

Printer margin and form length

Printer paper feed out c. Last character on

80th column a. No paper feed out d. Last character on

73rd through 79 th column b. Paper feed out on

RM loss

19.

20.

21.

22.

39.

Printer errored character symbol

Line feed on printer

Foldover on up-low printer

Foldover on monocase printer

Form switch (tractor feed printers only) c. Paper feed out on

RM Ion or ETX c. Not printed on parity error e. Printers with 64 character set a. Single a Upper and lower case print a. Lower case not folded over a. On d. Printers with 96 character set f. Printers with exitded ASCI character set b. Double b. Lower case prints as supper case b. Lower case printed as upper case b. Off

9-9

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


DO NOT REMOVE THIS PAGE

FROM MANUAL.


3. OPTIONS (Cont)

Set Features and Options Record for 132-Colum ROP Set

Set:

ROP

18.

Printer:


40P101/AB (Up-Low)

Printer paper feed out

Interface:




Receive Ready -6 V (EC185 )

Controller

OPTION

A.

B.

C.

D.

E

F.

DESCRIPTION

Line code

Transmit stop bit

Transmission mode

Not applicable to ROP Set.

Substitute asterisk(*) for parity errored character


Printer

17.

G.

H



I Asynchronous transmission speed on power up

Option II speed

J. through P Not applicable to ROP Set


OPTION CONDITION

1. ITA2 AV (-Baudot) 2. ITA5(ASCII )

1. 1 stop bit 2 2stop bits

(1.5 on ITA2)

1.Asychronous

1.

2. Isochronous

2.

2 Substitute

2 Odd parity


1. No parity

3. even parity

1.

1. No line feed

1. 110 baud

3. 110 baud

2.

2. Line feed

2. 1200 baud

4. 1200 baud e. Last character on132nd column f.-p. Last character on121st through131st column b. Paper feed out on RM lose

19.

20.

21.



Foldover on up-low printer a. No paper feed out c. Paper feed out on

RM loss or ETX a. Printed on even parity error c. Not printed on parity error e. Printers with 64 character set g. Printers with longest character set having less than 64 characters a. Single a. Upper and lower case print b. Printed on odd parity error d. Printer with

96 character set f. Printers with extended ASCII character set

22.

23.

39.

48.


Extended ASCII on printer (extended ASCII)

Forms switch

Incomplete form suppresses paper alarm a. Lower case prints as error symbol a. Prints extended

ASCU characters

(no parity check) a On a No (paper out not gated with form out) b. Double b. Lower case prints as upper case b. Lower ce printed upper case b. Does not print extended ASCII

(see 19.a., b., or c.) b. Off b. Yes (paper out gated with form out)

9-10

G.

H.

I.

J.

C.

D.

E.

F.

20.

21.

22.

39.

K.

L.

M.

N.

O.

P.

Printer

17.

Set:

ROP

KP

KD

KDP

Controller

OPTION

A.

B.

18.

19.

Printer:


40P101/AB (Up-Low)


40P151/AB (Up-Low)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Interface:

REMOVE THIS PAGE FROM MANUAL, FILL

OUT AND PLACE IN DOCUMENT HOLDER.




Receive Ready -6 V (EC185)

Line code

Transmit stop bit

DESCRIPTION

Transmission mode

Pre-empt local on receipt of data



OPTION CONDITION

1. ITA2 AV (Baudot) 2. ITA6 (ASCII)

1. 1 stop bit 2. 2 stop bits

1. Asynchronous

1. Do not pre-empt


1. No parity

3. Even parity

(1.56 on ITA2)

2. Isochronous

2. Pre-empt

2. Substitute

2. Odd parity

Transmit answer-back character on receipt of ENQ 1. No answer-back



Option II speed


1. No line feed

1. 110 baud

3. 110 baud

Character selected

2. Answer-back

2. Line feed

2. 1200 baud

4. 1200 baud

Insert line feed after 79th character from display from ASCII code chart

1. Insert line feed






1. Local

1. Send

1. Send characters

1. Send only if ETX is on display

1. Switch to local

2. Do not insert line feed

2. Receive

2. Receive

2. Do not send characters

2.Send without ETX on display

2. Stay in receive


Printer paper feed out c. Last character on

80th column d. Last character on

73rd through 79 th column b. Paper feed out on

RM loss





Form switch (tractor feed printers only) a. No paper feed out c. Paper feed out on

RM Ion or ETX c. Not printed on parity error e. Printers with 64 character set a. Single a Upper and lower case print a. Lower case not folded over a. On d. Printers with 96 character set f. Printers with exteded ASCI character set b. Double b. Lower case prints as supper case b. Lower case printed as upper case b. Off

9-10A

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


REMOVE THIS PAGE FROM MANUAL, FILL

OUT AND PLACE IN DOCUMENT HOLDER.

Set:

ROP

18.

Printer:

40P101/AA (Monocase)

40P101/AB (Up-Low)

Printer paper feed out

Interface:

Clear to Send +6 V (EC181)

Clear to Send -6 V (EC184)

Receive Ready +6 V (EC180)

Receive Ready -6 V (EC185 )

Controller

OPTION

A.

B.

C.

D.

E

F.

DESCRIPTION

Line code

Transmit stop bit

Transmission mode


Substitute asterisk(*) for parity errored character


G.

H

I




Option II speed

J. through P Not applicable to ROP Set

Printer

17.


1. ITA2 AV (-Baudot)

1. 1 stop bit

1.Asychronous

1.

OPTION CONDITION


2. ITA5(ASCII )

2 2stop bits

(1.5 on ITA2)

2. Isochronous

2.

2 Substitute

2 Odd parity 1. No parity

3. even parity

1.

1. No line feed

1. 110 baud

3. 110 baud

2.

2. Line feed

2. 1200 baud

4. 1200 baud e. Last character on132nd column f.-P. Last character on121st through131st column b. Paper feed out on RM lose

19.

20.

21.

22.

23.

39.

48.





Extended ASCII on printer (extended ASCII)

Forms switch

Incomplete form suppresses paper alarm a. No paper feed out c. Paper feed out on

RM loss or ETX a. Printed on even parity error c. Not printed on parity error e. Printers with 64 character set g. Printers with longest character set having less than 64 characters a. Single a. Upper and lower case print a. Lower case prints as error symbol a. Prints extended

ASCU characters

(no parity check) a On a No (paper out not gated with form out) b. Printed on odd parity error d. Printers with

96 character set f. Printers with extended ASCII character set b. Double b. Lower case prints as upper case b. Lower ce printed upper case b. Does not print extended ASCII

(see 19.a., b., or c.) b. Off b. Yes (paper out gated with form out)

9-10B

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Controller Optioning

NOTE: The following options apply to controllers other than the 40C430/AAT/017. The 40C430/AAT/017 must be

programmed per switch setting shown on Page 7-8. The only options available on this controller are terminal address,

KD address, printer address and the option of the automatic insertion of the terminal address and device address at the beginning of each message sent.

Field Options Other than Synchronous

Common to ROP, KP, KD and KDP Sets

Option

A. Line code

1.

ITA2 AV (Baudot) ]

2.

ITA5 (ASCII)

Choose 1

B. Transmit stop bit

1.

1 stop bit

2.

2 stop bits (1.5 on ITA2) ]

Choose 1

C. Transmission mode

1.

Asynchronous.] Choose 1

2.

Isochronous

D. Pre-empt local on receipt of receive data

1.

Do not pre-empt ] Choose 1

2.

Pre-empt


1.

Do not substitute ] Choose 1

2.

Substitute

F. Line parity on ITA5 data

1.

No parity

2.

Odd parity ]

3.

Even parity

Choose 1

G. Transmit answer-back character on receipt of ENQ

1.

No answer-back ] Choose 1

2.

Answer-back

H. Line feed printer on receipt of carriage return

1.

No line feed ] Choose 1

2.

Line feed

I. Asynchronous transmission speeds (see Note) Power up speed

2.

1200 baud ] Choose 1

2.

1200 baud

NOTE: Option II will be other baud rate.

J. Answer-back character

Choose any character from the ASCII code chart..

9-11

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



3. OPTIONS, Field Options Other than Synchronous, Common to ROP, KP, KD and KDP Sets, (Cont)

Option

K. Insert line feed after 79th character from display

1.

Insert Line feed

2.

Do not insert line feed ] Choose 1

L. Mode KD switches to after send

1.

Local

2.

Receive ] Choose 1

M. Line copied by printer in on-line mode

1.

Send

2.

Receive ] Choose 1

N. Send extended characters on-line in S/R mode

1.

Send characters

2.

Do not send characters ] Choose 1

O. Allow sending only if ETX is on display

1.

Send only if ETX is on display.].

Choose 1

2.

Send without ETX on display

P. Mode KD switches to on receipt of ETX

1.

Switch to local

2.

Stay in receive ] Choose 1

ASCII Code Chart

(1). Performs cursor left function on display device.

9-12

Baudot (ITA2) Code Chart

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4. CODE CONVERSION TABLES

ASCII to Baudot Conversion Table

BEL

BS

HT

LF

VT

FF

CR

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

SO

SI

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

ASCII (ITA5) CONVERTS

INPUT TO

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

BAUDOT (ITA2)

OUTPUT

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BELL (FIGS. S)

BLANK

BLANK

LINE FEED

BLANK

BLANK

CARRIAGE RETURN

FIGURES

LETTERS

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

ASCII (ITAS)

INPUT

(

'

)

#

$

%

&

FS

GS

RS

US

"

!

SP

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

EM

SS (SUB)

ESC

9-13

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

CONVERTS

TO

*

BAUDOT (ITA2)

OUTPUT

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

SPACE

! (FIGS. F)

" (FIGS. Z)

# (FIGS. H)

$ (FIGS. D)

BLANK

& (FIGS. G)

' (FIGS. J)

( (FIGS. K)

) (FIGS. L)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1



4. CODE CONVERSION TABLES, ASCII to Baudot Conversion Table (Cont)

ASCII (ITA5)

INPUT

?

@

A, a

B, b

C, c

D, d

E, e

F, f

G, g

=

>

;

<

:

8

9

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

/

0

-

•

,

*

+

*

*

*

*

*

*

CONVERTS

TO

BAUDOT (ITA2)

OUTPUT

BLANK

BLANK

, (FIGS. N)

- (FIGS. A)

• (FIGS. M)

/ (FIGS. X)

0 (FIGS. P)

1 (FIGS. Q)

2 (FIGS. W)

3 (FIGS. E)

4 (FIGS. R)

5 (FIGS. T)

6 (FIGS. Y)

7 (FIGS. U)

8 (FIGS. I)

9 (FIGS. O)

: (FIGS. C)

; (FIGS. V)

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

C

D

E

? (FIGS. B)

BLANK

A

B

F

G

*Denotes inhibit of LETTERS-FIGURES shifting circuitry.

FIGS. -- FIGURES

9-14

ASCII (ITAS)

INPUT

}

|

`

{

`

]

^

-

DEL

V, v

W, w

X, x

\

[

Y, y

Z, z

O, o

P, p

Q, q

R, r

S, s

T, t

U, u

H, h

I, i

J, j

K, k

L, 1

M, m

N, n

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

CONVERTS

TO

(Underscore)

LETTERS

BAUDOT (ITA2)

OUTPUT

V

W

X

Y

Z

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

BLANK

LETTERS

R

S

T

U

O

P

Q

K

L

M

N

I

H

J

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Baudot to ASCII Conversion Table

BAUDOT (ITA2)

A through Z

BLANK

INPUT

LETTERS

FIGURES

CONVERTS

TO

:

CARRIAGE RETURN

LINE FEED

-

?

ASCII (ITA5)

OUTPUT

A through Z

(Upper Case)

NUL

Sets LETTERS flag in controller only

Sets FIGURES flag in controller only

SPACE SPACE

CARRIAGE RETURN

LINE FEED

- (FIGS. A)

? (FIGS. B)

: (FIGS. C)

FIGS. -- FIGURES

5. SET INTERFACE

General

The Tempest Model 40 Terminals have one basic type of electrical interface:

188C -- MIL STD 188C

Mark +6 Volts l+ Volt

Space -6 Volts +1 Volt

BAUDOT (ITA2) CONVERTS

INPUT TO

$ (FIGS. D)

' (FIGS. F)

& (FIGS. G)

# (FIGS. H)

' (FIGS. J)

( (FIGS. K)

) (FIGS. L)

• (FIGS. M)

, (FIGS. N)

BELL (FIGS. S)

; (FIGS. V)

/ (FIGS. X)

" (FIGS. Z)

1 through 9

ASCII (ITAS)

OUTPUT

)

(

#

‘

!

$

&

,

•

BEL

/

;

"

1 through 9

The interface also provides for customer input clocks for send data and receive data. These clocks must also conform to

NIL STD 188C signaling requirements (+6 V to -6 V excursion). Where: to + transition is start of bit; + to transition is middle of bit.

Two control leads are provided in the interface: a. Char to Send Input b. Receive Ready Input

+6 V Clear to Send

-6 V Stop

+6 V Ready

-6 V Not Ready

All input/outputs conform to the impedance and wave shaping requirements of MIL STD 188C.

9-15

TM 11-5815406-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

B. SET IDENTIFICATION (Cont

)

5. SET INTERFACE (Cont)

Options

Several options are available in the interface of the Tempest Model 40 Terminals. Some units are equipped with interface circuit cards to provide an inverted clear to-send output and inverted terminal ready.

a.

b.

Clear to Send

Receiver Ready

- 6 V Clear to Send

+ 6 V Stop

- 6 V Ready

+ 6 V Not Ready

Refer to Page 9-2,

B. SET IDENTIFICATION

for these terminals.

Circuit cards available for modifying interface:

EIA- Receiver (LEDD)

EIA Line Keyer

303184

303185

Neutral Receiver

Neutral Line Keyer

303182

303183

Signal. Control, and Clock Connections

Signal and controls connections are indicated below. Two conduit fittings are provided for separate cable access.

Signal and clock lines are MIL STD 188. Optional circuit cards are available for Electronics Industries Association (EIA)

Standard RS-232-C and neutral operation.

*Terminals used only with keyboard equipped sets.

NOTE:

Half-duplex strap must be removed when the 40C430/AAT/017 controller is used.

AC Power Connections

The set requires a 3-wire, single phase,

115 V ac +107., 60 Hz tO.5 Hz, unswitched power source. A conduit fitting is provided for cable access.

CAUTION:

DO NOT APPLY AC POWER UNTIL INSTALLATION IS COMPLETE AND READY FOR CHECKOUT.

9-16

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


The interface between the controller and KD or KDP operator console, and between the controller and printer, is a SSI interface. This is a special signaling system in which 18-bit "words" convey information to and from a device on two pairs of 2-conductor cables. In the KDP or ROP controller/printer interface, SSI control and data words are transferred from controller to printer, and SSI words defining the status of the printer are transferred from printer to controller. In the KD or KDP controller/operator console interface, SSI control words are transferred from controller to console, and SSI data and status words are transferred from console to controller.

KP Block Diagram

In the RO printer, the signal interchange between operator console and controller is in the form of switch contact closures and indicator signal voltages.

ROP Block Diagram

9-17

6. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


9-18

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


C. TESTING

1. GENERAL

All standard line checks should be performed before the initial on-line checkout of the Tempest Model 40 Set. If trouble analysis indicates a problem in the line, refer to the appropriate equipment support literature for the trouble analysis.

Before performing checkout procedures make sure that the set is connected to a properly grounded ac power source, all cards and cable connectors are fully seated, the lids are closed, the paper is installed, etc. The power switches should be turned on or off under the direction of the checkout or other procedures. The checkout should always be performed in the sequence given, since the trouble analysis is based on prior requirements being met. If the indicated response is not obtained in any step of a checkout procedure, repeat the step to make sure that the procedure has been performed correctly. If the results are still unsatisfactory, perform the indicated trouble analysis by going to the troubleshooting portion of the indicated part (example: PART 4 -DISPLAY MONITOR).

To quickly locate the appropriate operational checkout procedures for the Tempest Model 40 Set under test, refer to index.

Off-Line Checkout

Off-line checkout procedures are indicated for the various Tempest Model 40 Set configurations. In general, the off-line checkout procedure is to be successfully completed before conducting on-line checkouts. Off-line checkout procedures do not require connection to the line. Since off-line checkout procedures do not check the interface or send and receive capabilities, an on-line checkout is also required to completely test the Tempest Model 40 Sets.

On-Line Checkout

With the Tempest Model 40 Set appropriately interfaced to the system where it will be used, conduct a complete checkout of send and receive capabilities taking into account all option and feature variables. Check all operational modes in sending to or receiving from another station in the system.

Alternatively, a back-to-back configuration can be achieved locally via a special connection (see Page 9-36, 4. BACK-

TO-BACK CHECKOUT).

9-19

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

C.

TESTING (cont)

2. PROTECTIVE GROUND AND PEROPERATIONAL CHECKS

Protective Ground Checks

As part of standard repair shop procedure, all Tempest Model 40 Sets should be subjected to a protective ground check prior to operation to insure that there is no potential shock hazard.

Check that the following ground straps are present.

Grounding Strap Locations

Using an ohmmeter, check the resistance between the protective ground lug of the ac line cord and each unit frame in the set. Resistance should not be more than

0.5 ohms. Use R X I scale.

9-20

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


3. OFF-LINE CHECKOUT

Preliminary Checks

Before turning on any equipment, check the following: a. Are all circuit cards and cable connectors fully seated?

b. Are all fuses in place?

c. Are all cabinet lids and pedestal doors closed?

d. Do all printers have paper and ribbon properly installed?

e. Is the set connected to a properly grounded ac service?

f. Have the set options been installed and are they properly recorded?

Testing C400 Station

1. The first test to be performed is the self-test of the C400 logic cards.

2. The next test to perform is the local test.

3. Perform component operational check.

9-21

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. OFF-LINE CHECKOUT (Cont)

40C400 Self-Test Procedures

Refer to Pages 7-8 through 7-11,

Controller

Arrangement Forms.

For the self-test program to properly test the 410408 circuit card, the card must be programmed for the ITA5 code, isochronous mode with one stop bit (factory option).

1

STEP

2

3

4

PROCEDURE

Apply power to controller.

Depress and hold test switch.

Release test switch.

CORRECT

RESPONSE

All PSU voltage lamps lit. Run lamp lit

All pattern lamps light.

Refer to Controller Arrangement Form. If continue pattern exists depress continue switch.

ANALYSIS

40PSU103

410401,

410400,

40PSU103

Refer to Controller

Arrangement Form

If this is a KD or KDP, check monitor.

After 1-2 minutes, pattern lights blink sequentially. Pattern lamps should extinguish

(approximately 15 seconds).

The display pattern corresponding to 410433 circuit card used. Sample displays follow.-

410433 circuit card associated with monitor.

5 To return 40C400 to normal operating mode, push continue switch

Display Pattern for a 410433 D I/0 Circuit Card

Keyboard is unlocked. Cursor in home position

on monitor

9-22

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-O10/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Off-Line Checkout Procedures

Terminals

Keytop Layout


9-23

TM L1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


3. OFF-LINE CHECKOUT, Off-Line Checkout Procedures, Terminals (Cont)

NOTE:

When set is equipped with 40C430/ABD/025 controller, the REC lamp lights immediately when power is turned on. When set is equipped with 40C430/AAT/017 controller, the LOCAL lamp lights immediately when power is turned on.

STEP

1

2 a.

b.

PROCEDURE

Depress Keys

A

CONTROL and A (SOH)

C

CONTROL and C (ETX)

D

CONTROL and D. (EOT)

G

CONTROL and G (BEL)

F

CONTROL and ACK

E

CONTROL and E (ENQ)

B

CONTROL and B (STX)

Function

SEND

SEND

REC

REC

LOCAL

LOCAL

S/R

S/R

INTRPT

INTRPT

FORM SEND

FORM SEND

OPT II

OPT II

RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Depress RETURN and ESC P simultaneously with additional force, and then release.

TST CLEAR lamp lights(brightly) momentarily indicating power supply to opcon

PART 6 POWER

SUPPLY, wiring,

TST CLEAR lamp lights(brightly) and remains lit indicating loop-back test mode is activated.

PART 5 OPCON

Depress RETURN and simultaneously with additional force, and then release

NOTE: Occasionally the operational lamps may flash on and then off, or alarm bell may sound when loopback test mode is activated.

If this occurs, clear the test by depressing

RETURN and ESC P beyond their normal stop, and re-enter test mode.

Place opcon into the caps mode by depressing and latching

CAPS LOCK.


Lamp

Condition

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

9-24

STEP PROCEDURE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

2b.

(Cont)

J

NEW

O

CONTROL and O (SI)

N

CONTROL and N (SO)

M

RETURN

L

CONTROL and L (FF)

K

CONTROL and K (VT)

I

TAB

H

PRINT ON LINE

PRINT ON LINE

PRINT LOCAL

PRINT LOCAL

PARITY ERROR

PARITY ERROR

TERM READY

TERM READY

KBD OVRN

KBD OVRN

CLEAR TO SEND

CLEAR TO SEND

HIGH LIGHT

HIGH LIGHT

FORM ENTER

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON c.

3

Depress Return and ESC P simultaneously with additional force, and then release.

TST CLEAR 1 lamp extinguishes and return opcon to normal operating mode.

Home the cursor and depress LOCAL.

Then depress each key on the keyboard portion of opcon four or five times.

On KD’s and KDPs check monitor for character; on KP’s check printer

PART 5

OPCON

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Checkout Procedures, Terminals (Cons)

STEP

4

5

PROCEDURE RESULTS

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

Disengage CAPS LOCK by depressing it again momentarily.

Again depress each key on keyboard portion of opcon four or five times

Alpha characters described in Step 3 are displayed in lower case (de, abcdef, etc) (if

410433 circuit card is driving monitor) or printer is an AB arrangement. On AA printer arrangements lower case characters will be printed as upper case.

PART 5 - OPCON.

Depress left SHIFT together with each nonalpha key (ie,!#$, ect) on keyboard portion of apron.

6

7

. Depress right SHIFT together with one of the keys depressed in Step

The character on upper portion of depressed key is displayed

KD OR KDP ONLY

Depress left CONTROL together with keys containing control characters four or five times each.

NOTE

: On terminals equipped with 40C430/ M AAT/017 controller, ENQ, US,

SYN, ACK, EOT, DLE and NAK cannot be generated from the opcon.

9-26

STEP

8

9

10

TM 11-5815-606-34/NA VELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


TROUBLE

ANALYSIS PROCEDURE

Depress right CONTROL together with one of the keys depressed in

Step 7.

RESULTS

The corresponding control character is displayed

Depress and SPACE with additional force than is normally required.


STEPS 10 THROUGH 58 PERTAIN TO KD AND KDP TERMINAIS ONLY.

Depress HOME. Then in sequence depress momentartly with more force than normally required, each cursor movement key shown.

PART 5

OPCON

PART 7

CONTROLLER

LOGIC

PART 4 -

DISPLAY

MONITOR

11

12

13

14

Home the cursor and type alpha characters A through J on the display. Place the cursor over character E and depress CHAR

INSERT momentarily; then depress it fully releasing it after characters atop moving

ABCDEFGHIJ

ABCDEFGHIJ

ABCD FGHJ

ABCD EFGHIJ

Depress CHAR DLETE momentartly; then depress it fully -

Depress LINE INSRT once.

Depress LINE DLETE once; then depress CLEAR

ABCD EFGHIJ

ABCD EFGHIJ

ABCD E FGHIJ

ABCD F GHIJ

ABCD G HIJ



9-27

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



TROUBLE

ANALYSIS STEP

15

PROCEDURE

Place the cursor away from home position and depress

TAB

16 Place the cursor away from home position and depress

TAB.

Depress BDMe and numeric 1.

17

.

18 Depress NEW LINE 24 times.

RESULTS




19

.

20

21

22

23

24

25

Type a numeric 2 and depress

NEW LINE 24 times

Type a numeric 3.

Depress HDME.

Depress SEGHT ADV.




Numeric 1 is displayed in home position

Cursor moves down display, displaying new line character at 1st position of each line. On the 24th depression of NEW LINE, the numeric 1 will disappear from display.








9-28

STEP

26

27 then fully.

PROCEDURE


Depress SCROL DOWN once,

28 Depress SEGMT ADV twice.

29 Position cursor by means of the the last line of display.

to next to

Type some Us on this line.


31

32

33

34

.

.

35

36


Home cursor and depress TAB

. CLEAR.

Depress HIGH LIGHT.

Enter a full line of *s at top of display

Depress HIGH LIGHT again.

Depress LINE INSRT.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

.

RESULTS

The 2, then the 3 move up the display. Scrolling stops when the 3 reaches top of display.

The 3 moves down one line, then moves down continuously and disappears as the 2 appears at top of display.

Scrolling continues until the 1 appears at top of display.

First the 2 then the 3 appear at top of display.

Cursor moves under direction of cursor control key. Us are displayed.

The Us move to last line of display. The cursor moves to the 1st character position of the line next to last line of display.


All tab marks (on all segments) are cleared

HIGH LIGHT lamp lights.

*s are displayed as intensified

Alarm sounds at 73rd and

80th character positions


HIGH LIGHT lamp extinguishes.

Cursor moves to left margin, and highlighted *s move down one line.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

C. TESTING (Cont

)


STEP

37

38

.

PROCEDURE

Depress FORM ENTER.

Enter a full line of Us at top of display

RESULTS

FORM ENTER lamp lights.

Us are displayed at halfintensity (protected).

Alarm sounds at 73rd and



39 Depress LINE INSRT.

Cursor moves to left margin and lines of *s and Us both move down one position.

Cursor remains in home position.

40

41

42

Depress CLEAR.

Depress FORM ENTER.

Screen is cleared.

FORM ENTER lamp extinguishes.

Enter message in lines 1 Message appears as shown on through 9 of display. (Pro-

Page 9-31. (To observe protected spaces, increase

cedure is indicated on monitor brightness and note

Page 9-31.)

that all protected data has darker background than unprotected data.)

TROUBIE

ANALYSIS

43

44

45

Depress CHAR INSRT fully Word QUICK in line 1 moves to and hold until movement tab column and stops. No other characters affected stops.

Depress CHAR DLETE twice.

Word QUICK in line 1 moves two positions left. No other characters affected.

Depress TAB.

Cursor moves to tab column.

Tab symbol ( ) appears at original position of cursor.

All characters passed over by cursor are erased from display.

9-30

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


NOTE:

Depress each key once unless number of depressions is indicated in parentheses.

LINE 2 LINE 3 LINE 1

Type QUICK

Depress SPACE (5)

Depress TAB SET

Type UNPROTECTED

Depress SPACE (2)

Depress FORM ENTER

Type PROTECTED

Depress FORM ENTER

Depress SPACE (8)

Depress FORM ENTER

Depress NEW LINE

Depress FORM ENTER

LINES 4 AND 5

Type QUICK

Depress FORM ENTER

Depress SPACE (4)

Type UNPROTECTED

Depress SPACE (2)

Depress FORM ENTER

Type PROTECTED

Depress FORM ENTER

Depress SPACE (7)

Depress FORM ENTER

Depress NEW LINE

Type INSERT

Depress SPACE until cursor is one character to the left of new line symbol in line 2.

Depress FORM ENTER

Depress NEW LINE

Depress FORM ENTER

Depress Cursor

Right ( ) until cursor is under new line symbol.

Depress NEW LINE

(Repeat for line 5)

LINE 8

Depress CURSR RETRN

Depress Cursor

Down ( ) twice.

Depress HOME

LINE 6

Depress Cursor

Right ( -) until cursor is at about

23rd character position.

Depress FORM ENTER

Depress NEW LINE

Depress FORM ENTER

LINE 9

Depress FORM ENTER

Type PROTECTED

Depress FORM ENTER

LINE 7

Type MDDEL

Depress SPACE

Type 40

9-31

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

C. TESTING (Cont

)


TROUBLE

ANALYSIS STEP

46

PROCEDURE

Depress CHAR INSRT fully and hold until movement stops.

47

48

49

50

51

52

Depress CHAR DLETE fully and hold until movement stops.

Depress TAB.

Depress Space once, then depress it fully.

Depress TAB.

Depress CURSR TAB three times.

Depress LINE INSRT three times.

RESULTS

Word UNPROTECTED moves two positions to right, stopping when it reaches word PRO

TECTED. No other characters affected.

Word UNPROTECTED is moved left and completely erased

No other characters affected

Cursor moves to second character position after word

PROTECTED.

Tab symbol appears at original position of cursor.

Cursor moves to character position preceding protected new line symbol.

Alarm sounds continuously, and cursor dbes not advance beyond this position.

Cursor moves to second space after protected word QUICK in line 2.

Cursor moves to tab mark on first depression

Cursor moves to the second space following word PRO-

TECTED on second depression.

Cursor moves to beginning of word INSERT in line 3 on third depression.

No characters altered in any way.

Word INSERT moves down two lines and stops. Rest of display does not change.

9-32

56

57

.

58

STEP

53

54

55

.

PROCEDURE

Position cursor over M in word MODEL, then depress

LINE INSRT twice.

Move cursor over P at beginning of line 9, and type some miscellaneous characters.

character space with each key depression.)

Depress HOME, CLEAR, then

TAB CLEAR

Depress FORM ENTER.

Depress CLEAR.

Depress FORM ENTER.

Printer (ROP, KP and KDP)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


TROUBLE

ANALYSIS RESULTS

Words MDDEL 40 move down one position and stop

Alarm sounds each time a key is depressed. (No characters can overwrite a protected character. Cursor moves one

Cursor goes to home position.

All unprotected characters and tab columns are cleared.

Protected characters remain on display.

FORM ENTER lamp lights.

All characters are cleared from display

FORM ENTER lamp extinguishes

132-Column Tractor Feed

9-33

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-30G-1

359


3. OFF-LINE CHECKOUT, Off-Line Checkout Procedures, Printer (ROP, KP and KDP)

(Cont)

STEP

1

PROCEDURE

Momentarily depress PAPER button (red) on printer cabinet cover.

RESULTS

Paper feeds out as long as button is depressed.

2 TRACTOR FEED PRINTER

ONLY

Depress and release FORM

ADVANCE button (black) on printer cabinet cover.

Paper feeds out until first line of next form is reached, then stops.

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

PART 2 or

3 PRINTER

3

4

5

6

Unlatch and raise printer cabinet cover.

Raise cover interlock switch to maintenance position.

Set test switch to ON, allow printer to print several lines, then turn test switch

OFF.

FRICTION FEED PRINTER

Lift paper roll to simulate a paper alarm. Lower paper roll, guide paper through window, and close cabinet cover.

TRACTOR FEED PRINTER

Tear off next form under pedestal top, then depress

PAPER button on printer cabinet cover until last form passes through printer.

Reload forms, guide first form through window, and close cabinet cover.

TERM READY lamp extinguishes.

Printer turns on and prints font identification symbol

A

OR

A

A B

repeatedly until switch is turned off.

LOW PAPER lamp lights.

LOW PAPER lamp extinguishes.

PAPER lamp lights.

PAPER lamp extinguishes.

9-34

STEP

7

PROCEDURE

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


RESULTS

ROP SET ONLY

PRINT LOCAL lamp lights.

Place a line of Es on top and bottom lines of display.

Cursor moves through line of Es at top of display, returns to left, and moves through lines of spaces (blank lines).

Depress PRINT LOCAL and while cursor is moving through third or fourth line depress

PRINT LOCAL again.

Printer prints line of Es.

NOTE 1: Printing may occur in all 80 character positions or some Es may be carried over to next line, depending on

Option 17.

Printer line feeds but does not print for each line of spaces.

When PRINT LOCAL is depressed again,

PRINT LOCAL lamp extinguishes and printer stops.

NOTE 2: Printer may or may not feed out 16 lines of paper before turning off, depending on Option 18.

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

8 ROP SET ONLY

Depress TEST key.

TEST key locks in down position and lights.

TERM READY lamp extinguishes.

Printer starts printing U*U* pattern if ITA5 code was programmed or RYRY pattern if

ITA2 code was programmed.

Printer will continue to print pattern until

TEST key is depressed again.

9-35

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

C. TESTING (Cont)

3. OFF-LINE CHECKOUT, Off-Line Checkout Procedures, Printer (ROP, KP and KDP) (Cont)

RESULTS STEP

9

PROCEDURE

Depress TEST key again.

TEST key unlatches, lamp extinguishes.

Printer stops printing and turns off.

TERN READY lamp lights.

TROUBLE

ANALYSIS

4. BACK-TO-BACK CHECKROUT

If a system is not available for on-line checkout of the set, it is desirable to use a back-to-back checkout of the set.

When using the back-to-back checkout procedure, a separate functional KDP Set (referred to as test set) is required.

The test set and the unit under test must be optioned for the same type of operation (i.e., 8-level code, asynchronous

operation, etc). Refer to Page 9-36, Connections for Back-to-Back Checkout for connections between the test set and

the set under test. The cabling between the sets must be supplied locally.

NOTE: If isochronous mode is to be tested, an external 188C bit clock must also be provided.

Connections for Back-to-Back Checkout

NOTE: External clock input required when testing in isochronous mode.

9-36

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Back-to-Back Checkout Procedure

The back-to-back checkout consists of preparing a message on the test set and sending it to the set under test. If the set under test has a send capability, a message should be sent from the set under test to the test set. Should troubles arise refer to Part 8, Interface Troubleshooting.

To check out terminal ready output and clear to send input of the set under test perform the following procedures.

STEP

1

2

PROCEDURE

Depress TERM READY keytop on test set.

Depress TERM READY keytop on test set again.

3

4

Depress TERM READY keytop on set under test.

Depress TERM READY keytop on set under test again.

RESULTS

TERM READY lamp on test set extinguishes, CLEAR TO SEND lamp on set under test lights.

TERM READY lamp on test set lights,

CLEAR TO SEND lamp on set under test extinguishes.

TERM READY lamp on set under test extinguishes, CLEAR TO SEND lampoon test set lights.

TERM READY lamp on set under test lights, CLEAR TO SEND lamp on test set extinguishes.

D. TROUBLESHOOTING

1. GENERAL

To use the troubleshooting information, always start with Analysis Question 1 and follow the indicated procedure to the directive which specifies proceeding to the component troubleshooting. Then follow the specific component troubleshooting indicated (i.e., power supply, display monitor, opcon, etc) starting with Question 1 to isolate and correct the trouble by replacing the indicated defective component.

If replacement of the part or subcomponent indicated in the component troubleshooting does not correct the trouble, replace the next higher order of component (i.e., fuse, power distribution assembly, display monitor, or entire terminal).

When installing a replacement component, make certain that all options (if present) in this component are implemented for proper set operation.

Where more than one component is specified for replacement, they should be substituted one at a time in the order specified. The original component should be replaced if the trouble is not corrected before making the next indicated substitution.

9-37

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


1. GENERAL (Cont)

Once the trouble has been corrected, the terminal should be checked out to be sure that it is performing properly. Refer

to Page 9-21, 3. OFF-LINE CHECKOUT.

The following caution procedures must be observed when troubleshooting a Tempest Model 40 Set.

CAUTION 1: TURN OFF ALL POWER OR SIGNAL SOURCES BEFORE REDOVING OR REPLACING ANY

COMPONENT.

CAUTION 2: TO AVOID POSSIBLE INTERNAL DAMAGE TO CIRCUITRY, WEAR A 346392 STATIC DISCHARGE

STRAP CONNECTED TO GROUND TO ALIOW STATIC DISCHARGE BEFORE HANDLING CIRCUIT CARDS FOR

REM)VAL OR REPLACEMENT. AVOID TOUCHING CIRCUIT LANDS OR COMPONENTS AS MUCH AS POSSIBLE.

To locate components, circuit cards, connectors, test switches, indicator lamps and other elements indicated in the troubleshooting information, refer to appropriate unit parts.

For wire color codes, cable, connector, and other wiring indicated for continuity checks etc, in troubleshooting, refer to wiring diagrams in applicable wiring diagram packages.

The following test equipment is required for troubleshooting the components.

•

Volt-Ohm-Milliameter, Triplett Model 630 APL or equivalent

•

Oscilloscope, Tektronic Model 7904 e/w:



2. SET ANALYSIS

ANALYSIS QUESTION

1. Does set have a display monitor?

"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 2.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 17.

9-38

ANALYSIS QUESTION

2. Does LOCAL lamp on opcon light when power is turned on?

(On sets with 40C430/AAT/017 controller.)

Does REC lamp on opcon light when power is turned on? (On sets with 40C430/ABD/025 controller.)

3. Do fans turn when power is turned on?

Go to 4.

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 5.

"NO" RESPONSE

Go to 3.

DIRECTIVE

Check ac to fan.

Refer to wiring diagram.

Refer to PART 7 -- CONTROL-

LER LOGIC.

Power cable connected.

Power switch on.

AC present at fan assembly connector.

Go to PART 6 -- POWER

SUPPLY.

4. Are all three LED indicators in power supply on?

5. Is 15 red DRIVE lamp (in display monitor) on?

6. Is I7 red PILOT lamp (next to fuse on power distribution assembly in display monitor) on?

7. With monitor OFF/ON control switch ON (CCW) and operator brightness control to full intensity (CCW) is raster visible?

8. Is I6 HIGH VOLTAGE lamp in display monitor on?

Go to PART 5 --

OPCON.

Go to PART 7 --

CONTROLLER LOGIC.

Go to 6.

Go to 7.

Go to 9.

Check Master

Brightness adjust-

ment (Page 4-63).

Go to 9.

9-39

Go to PART 4 -- DISPLAY

MONITOR.


MONITOR.

Go to 8.


MONITOR.

2. SET ANALYSIS (Cont)

ANALYSIS QUISTION

9. Is cursor displayed on monitor?

10. In local mode, can data

(including editing func-

tions) be inputed from the

opcon to display monitor

on all segments?

11. Are characters displayed

on display monitor dis-

torted?

12. Do characters displayed

on display monitor cor-

respond to those

generated from opcon?

13. Does set have a printer?

14. Does printer respond pro-

perly when the PRINT LOCAL

key is depressed?

15. Does type carrier symbol

( - or ) or (=-_ or iA)

print in every column when

printer TS9 test switch is

on and printer cover is

closed or TS5 interlock

switch is in maintenance

position?

16. Does set perform properly

on-line?

17. Does set have a full

opcon and printer?

18. Does REC lamp light when

power is turned on?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


“YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 10.

Go to 11.

'"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE


MONITOR.

Go to PART 7 -- CONTROLLER

LOGIC.

Go to PART 5 -- OPCON.


MONITOR.


LOGIC.

Go to 12.

Go to PART 4 --

DISPLAY MONITOR.

Go to PART 7 --

CONTROLLER LOGIC.

Go to 13.

Go to 14.

Go to 16.

Go to 16.


LOGIC.


Go to 16.

Go to 15.

Go to PART 2 -- 80-COLUMN

PRINTERS or PART 3 -- 132-

COLUMN PRINTER.

Place in service.

Go to 18.

Go to 21.

9-40


LOGIC.

Go to 29.

Go to 19.

ANALYSIS QUESTION



21. Depress LOCAL key. Does

REC lamp extinguish and

LOCAL lamp light?

22. Do characters generated on opcon appear on printer?

NOTE: Control characters and editing key function will have no effect on printer.


( -: or or )r (j-: or m-) print in every column when printer TS9 test switch is on and printer cover is closed or TS5 interlock switch is in maintenance position?

24. Depress SEND key. Does

LOCAL lamp extinguish and

SEND and REC lamps light?

25. Is CLEAR TO SEND lamp on?

26. Is clear-to-send input on?

(+6 V on terminal board

TB102 of interface assembly.)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


'"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 20.

Go to PART 7 --

CONTROLLER LOGIC.

Go to 22.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Check ac to fan.

Refer to wiring diagrams.


LER LOGIC.

Controller power cable connected.

Power switch on.


Go to PART 6 -- PCWER

SUPPLY.



LOGIC.

Go to 24. Go to 23.

Go to PART 5 --

OPCON.

Go to PART 7 --

CONTROLLER LOGIC.

Go to 25.

LOGIC.

Go to 26.

Go to PART 8 --

INTERFACE.

Go to PART 2 -- 80-COL-

UMN PRINTERS or PART 3 --

132-COLUMN PRINTER.



Go to 28.

System must turn on CTS or remove card in card connector Z4 of interface.

Go to 27.

9-41

2. SET ANALYSIS (Cont)

ANALYSIS QUESTION

27. Is half-duplex strap installed in interface?

(Strap between TBLO1, terminals 2 and 3 in interface.)

28. In send mode, do characters generated on opcon appear on printer?

29. Does TERM READY lamp light when power is turned on with paper in printer and printer cover closed?


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to 28.

Place in service.

LOGIC.

Go to 32.

'"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

If system permits, temporarily add strap.

Go to 28.


Go to PART 8 -- INTERFACE.

Go to 30.

Go to 31. Check ac to fan.

Refer to wiring diagrams.


LER LOGIC.

Power cable connector.

Power switch on.


Go to PART 6 -- POWER

SUPPLY.


32. Depress TEST key. Does

TERM READY lamp extinguish,

TEST key latch down and lamp light, and printer start printing U*U*, if

ASCII or RYRY, if Baudot?

Go to PART 5 --

OPCON.

Go to PART 7 --

CONTROLLER LOGIC.

Go to 34.

9-42

Go to 33.

ANALYSIS QUESTION


( or _:-or r (---, -or a-) print in every column when printer TS9 test switch is on and printer cover is closed or TS5 interlock switch is in maintenance position?

34. Depress TEST key again.

Does TEST key release,

TEST extinguish, and TERM

READY lamp light?

35. Does set receive on-line signals correctly?

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


"YES" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to PART 7 --

CONTROLLER LOGIC.

Go to 35.

Place in service.

"NO" RESPONSE

DIRECTIVE

Go to PART 2 -- 80-COLUMN

PRINTERS or PART 3 -- 132-

COLUMN PRINTER.


LOGIC.


LOGIC.

Go to PART 8 -- INTERFACE.

E. CABLE INTERCONNECTION

1. CABLING FOR ROP (80 AND 132 COLUMN)

9-43

2.

CABLING FOR KP

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

E. CABLE INTERCONNECTION (Cont)

3.

CABLING FOR KD

9-44

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4. CABLING FOR KDP -- TRACTOR FEED PRINTER

Cables Required

5. CABLING FOR KDP -- FRICTION FEED PRINTER

9-45/(9-46 Blank)

315M

2836

6800

8449

22746

41385

55089

70885

73404

74707

76296

76804

76966

78596

78824

80403

82463

82861

84226

87402

90684

91577

97462

101386

110438

111342

114215

116783

118748

This part is a combination of the part numbers contained in the individual component parts lists located at the end of

Parts 2 through 8. All part numbers are included in this listing except those which are considered general hardware (i.e.

screws, washers, nuts, retaining rings, etc). See individual component parts lists for part numbers, descriptions and page numbers of general hardware.

NOTE: When ordering replaceable components, unless otherwise specified, prefix each part number with the letters "TP"

(i.e., TP410055).

PART NO.


PART NO.


120166

121409

123973

124223

124244

124681

125124

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART 10 -- MASTER COMPONENT PARTS LIST

Coil, Magnet 2-280, 3-107

Spring 2-286, 287, 3-109

Screw, 6-40 Shoulder 5-82

Spacer, .094" Thk 2-276, 285,

8-58

Spring 2-283

Spring 2-289, 3-110

Spring 2-263, 3-84, 107

Washer, Spring 2-289, 3-110

Wrench, Tommy 2-253

Spring 4-100

Spring 4-84, 94

Spring 2-290, 3-111

Setscrew, 10-32 2-274, 275,

3-104

Washer, Friction 2-282

Spring 2-297, 3-113

Screw, Shoulder 2-280, 3-107

Spring 2-290, 3-111

Spring 2-288

Spring 4-91

Spring 2-282, 305

Spacer 3-104

Spring 2-284


Spring 2-280, 3-107

Spring 2-265, 278, 3-90, 106

Spring 2-275, 277, 3-104, 105

Post, Spring 2-283

Holder, Fuse 8-82

Screw, 6-32 Self-Tapping

2-293

Fuse, 2 Amp 2-291

Washer, Insulating 2-271

Spring 2-278, 3-106

Screw 6-40 Shoulder 2-288

Washer, Felt 2-305

Setscrew, 6-40 2-239, 241, 274,

275, 3-92


125239

125258

125268

129919

138031

138034

140306

143306

147877

150029

150241

150904

151395

151565

151634

151827

151939

152426

152445

152760

153484

153803

154047

154156

154249

154697

155752

156833

160396

163536

164427

173907

173979

177113

178306

180675

10-1

Spring, Compression 8-58

Spring 5-73

Spring 2-286, 287, 3-109

Fuse, SL-BL 4 Amp 2-293

Bushing, Insulating 2-288

Plate, Clamp 2-297, 3-113

Fuse 3-112

Fuse, SL-BL 1 Amp 2-293, 3-88

Terminal, Receptacle Type 3-112

Wick, Felt 2-280, 3-107

Spring 2-280, 3-107

Block, Right Paper Spindle

2-288

Spring 2-258, 273

Bushing, Shoulder 2-297, 3-113

Bearing, Ball 2-276, 277, 3-105

Strap, Terminal 8-81

Grommet, Rubber 2-292

Nut, 6-40 Self-Locking 8-82


Stud 8-83

Screw, 6-32 Special 2-291, 292

Jumper, 5" Slate 2-291

Post, Spring 2-281, 3-108

Grommet, Rubber 4-98

Screw, No. 8B Self-Tapping

8-65, 66, 68

Grommet, Rubber 2-293, 3-112

Sleeve, 5/64 ID x 1/2" Lg

Insulating 8-82

Drum Assembly, Clutch 2-280,

3-107

Pliers, Retaining Ring 2-243

Spacer, .562" Thk 2-292

Clip, Capacitor 2-291, 293

Spacer 3-104

Head, Hammer 16B 2-283

Insulator 2-293, 294, 3-88, 112

Relay, Power 2-264, 291, 292, 293

Screw, #6 Self-Tapping 6-52, 53

PART NO.

180714

181266

181523

181707

181721

181842

181999

182182

182523

182648

182726

185677

186749

186823

188230

188483

192269

192557

194873

194956

195245

195272

196740 thru

196774

196778

300124

300214

305355

306085

310646

310751

310752

311763

312042

312315

312829

312918


Screw, #6 Self-Tapping 4-92,

6-54

Bushing, Insulator 3-88

Spring 4-85

Nut, Speed 4-92

Connector, 12 Pt Plug Type

4-92

Nameplate 2-291

Insulator 2-293

Holder, Fuse 2-291, 293, 3-88,

112

Clamp, 1-3/8" ID Mounting

2-292, 8-82


Type 4-93, 94


8-69


3-112, 4-93, 94

Bolt w/Cap 8-76

Screw, 8-32 Shoulder 8-64, 65,

74

Spring, Compression 2-275,

3-104

Arm, Stop 8-63

Nut, Speed 6-46

Grommet, Rubber 8-67, 75

Disc, 6 Stop Adjusting 2-280,

3-107

Spring 2-280, 3-107

Sleeve, 1/2 ID x 1-1/2" Lg

Insulating 8-82


Pallet, Type 2-303

Pallet, Type 2-303

Switch 8-59

Filter 7-37

Terminal 6-58

Board, Terminal 6-56

Diode 8-82

Insulator, Terminal Block

8-81

Block, Terminal 8-81

Mount, Vibration 8-66, 73

Connector, 4 Pt Plug 6-51

Thumbscrew, '6-40 2-276

Strap, 2-1/2" Braided 8-50

Strap 3-108

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

PART 10 -- MASTER COMPONENT PARTS LIST (Cont)

PART NO.

315946

318630

318821

318822

318835

318845

320119

320416

320418

320420

320421

323846

324142

324148

324612

325163

325218

325938

325959

325961

326270

326553

326594

327444

327954

328282

328378

328678

328793

330299

332167

332378

332379

332860

333588

334187

334233

334422

335123

10-2


Connector, 6 Pt Receptacle 5-76

Jumper, 6-1/8" Braided 8-77

Bushing, Insulating 2-293, 294,

3-112

Transistor 4-90, 96

Transistor 2-293, 294, 3-79, 88,

112

Jumper 2-270, 279, 291, 4-91

Spacer, .497" Thk 8-63

Terminal, Ring Type 3-112

Terminal, Ring Type 2-293,

3-88, 100, 112



Pad, Transistor Mounting 6-57

Connector, 3 Pt Plug 7-37,

8-53, 59

Label 8-79

Fan 7-32, 38


5-77, 78

Washer, Insulating 2-293, 294,

3-112

Connector, 3/4" 90 Degree 8-77

Insulator, Terminal Block 8-81

Block, Terminal 8-81

Connector, 15 Pt Circuit Card

8-82

Spacer 5-77, 78

Transistor 8-82

Capacitor, 2 MFD 8-59, 83

Retainer, Split Ring 4-96,

6-50, 54

Fan 2-239, 241, 274, 275, 3-92

Washer, Insulating 8-82

Jumper w/Terminal 7-33

Capacitor, .001 MFD 4r85, 86,

8-82

Clip, Speed 2-288

Clamp 2-276, 277, 3-105

Shoe, Secondary Clutch 2-280,

3-107

Shoe, Primary Clutch 2-280,

3-107

Bumper 8-76

Lamp, 28 V Miniature 8-68

Inductor 8-59, 83

Bar, Pry 2-280, 3-107

Bushing, Shoulder 8-82

Switch, Pushbutton 8-68

PART NO.

336021

336027

336810

337871

340770

340777

341097

341502

341507

341522

341523

341526

341527

341546

338538

338539

338727

338728

340269

340701

340711

340720

340721

340722

340730

340731

340762

340764

341557

341558

341559

341561

341562

341568

341569

341570

341577

341578

341579

341580

341616

341621

341630

341647

341648

341649


Transformer 8-83

Capacitor, 2500 MFD 8-82

Plate, Identification 3-105,

5-75

Plate, Identification 3-105,

5-75

Disc w/Post 2-280, 3-107

Arm, Trip 2-280, 3-107

Isolator, Bushing 2-271


Clip, Fuse 6-56

Keytop 5-82

Support 6-45, 46

Keyswitch, Basic 5-72

Keyswitch, Repeat 5-72

Keyswitch, Latching 5-72

Channel 5-72

Channel 5-82

Housing 5-72

Spring., Compression 5-72

Guide 5-72

Bumper 5-72

Keyswitch, Combination 5-72

Tube, Cathode Ray 4-69

Cable Assembly 4-72, 92

Choke 4-94

Bracket 4-92

Socket Assembly 4-72, 96


Fastener, Drive 4-71, 87, 88,

89, 90, 92, 96, 100

Wheel 4-87, 93, 94

Potentiometer 4-87., 93, 94

Cable Assembly 4-93

Retainer, Spring 4-87, 93, 94

Container 4-87, 93, 94

Transistor 4-90, 96

Transistor 4-90, 96

Transistor 4-90, 98

Socket, Fuse 4-92

Fuse 4-83, 92

Fastener 4-96

Support, Circuit Card 4-96

Insulator 4-92

Cover 4-90, 96



2-292, 3-100, 112, 7-37, 8-53,

60, 68, 70


2-292, 3-100, 112, 4-95, 5-82,

8-60, 70

Connector 2-271, 3-100, 112,

4-95, 8-70

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

TEMPEST M40 SHOP-MANUAL 359

PART NO.


341651

341674

341683

341684

341685

341690

341691

341696

341698

341704

341705

341711

341715

341716

341717

341730

341791

341795

346257

346260

346261 thru

346264

346270

346271

346291

346311

346352

346392

341819

343582

344091

346124 thru

346127

346212 thru

346215

346241

346251

400001

400013

400019

400021

400030

400031

10-3

Stud 4-96, 6-43, 54


3-112, 4-93

Socket, Fuse 4-92

Lamp Assembly, Neon 4-92

Strap 4-92

Transformer 4-92


2-271, 3-112, 8-53, 68, 69


4-92

Yoke Assembly 4-69


3-100, 108, 112

Terminal, Plug Type 3-112

Clamp, Cable 4-94

Label 4-92

Latch 4-91


Screw, 6-40 Shoulder 4-84, 99

Transformer 4-92

Distribution Assembly, Power

4-70, 83


Jumper 3-100, 104, 112

Screen 7-32, 38

Keytop 5-82

Keytop 5-82

Insulator 5-81, 82

Fastener 3-108

Extractor, Keyswitch 5-70, 81

Extractor, Keytop 5-68

Sink, Heat 5-76

Post 5-77, 78

Sink, Heat 5-76

Spacer 5-82

Bumper 5-77, 78

Connector, 40 Pt 3-112

Strap, Static Discharge 2-232,

261, 7-27

Head Assembly, Print 2-230, 245,

259, 266, 272, 3-91

Casting w/Magnet, Center 2-272

Spring 2-258, 272, 3-102

Bank Assembly, Interposer

2-253, 254, 272

Upstop 2-272

Upstop 3-102

PART NO.

400033

400034

400039

400043

400062

400063

400065

400075

400079

400081

400090

400093

400098

400101

400112

400115

400116

400121

400127

400136

400138

400141

400147

400150

400157

400180

400197

400198

400201

400204

400207

400209

400211

400213

400221

400226

400227

400231

400270

400277

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Shim 2-272

Shim 3-102

Spacer 2-278, 3-106

Shaft Assembly, Impeller

2-255, 272

Collar 2-278, 3-106

Nut, Adjusting 2-278, 3-106

Gear, 24T 2-278, 3-106

Ring, Retainer 2-278, 3-106

Retainer 2-278, 3-106

Bank Assembly, Armature

2-249, 250, 251, 252, 273

Armature 2-273

Rod 2-258

Screw, Shoulder 2-273

Bank Assembly, Hammer 2-246,

247, 248, 273

Bumper 2-257

Screw, Stop 2-272, 3-101

Rod, Wear 2-258, 273

Gear, 57T 2-276, 277, 3-105'

Rod 2-258

Lifter 2-247

Spring, Retaining 2-246, 247,

273

Spring, Return 2-256, 273

Backstop 2-256, 272

Shim 2-272

Strip, Antifreeze 2-250, 251,

273

Printer w/Base 2-270

Cover w/Tubing 2-282

Shield 2-274, 275

Casting Assembly, Front

2-229, 242, 243, 281, 282, 284

Casting w/Track 2-281

Bar, Backup 2-281

Screw, Adjusting 2-281, 285,

3-108

Guide, Top 2-281

Post 2-281

Sprocket Assembly, Idler

2-267, 275, 282, 3-94, 104

Spring 2-267, 282, 3-94, 104

Nut, Self-Locking 2-275, 282,

3-94, 104

Wick, Felt 2-281, 285

Motor, Induction 2-228, 239,

240, 274, 275, 291

Armature 3-103

PART NO.

400280

400282

400286

400290

400293

400299

400300

400304

400305

400307

400308

400309

400312

400313

400317

400401

400402

400403

400404

400405

400406

400420

400434

400435

400436

400441

400446

400447

400448

400449

400450

400451

400453

400454

400456

400457

400460

400461

10-4


Sprocket w/Flange 2-241, 270,

271, 274, 275, 3-104

Sprocket w/Flange 2-274, 275,

3-104

Plate, Motor Mounting 2-241,

274

Casting, Left 2-274

Screw, Shoulder 2-265, 274, 275,

276

Spring 3-103

Casting Assembly, Right 2-229,

243, 244, 276

Casting, Right 2-276

Shaft 2-276

Screw, 8-32 Special 2-276, 277,

3-105

Ring, Retainer 2-276, 277, 3-105

Hub, Gear 2-276, 277, 3-105

Washer, Spring 2-276, 277, 3-105

Nut, Adjusting 2-276, 277, 3-105

Post, Threaded 2-266, 274, 3-91

Base Assembly 2-270


Plate, Cover 2-294

Pan 2-279



Spring, Torsion 2-286, 287,

3-109

Spring, Torsion 2-284

Pin 2-276, 284

Lever, Release 2-284

Pulley and Gear w/Flanges

2-286, 287, 3-109

Disc, Friction 2-286, 287, 3-109

Arm, Left Sensing 2-286, 287,

3-109

Arm, Right Sensing 2-286, 287,

3-109

Post 2-276, 284

Roller, 2-275', 276, 277, 284, 286,

287, 3-109

Sprocket, 14T 2-276, 277, 3-105

Washer, Special 2-286, 287w- -..

3-109


Arm, Left 2-284

Post 2-276

Guide, Right Ribbon 2-282.:

Bracket, Left 2-284

PART NO.

400462

400463

400470

400472

400531

400532

400533

400535

400536

400537

400538

400540

400541

400542

400543

400544

400545

400546

400547

400548

400549

400551

400473

400474

400475

400482

400483

400486

400488

400505

400511

400516

400517

400518

400519

400520

400521

400523

400524

400525

400527

400528

400529

400530


Guide, Left Ribbon 2-282

Clamp, Bearing 2-276

Feed Assembly, Line 2-228,

237, 280

Clutch Assembly, Line Feed

2-280, 3-107

Post 2-280, 3-107

Sprocket, 72T 2-280, 3-107

Sprocket, 100T 2-280, 3-107

Bar, Line Feed 2-280

Bail w/Roller and Stud 2-280,

3-107

Post 2-280, 3-107

Bracket w/Core 2-280, 3-107

Bracket w/Bushing 2-292

Bracket, Mounting 2-281

Bearing, Sleeve 2-280, 3-107

Post 2-282, 283

Link, Pivot 2-282


Shaft, Paper Positioning

2-253, 282

Gear, .42T 2-282

Rod 2-283

Roller, Pressure 2-283

Shaft, Pressure Roller 2-283

Lever, Release 2-283

Lever, Adjusting 2-282

Support, Left Paper

Straightener 2-283

Support, Right Paper

Straightener 2-283

Shaft, Paper Straightener

2-283

Tubing 2-283

Guide, Paper 2-283

Guide, Paper 2-281

Guide, Paper 2-281

Bearing, Sleeve 2-282

Link, Paper Straightener

2-283

Container Assembly, Paper

2-228, 288

Knob 2-288

Retainer, Left Bearing 2-282

Retainer, Right Bearing 2-282

Cover, Circuit Card 2-288

Tray, Paper 2-288

Container, Paper 2-288

Support, Paper Tray 2-276

Post 2-283

Post 2-283

Support, Left Paper Tray

2-274

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART NO.


400552

400553

400554

400556

400560

400565

400569

400570

400571

400575

400578

400579

400580

400587

400588

400589

400598

400615

400628

400629

400630

400631

400632

400634

400635

400645

400650

400651

400652

400653

400654

400655

400656

400657

400658

400659

Spindle, Paper Roll 2-288

Block, Left 2-288, 305

Stud, Ball 2-288

Bumper, Flange 2-288, 3-100

Switch, Slide 2-295, 3-79, 88

Switch 2-288


Lever, Low Paper 2-288

Plate, Switch Adjusting 2-288

Switch Assembly 8-60

Switch Assembly 2-295

Cable Assembly 2-288

Cable Assembly, Main Printer

2-295

Bail w/Post, Left 2-283

Bail w/Post, Right 2-283

Rod, Guide 2-283


Sensor 2-295, 3-100


8-60

Type Carrier Arrangement, AB

2-299

Belt, Toothed 2-236, 262, 286, 287

Belt, Toothed 2-274, 275, 3-79,

85, 104

Belt, Toothed 2-280, 3-78, 85,

107

Belt, Toothed 2-274, 275, 3-84,

85

Belt, 245T 3-83, 109

Type Carrier Arrangement, AA

2-298

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 301, 304,

3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300, 301,

302, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300, 301,

302, 303, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300, 301,

302, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300, 301,

302, 303, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 301, 302,

304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 301, 302,

303, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300, 301,

302, 303, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300, 301,

302, 303, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300, 301,

304, 3-114, 115, 116

10-5

400681

400682 thru

400707

400708

400709

400710

400711

400712

400713

400719

400721 thru

400728

400731 thru

400737

400739

400740 thru

400743

400745

400746

PART NO.

400660 thru

400663

400664 thru

400674

400675 thru

400680

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



PART NO.

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300,

301, 302, 303, 304, 3-114, 115,

116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300,

301, 302, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300,

301, 302, 303, 304, 3-114, 115,

116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 301,

3-114, 115, 116

400747

400748

400750

400751

400752

400755

400758

400760

400762

400767

400768

400770 thru

400773

400774

400775


Pallet, Type 2-300

Pallet, Type 2-301

Pallet, Type 2-302

Pallet, Type 3-114

Pallet, Type 2-303

Pallet, Type 3-115

Pallet, Type 2-304

Pallet, Type 3-116

Pallet, Type 2-300

Pallet, Type 2-300

Pallet, Type 2-300

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300,

301, 302, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 301,

3-114, 115, 116

Pallet; Type 2-298, 299, 301,

302, 303, 3-114, 115

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 301,

3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300,

301, 304, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298, 299, 300,

301, 3-114, 115, 116

Pallet, Type 2-299, 302, 304,

3-114, 116

Pallet, Type 2-299, 302, 304,

3-114, 116

Pallet, Type 2-299, 302, 304,

3-114, 116

Pallet, Type 2-299, 302, 304,

3-114, 116

Pallet, Type 2-299, 302,

3-114, 116

Pallet, Type 2-298

Pallet, Type 2-299

400776

400777

400778

400779

400780

400789 thru

400803

400804

400805 thru

400812

400813

400814 thru

400819

400820 thru

400826

400850 thru

400856

400859

400861

400864 thru

400866

Pallet, Type 2-300

Type Carrier Arrangement, AC

2-300

Type Carrier Arrangement, AD

2-301

Type Carrier Arrangement, AF

2-302

Carrier, Type 3-78, 80

Type Carrier Arrangement, AH

2-303

Type Carrier Arrangement, AP

2-304

Carrier, Type 3-78, 80

Pallet, Type 2-301

Pallet, Type 2-301, 304 thru

Pallet, Type 2-301

Pallet, Type 2-301, 304

Pallet, Type 2-301

Pallet, Type 2-302, 304

Pallet, Type 2-303

Pallet, Type 2-303

Pallet, Type 2-303

Pallet, Type 2-299, 302, 304,

3-114, 116

10-6

PART NO.

400867

400868

400901

400903

400904

400905

400906

400907

400908

400912

400916

400917

400918

400920

400921

400923

400926

400931

400932

400933

400934

400935

400936

400939

400940

400941

400946

400948

400952

400953

400955

400957

400958

400960

400961

400962

400963

400964

400965

400966

400967

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART NO.



Pallet, Type 2-299, 302, 304,

3-114

400968

400969

Pallet, Type 3-116 400970

Transformer 2-230, 238, 259, 264, 400971

267, 279, 293 400972

Cover Assembly 2-228, 233, 238, 400976

239, 294

Transformer w/Cable 2-279

Control Assembly, AC Input and Motor 2-228, 233, 235

Capacitor, Electrolytic

2-293, 294, 3-112

Resistor, 38 Ohm 2-293, 294,

400977

400978

400979

400988

400989

400990

400993

3-112

Power Supply Assembly 2--228,

234, 292

Capacitor, Electrolytic

2-292, 293, 3-112



Clamp, Capacitor 2-293, 294


2-294, 8-60

Connector 2-295, 3-100, 112

Diode 2-266

Connector 2-292, 293, 295,

3-112

400994

400995

400997

400998

401002

401100

401107

401108

401109

401110

401111

401112

401113

401114

Spacer 2-265, 276, 278, 3-90,

106

Post, Mounting 2-278, 3-106

Wheel, Timing 2-278, 3-106

Screw, 6-40 Adjusting 2-278

Bracket w/Nut 2-278, 3-106

Plate w/Post 2-278, 3-106

Arm, Right 2-276

Bracket, Sensor 2-276

Sprocket, 38T 2-276, 277

Spacer 2-278, 3-106

Shield, Cable 2-276

Bracket 2-292

Resistor 2-292, 293

Switch Assembly 2-228, 238

Bracket 2-280, 3-107

Guard 2-274

Control Assembly, Motor

2-228, 233, 236, 291

Bracket 2-291

Bracket 2-291

Plate 2-291

Post 2-288

Post 2-294

Insulator 2-291

Cable, Interlock 2-291

401115

401116

401117

401119

401120

401125

401128

401132

401136

401139

401141

401142

401143

401144

401145

401146

401149

401150

401152

401153

401156

401158

401161

401169

10-7

Relay 2-291

Capacitor 2-291

Filter 2-291

Cable, Power 2-291

Shield 2-291

Ring, Retaining 2-280, 3-107

Ring, Retaining 2-280, 3-107

Post, 2-280, 3-107

Eccentric 2-280, 3-107

Pawl Assembly, Line Feed 2-280

Pawl Assembly 2-280, 3-107

Armature 2-280, 3-107

Strip, Antifreeze 2-280, 3-107

Spacer 2-280, 3-107

Bracket 2-280, 3-107

Lever 2-280, 3-107

Magnet Assembly 2-280, 3-107

Rectifier 6-42, 51

Cover 5-65, 66, 68

Mask, Monitor 4-99

Plate, Bottom 4-87, 88, 89, 100

Rod, Support 4-91

Guide 8-51

Support 4-95

Cover, Right Support 4-91, 95

Cover, Left Support 4-95

Shield, Right Side 4-91

Shield, Left Side 4-91

Shield, Front 4-91

Bracket 4-95

Bracket, Hinge 4-91

Post 4-95

Housing 4-69

Plate, Front 8-54

Cover 8-50

Plate, Spring 5-73

Post, Spring 5-73

Latch, Left Plate 5-73, 82

Latch, Right Plate 5-73, 82

Screw, 6-40 x 11/32 Shoulder

5-73

Spring 5-73, 82

Latch, Left Cover 5-73

Latch, Right Cover 5-73

Connector 5-71, 80, 82


2-292, 8-53, 60, 70

Table 8-76

Door 8-78

Foot 8-76

Spacer 8-76

Cover 5-79, 80, 82

Arm, Stop 8-50

401514

401515

401555

401556

401558

401559

401564

401566

401568

401582

401268

401269

401273

401274

401275

401276

401278

401285

401287

401288

401299

401301

401302

401512

401586

401599

401623

401627

401646

401647

401648

PART NO.

401170

401174

401191

401194

401195

401203

401204

401217

401219

401220

401223

401230

401239

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


PART NO.


Spacer 8-50

Door 8-51

Panel, End 8-57

Band, Trim 8-57

Clip 8-57

Bumper 8-76

Bumper 8-57, 61, 71

Bracket, Left Door 8-58

Bracket 8-58

Post 8-54

Screw, 10-32 Shoulder 8-50,

54

Bumper 8-51

Screw, 8-18 Spl 8-50, 52, 54,

68


Washer, Spring 8-51

Latch, Bar 8-58

Handle 8-58

Bracket, Left Window 8-58

Bracket, Right Window 8-58

Guide, Paper 8-58

Spring 8-58

Latch 8-51

Handle 8-51

Window 8-58

Plate 8-57

Plate 8-57

Screw, 1/4-20 Captive 8-76

Bracket, Left 8-52

Bracket, Right 8-52

Holder 8-76

Latch 8-78

Bracket, Latch 4-100

Post 4-100

Plate, Trim 8-54

Button, Plug 8-76

Spring 8-78

Nut, 8-32 Spl 6-48, 54, 8-61,

71, 76

Bushing 8-55, 67, 75



Switch, Rocker 8-59


2-293, 8-59


2-271, 295, 3-100, 4-94, 7-37


2-292, 293, 3-112

401649

401742

401743

401745

401746

401748

401757

401765

401842

401843

401844

401861

401865

401868

401869

401870

401871

401872

402007

402008

402009

402010

402011

402012

402023

402024

402025

402026

402031

402032

402034

402035

402036

402037

402038

402039

402040

402041

402044

402045

402046

402049

402050

402051

402054

402055

402056

402057


Connector, 3 Pt Plug 2-241, 274,

275, 3-104, 8-69

Pad, Left Side 8-57

Pad, Right Side 8-57

Pad, Upper Front 8-57

Pad, Rear Lid 8-58

Pad, Upper Side 8-57

Label 8-78

Latch 8-78

Bar 8-55

Strap, 5-1/2" Braided Ground

8-54

Hook 8-55

Screw, 1/4-32 Pilot 8-55, 67

Cradle Assembly 8-55

Spring 8-55


Plate, Retaining 8-55, 67, 75

Hub 8-55, 67, 75

Bushing 8-55, 67, 75

Bracket 8-60

Retainer 8-60

Lever, Actuating 8-60

Spacer 8-60

Spring 8-60

Switch 8-60

Box 8-80

Cover 8-79

Bracket 8-80

Breaker, Circuit 8-80

Plate, Cover 8-80

Frame 8-82

Plate 8-83

Spacer 8-76

Screw, 1/4-20 Shoulder 8-76

Lever 8-76

Spacer .8-77


Arm 8-77

Bracket 8-76

Bracket 5-82

Cable Assembly 5-79, 81, 82

Cover 5-80, 82

Cover 5-80, 82

Housing, Receptacle 5-80, 82

Housing 8-52, 56, 62, 72

Panel 7-33

Bracket 8-76

Plate 7-32, 38

Cover w/Pads 7-33

10-8

PART NO.

402085

402086

402090

402091

402092

402093

402094

402095

402097

402101

402108

402109

402110

402112

402117

402118

402058

402060

402061

402062

402063

402064

402069

402070

402071

402072

402073

402074

402077

402120

402121

402208

402212 thru

402217

402233

402234

402235

402244

402246

402247

402248

402254

402255

402256

402257

402258

402283

402284

402285

402286



Cover, Filter 7-37, 8-59

Bracket, Filter 7-37, 8-59


Filter Assembly 7-37

Cabinet 8-56

Bracket 8-58

Bracket 8-58

Gasket, Front 8-58

Gasket, Left 8-54

Gasket, Right 8-54

Bracket 8-59

Transformer Assembly 8-80, 83

Filter 8-80

Filter 8-80

Filter Assembly 7-31, 36



Cable Assembly 8-83

Cable Assembly 8-83

Receptacle 8-53, 59

Pin 8-53

Shield 4-99

Choke Assembly 4-70, 81

Strap, 3Y" Braided 4-86, 94

Shield Assembly 4-85, 86, 99

Shield 4-85, 99


Cable Assembly 4-70, 73, 74, 87,

94

Switch Assembly 4-70, 88, 94

Cable 8-83

Fuse 6-46, 47

Wire 6-57

Label 8-59

Label 8-59

Label 8-59

Sleeve, Ferrite 4-85, 86

Cable Assembly 4-98


Housing 8-53

Voltage Assembly, High 4-70,

73, 79

Pan 5-65, 66, 67, 71

Plate 5-66

Housing, Receptacle 5-75

Bracket 5-75

Clip, Spring 4-84, 94

Bracket 4-84, 94

Lever 4-84, 85, 99

Modification Kit 4-94

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART NO.


402318

402319

402401

402402

402403

402404

402405

402406

402407

402408

402410

402416

402418

402419

402420

402422

402423

402425

402427

402428

402430

402432

402440

402443

402444

402446

402447

402449

402450

402452

402454

402455

402456

402458

402459

402460

402461

402464

402465

402466

402467

402468

Insulator 4-90, 96, 98

Insulator 4-90, 96


Motor 2-228, 239, 240, 241, 259,

264, 266, 274, 275, 291, 3-79, 92,

104

Filter 2-293

Capacitor, Motor Start 2-293


Cable Assembly 2-259, 268, 297,

3-113

Network 2-293



3-108


Diode 2-291, 293


Feed Assembly, Ribbon 2-229,

236, 259, 262, 286, 287, 3-78, 83,

86, 109

Frame Assembly 2-286, 287, 3-109

Relay 2-264, 291, 293

Printer w/Base 2-270, 271

Lamp 2-295

Nut 2-295

Plate Assembly, Front 2-259,

264, 285

Shaft, Cross 2-277, 3-105

Frame Assembly, Front 2-285

Bracket 2-285

Ribbon w/Twin Spool 2-231, 259,

260, 286, 287, 3-78, 79, 80, 83, 95,

109

Guide, Left 2-285

Guide, Right 2-285

Bushing 2-271, 3-100

'Bracket 2-277, 3-105

Lever, Release 2-275, 277,

3-104, 105

Arm, Right 2-277

Arm, Left 2-275

Bracket, Left 2-275

Bracket, Right 2-277, 3-105

Pin 2-275, 277, 3-104, 105

Paper Handling Assembly 2-259,

263, 289, 290

Bracket 2-289

Handle 2-289, 3-110

Tubing 2-289

Shaft 2-289

Link, Pivot 2-290, 3-111

Roller 2-290

10-9

PART NO.

402469

402470

402471

402472

402474

402475

402477

402478

402480

402481

402482

402483

402484

402485

402487

402488

402489

402490

402491

402492

402493

402495

402496

402497

402499

402500

402505

402506

402507

402508

402510

402512

402513

402515

402516

402517

402519

402520

402522

402524

402525

402526

402527

402529

402530

402531

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


PART NO.


Guide, Paper 2-290

Shaft 2-290

Post 2-290, 3-111

Gear, 30T 2-289, 3-110

Post 2-290, 3-111

Clip, Line Indicator 2-289,

3-110

Knob, Paper Advance 2-289,

3-110

Lever, Paper Release 2-290,

3-111

Post 2-289, 3-110

Spring, Torsion 2-290, 3-111


Bearing 2-289, 3-110

Spacer 2-289, 3-110

Link w/Post 2-290, 3-111

Shaft 2-289

Knob w/Insert 2-289, 3-110

Clamp, Top Left 2-289

Shaft 2-290

Link, Left 2-290, 3-111

Link, Right 2-290, 3-111

Bail, Roller Release 2-290

Clamp, Top Right 2-289, 3-110

Clamp, Lower 2-289, 3-110

Plate, Cover 2-289

Retainer 2-289, 3-110

Set of Parts 2-295

Retainer, Ring 2-289, 3-110

Retainer, Ring 2-289, 3-110

Tractor, Form Feed 2-269, 289,

3-78, 98, 110

Tractor, Form Feed 2-269, 289,

3-78, 98, 110

Switch 3-108

Post 2-275

Bushing 2-293

Post 2-271, 3-100

Post 2-271, 3-100

Bracket 2-277

Plate 2-271

Bar, Line Feed 2-280, 3-107

Casting, Right 2-277, 3-105

Casting, Left 2-275, 3-104

Pan, Lower 2-271

Plate 2-275, 277, 3-92, 104, 105

Bracket 2-293

Bracket 2-293

Chassis, Power Module 2-293

Plate, Nut 2-293

402532

402533

402536

402537

402541

402543

402544

402545

402546

402547

402549

402550

402551

402552

402556

402557

402560

402563

402565

402566

402568

402570

402571

402572

402573

402574

402575

402576

402577

402578

402579

402580

402590

402591

402601

402604

402607

402610

402613

402614

402615

402620

402621

402622

402623

402624


Bracket 2-293

Base 2-259, 262, 271

Guard 2-293, 3-88, 112

Post 2-293, 3-88, 112

Post 2-293, 3-112

Pin, Guide 2-271, 3-100

Bracket, Connector 2-271, 3-100

Plate 2-297, 3-113

Guide 2-297, 3-113

Post, Detent 2-297, 3-113

Post 2-289, 3-110

Bushing, Eccentric 2-297, 3-113

Knob w/Insert 2-297, 3-113


Post, Eccentric 2-297, 3-113

Sprocket, 32T 2-297, 3-113

Nut, Special 2-297, 3-113

Bracket w/Nut 2-297, 3-113

Bail w/Post 2-297, 3-113

Gear 60T and Sprocket 30T w/Insert 2-297, 3-113

Bracket 2-297, 3-113

Form-Out Assembly 2-259, 268, 297,

3-79, 97, 98, 113

Belt, Amber 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, Blue 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, Yellow 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, Brown 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, Red 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, Pink 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, Lt-Green 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, Green 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, Lt Blue 2-297, 3-96, 113

Belt, White 2-297, 3-96, 113

Spring, Left 2-275, 3-104

Spring, Right 2-277, 3-105

Bushing 2-296

Guide Assembly, Rear 2-296

Plate, Spring 2-296

Spring 2-296

Switch Assembly 2-268, 275

Bushing 2-275

Washer 2-275

Module Assembly, Power 2-259,

264, 293

Feed Assembly, Line 2-259, 263,

280, 3-79, 84, 85, 107

Casting Assembly, Right 2-259,

265, 277

Guide Assembly, Rear 2-296

Casting Assembly, Left 2-275

10-10

PART NO.

402625

402626

402629

402630

402631

402632

402634

402635

402636

402639

402661

402663

402664

402666

402667

402668

402670

402671

402672

402673

402674

402675

402680

402644

402645

402646

402652

402653

402654

402655

402656

402657

402658

402660

402682

402684

402685

402686

402687

402688

402691

402692

402693

402695

402696

402697

402698


Arm Assembly, Left 2-259,

267, 275

Arm Assembly, Right 2-259,

267, 277

Insulator 2-291

Receptacle 2-293

Switch, Button 2-295

Control Assembly, Motor 2-228,

236, 291

Guide, Left 2-289

Guide, Right 2-289

Capacitor 2-291

Cable Assembly, Logic 3-104,

112

Lever, Paper-Out 3-108

Bracket 3-108

Plate, Nut 3-108

Shaft 3-110

Bracket 3-110

Bail 3-111

Tubing 3-110

Shaft 3-111

Shaft, Paper Guide 3-111

Roller 3-111

Paper Handling Assembly

3-78, 83, 87, 90, 92, 93, 98, 110


Chassis 3-88, 112

Pan 3-100

Plate 3-100

Shaft 3-110

Guide, Paper 3-111

Casting, Front 3-108

Guide, Left Ribbon 3-108

Guide, Right Ribbon 3-108

Arm, Left 3-78, 86, 94, 104

Arm, Right 3-78, 95, 105

Base 3-79, 82, 90, 100

Head Assembly, Print 3-78, 91,

101

Spacer 3-105

Guide, Rear Paper 3-108

Plate, Cover 3-110

Shield, Ribbon 3-78, 86, 108

Deflector, Paper 3-108

Clamp 3-108

Shim, .006 Thk 3-102

Shim, .010 Thk 3-102

Spring 3-103 -

Rod, Wear 3-103

Guide, Armature 3-103

Shim 3-103

Strip, Damping 3-108

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART NO.


402753

402754

402755

402756

402757

402758

402769

402771

402772

402774

402775

402776

402777

402727

402728

402729

402734

402738

402739

402740

402741

402742

402743

402745

402746

402747

402752

402699

402703

402705

402707

402709

402710

402711

402715

402718

402719

402720

402721

402722

402723

402725

402778

402785

402789

402803

402804

402811

402812

402816

10-11

Isolator 3-100

Shaft, Impeller 3-102, 106

Guide, Hammer 3-103

Bank Assembly, Hammer 3-103

Bank Assembly, Interposer 3-102

Casting, Center 3-101

Strip, Antifreeze 3-103

Stop, Back 3-101

Shield 3-104

Guide, Front Paper 3-108

Module, Power 3-79, 87 to 90, 92,

93, 112

Bracket, Left 3-104

Sprocket, 38T 3-105

Post 3-108

Plate Assembly, Front 3-78, 86,

90

Wick, Felt 3-108

Spring, Left Return 3-103

Spring, Right Return 3-103

Post 3-108

Bracket 3-112


Bracket 3-112


Transformer 3-79, 87, 88, 93, 112

Filter 3-112

Plate 3-105

Plate, Switch 3-104

Clamp 3-112

Retainer 2-285

Shield, Ribbon 2-285

Spacer 2-285

Flag 2-298 to 2-304

Bracket 2-285

Guide, Top 2-285

Bar, Backup 2-285

Collar 2-239, 241, 274, 275, 3-92

Guide, Left 2-289, 3-110

Guide, Right 2-289, 3-110

Label 2-291

Indicator, Column 2-285

Label 2-289, 3-110


3-112


Transformer Assembly 2-293

Module, Power 2-293



Bracket 3-104

Insulator 3-104

Disk Assembly 2-286, 287, 3-109

PART NO.

402820

402821

402863

402864

402865

402869

402870

402874

402877

402890

402891

402897

402830

402833

402834

402841

402842

402843

402844

402854

402861

402862

402898

403389

403390

403391

403394

403501 thru

403564

403597

403602 thru

403605

402899

402903

402904

402905

403061

403380

403383

403384

403385

403386

403387

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359



Bushing, Eccentric 2-290,

3-111

Link, Positioning 2-290,

3-111

Printer w/Base 3-99

Hammer 2-273

Hammer Set 3-103

Post 2-286, 287, 3-109

Clip, Spring 2-286, 287, 3-109

Bushing 2-286, 287, 3-109

Disk, Spool 2-286, 287, 3-109

Thumbscrew 2-285

Switch 2-293, 3-104

Roller 2-275, 277, 3-94, 95,

104, 105

Roller 2-287, 3-109

Roller 2-285, 3-108

Bracket 2-285

Washer, Felt 2-286, 287, 3-109

Spacer 2-286, 287, 3-109

Spring 2-286, 287, 3-109

Belt 2-289, _3-110

Stop, Armature 2-280

Label, Fuse 2-293, 3-112

Lid w/Side Plate, Right

2-289, 3-110.

Lid w/Side Plate, Left 2-289,

3-110

Bumper 2-280

Retainer 3-108

Post 3-108

Spring 2-280

Cable Assembly 8-80

Modification Kit 2-305

Bail w/Post, Right 2-305

Bail w/Post, Left 2-305

Roller, Pressure 2-305

Link, Right 2-305

Link, Left 2-305

Plate, Locking 2-305

Window 2-305

Guide 2-305

Shaft, Pressure Roller 2-305

Pallet, Type 3-116

Stud 6-44

Cable Assembly 8-82

PART NO.

403712

403713

403716

403721

403723

403725

403726

403727

403730

403735

403737

403740

403741

403743

403744

403745

403748

403750

403756 thru

403759

403639

403644

403646 thru

403649

403681 thru

403685

403698

403700

403705

403706

403707

403708

403711

403606

403610

403614

403615

403616

403617

403618

403619

403620

403622

403623

403636

403637

403638

10-12


Connector Assembly 8-80

Cable Assembly 8-82

Cabinet 8-50

Panel, Filter 8-56, 62, 72

Post 8-56, 62, 72

Cable Assembly 8-59

Cable Assembly 8-60

Cable Assembly 8-59


Cover 8-53

Housing 8-52

Bracket 4-82, 92

Post 4-83, 92

Filter 4-82, 92


Decalcomania 8-82

Cable Assembly 7-37

Label 7-37

Cable Assembly 8-70

Breaker, Circuit 6-42, 50

Capacitor 6-42, 45, 46, 48

Capacitor 6-42, 45, 47

Fuse 6-46, 47

Insulator 6-52, 53

Support 6-48

Transistor 6-52, 53

Transistor 6-52, 53

Rectifier 6-52, 53

Latch 6-43, 54

Socket 6-52, 53

Sink, Heat 6-43, 49, 51 to 54

Sink, Heat 6-43, 54

Transistor 6-54

Transistor 6-54

Thermostat 6-42, 49

Support 6-54

Cover 6-43, 44

Plate 6-46, 47

Clamp 6-46, 47

Wire 6-54

Bracket 6-50

Bracket 6-54

Diode Assembly 6-42, 52, 53

Wire 6-58

PART NO.

403821

403824

403825

403828

403832

403835

403836

403837

403838

403840

403844

403847

403848

403849

403850

403853

403882

403883

403888

403889

403890

405037

403791

403792

403793

403794

403795

403796

403800

403801

403807

403812

403813

403814

403819

403820

403761

403762

403764

403767

403770

403771

403773

403774

403785

403787

403788

403789

403790

405183

405520


TM 1 1-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART NO.


Handle 6-42, 43, 44

Cable Assembly 6-45

Socket, Transistor 6-52, 53

Wire 6-53

Lead, 24-1/2" Lg Green 6-51

Lead, 25" Lg Red 6-51

Cable 6-58

Socket, Transistor 6-54

Blower 8-66, 73

Arm, Left Latch 8-67, 75

Arm, Right Latch 8-67, 75


Plate 8-66, 73


Cradle 8-67

Channel, Right 8-67, 75

Channel, Left 8-67, 75

Bracket 8-67, 75

Spring, Torsion 8-67, 75

Button 8-68

Button 8-68

Plate, Trim 8-61

Plate, Front 8-61

Bracket 8-63


Dome 8-65, 66

Window 8-63, 64, 65

Clamp 8-63

Bracket 8-68

Shield 8-66

Plate 8-61

Plate 8-63, 64, 65, 74

Switch 8-68

Latch, Left 8-63, 64, 65, 74

Latch, Right 8-63, 64, 65, 74

Bracket 8-63, 64, 65, 74

Spring, Latch 8-63, 64, 65, 74


Spacer 8-68

Spring, Actuator 8-68

Lever, Actuating 8-68

Bracket 8-68

Plate 8-68

Rail, Left 2-271, 3-100

Rail, Right 2-271, 3-100



Cable Assembly 8-68


3-112


3-112

Dome 8-64, 66

405809

405810

405811

405812

405815

405818

405819

405820

405824

405825

405832

405833

405705

405715

405716

405717

405718

405719

405722

405723

405726

405766

405803

405804

405805

405807

405605

405606

405634

405635'

405636

405637

405639

405642

405643

405651

405656

405657

405701

405703

405523

405540

405545

405554

405555

405560

405568

405569

405575

405576

405589

405590

405604

Clamp, Window 8-64, 74

Dome 8-73

Cable Assembly 8-69


Label 8-67, 75

Trim, Front 8-50

Shield 8-68


Duct, Narrow 8-66

Duct, Wide 8-73

Arm, Stop 8-74

Cradle 8-75

Shield 8-73

Arm, Stop 8-64, 65, 74

Plate, Front 8-71

Bracket, Left 8-75

Bracket, Right 8-75

Screw, 1/4-20 Spl 8-75

Nut, 1/4-20 Spl 8-75

Spacer 8-75

Spring, Right Torsion 8-74

Spring, Torsion 8-64, 65, 74

Guide, Paper 8-71

Guide, Paper 8-61

Window 8-74

Yoke Assembly 4-85, 86, 99

Cable Assembly 4-70, 89, 95

Bracket 4-91




Cable Assembly :8-62, 70, 72

Network 4-94

Duct, Inlet 8-62

Screen 8-62

Cabinet 8-61

Support 8-51

Module Assembly 7-33



Cable Assembly 7-34

Sink, Heat 4-96, 7-29

Bar 4-96

Rail 4-96

Plate 4-96

Cover 4-90, 98

Nut, 4-40 Slotted 4-80, 98

Post 4-80, 98

Enclosure, Rear 4-98

Cable Assembly 4-97

Cable Assembly 4-97

Cable Assembly 4-97


10-13

PART NO.

405845

405853

405856

405857

405859

405861

405863

405864

405870

405873

405911

405912

405913

405914

405919

405920

405921

405922

405923

405924

405925

405926

405881

405882

405886

405887

405888

405891

405903

405904

405906

405908

405909

405910

405927

405931

405936

405937

405938

405939

405940

405941

405943

405944

405946

405947

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359


PART NO.


Cable Assembly 4-72

Cover 4-96, 97

Cable Assembly 4-97

Cable Assembly 4-97

Plate Assembly, High Voltage

4-70, 74 to 80

Cover Assembly, Rear 4-70, 78,

79, 81, 82, 88

Cable Assembly 4-94

Cover 4-98

Cap 5-72

Enclosure Assembly, Front

4-76

Sleeve 4-97

Insulator 6-57, 58

Label 6-44

Insulator 6-42, 44

Label 6-44

Insulator 6-52, 53

Retainer 2-288

Post 2-288

Shield, Keytop 5-69, 74

Plate 5-73

Frame, Front 5-74

Frame, Rear 5-74

Frame, Left 5-74

Frame, Right 5-74

Bail 5-68, 72

Spring 5-72

Bar 5-69, 74

Spacer 5-72

Spacer 5-72

Spacer 5-72

Cable Assembly 5-75

Filler 5-74

Keyswitch, Indicator 5-72

Cable Assembly 5-65, 67, 71, 77,

78

Bar 5-69, 74

Cover Assembly 5-65, 71, 75

Filter 6-51

Bracket 6-51

Screen 7-33

Label 6-44

Transformer 6-42, 48

Cable Assembly 6-51

Strap, 7-1/2" Lg 6-51

Strap, 11" Lg 6-, 51

Cover, Monitor 4-71, 100

Bushing 4-100

405952

405954

405955

405994

405999

407001

407002

407003

407022

407048

407064

407065

407351 thru

407354

407390

407391

407401

408032

408043

409054

409055

410010

410011

410012

410051

410059

410074

410100

410150

410151

410155

410202

410544

410545

410546

410547

410548

410549

410551

410553

410555

410559

410590

410592


Strap 4-70, 94

Capacitor 8-81


Yoke Assembly 4-99

Spacebar 5-68

Adhesive, 5/8 x 14-5/16 8-50, 54

Adhesive, 5/8 x 18-15/32 8-61

Adhesive, 5/8 x 26 8-71

Adhesive, 3 x 13-1/2 8-61

Bracket 8-65

Clamp, Left 8-65

Clamp, Right 8-65

Decal 8-79

Insulator 8-59


Cabinet 8-71

Fan w/Hub 2-274, 275, 3-104

Holder 8-76

Board, Etched Circuit 5-76

Board, Etched Circuit 5-77, 78

Card, Circuit 6-42, 45 to 48, 55,

56

Card, Circuit 6-42, 54, 55, 57

Card, . Circuit 6-42, 45, 49, 52, 53,

55, 58

Card, Circuit 5-72

Card, Circuit 5-74, 76

Card, Circuit 5-65, 67, 77

Card, Circuit 4-76

Card, Circuit 2-292

Card, Circuit 3-79, 87, 89, 112


Panel, Back 7-29, 31, 32, 33

Card, Circuit 4-98

Card, Circuit 4-70, 78, 79, 80, 97

Card, Circuit 4-70, 77 to 80, 97

Filter Assembly, Regulator

4-70, 72, 75






Card, Circuit 4-70, 72, 84, 85,

96



10-14

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


PART NO.

410596

410599

410640

410681



Card, Circuit 5-65, 71, 75, 79

Card, Circuit 2-230, 232, 237,

259, 261, 270, 271

Card, Circuit 2-234, 264, 292,

293

PART NO.

410729


410852

410853

430772

Card, Circuit 3-79, 81, 82, 84, 87,

89, 90, 92, 99, 100

Card, Circuit 4-70, 72, 81, 82, 83,

85, 88, 92

Card, Circuit 4-70, 72, 75, 76


U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1991 0 - 281-486 (42858)

10-15/(10-16 Blank)

2-59

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5.

CIRCUIT CARD ANALYSIS .(410764) (Contd)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

2-60

40MN202/RA Display Monitor

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


4-67

1. ADJUSTMENTS

Preliminary

C. TESTING


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

4-68

Circuit Notes -- 40K108 Opcon

1. Supply Voltages:

The following voltages are measured in respect to VGG1 (OV).

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


2. Signal Voltages:

The input signal for pins 1 and 2 is a differential voltage of 1.4 V

±.8 V P-P.

The output signal for pins 3 and 6 is a differential voltage of 1.6 V

± 6 V P-P.

Information Notes - All 40KXXX KD Opcons

ABBREVIATIONS:

AE-- ASSRESS ENABLE

CREF-- REFERENCE CAPACITOR

DE-- DATA ENABLE

DEP-- DEPRESSION

EOS-- END OF SCAN

I-- NPUT

I/O-- INPUT/OUTPUT

INIT-- INITIALIZE

ITC-- INFORMATION TO CONTROLLER

ITD-- INFORMATION TO DEVICE

KL-- KEYSWITCH LOGIC

LD10-- LAMP DRIVER INPUT OUTPUT

L.LPBK-- LOCAL LOOPBACK

5-97

MOS --

MR--

NUM--

OE--

P-P--

PNC--

POR--

ROM--

RREF--

SCA--

SI--

ST--

--

TKL--

METAL-OXIDE SILICON CIRCUIT

PACK

MASTER RESET

NUMERIC CLUSTER

OUTPUT ENABLE

PEAK TO PEAK

PRESENT NEXT CHARACTER

POWER ON RESET

READ ONLY MEMORY

REFERENCE RESISTOR

SEND CHARACTER AVAILABLE

SERIAL INTERFACE

STRAP, WIRE

SUMMATION

TELETYPE KEYSWITCH LOGIC


4. REFERENCE MATERIAL. Functional Schematics (Contd)

Keyswitches and Sense Amplifiers (410059 Circuit Card) (FS-1)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-98

Keyswitch and Serial Interface Logic (410059 Circuit Card ) (FS-2)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-99

D. TROUBLESHOOTING ((Contd)

4. REFERENCE MATERIAL, Functional Schematics (Contd)

High frequency Clock and Drivers (410059 Circuit Card) (FS-3)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

5-100

405931 Cover Assembly

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5-135


5. Parts – KD (Contd)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

5-136

410074 Circuit Card (Early Design)

5-137

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5. Parts KD (Contd)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

410074 Circuit Card (Late Design)

5-138

410096 Circuit Card 359,

5-139

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


5.

PARTS -- KD (Contd)

410566 Circuit Card

410590 Circuit Card


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

6. SUBASSEMBLY IDENTIFICATION -- RO

NOTE:

The number indicated in parentheses after each assembly designates the page covering the disassembly/reassembly procedures

.

5-140

410566 and 410599 Circuit Card

5-140

4.. FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS AND COMPONENT LAYOUT FOR 70PSU103 POWER SUPPLY

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


FUNCTON SCHEMATIC OF 410010

CIRCUIT CARD AND AC INPUT

6-33

4.

FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS AND COMPONENT LAYOUT FOR 40PSU103 POWER SUPPLY (Cont)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

Component Layout of 410010 Circuit Card and AC Input

6-34

4.

FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS AND COMPONENT LAYOUT (Cont)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Functional Schematic of +12 V dc Circuit on 410011 Circuit Card

6-35

4.

FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS AND COMPONENT LAYOUT FOR 40PSU103 POWER SUPPLY (Contt)

D. TROUBLESI[OOTING (Cont)

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

Component Layout of +12 V dc Circuit on 410011 Circuit Card

6-36

Functional schematic of -12 V dc Circuit on 410011 Circuit Card

6-37

TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


359

4.



TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

Component Layout of -12 V dc Circuit on 410011 Circuit Card

6-38

4.

FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATICS AND COMPONENT LAYOUT (Cont)


TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1


Functional Schematic of 410012 Circuit Card

6-39

4.



TM 11-5815-606-34/NAVELEX 0969-LP-188-0010/TO 31W4-4-300-1

359

Component Layout of 410012 Circuit Card

6-40

PIN NO: 052895

This fine document...

Was brought to you by me:

Liberated Manuals -- free army and government manuals

Why do I do it? I am tired of sleazy CD-ROM sellers, who take publicly available information, slap “watermarks” and other junk on it, and sell it.

Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that sell free information, come up first in search engines. They did not create it...

They did not even scan it... Why should they get your money? Why are not letting you give those free manuals to your friends?

I am setting this document FREE. This document was made by the US

Government and is NOT protected by Copyright. Feel free to share, republish, sell and so on.

I am not asking you for donations, fees or handouts. If you can, please provide a link to liberatedmanuals.com, so that free manuals come up first in search engines:

<A HREF= http://www.liberatedmanuals.com/ >Free Military and Government Manuals</A>

–

Sincerely

Igor Chudov http://igor.chudov.com/

Teletype Corporation 40 Tempest Model 40 Shop Manual

Assistant Bot

↓

•

This fine document...

Was brought to you by me:

Liberated Manuals -- free army and government manuals

Why do I do it? I am tired of sleazy CD-ROM sellers, who take publicly available information, slap “watermarks” and other junk on it, and sell it.

Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that sell free information, come up first in search engines. They did not create it...

They did not even scan it... Why should they get your money? Why are not letting you give those free manuals to your friends?

I am setting this document FREE. This document was made by the US

Government and is NOT protected by Copyright. Feel free to share, republish, sell and so on.

I am not asking you for donations, fees or handouts. If you can, please provide a link to liberatedmanuals.com, so that free manuals come up first in search engines:

–

Sincerely

Igor Chudov http://igor.chudov.com/

Key Features

Frequently Answers and Questions

What is the function of the cassette drive in the Tempest Model 40?

What types of cassettes can I use with the Tempest Model 40?

How much data can I store on a cassette?

Related manuals

Table of contents

Teletype Corporation 40 Tempest Model 40 Shop Manual

Assistant Bot

↓

•

This fine document...

Was brought to you by me:

Liberated Manuals -- free army and government manuals

Why do I do it? I am tired of sleazy CD-ROM sellers, who take publicly available information, slap “watermarks” and other junk on it, and sell it.

Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that sell free information, come up first in search engines. They did not create it...

They did not even scan it... Why should they get your money? Why are not letting you give those free manuals to your friends?

I am setting this document FREE. This document was made by the US

Government and is NOT protected by Copyright. Feel free to share, republish, sell and so on.

I am not asking you for donations, fees or handouts. If you can, please provide a link to liberatedmanuals.com, so that free manuals come up first in search engines:

–

Sincerely

Igor Chudov http://igor.chudov.com/

Key Features

Frequently Answers and Questions

What is the function of the cassette drive in the Tempest Model 40?

What types of cassettes can I use with the Tempest Model 40?

How much data can I store on a cassette?

Related manuals

Tokyo Gas

RR-5815 W

KITCHENjet

KITCHENjet 1000

Heco

58155815

Teletype

Dataspeed 45K301GAA03

Chino

AA Recorder

3M

Modular Tap Splice Kit 5815-T, 1/Case

Telegan

Tempest 100

Sony

KDP-65WS550

WeatherFlow

2020

Teletype

43K001/AAA

Octagon Systems

5815

Table of contents